The City of Miami Community Redevelopment Agency

PROJECT MANUAL The City of Miami

Community Redevelopment Agency

Project No. B-30579 Renovation of Historic Fire Station No. 2 (Phase II-B)

Department of Capital Improvements 444 SW 2nd Avenue – Miami, Florida 33130

100 % CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

Prepared by Consultant:

M.C. Harry & Associates, Inc.

Architecture – Engineering – Planning

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (PHASE II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 00010 - 1 of 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS

CITY OF MIAMI

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 PHASE II-B

Project No. B-30579 TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 1 -- GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01010 - SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01400 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01425 - REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01600 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01780 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE (NOT USED)

DIVISION 4 – MASONRY (NOT USED) DIVISION 5 -- METALS

SECTION 05500 – METAL FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 6 -- WOOD AND PLASTICS

SECTION 06100 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06400 - ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK & CUSTOM CABINETS

SECTION 06620 – SOLID SURFACE FABRICATIONS

DIVISION 7 -- THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

SECTION 07140 – FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07212 - BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07840 - FIRESTOPPING


SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALERS

DIVISION 8 -- DOORS AND WINDOWS

SECTION 08110 - STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08211 – FLUSH WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08310 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08450 – ALL GLASS ENTRANCES

SECTION 08710 - DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08800 – GLASS AND GLAZING

DIVISION 9 -- FINISHES

SECTION 09260 – GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09300 – INTERIOR TILE

SECTION 09650 – RESILIENT TILE FLOORING AND BASE

SECTION 09680 - CARPET

SECTION 09900 - PAINTS AND COATINGS

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

SECTION 10170 – PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10400 – IDENTIFYING DEVICES

SECTION 10523 – FIRE EXTINGUISHER, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10800 – TOILET ACCESSORIES

DIVISION 11 -- EQUIPMENT

SECTION 11132 – OVERHEAD PROJECTION SCREEN

DIVISION 12 -- FURNISHINGS (NOT USED)

DIVISION 13 -- SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (NOT USED)

DIVISION 14 -- CONVEYING SYSTEMS

SECTION 14201 – PASSENGER ELEVATOR

DIVISION 15 -- MECHANICAL

SECTION 15010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS


SECTION 15030 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIP.

SECTION 15050 - BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15055 - BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15100 - VALVES

SECTION 15135 - METERS AND GAGES

SECTION 15140 - SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

SECTION 15190 - MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 15241 - VIBRATION CONTROL

SECTION 15250 - MECHANICAL INSULATION

SECTION 15300 - FIRE PROTECTION

SECTION 15411 - WATER DISTRIBUTION AND PIPING

SECTION 15420 - DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS

SECTION 15440 - PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 15530 - REFRIGERANT PIPING

SECTION 15854 - CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

SECTION 15670 - AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

SECTION 15870 - POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

SECTION 15891 - METAL DUCTWORK

SECTION 15910 - DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

SECTION 15932 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

SECTION 15975 - H.V.A.C. CONTROLS SYSTEM

SECTION 15990 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

DIVISION 16 -- ELECTRICAL

SECTION 16010 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 16050 - BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 16110 - RACEWAYS

SECTION 16120 - WIRES AND CABLES

SECTION 16135 - ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

SECTION 16142 - ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT

SECTION 16143 - WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 16144 - SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

SECTION 16170 - CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS


SECTION 16190 - SUPPORTING DEVICES

SECTION 16195 - ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 16402 - ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES

SECTION 16430 - METERING AND SUB-METERING

SECTION 16452 - GROUNDING

SECTION 16470 - PANELBOARDS

SECTION 16477 - FUSES

SECTION 16480 - MOTOR STARTERS/CONTROLLERS

SECTION 16515 - INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

SECTION 16516 - ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

SECTION 16650 - TEMPORARY WIRING SYSTEM

SECTION 16721 - FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 16740 - TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

SECTION 16845 - INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01010 - 1 of 4 SUMMARY OF WORK

SECTION 01010

SUMMARY OF WORK

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY OF WORK

A. Project Name: Renovation of Historic Fire Station No. 2, Phase II-A. 1. Address: 1401 and 1441 North Miami Avenue; Miami, FL. 2. Folio No.: 01-3136-005-1160 and 01-3136-005-1110.

B. Owner (City): The City of Miami, Florida, a Florida municipal corporation. In all respects hereunder, City’s performance is pursuant to the City’s capacity as Owner. In the event the City exercises its regulatory authority as a governmental body, the exercise of such regulatory authority and the enforcement of any rules, regulations, codes, laws and ordinances shall be deemed to have occurred pursuant to City’s authority as a governmental body and shall not be attributable in any manner to the City as a party to this Contract. For the purposes of this Contract, “Owner” may also be referred to as “City”; also, “City” without modification shall mean the City Manager or Director, as applicable. 1. City of Miami - CRA; 49 NW 5 Street, Miami, FL 33128. 2. Project Manager: The individual assigned by City of Miami Department of

Capital Improvements Program to manage the Project(s).

C. Consultant: Refers to the Architect or Engineer of Record contracted by the City to prepare the plans and specifications for the Project. For the purposes of this Contract, “Consultant” may also be referred to as “Architect,” “Engineer,” or “Architect/Engineer.” 1. Architect: M.C. Harry & Associates, Inc.; 2780 SW 37 Avenue, Suite 302;

Miami, FL 33133. 2. Sub-consultants:

a. Civil Engineer: Consulting Engineering & Science, Inc.; 8925 SW 148 Street, Suite 100; Miami, FL 33176.

b. Structural Engineer: Bliss & Nyitray, Inc.; 800 Douglas Entrance; Coral Gables, FL 33134.

c. M/E/P Engineer: SDM Consulting Engineers, Inc.; 135 Almeria Avenue; Coral Gables, FL 33134.

D. Project Description: The Phase II-A scope of work includes but is not limited to the following: 1. Interior build-out of 2 story building. Full build out of 2nd floor, life safety and

minimal improvements on 1st floor. 2. New utility services to building and complete 2nd floor installation 3. Addition of a new elevator within existing hoistway. 4. Site utility alterations associated with work outlined above.

E. The Work to be performed under this Contract shall consist of furnishing all tools, equipment, materials, supplies, and manufactured articles and for furnishing all transportation and services, include fuel, power, water, and essential communications, and for the performance of all labor, work, or other operations required for the fulfillment of the Contract in strict accordance with the Contract


Documents. The Work shall be complete, and all work, materials, and services not expressly shown or called for in the Contract Documents which may be necessary for the complete and proper construction of the Work in good faith shall be performed, furnished, and installed by the Contractor as though originally so specified or shown, at no increase in cost to the City.

F. Wherever the Contract Documents address a third party, i.e. subcontractor, manufacturer, etc., it is to be considered as the Contractor through the third party.

G. The Contractor acknowledges that it has investigated prior to bidding and satisfied itself as to the conditions affecting the Work, including but not restricted to those bearing upon transportation, disposal, handling and storage of materials, availability of labor, water, electrical power, roads and uncertainties of weather, river stages, tides, water tables or similar physical conditions at the site, the conformation and conditions of the ground, the character of the equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during prosecution of the Work. The Contractor further acknowledges that it has satisfied itself as to the character, quality and quantity of surface and subsurface materials of obstacles to be encountered insofar as this information is reasonably ascertainable from an inspection of the site, or any contiguous site, as well as from information presented by the Drawings and Specification made a part of this Contractor to acquaint itself with the available information will not relieve him from responsibility for estimating properly the difficulty or cost of successfully performing the Work. The City assumes no responsibility for any conclusions or interpretations made by the Contractor on the basis of the information made available by the City.

1.02 INTENT OF DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Intent of specifications and drawings is to cover an installation complete is every respect. It is not intended to give every detail on drawings and in specifications. City will not be responsible for absence of any detail, which Contractor may require, nor for any special construction which may be found necessary as work progresses. If an item is either indicated or specified, it shall be considered sufficient for inclusion of said item in Contract. Contractor shall furnish and install materials and equipment usually furnished with such systems, and as needed to complete an operating installation, whether mentioned or not which are customary to its trade.

B. Incidental accessories not usually shown or specified but which are necessary for the proper installation and operation shall be included in work without additional cost to the City, the same as if herein specified.

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicate the general arrangement of systems and work indicated. Dimensions shall govern; do not scale the drawings.

D. The Consultant’s interpretation of drawings and specifications shall be final and binding upon Contractor.

E. Contractor shall visit site prior to submitting bid, and thoroughly investigate and verify all conditions under which work shall be performed.

1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS


A. The City has the right to let other contracts in connection with the work, and the Contractor shall properly cooperate with any such other Contractors.

B. Other projects that may be let include but are not limited to the following: 1. Renovation of Historic Fire Station No. 2, Phase II-A.

1.04 WORK BY CITY/OTHERS

A. Items noted “NIC” (Not in Contract) will be supplied and installed by City or others after Substantial Completion of the work of this contract.

1.05 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE AND PREMISES (LANDS OF WORK)

A. Construction Operations: Limited to areas noted on Drawings.

B. Provide and maintain access to and from site in accordance with applicable regulatory requirements, and as directed by authorities having jurisdiction and Project Manager: 1. Emergency Building Exits During Construction: Keep all exits required by

code open during construction period; provide temporary exit signs if exit routes are temporarily altered.

2. Do not obstruct roadways, sidewalks, or other public ways without permit.

C. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Project Manager.

D. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of equipment and materials stored on the site.

E. Move any stored Products, under Contractor's control, which interfere with operations of the City or separate Contractor.

1.06 PUBLIC SAFETY AND CONVENIENCE

A. The Contractor shall at all times so conduct his work as to ensure the least possible obstruction to traffic, or inconvenience to the general public and residents in the vicinity of the work. No road or street shall be closed to the public, except with the permission of the Project Manager and other jurisdictional governmental authority, if any. Fire hydrants on or adjacent to the work shall be kept accessible. Provisions shall be made by the Contractor to ensure public access to sidewalks, public telephones, and the proper functioning of all gutters, sewer inlets, drainage ditches, and irrigation ditches. No open excavation shall be left overnight except during road closing. All open excavation within the roadway shall be backfilled and a temporary asphalt patch applied prior to darkness each day. A cold asphalt patch is acceptable.

1.07 STORAGE OF MATERIALS

A. Suitable storage facilities shall be furnished by the Contractor. All materials, supplies and equipment intended for use in the work shall be suitably stored by the Contractor to prevent damage from exposure, admixture with foreign substances, or vandalism or other cause. Materials, supplies or equipment found to be improperly stored (as determined by the Project Manager) will not be accepted or sampled for testing.

B. Materials found unfit for use shall not be incorporated in the work and shall immediately be removed from the construction or storage site. Delivered materials


shall be stored in a manner acceptable to the Project Manager before any payment for same will be made. Materials strung out along the line of construction will not be allowed unless the materials will be installed within one week from the time of unloading and stringing out.

1.08 PRESERVATION OF PROPERTY

A. The Contractor shall preserve from damage all property along the line of the work, or which is in the vicinity of or is in any way affected by the work, the removal or destruction of which is not called for by the plans. Wherever such property is damaged due to the activities of the Contractor, it shall be immediately restored to its original condition by the Contractor at no cost to the City.

B. In case of failure on the part of the Contractor to restore such property, or make good such damage for injury, the City may, after 48 hours notice to the Contractor, proceed to repair, rebuild or otherwise restore such property as may be deemed necessary and the cost thereof will be deducted from any monies due or which may become due to the Contractor under this contract.

1.09 CLEAN UP

A. The Contractor shall keep the construction site free of rubbish and other materials and restore to their original conditions those portions of the site not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. Clean up and restoration shall be accomplished on a continuing basis throughout the contract period and in such a manner as to maintain a minimum of nuisance and interference to the general public and residents in the vicinity of the work.

B. The Contractor shall also remove, when no longer needed, all temporary structures and equipment used in his operation. It is the intent of this specification that the construction areas and those other areas not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents shall be immediately restored to original condition as upon completion of the project.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION - NOT USED

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-A) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01400 - 1 of 4 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01400

QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Quality assurance submittals.

B. Mock-ups.

C. Control of installation.

D. Tolerances.

E. Testing and inspection services.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 01425 - Reference Standards.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions and Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: 1. Prior to start of Work, submit agency name, address, and telephone number,

and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 2. Submit copy of report of laboratory facilities inspection made by NIST

Construction Materials Reference Laboratory during most recent inspection, with memorandum of remedies of any deficiencies reported by the inspection.

C. Design Data: Submit for Consultant's knowledge as contract administrator or for the City, for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

D. Test Reports: After each test/inspection, promptly submit two copies of report to Consultant and to Contractor. 1. Include:

a. Date issued. b. Project title and number. c. Name of inspector. d. Date and time of sampling or inspection. e. Identification of product and specifications section. f. Location in the Project. g. Type of test/inspection. h. Date of test/inspection. i. Results of test/inspection. j. Conformance with Contract Documents. k. When requested by Consultant, provide interpretation of results.

2. Test reports are submitted for Consultant's knowledge as contract administrator or for the City, for information for the limited purpose of


assessing conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

E. Certificates: When specified in individual specification sections, submit certification by the manufacturer and Contractor or installation/application subcontractor to Consultant, in quantities specified for Product Data. 1. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements.

Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate.

F. Manufacturer's Instructions: When specified in individual specification sections, submit printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, for the City's information. Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and special environmental criteria required for application or installation.

G. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Submit reports for Consultant's benefit as contract administrator or for City. 1. Submit for information for the limited purpose of assessing conformance with

information given and the design concept expressed in the contract documents.

1.04 REFERENCES AND STANDARDS - See Section 01425

1.05 TESTING AND INSPECTION AGENCIES - Refer to Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

A. Product and Material Testing: All tests will be performed by the City, except where otherwise specifically stated in the specifications or drawings. All costs for testing performed by the City shall be at the City’s expense, except where the product or material does not pass the testing. In such instances the Contractor shall reimburse the City for each re-test conducted by the City. When the specification or drawing require testing by the Contractor, such testing shall be performed at the expense of the Contractor and in accordance with any stated requirements

B. Employment of independent testing agency in no way relieves Contractor of obligation to perform Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Contractor-Employed Independent Testing Agency: 1. Testing Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM E 329, ASTM E 543,

ASTM C 1021, ASTM C 1077, and ASTM C 1093. 2. Inspection Agency: Comply with requirements of ASTM D 3740 and ASTM

E 329. 3. Laboratory: Authorized to operate in the State in which the Project is

located. 4. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review

services. 5. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals either by NIST or

using an NIST established Measurement Assurance Program, under a laboratory measurement quality assurance program.



PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 CONTROL OF INSTALLATION

A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

B. Comply with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence.

C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Consultant before proceeding.

D. Comply with specified standards as minimum quality for the Work except where more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate higher standards or more precise workmanship.

E. Have Work performed by persons qualified to produce required and specified quality.

F. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings or as instructed by the manufacturer.

G. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion, and disfigurement.

3.02 MOCK-UPS

A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section and identified in the respective product specification sections.

B. Assemble and erect specified items with specified attachment and anchorage devices, flashings, seals, and finishes.

C. Accepted mock-ups shall be a comparison standard for the remaining Work.

D. Where mock-up has been accepted by Consultant and is specified in product specification sections to be removed, remove mock-up and clear area when directed to do so.

3.03 TOLERANCES

A. Monitor fabrication and installation tolerance control of products to produce acceptable Work. Do not permit tolerances to accumulate.

B. Comply with manufacturers' tolerances. Should manufacturers' tolerances conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Consultant before proceeding.

C. Adjust products to appropriate dimensions; position before securing products in place.

3.04 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Testing Agency Duties: 1. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. 2. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Consultant and


Contractor in performance of services. 3. Perform specified sampling and testing of products in accordance with

specified standards. 4. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract

Documents. 5. Promptly notify Consultant and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-

conformance of Work or products. 6. Perform additional tests and inspections required by Consultant. 7. Submit reports of all tests/inspections specified.

B. Limits on Testing/Inspection Agency Authority: 1. Agency may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of

Contract Documents. 2. Agency may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. 3. Agency may not assume any duties of Contractor. 4. Agency has no authority to stop the Work.

C. Contractor Responsibilities: 1. Deliver to agency at designated location, adequate samples of materials

proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. 2. Cooperate with Consultant, Project Manager, and laboratory personnel, and

provide access to the Work and to manufacturers' facilities. 3. Provide incidental labor and facilities:

a. To provide access to Work to be tested/inspected. b. To obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of Products to be

tested/inspected. c. To facilitate tests/inspections. d. To provide storage and curing of test samples.

4. Notify Consultant and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring testing/inspection services.

5. Employ services of an independent qualified testing laboratory and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

6. Arrange with City's agency and pay for additional samples, tests, and inspections required by Contractor beyond specified requirements.

D. Re-testing required because of non-conformance to specified requirements shall be performed by the same agency on instructions by Consultant, at no additional cost to City.

3.05 DEFECT ASSESSMENT

A. Replace Work or portions of the Work not conforming to specified requirements.

B. If, in the opinion of Consultant, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, Consultant will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01425 - 1 of 23 REFERENCE STANDARDS

SECTION 01425

REFERENCE STANDARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Requirements relating to referenced standards.

B. Reference standards full title and edition date.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. For products or workmanship specified by reference to a document or documents not included in the Contract Documents, also referred to as reference standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes.

B. Conform to reference standard of date of issue specified in this section, except where a specific date is established by applicable code.

C. When required by the Contract Documents, Contractor shall obtain copies of designated reference standard document(s) and maintain at project site during submittals, planning, and progress of the specific work, until Substantial Completion.

D. The references listed in this section are hereby made a part of the Contract Documents the same as if herein repeated in full. In the event of any conflict between any of these standards and those specified, the most stringent shall govern unless otherwise stated.

E. Neither the contractual relationships, duties, or responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Consultant shall be altered by the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document.

PART 2 CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY ORGANIZATION DOCUMENTS

2.01 ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION (AA)

2.02 ALUMINUM ASSOCIATION OF FLORIDA (AAF)

2.03 ASSOCIATED AIR BALANCE COUNCIL (AABC)

2.04 AMERICAN ARCHITECTURAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (AAMA)

A. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2 -- Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, Vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and Glass Doors; 1997 with revisions contained in "reprinting" of 1999.

B. AAMA 501 -- Methods of Test for Exterior Walls; 2005.

1. AAMA 501.2 -- Field Check of Metal Storefronts, Curtain Walls, and Sloped Glazing Systems for Water Leakage; (part of AAMA 501).

C. AAMA 502 -- Voluntary Specification for Field Testing of Windows and Sliding


Glass Doors; 2002.

D. AAMA 605.2 -- Voluntary Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 1998.

E. AAMA 1302.5 -- Forced Entry Aluminum Prime Windows; 1976.

F. AAMA 1303.5 Forced Entry Resistant Aluminum Sliding Glass Doors.

G. AAMA 2603 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2002.

H. AAMA 2604 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for High Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

I. AAMA 2605 -- Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

J. AAMA CW-10 -- Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; 2004.

2.05 AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF TEXTILE CHEMISTS & COLORISTS (AATCC)

2.06 AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS (AASHTO)

A. AASHTO M 182 -- Burlap Cloth made from Jute or Kenaf.

2.07 AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL (ACI)

A. ACI 117 -- Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials; 2006.

B. ACI 211.1 -- Standard Practice for Selecting Proportions for Normal, Heavyweight, and Mass Concrete; 1991(R2002).

C. ACI 216.1 -- Method for Determining Fire Resistance of Concrete and Masonry Construction Assemblies; 1997.

D. ACI 301 -- Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings; 2005.

E. ACI 302.1R -- Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction; 2004 (errata 2007).

F. ACI 304 -- Recommended Practice for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting and Placing Concrete;

G. ACI 305R -- Hot Weather Concreting; 1999.

H. ACI 306R -- Cold Weather Concreting; 1988(R2002).

I. ACI 306.1 -- Standard Specification for Cold Weather Concreting; 1990(R2002).

J. ACI 308R -- Guide to Curing Concrete; 2001.

K. ACI 309R -- Guide for Consolidation of Concrete; 2005.


L. ACI 311.4R -- Guide for Concrete Inspection; 2005.

M. ACI 311.5 -- Guide for Concrete Plant Inspection and Testing of Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2004.

N. ACI 315 -- Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.

O. ACI 317 -- Standard Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.

P. ACI 318 -- Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary; 2005.

Q. ACI 347 -- Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork.

R. ACI 347R -- Guide to Formwork for Concrete; 2004.

S. ACI 506 -- Recommended Practice for Shotcreting.

T. ACI 506.2 -- Specification for Shotcrete.

U. ACI 524R -- Guide to Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2004.

V. ACI 530/ASCE 5/TMS 402 -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.

W. ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 -- Specification For Masonry Structures; American Concrete Institute International; 2005.

X. ACI CP-60 -- Shotcrete Nozzleman Craftsman Workbook; 2002.

Y. ACI SP-2 -- ACI Manual of Concrete Inspection; 1999.

Z. ACI SP-4 -- Formwork For Concrete; 2005 (7th edition).

AA. ACI SP-66 -- ACI Detailing Manual; 2004.

2.08 AIR DIFFUSION COUNCIL (ADC)

2.09 ASSOCIATED GENERAL CONTRACTORS OF AMERICA (AGC)

2.10 AMERICAN FOREST AND PAPER ASSOCIATION (AFPA)

A. AFPA (NDS) -- National Design Specification for Wood Construction; 2005 (with 2005 Supplement).

B. AFPA (WFCM) -- Wood Frame Construction Manual; 2001.

2.11 AMERICAN HARDBOARD ASSOCIATION (AHA)

2.12 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF STEEL CONSTRUCTION, INC. (AISC)

A. AISC (AMAN) -- ASD Manual of Steel Construction; 1989, Ninth Edition.

B. AISC (HSS) -- Specification for the Design of Steel Hollow Structural Sections.

C. AISC (LMAN) -- LRFD Manual of Steel Construction, Volume I - Structural Members, Specifications and Codes; 2001, Third Edition.

D. AISC 360 -- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings; 2005.

E. AISC 335 -- Specification for Structural Steel Buildings - Allowable Stress


Design and Plastic Design; 1989, including Supplement No.1, 2001.

F. AISC S303 -- Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges; 2005.

G. AISC S348 -- Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or ASTM A 490 Bolts; 2001.

2.13 AMERICAN IRON AND STEEL INSTITUTE (AISI)

A. AISI SG02-1 -- North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 2001 with 2004 supplement. (replaced AISI SG-971)

B. AISI SG02-5 -- Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing-Truss Design, 2004.

C. AISI SG-971 -- Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members; 1996, with 2000 Supplement.

D. AISI SG-973 -- Cold-Formed Steel Design Manual; 1996.

E. AISI Truss -- Standard for Cold-formed Steel Framing-Truss Design; 2004.

2.14 AMERICAN INSTITUTE OF TIMBER CONSTRUCTION (AITC)

A. AITC 104 -- Typical Construction Details; 2003.

B. AITC 108 -- Standard for Heavy Timber Construction; American Institute of Timber Construction; 1993.

C. AITC 112 -- Standard for Tongue and Groove Heavy Timber Roof Decking; 1993, and errata.

2.15 AIR MOVEMENT AND CONTROL ASSOCIATION INTERNATIONAL, INC. (AMCA)

2.16 AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI)

A. ANSI A13.1 -- Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; 1996(R2002).

B. ANSI A41.1 -- Building Code Requirements for Masonry.

C. ANSI A41.2 -- Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Masonry.

D. ANSI A224.1 -- American National Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1990.

E. ANSI A250.6 -- (formerly SDI 107) Hardware on Standard Steel Doors (Reinforcement-Application); 2003.

F. ANSI A250.8 -- (formerly SDI 100) Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2003.

G. ANSI A250.10 -- Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames; 1998 (Revised 2004).

H. ANSI A250.11 -- (formerly SDI 105) Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames; 2001.

I. ANSI Z97.1 -- American National Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings, Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test; 1984 (R1994).

2.17 THE ENGINEERED WOOD ASSOCIATION (APA)


A. APA PRP-108 -- Performance Standards and Qualifications Policy for Structural Use Panels; 2002.

B. APA V345 -- Concrete Forming, Design/Construction Guide.

C. APA V995 -- PS1-95 Construction and Industrial Plywood (With Typical APA Trademarks).

D. APA Y510 -- Plywood Design Specification; 1997(R1998).

2.18 AIR-CONDITIONING, HEATING, AND REFRIGERATION INSTITUTE (AHRI or ARI)

2.19 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS (ASCE)

A. ASCE 3 -- Structural Design of Composite Slabs; 1991.

B. ASCE 7 -- Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; 2005.

C. ASCE 8 -- Specification for the Design of Cold--formed Stainless Steel Structural Members; 2002.

2.20 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF HEATING, REFRIGERATING AND AIR-CONDITIONING ENGINEERS, INC. (ASHRAE)

2.21 THE AMERICAN SOCIETY OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERS (ASME)

A. ASME B18.2.1 -- Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series); 1996.

B. ASME B18.2.2 --

C. ASME B18.6.1 -- Wood Screws (Inch Series); 1997.

D. ASME B18.21.1 -- Lock Washers (Inch Series); 1999.

E. ASME B18.22.1 -- Plain Washers; 1965 (2003).

2.22 AMERICAN SOCIETY OF SANITARY ENGINEERING (ASSE)

2.23 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM A Series)

A. ASTM A 6 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Rolled Structural Steel Bars, Shapes, and Sheet Piling; 2004a.

B. ASTM A 36 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2004.

C. ASTM A 53 -- Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2007.

D. ASTM A 82 -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002.

E. ASTM A 123 -- Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2002.

F. ASTM A 153 -- Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2003.

G. ASTM A 167 -- Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip; 1999(R2004).

H. ASTM A 185 -- Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement,


Plain, for Concrete; 2002.

I. ASTM A 307 -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60 000 PSI Tensile Strength; 2003.

J. ASTM A 325 -- Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 1994.

K. ASTM A 490 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel Bolts, Alloy Steel, Heat Treated, 150 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008b.

L. ASTM A 496 -- Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Deformed, for Concrete Reinforcement; 2002.

M. ASTM A 500 -- Standard Specification for Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes; 2007.

N. ASTM A 525 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot-Dip Process; 1987.

O. ASTM A 563 -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts; 2007a.

P. ASTM A 568 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low Alloy, Hot Rolled and Cold Rolled, General Requirements for; 2009a.

Q. ASTM A 570 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel, Sheet and Strip, Carbon, Hot-Rolled; 1998.

R. ASTM A 591 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Electrolytic Zinc-Coated, for Light Coating Weight (Mass) Applications; 1998.

S. ASTM A 611 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel (SS), Sheet, Carbon, Cold-Rolled; 1997.

T. ASTM A 615 -- Standard Specification for Deformed and Plain Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004a.

U. ASTM A 641 -- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Carbon Steel Wire; 2003

V. ASTM A 653 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004a.

W. ASTM A 666 -- Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar; 2003.

X. ASTM A 706 -- Standard Specification for Low-Alloy Steel Deformed and Plain Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2004a.

Y. ASTM A 767 -- Standard Specification for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement; 2000b.

Z. ASTM A 780 -- Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings; 2001(R2006).

AA. ASTM A 792 -- Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc


Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2003.

AB. ASTM A 924 -- Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process; 2004.

AC. ASTM A 992 -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel Shapes; 2006a.

AD. ASTM A 1008 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 1989.

AE. ASTM A 1011 -- Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability; 2007.

2.24 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM B Series)

A. ASTM B 32 -- Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2004.

B. ASTM B 88 -- Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2003.

C. ASTM B 117 -- Standard Practice for Operating Salt Spray (Fog) Apparatus; 2007a.

D. ASTM B 209 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2004.

E. ASTM B 221 -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2006.

2.25 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM C Series)

A. ASTM C 5 -- Lime shall conform to the Standard Specification for Quicklime for Structural Purposes; 2003.

B. ASTM C 31 -- Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field; 1998.

C. ASTM C 33 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates; 2003.

D. ASTM C 36 -- Standard Specification for Gypsum Wallboard; 2003.

E. ASTM C 39 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens; 1999ae1.

F. ASTM C 42 -- Standard Test Method for Obtaining and Testing Drilled Cores and Sawed Beams of Concrete; 1999.

G. ASTM C 55 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Brick; 2003.

H. ASTM C 90 -- Standard Specification for Loadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2003.

I. ASTM C 91 -- Standard Specification for Masonry Cement; 2003a.

J. ASTM C 94 -- Standard Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete; 2004.

K. ASTM C 129 -- Standard Specification for Nonloadbearing Concrete Masonry Units; 2006.


L. ASTM C 140 -- Standard Test Methods of Sampling and Testing Concrete Masonry Units and Related Units; 2003.

M. ASTM C 143 -- Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005a.

N. ASTM C 144 -- Standard Specification for Aggregate for Masonry Mortar; 2003.

O. ASTM C 150 -- Standard Specification for Portland Cement; 2004.

P. ASTM C 171 -- Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete; 2007.

Q. ASTM C 172 -- Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete; 2003.

R. ASTM C 173 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method; 2007.

S. ASTM C 206 -- Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime; 2003

T. ASTM C 207 -- Standard Specification for Hydrated Lime for Masonry Purposes; 2004.

U. ASTM C 209 -- Standard Test Methods for Cellulosic Fiber Insulating Board; 2007.

V. ASTM C 219 -- Standard Terminology Relating to Hydraulic Cement; 2003e1.

W. ASTM C 231 -- Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method; 2008.

X. ASTM C 236 -- Steady--State Thermal Performance of Building Assemblies by Means of a Guarded Hot Box; 1989(R1993).

Y. ASTM C 260 -- Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete; 2006.

Z. ASTM C 270 -- Standard Specification for Mortar for Unit Masonry; 2004.

AA. ASTM C 309 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete; 2007.

AB. ASTM C 330 -- Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Structural Concrete; 2004.

AC. ASTM C 332 -- Standard Specification for Lightweight Aggregates for Insulating Concrete; 2007.

AD. ASTM C 404 -- Standard Specification for Aggregates for Masonry Grout; 2007.

AE. ASTM C 473 -- Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products; 2003.

AF. ASTM C 476 -- Standard Specification for Grout for Masonry; 2002.

AG. ASTM C 494 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete; 1999.


AH. ASTM C 595 -- Standard Specification for Blended Hydraulic Cements; 2009.

AI. ASTM C 618 -- Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete; 2005.

AJ. ASTM C 665 -- Standard Specification for Mineral-Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing; 2006.

AK. ASTM C 685 -- Standard Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing; 1998a.

AL. ASTM C 744 -- Standard Specification for Prefaced Concrete and Calcium Silicate Masonry Units; 1999.

AM. ASTM C 754 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached Gypsum Panel Products; 2004.

AN. ASTM C 779 -- Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces; 2005.

AO ASTM C 780 -- Standard Test Method for Preconstruction and Construction Evaluation of Mortars for Plain and Reinforced Unit Masonry; 2007a.

AP. ASTM C 834 -- Standard Specification for Latex Sealants; 2005.

AQ. ASTM C 881 -- Standard Specification for Epoxy-Resin-Base Bonding Systems for Concrete; 2002.

AR. ASTM C 919 -- Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2002.

AS. ASTM C 920 -- Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2005.

AT. ASTM C 926 -- Standard Specification for Application of Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 1998a(R2005).

AU. ASTM C 932 -- Standard Specification for Surface-Applied Bonding Compounds for Exterior Plastering; 2003.

AV. ASTM C 954 -- Standard Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 in. (0.84 mm) to 0.112 in. (2.84 mm) in Thickness; 2000.

AW. ASTM C 955 -- Standard Specification for Load-bearing, Transverse and Axial Steel Studs, Runners, Tracks, and Bracing or Bridging, for Screw Application of Gypsum Panel Products and Metal Plaster Bases; 2003.

AX. ASTM C 989 -- Standard Specification for Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars; 1999.

AY. ASTM C 1002 -- Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs; 2001.

AZ. ASTM C 1007 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and Axial) Steel Studs and Related Accessories; 2004.


BA. ASTM C 1017 -- Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Use in Producing Flowing Concrete; 2003.

BB. ASTM C 1019 -- Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Grout; 1997.

BC. ASTM C 1021 -- Standard Practice for Laboratories Engaged in Testing of Building Sealants; 2008.

BD. ASTM C 1059 -- Standard Specification for Latex Agents for Bonding Fresh to Hardened Concrete; 1999.

BE. ASTM C 1063 -- Standard Specification for Installation of Lathing and Furring to Receive Interior and Exterior Portland Cement-Based Plaster; 2003.

BF.ASTM C 1064 -- Standard Test Method for Temperature of Freshly Mixed Hydraulic-Cement Concrete; 2005.

BG. ASTM C 1077 -- Standard Practice for Laboratories Testing Concrete and Concrete Aggregates for Use in Construction and Criteria for Laboratory Evaluation; 2009b.

BH. ASTM C 1093 -- Standard Practice for Accreditation of Testing Agencies for Unit Masonry; 2007.

BI. ASTM C 1107 -- Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink); 2007a.

BJ. ASTM C 1140 -- Standard Practice for Preparing and Testing Specimens from Shotcrete Test Panels; 2003a.

BK.ASTM C 1167 -- Standard Specification for Clay Roof Tiles; 2003.

BL. ASTM C 1184 -- Standard Specification for Structural Silicone Sealants; 2005.

BM. ASTM C 1193 -- Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2005a.

BN. ASTM C 1224 -- Reflective Insulation for Building Applications.

BO. ASTM C 1278 -- Standard Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel; 2003.

BP ASTM C 1289 -- Standard Specification for Faced Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Thermal Insulation Board; 2007.

BQ. ASTM C 1315 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds Having Special Properties for Curing and Sealing Concrete; 2007.

BR. ASTM C 1338 -- Determining the Fungi Resistance of Insulation Materials and Facings.

BS. ASTM C 1371 -- Determination of Emittance of Materials Near Room Temperature Using Portable Emissometers.

2.26 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS -- (ASTM D Series)

A. ASTM D 16 -- Standard Terminology for Paint, Related Coatings, Materials, and Applications; 2007.


B. ASTM D 41 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and Waterproofing; 1994-00-e01.

C. ASTM D 43 -- Standard Specification for Coal Tar Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing; 1994(R2000).

D. ASTM D 226 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a.

E. ASTM D 235 -- Standard Specification for Mineral Spirits (Petroleum Spirits) (Hydrocarbon Dry Cleaning Solvent); 2002(R2007).

F. ASTM D 312 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Used in Roofing; 2000.

G. ASTM D 1079 -- Terminology Relating to Roofing and Waterproofing; 2002.

H. ASTM D 1556 -- Standard Test Method for Density and Unit Weight of Soil in Place by the Sand-Cone Method; 2007.

I. ASTM D 1557 -- Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft3 (2,700 kN m/m3)); 2002.

J. ASTM D 1621 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties Of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2004a.

K. ASTM D 1622 -- Standard Test Method for Apparent Density of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2003.

L. ASTM D 1623 -- Standard Test Method for Tensile And Tensile Adhesion Properties of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2003.

M. ASTM D 1634 -- Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Soil-Cement Using Portions of Beams Broken in Flexure (Modified Cube Method); 2000(R2006).

N. ASTM D 1667 -- Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials-Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed-Cell Foam); 2005.

O. ASTM D 1751 -- Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction (Non-extruding and Resilient Bituminous Types); 2004.

P. ASTM D 1761 -- Test Methods for Mechanical Fasteners in Wood; 1988(2000).

Q. ASTM D 1970 -- Standard Specification for Self-Adhering Polymer Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection; 2001.

R. ASTM D 2126 -- Standard Test Method for Response of Rigid Cellular Plastics to Thermal and Humid Aging; 2004.

S. ASTM D 2127 -- Method of Test for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics (Withdrawn 1969; replaced by ASTM D 2842).

T. ASTM D 2178 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and Waterproofing; 1997a.


U. ASTM D 2487 -- Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes (Unified Soil Classification System); 2000.

V. ASTM D 2626 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt-Saturated and Coated Organic Felt Base Sheet Used in Roofing; 2004.

W. ASTM D 2822 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement; 1991(R1997)e01.

X. ASTM D 2842 -- Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Rigid Cellular Plastics; 2006.

Y. ASTM D 2856 -- Standard Test Method for Open-Cell Content of Rigid Cellular Plastics by the Air Pycnometer; 1994(R1998).

Z. ASTM D 2922 -- Standard Test Methods for Density of Soil and Soil-Aggregate in Place by Nuclear Methods (Shallow Depth); 2005.

AA. ASTM D 3019 -- Standard Specification for Lap Cement Used with Asphalt Roll Roofing, Non Fibered, Asbestos Fibered, and Non Asbestos Fibered; 1994 (2002)e01.

AB. ASTM D 3273 -- Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber; 2000(R2005).

AC. ASTM D 3310 -- Determining Corrosivity of Adhesive Materials.

AD. ASTM D 3498 -- Standard Specification for Adhesives for Field-Gluing Plywood to Lumber Framing for Floor Systems; 2003.

AE. ASTM D 3740 -- Standard Practice for Minimum Requirements for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Soil and Rock as Used in Engineering Design and Construction; 2004a.

AF. ASTM D 3746 -- Standard Test Method for Impact Resistance of Bituminous Roofing Systems; 1985(1996) e1.

AG. ASTM D 3909 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roll Roofing (Glass Felt) Surfaced With Mineral Granules; 1997b(R2004)e1.

AH. ASTM D 4214 -- Standard Test Methods for Evaluating the Degree of Chalking of Exterior Paint Films; 2007.

AI. ASTM D 4397 -- Standard Specification for Polyethylene Sheeting for Construction, Industrial, and Agricultural Applications; 2002.

AJ. ASTM D 4442 -- Standard Test Methods for Direct Moisture Content Measurement of Wood and Wood-Base Materials; 1992(R2003).

AK. ASTM D 4444 -- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Standardization and Calibration of Hand-Held Moisture Meters; 2008.

AL. ASTM D 4479 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Coatings - Asbestos-Free; 2000.

AM. ASTM D 4586 -- Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free; 2000.

AN. ASTM D 5664 -- Standard Test Method for Evaluating the Effects of Fire-


Retardant Treatments and Elevated Temperatures on Strength Properties of Fire-Retardant Treated Lumber; 2002.

AO. ASTM D 6083 -- Standard Specification for Liquid Applied Acrylic Coating Used in Roofing; 1997a.

AP. ASTM D 6162 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2000a.

AQ. ASTM D 6163 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements; 2000e01.

AR. ASTM D 6164 -- Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements; 2000.

2.27 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM E Series)

A. ASTM E 84 -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2004.

B. ASTM E 96 -- Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2000e01.

C. ASTM E 108 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2004.

D. ASTM E 119 -- Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials; 2000a.

E. ASTM E 136 -- Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 2004.

F. ASTM E 283 -- Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004.

G. ASTM E 329 -- Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction; 2007a.

H. ASTM E 330 -- Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002.

I. ASTM E 331 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

J. ASTM E 336 -- Standard Test Method for Measurement of Airborne Sound Insulation in Buildings; 2007.

K. ASTM E 413 -- Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.

L. ASTM E 488 -- Standard Test Methods for Strength of Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements; 1996(R2003).


M. ASTM E 514 -- Standard Test Method for Water Penetration and Leakage Through Masonry; 2009.

N. ASTM E 543 -- Standard Practice for Agencies Performing Nondestructive Testing; 2008.

O. ASTM E 814 -- Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops; 2002.

P. ASTM E 1105 -- Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

Q. ASTM E 1155 -- Standard Test Method for Determining F(F) Floor Flatness and F(L) Floor Levelness Numbers; 1996(R2008).

R. ASTM E 1190 -- Standard Test Methods for Strength of Power-Actuated Fasteners Installed in Structural Members; 1995(2000)e1.

S. ASTM E 1300 -- Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 1998.

T. ASTM E 1408 -- Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Sound Transmission Loss of Door Panels and Door Systems; 1991(R2000).

U. ASTM E 1613 -- Standard Test Method for Determination of Lead by Inductively Coupled Plasma Atomic Emission Spectrometry (ICP-AES), Flame Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (FAAS), or Graphite Furnace Atomic Absorption Spectrometry (GFAAS) Techniques; 2004.

V. ASTM E 1729 -- Standard Practice for Field Collection of Dried Paint Samples for Subsequent Lead Determination; 2005.

2.28 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM F Series)

A. ASTM F 436 -- Standard Specification for Hardened Steel Washers; 2007a.

B. ASTM F 568 -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Metric Fasteners; 2007.

C. ASTM F 588 -- Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact; 2007.

D. ASTM F 844 -- Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use; 2004e1.

E. ASTM F 959 -- Standard Specification for Compressible-Washer-Type Direct Tension Indicators for Use with Structural Fasteners; 2007a.

F. ASTM F 1554 -- Standard Specification for Anchor Bolts, Steel, 36, 55, and 105-ksi Yield Strength; 2007a.

G. ASTM F 1852 -- Standard Specification for “Twist Off” Type Tension Control Structural Bolt/Nut/Washer Assemblies, Steel, Heat Treated, 120/105 ksi Minimum Tensile Strength; 2008.

H. ASTM F 1667 -- Standard Specification for Driven Fasteners: Nails, Spikes, and Staples; 2003.


2.29 AMERICAN SOCIETY FOR TESTING AND MATERIALS - (ASTM G Series)

A. ASTM G 53 -- Standard Practice for Operating Light- and Water-Exposure Apparatus (Fluorescent UV-Condensation Type) for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996.

B. ASTM G 85 -- Standard Practice for Modified Salt Spray (Fog) Testing; 2002e1.

C. ASTM G 152 -- Standard Practice for Operating Open Flame Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2006.

D. ASTM G 153 -- Standard Practice for Operating Enclosed Carbon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2004.

E. ASTM G 154 -- Standard Practice for Operating Fluorescent Light Apparatus for UV Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2006.

F. ASTM G 155 -- Standard Practice for Operating Xenon Arc Light Apparatus for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 2005a.

2.30 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK INSTITUTE (AWI)

2.31 AMERICAN WOOD-PRESERVERS' ASSOCIATION (AWPA)

A. AWPA C2 -- Lumber, Timber, Bridge Ties and Mine Ties -- Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2001.

B. AWPA C9 -- Plywood - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2000.

C. AWPA C15 -- Wood for Commercial-Residential Construction - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Processes.

D. AWPA C20 -- Structural Lumber - Fire-Retardant Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2002.

E. AWPA C31 -- Lumber Used Out of Contact with the Ground and Continuously Protected From Liquid Water - Treatment by Pressure Processes; 2003.

F. AWPA E1 - Standard Method for Laboratory Evaluation to Determine Resistance to Subterranean Termites; 2006.

G. AWPA M4 -- Standard for the Care of Preservative-Treated Wood Products; 2006.

H. AWPA U1 -- Use Category System: User Specification for Treated Wood; 2004.

2.32 AMERICAN WOOD PRESERVERS BUREAU (AWPB)

2.33 AMERICAN WELDING SOCIETY (AWS)

A. AWS A2.4 -- Standard Symbols for Welding, Brazing, and Nondestructive Examination; 2007.

B. AWS D1.1 -- Structural Welding Code - Steel; 2004.

C. AWS D1.3 -- Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel; 1998.


D. AWS D1.4 -- Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel; 1998.

2.34 AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION (AWWA)

2.35 BAY AREA AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (BAAQMD)

2.36 BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA)

A. BHMA A156.1 -- American National Standard for Butts and Hinges; 2006 (ANSI/BHMA A156.1).

B. BHMA A156.3 -- American National Standard for Exit Devices; 2001 (ANSI/BHMA A156.3).

C. BHMA A156.4 -- American National Standard for Door Controls - Closers; 2000 (ANSI/BHMA A156.4).

D. BHMA A156.6 -- American National Standard for Architectural Door Trim; 2005 (ANSI/BHMA A156.6).

E. BHMA A156.9 -- American National Standard for Cabinet Hardware; 2003 (ANSI/BHMA A156.9).

F. BHMA A156.16 -- American National Standard for Auxiliary Hardware; 2002 (ANSI/BHMA A156.16).

2.37 CARPET AND RUG INSTITUTE (CRI)

2.38 CAST IRON SOIL PIPE INSTITUTE (CISPI)

2.39 COLD-FORMED STEEL ENGINEERS INSTITUTE (CFSEI)

2.40 CONCRETE REINFORCING STEEL INSTITUTE (CRSI)

A. CRSI (DA4) -- Manual of Standard Practice; 2001.

2.41 DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI)

A. DHI (LOCS) -- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2004.

B. DHI WDHS.3 -- Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Flush Wood Doors; 1993 (also in WDHS-1/WDHS-5 Series, 1996).

C. DHI A115 Series -- Specifications for Steel Doors and Frame Preparation for Hardware; 2000 (ANSI/DHI A115 Series).

D. DHI (INST) -- Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware; 1994.

2.42 FACTORY MUTUAL RESEARCH CORPORATION (FM)

A. FM 4450 -- Class I Insulated Steel Roof Decks; 1992.

B. FM 4470 -- Class I Roof Covers; 1992.

C. FM 4471 -- Class 1 Panel Roof (Uplift Evaluation); 1995.

D. FM 4991 -- Approval of Firestop Contractors; 2001.

E. FM DS 1-28 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-28, Design Wind Loads; 2005.

F. FM DS 1-29 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-29, Roof Deck Securement and Above


Deck Roof Components; 2006.

G. FM DS 1-52 -- Loss Prevention Data 1-52, Field Uplift Tests; 2007.

H. FM-1-49 -- Loss Prevention Data SH Perimeter Flashing; 2000.

2.43 FLORIDA BUILDING CODE (FBC)

A. FBC -- Florida Building Code; 2007 edition, with 2009 Supplement. 1. FBC-B: Florida Building Code, Building. 2. FBC-M: Florida Building Code, Mechanical. 3. FBC-P: Florida Building Code, Plumbing. 4. FBC-EB: Florida Building Code, Existing Building. 5. FBC-TPHVHZ: Florida Building Code, Test Protocols for High-Velocity

Hurricane Zones: a. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 109 -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No. 109. b. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 109(A) -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No.

109, Detail Drawings. c. FBC-TPHVHZ RAS 111 -- Roofing Application Standard (RAS) No. 111,

Standard Requirements for Attachment of Perimeter Woodblocking and Metal Flashing.

d. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 105 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 105-98, Test Procedure for Field Withdrawal Resistance Testing.

e. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 110 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 110-2000, Testing Requirements for Physical Properties of Roof Membranes, Insulation, Coatings, and Other Roofing Components.

f. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 114(H) -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) No. 114-95, Test Procedures for Roof System Assemblies in the High-Velocity Hurricane Zone Jurisdiction.

g. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 201 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 201-94, Impact Test Procedures.

h. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 202 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 202-94, Criteria for Testing Impact & Non-impact Resistant Building Envelope Components Using Uniform Static Air Pressure.

i. FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 203 -- Testing Application Standard (TAS) 203-94, Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading.

2.44 FOREST STEWARDSHIP COUNCIL US (FSC)

A. FSC STD-01-001 -- FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship.

2.45 GREEN SEAL (GS)

2.46 GYPSUM ASSOCIATION (GA)

A. GA-600 -- Fire Resistance Design Manual; 2003.

2.47 GLASS ASSOCIATION OF NORTH AMERICA (GANA)

A. GANA 01 or GANA (GM) -- GANA Glazing Manual; 2004.

B. GANA 02 or GANA (SM) -- FGMA Sealant Manual; 1990.

C. GANA 03 or GANA (LGDG) -- Laminated Glass Design Guide; 2006.

D. GANA 04 -- Tempered Glass Engineering Standard Manual; 2001.


2.48 HARDWOOD PLYWOOD VENEER ASSOCIATION (HPVA)

2.49 ICBO EVALUATION SERVICE, INC. (ICBO-ES)

2.50 INTERNATIONAL CODE COUNCIL, INC. (ICC)

A. ANSI/ICC A117.1 -- American National Standard for Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities; 2003.

B. ICC-ES AC58 -- Acceptance Criteria for Adhesive Anchors in Concrete and Masonry Elements; ICC Evaluation Service, Inc.; 2005.

C. ICC ESR-1328 -- ICC Evaluation Service Report for Tapcon Screw Anchors; 2006.

D. ICC ESR-1671 -- ICC Evaluation Service Report for Tapcon with Advanced Threadform Technology Anchors; 2006.

2.51 INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC ENGINEERS (IEEE)

2.52 INTERNATIONAL FIRESTOP COUNCIL (IFC)

A. IFC (GEFSEJ) -- Guidelines for Evaluating Firestop Systems Engineering Judgments; 2001.

2.53 INTERNATIONAL SOLID SURFACE FABRICATORS ASSOCIATION (ISSFA)

A. ISSFA-2 -- Classification and Standards for Solid Surfacing Material; 2001(R2002).

2.54 LIGHT GAUGE STEEL ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION (LGSEA)

A. LGSEA 5000 -- Refer to CFSEI 5000.

2.55 McGRAW-HILL BOOK COMPANY (M-H)

2.56 MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE, MASTER PAINTERS AND DECORATORS ASSOCIATION (MPI)

A. MPI (APL) -- Master Painters Institute Approved Products List; Master Painters and Decorators Association; current edition, www.paintinfo.com.

B. MPI (APSM) -- Master Painters Institute Architectural Painting Specification Manual; 2004.

2.57 MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY, INC. (MSS)

2.58 THE NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF ARCHITECTURAL METAL MANUFACTURERS (NAAMM)

2.59 NATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF MIRROR MANUFACTURERS (NAMM)

2.60 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NECA)

2.61 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (NEMA)

A. NEMA MG 1 -- Motors and Generators; 2006.

2.62 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA)


A. NFPA 10 -- Standard for Portable Fire Extinguishers; 2002.

I. NFPA 70 -- National Electrical Code; 2005.

L. NFPA 80 -- Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows; 1999.

O. NFPA 101 (FL) -- Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures; 2006, including Florida revisions as adopted in the Florida Fire Prevention Code.

R. NFPA 241 - Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alteration, and Demolition Operations; 2004.

2.63 NATIONAL FENESTRATION RATING COUNCIL, INC. (NFRC)

A. NFRC 100 -- Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; ; 2004, with 2005 addendum.

B. NFRC 200 -- Procedure for Determining Fenestration Product Solar Heat Gain Coefficients at Normal Incidence; 2001.

C. NFRC (CPD) -- Certified Products Directory; current edition.

2.64 NATIONAL FLOOR SAFETY INSTITUTE (NFSI)

A. NFSI 101-A - Standard for Evaluating High-Traction Flooring Materials, Coatings, and Finishes.

B. NFSI/ANSI B101.1 - Test Method for Measuring Wet SCOF of Common Hard-Surface Floor Materials; 2009.

2.65 NATIONAL HARDWOOD LUMBER ASSOCIATION (NHLA)

2.66 NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF STANDARDS AND TECHNOLOGY (NIST)

2.67 NATIONAL ROOFING CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION (NRCA)

A. NRCA ML104 -- The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual; Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

B. NRCA MS104 -- The NRCA Steep Roofing Manual; 2001, Fifth Edition, with interim updates.

2.68 NATIONAL SANITATION FOUNDATION INTERNATIONAL (NSF)

2.69 NATIONAL WOOD WINDOW AND DOOR ASSOCIATION (name changed to WDMA) (NWWDA)

2.70 PLUMBING AND DRAINAGE INSTITUTE (PDI)

2.71 PORTLAND CEMENT ASSOCIATION

A. PCA EB049 -- Portland Cement Plaster/Stucco Manual; 2003.

B. PCA EB088 -- Concrete Masonry Handbook for Architects, Engineers and Builders; 1991.

C. PCA IS526 -- Repair of Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco).

2.72 PORTLAND ENERGY CONSERVATION, INC. (PECI)


2.73 REUNION INTERNATIONALE DES LABORATOIRES D'ESSAIS ET DE RECHERCHES SUR LES MATERIAUX ET LES CONSTRUCTIONS (RILEM):

A. RILEM Test Method 11.4 -- Standard Measurement of Reduction of Moisture Penetration through Horizontal Concrete Surfaces.

2.74 SOUTH COAST AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT DISTRICT (SCAQMD)

2.75 SCIENTIFIC CERTIFICATION SYSTEMS (SCS)

2.76 STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE (SDI)

A. SDI 111 -- Recommended Standard Details for Steel Doors & Frames; 2000.

B. SDI 113 -- Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance of Steel Door and Frame Assemblies; 2001.

C. SDI 122 -- Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames; 2007.

2.77 SAFETY GLAZING CERTIFICATION COUNCIL (SGCC)

A. SGCC (CPD) -- Certified Products Directory: Safety Glazing Material Used in Buildings; current edition

2.78 SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS' NATIONAL ASSOCIATION, INC. (SMACNA)

A. SMACNA (ASMM) -- Architectural Sheet Metal Manual; 2003.

2.79 STEEL STUD MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (SSMA)

A. SSMA (PTI) -- Product Technical Information; current edition.

2.80 SOUTHERN PINE INSPECTION BUREAU, INC. (SPIB)

A. SPIB (GR) -- Grading Rules; 2002.

2.81 SINGLE-PLY ROOFING INSTITUTE (SPRI)

A. SPRI ES-1 -- Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems Used with Low Slope Roofing Systems; 2003.

2.82 THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS (SSPC)

A. SSPC-Paint 20 -- Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, "Organic"); 2002 (Ed. 2004).

B. SSPC-Paint 25 -- Red Iron Oxide, Zinc Oxide, Raw Linseed Oil and Alkyd Primer; 1991 (Part of Steel Structures Painting Manual, Vol. Two).

C. SSPC-PA 11 -- Power Tool Cleaning to Bare Metal; 1987(2004).

2.83 TILE COUNCIL OF NORTH AMERICA, INC. (TCNA)

2.84 TRUSS PLATE INSTITUTE (TPI)

A. TP1 1 -- National Design Standard for Metal Plate Connected Wood Truss Construction; 2002 (ANSI/TPI 1).

2.85 UNIFORM BUILDING CODE (UBC)


A. UBC 7-2, Part II -- Test Standard for Smoke- and Draft-control Assemblies; International Conference of Building Officials; 1997.

B. UBC 43-2 -- Fire Test of Door Assemblies; 1991.

2.86 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES INC. (UL)

A. UL (BMD) -- Building Materials Directory; current edition.

B. UL (FRD) -- Fire Resistance Directory; current edition.

C. UL 10C -- Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies; 1998.

D. UL 555 -- Standard for Fire Dampers; 1999.

E. UL 580 -- Standard for Tests for Uplift Resistance of Roof Assemblies; 1994.

F. UL 790 -- Standard for Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings; 2004.

G. UL 1479 -- Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops; 1994.

H. UL 1784 -- Standard for Air Leakage Tests of Door Assemblies; 2001.

I. UL 1897 -- Uplift Tests for Roof-Covering Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; 2002.

J. UL 2079 -- Standard for Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems; 1998.

2.87 UNITED STATES GREEN BUILDING COUNCIL (USGBC)

2.88 WINDOW AND DOOR MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (formerly NWWDA) (WDMA)

2.89 WESTERN WOOD PRODUCTS ASSOCIATION (WWPA)

A. WWPA G-5 -- Western Lumber Grading Rules; 2005.

PART 3 GOVERNMENT AND RELATED AGENCIES DOCUMENTS

3.01 U.S. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR)

A. 16 CFR 1201 -- Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977.

B. 29 CFR 1926 -- U.S. Occupational Safety and Health Standards; current edition. (for construction work)

1. 29 CFR 1926.58 - Asbestos, Tremolite, Anthophyllite, and Actinolite.

2. 29 CFR 1926.62 - Lead.

3. 29 CFR 1926.850 - Demolition, Preparatory Operations.

4. 29 CRF 1926.1101 - Asbestos.

C. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D -- National Volatile Organic Compound Emission Standards for Architectural Coatings; U.S. Environmental Protection Agency;


current edition.

D. 40 CFR 261 -- United States Environmental Protection Agency Regulations.

3.02 U.S. ARCHITECTURAL AND TRANSPORTATION BARRIERS COMPLIANCE BOARD (ATBCB)

A. ATBCB ADAAG -- Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines; 2004.

3.03 CORPS OF ENGINEERS, U.S. ARMY (COE)

3.04 COMMERCIAL ITEM DESCRIPTION, U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION, FEDERAL ACQUISITION SERVICE (CID)

A. CID A-A-55615 -- Shield, Expansion (Wood Screw and Lag Bolt Self Threading Anchors); 1995.

3.05 U.S. CONSUMER PRODUCTS SAFETY COMMISSION (CPSC)

A. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 -- Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; 1977, with 1984 Revision.

B. CPSC Doc. No. 423 – What You Should Know About Using Paint Strippers.

3.06 U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY (EPA)

A. EPA (NPDES) -- National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES), Construction General Permit; current edition; http://cfpub.epa.gov/npdes/stormwater/cgp.cfm.

3.07 FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION (FHWA)

3.08 FEDERAL SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS, U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (FS)

A. FS FF-B-588 -- Bolt, Toggle; and Expansion Sleeve, Screw; Revision D, 1989.

B. FS FF-B-561 -- Bolts, (Screw), Lag; 1993.

C. FS FF-N-105 -- Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes; Wire, Cut and Wrought.

D. FS FF-S-111 -- Screw, Wood; Revision D, 1974, and Amendment 1, 1989.

E. FS FF-S-325 -- Shield, Expansion; Nail Expansion; and Nail, Drive Screw (Devices, Anchoring, Masonry); 1957, and Amendment 3, 1965.

F. FS FF-W-84 -- Washers, Lock (Spring).

G. FS QQ-Z-325C -- Zinc Coating, Electrodeposited, Requirements for

H. FS UU-B-790 -- Building Paper, Vegetable Fiber (Kraft, Waterproofed, Water Repellent and Fire Resistant).

3.09 U.S. GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION (GSA)

3.10 U.S. MILITARY SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS (MIL)

3.11 PRODUCT STANDARDS, U.S. DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE (PS)

A. PS 1 -- Construction and Industrial Plywood; 1995.

B. PS 20 -- American Softwood Lumber Standard; 2005.


3.12 FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS FOR ROAD AND BRIDGE CONSTRUCTION (FDOT)

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01600 - 1 of 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01600

PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. General product requirements.

B. Transportation, handling, storage and protection.

C. Product option requirements.

D. Substitution limitations and procedures.

E. Spare parts and maintenance materials.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Procedures: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, articles 42 through 45. See also, Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 NEW PRODUCTS

A. Provide new products unless specifically required or permitted by the Contract Documents.

2.02 PRODUCT OPTIONS

A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Use any product meeting those standards or description.

B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Use a product of one of the manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed.

C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named.

D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, article 49.

2.03 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra products of types and in quantities specified in individual specification sections.

B. Deliver to and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

A. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01600 - 2 of 2 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

proposed substitution with Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents.

C. Substitution Submittal Procedure: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, article 49.

3.02 TRANSPORTATION, HANDLING, STORAGE AND PROTECTION

A. General: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, article 38.

B. Designate receiving/storage areas for incoming products so that they are delivered according to installation schedule and placed convenient to work area in order to minimize waste due to excessive materials handling and misapplication.

C. Store with seals and labels intact and legible.

D. Store sensitive products in weather tight, climate controlled, enclosures in an environment favorable to product.

E. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.

F. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation and degradation of products.

G. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well-drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter.

H. Prevent contact with material that may cause corrosion, discoloration, or staining.

I. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage.

J. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 01700 - 1 of 7 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 01700

EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pre-installation meetings.

B. Cutting and patching.

C. Surveying for laying out the work.

D. Starting of systems and equipment.

E. Demonstration and instruction for City’s personnel.

F. Closeout procedures, except payment procedures.


A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Limitations on working in existing building; continued occupancy; work sequence; identification of salvaged and relocated materials.

B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Testing and inspection procedures.

D. Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

E. Section 01780 - Closeout Submittals: Project record documents, operation and maintenance data, warranties and bonds.

F. Section 07840 - Firestopping.

G. Individual Product Specification Sections: 1. Advance notification to other sections of openings required in work of those

sections. 2. Limitations on cutting structural members.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Survey Work (Laying Out the Work): Submit name, address, and telephone number of Surveyor before starting survey work. 1. On request, submit documentation verifying accuracy of survey work. 2. Submit a copy of site drawing and certificate signed by the Land Surveyor,

that the elevations and locations of the work are in conformance with Contract Documents.

3. Submit surveys and survey logs for the project record.

C. Cutting and Patching: Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: 1. Structural integrity of any element of Project. 2. Integrity of weather exposed or moisture resistant element.


3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of any operational element. 4. Visual qualities of sight exposed elements. 5. Work of City or separate Contractor. 6. Include in request:

a. Identification of Project. b. Location and description of affected work. c. Necessity for cutting or alteration. d. Description of proposed work and products to be used. e. Alternatives to cutting and patching. f. Effect on work of City or separate Contractor. g. Written permission of affected separate Contractor. h. Date and time work will be executed.

D. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped and active utilities.

1.04 QUALIFICATIONS

A. For survey work, employ a land surveyor registered in the State in which the Project is located and acceptable to Consultant and Project Manager. Submit evidence of Surveyor's Errors and Omissions insurance coverage in the form of an Insurance Certificate.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Grade site to drain. Maintain excavations free of water. Provide, operate, and maintain pumping equipment.

B. Protect site from puddling or running water. Provide water barriers as required to protect site from soil erosion.

C. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases.

D. Dust Control: Execute work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from dispersing into atmosphere.

E. Noise Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to minimize noise produced by construction operations.

F. Pest Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent pests and insects from damaging the work.

G. Rodent Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent rodents from accessing or invading premises.

H. Pollution Control: Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious, toxic substances, and pollutants produced by construction operations.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and work of the various sections of the Project Manual to ensure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements.


B. Notify affected utility companies and comply with their requirements.

C. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of new operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment.

D. Coordinate space requirements, supports, and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with lines of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs.

E. In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.

F. Coordinate completion and clean-up of work of separate sections.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 PATCHING MATERIALS

A. New Materials: As specified in product sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work.

B. Type and Quality of Existing Products: Determine by inspecting and testing products where necessary, referring to existing work as a standard.

C. Product Substitution: For any proposed change in materials, submit request for substitution described in Section 01600. See also, Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, article 49.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent work. Start of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural support or attachment of new work being applied or attached.

C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections.

D. Take field measurements before confirming product orders or beginning fabrication, to minimize waste due to over-ordering or misfabrication.

E. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct locations.

F. Prior to Cutting: Examine existing conditions prior to commencing work, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering existing work, assess conditions affecting performance of work. Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions.


3.02 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance.

B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance.

C. Apply manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond.

D. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or integrity of affected portion of work.

E. Provide devices and methods to protect other portions of Project from damage.

3.03 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. When required in individual specification sections, convene a pre-installation meeting at the site prior to commencing work of the section.

B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific section.

C. Notify Consultant and Project Manager at least four days in advance of meeting date.

D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting: 1. Review conditions of examination, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work.

E. Record minutes and distribute copies within two days after meeting to participants, with two copies each to Consultant, Project Manager, participants, and those affected by decisions made.

3.04 LAYING OUT THE WORK

A. Verify locations of survey control points prior to starting work.

B. Promptly notify Consultant and Project Manager of any discrepancies discovered.

C. Contractor shall locate and protect survey control and reference points.

D. Control datum for survey is that established by City-provided survey.

E. Protect survey control points prior to starting site work; preserve permanent reference points during construction.

F. Promptly report to Consultant and Project Manager the loss or destruction of any reference point or relocation required because of changes in grades or other reasons.

G. Replace dislocated survey control points based on original survey control. Make no changes without prior written notice to Consultant and Project Manager.

H. Utilize recognized engineering survey practices.

I. Establish a minimum of two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on project record documents.

J. Establish elevations, lines and levels. Locate and lay out by instrumentation and


similar appropriate means: 1. Site improvements including pavements; stakes for grading, fill and topsoil

placement; utility locations, slopes, and invert elevations. 2. Grid or axis for structures. 3. Building foundation, column locations, ground floor elevations.

K. Periodically verify layouts by same means.

L. Maintain a complete and accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses.

3.05 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install products as specified in individual sections, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and so as to avoid waste due to necessity for replacement.

B. Make vertical elements plumb and horizontal elements level, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Install equipment and fittings plumb and level, neatly aligned with adjacent vertical and horizontal lines, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Make consistent texture on surfaces, with seamless transitions, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Make neat transitions between different surfaces, maintaining texture and appearance.

3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Execute cutting and patching including excavation and fill to complete the work, to uncover work in order to install improperly sequenced work, to remove and replace defective or non-conforming work, to remove samples of installed work for testing when requested, to provide openings in the work for penetration of mechanical and electrical work, to execute patching to complement adjacent work, and to fit products together to integrate with other work.

B. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement or damage to other work.

C. Execute work by methods to avoid damage to other work, and which will provide appropriate surfaces to receive patching and finishing. In existing work, minimize damage and restore to original condition.

D. Employ original installer to perform cutting for weather exposed and moisture resistant elements, and sight exposed surfaces.

E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic tools not allowed without prior approval.

F. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.

G. Fit work air tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces.

H. At penetrations of fire rated walls, partitions, ceiling, or floor construction,


completely seal voids with fire rated material in accordance with Section 07840, to full thickness of the penetrated element.

I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finish. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection or natural break. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.

J. Make neat transitions. Patch work to match adjacent work in texture and appearance. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition.

K. Patch or replace surfaces that are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections due to patching work. Repair substrate prior to patching finish. Finish patches to produce uniform finish and texture over entire area. When finish cannot be matched, refinish entire surface to nearest intersections.

3.07 PROGRESS CLEANING


B. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition.

C. Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of waste materials, debris, and rubbish caused by its operations. 1. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces,

and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. 2. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and trash/rubbish from site and

dispose off-site; do not burn or bury. 3. All combustible waste materials shall be removed from the Project(s) at the

end of each day.

D. Cleaning operations should be controlled to limit dust and other particles adhering to existing surfaces.

3.08 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK


B. Protect installed work from damage by construction operations.

C. Provide special protection where specified in individual specification sections.

D. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed products. Control activity in immediate work area to prevent damage.

E. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings.

F. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer.

G. Remove protective coverings when no longer needed; reuse or recycle plastic coverings if possible.

3.09 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operating products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation.


3.10 FINAL CLEANING


B. Execute final cleaning after Substantial Completion but before making final application for payment.

C. Use cleaning materials that are non-hazardous.

D. Clean interior and exterior glass, surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances.

E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems.

F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces.

G. Remove waste, surplus materials, trash/rubbish, and construction facilities from the site; dispose of in legal manner; do not burn or bury.

3.12 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. General: 1. Make submittals that are required by governing or other authorities.

a. Provide copies to Consultant and Project Manager. 2. Notify Consultant and Project Manager when work is considered ready for

Substantial Completion. 3. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed,

work has been inspected, and that work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for review by Consultant and Project Manager.

4. Correct items of work listed in executed Certificates of Substantial Completion.

5. Notify Consultant and Project Manager when work is considered finally complete.

6. Complete items of work determined by Consultant's and Project Manager’s final inspection.

B. Substantial Completion, Punch List and Final Completion: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions, article 62.

C. Contractor's Closeout Submittals: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions. 1. Record Set of Contract Documents: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions, article 46. 2. As-Built Drawings: Refer to Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions, article 48. 3. Warranties and guarantees.

a. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Final Acceptance completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents.

4. Refer to Section 01780 for additional requirements.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 ( Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. 30579 01780 - 1 of 3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

SECTION 01780

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Project Record Documents.

B. Warranties and bonds.


A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract closeout procedures.

B. Individual Product Sections: 1. Warranties required for specific products or Work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Evidence of Compliance with Requirements of Governing Authorities: 1. Certificate of Completion, submitted upon Substantial Completion.

a. Certificate of Completion: A written certification that the work specified in the permit has been completed according to code and the premises are fit for inhabitancy.

b. FBC-B SECTION 308.1 states that "The permit holder must apply for and obtain a Certificate of Completion of any building after all inspections have been approved by the Building Official."

C. Project Record Documents: Submit documents to Consultant with claim for final Application for Payment. 1. Record Set of Contract Documents: Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions, article 46.1. 2. As-Built Drawings: Refer to Refer to Section 2 - General Terms and

Conditions, article 48. a. As-Built Drawings shall be legibly marked to record actual construction. b. Include horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements; signed and sealed by a surveyor registered in the State of Florida.

3. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record. 4. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order.

D. Warranties and Guarantees: 1. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during

construction with Project Manager's permission, submit documents within ten days after acceptance.

2. Make other submittals within ten days after Date of Substantial Completion, prior to final Application for Payment.

3. For items of Work for which acceptance is delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, submit within ten days after acceptance, listing the


date of acceptance as the beginning of the warranty period.

E. Itemized List for Spare Parts and Extra Stock: Submit in accordance with requirements of individual sections of the Technical Specifications, by Substantial Completion.

F. Itemized List for Keys and Keying Schedule: Submit in accordance with requirements of Section 08710, by Substantial Completion.

G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Claims: In accordance with the General Conditions and Subcontractor's Affidavit(s) of Satisfaction and/or Consent of Surety to Final Payment.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Maintain on site one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 6. Manufacturer's instruction for assembly, installation, and adjusting.

B. Ensure entries are complete and accurate, enabling future reference by City.

C. Store record documents separate from documents used for construction.

D. Record information concurrent with construction progress.

E. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each product section description of actual products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and modifications.

F. Record Drawings and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in

construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract drawings.

3.02 PRODUCT DATA

A. For Each Product or System: List names, addresses and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement


parts.

B. Product Data: Mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation. Delete inapplicable information.

C. Typed Text: As required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions.

3.03 MATERIALS AND FINISHES DATA

A. For Each Product, Applied Material, and Finish: 1. Product data, with catalog number, size, composition, and color and texture

designations. 2. Information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.

B. Instructions for Care and Maintenance: Manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental cleaning agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Additional information as specified in individual product specification sections.

D. Provide a listing in Table of Contents for design data, with tabbed fly sheet and space for insertion of data.

3.04 WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES AND BONDS

A. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by responsible Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Project Manager's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Substantial completion is determined.

B. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

C. Co-execute submittals when required.

D. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.

E. Manual: Bind in commercial quality 8-1/2 x 11 inch (216 x 279 mm) three D side ring binders with durable plastic covers.

F. Cover: Identify each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS, with title of Project; name, address and telephone number of Contractor and equipment supplier; and name of responsible company principal.

G. Table of Contents: Neatly typed, in the sequence of the Table of Contents of the Project Manual, with each item identified with the number and title of the specification section in which specified, and the name of product or work item.

H. Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to the Table of Contents listing. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List Subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 05500 - 1 of 11 METAL FABRICATIONS

SECTION 05500

METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Rough hardware.

B. Miscellaneous framing and supports.

C. Shelf angles.

D. Miscellaneous mechanical anchors.

E. Adhesive anchors.


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry.

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies: Non-loadbearing metal framing.

C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Paint finish.

D. Section 14201 - Elevator: Sump pit grating, except where provided by elevator manufacturer.

E. Division 16 - Electrical: Miscellaneous framing and supports for lighting.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product (e.g., miscellaneous mechanical anchors; adhesive anchors) to be used, including: 1. Structural design criteria. 2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations

C. Shop Drawings: 1. General:

a. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable.

b. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.4 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths.

c. Shop drawings for load-carrying components and assemblies shall be signed and sealed by Delegated Professional Structural Engineer; see Quality Assurance.


A. Design load carrying components and assemblies, including but not necessarily limited to railing and handrail assemblies, steel tube support for casework, etc.,


under direct supervision of a Delegated Professional Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the State of Florida.

B. Field Measurements: Where metal fabrications are indicated to fit walls and/or other construction, verify field dimensions by field measurements. Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, and indicate measurements on shop drawings. 1. Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work,

establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating metal fabrications without field measurements. Coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. Allow for trimming and fitting.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Ladder Manufacturer: A firm experienced in producing aluminum metal

ladders similar to those indicated for this Project. a. Record of successful in-service performance. b. Sufficient production capacity to produce required units. c. Professional engineering competent in design and structural analysis to

fabricate ladders in compliance with industry standards and local codes. 2. Anchor Manufacturers: Firm having a minimum of five years of experience

producing products of the type specified, with a complete line of installation tools and accessories.

D. Installer Qualifications: Competent and experienced firm capable of selecting fasteners and installing ladders to attain designed operational and structural performance. 1. Workmen Qualifications: Provide at least one person who will be present at

all times during execution of this portion of the work, and who is thoroughly trained and experienced in metal fabrication of the type specified herein, and who shall direct all work performed under this Section.

E. Welder Qualifications: Use only certified welders and shielded arc process for all welding performed in connection with the work of this Section. 1. Welders employed on the project must be qualified within the past 12

months under the AWS procedure for the type(s) of work required. Submit certification for welders, verifying AWS qualification within the previous 12 months.

F. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and install metal fabrications in compliance with governing building code and all other applicable regulatory requirements. 1. Design miscellaneous steel framing and support assemblies (including

connections, attachments and attachments) to support imposed loads in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code.

2. Ladders shall comply with the following: a. 29 CFR 1910.27 minimum standards for ladders. b. ANSI A14.3 fixed ladder requirements.

G. Welding shall comply with requirements of AWS A2.4, AWS A5.8, AWS B2.1, AWS B2.2, AWS D1.1, AWS D10.9, governing building code, and applicable regulatory requirements.

1.05 STORAGE AND HANDLING


A. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect work of this Section, before, during and after installation, and to protect the installed work and materials of all other trades.

B. Replacements: In the event of damage or rejection, immediately make all repairs and replacements necessary for the approval of the Consultant, at no additional cost to the City.


A. Field Measurements: Verify dimensions by field measurement before fabrication. 1. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made

without delaying the Work, indicate established dimensions on shop drawing submittal and proceed with fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Recycled Content 1. Steel Products (Other Than Stainless Steel): Provide products with an

average recycled content of steel products so post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than the following: a. W-Shapes: 60 percent. b. Channels, Angles, M- and S-Shapes: 60 percent. c. Plate and Bar: 25 percent. d. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: 25 percent. e. Steel Pipe: 25 percent. f. All Other Steel Materials: 25 percent.

B. Steel (Other Than Stainless Steel): 1. Except as otherwise indicated, rolled structural steel bars, plates, and

shapes used for load carrying applications shall conform to ASTM A 6. 2. Steel Sections: ASTM A 36. 3. Steel Plates: ASTM A 283. 4. Steel Tubing:

a. Cold-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 500, Grade B except as otherwise indicated.

b. Hot-Formed Structural Tubing: ASTM A 501. 5. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53.

a. Type: Type S, except as otherwise indicated. b. Grade: Grade B, except as otherwise indicated. b. Wall Thickness: Schedule 40, except as otherwise indicated. c. Finish: Hot-dip galvanized finish, except as otherwise indicated.

6. Slotted Steel Channel Framing: ASTM A 653, Grade 33. 7. Slotted Steel Channel Fittings: ASTM A 1011. 8. Steel Sheet: Hot-rolled ASTM A 570; or cold-rolled ASTM A 611, Class 1, of

grade required for design loading. 9. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325, Type 1, galvanized to ASTM A 153

where connecting galvanized components. 10. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1; type required for materials being welded. 11. Shop and Touch-Up Primer:


a. Non-galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 15, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

b. Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic, complying with VOC limitations of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Stainless Steel: 1. Stainless Steel Sections (e.g., angles): ASTM A 276, Type 304. 2. Stainless Steel Strip: ASTM A 480, Type 304, #2B finish, except as

otherwise indicated. 3. Stainless Steel Plate: ASTM A 240, Type 304, #1 finish, except as

otherwise indicated. 4. Stainless Steel Flat Bar: ASTM A 240 or A 276, except as otherwise

indicated. 5. Stainless Steel Pipe: ASTM A 312, Seamless, Type 304L, Schedule 40S,

except as otherwise indicated. 6. Stainless Steel Tubing:

a. Polished: ASTM A 312, Seamless, Schedule 10, except as otherwise indicated.

b. Ornamental, Round: ASTM A 269, Seamless, Type 304, 16 gage, unless otherwise indicated.

7. Wrought Stainless Steel Pipe Fittings: ASTM A 403. 8. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240, Type 304, #4 satin finish, except as

otherwise indicated. 9. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel.

D. Aluminum: 1. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221, 6063 alloy, T6 temper, except as

otherwise indicated. 2. Sheet Aluminum: ASTM B 209, 5052 alloy, H32 or H22 temper, except as

otherwise indicated. 3. Aluminum-Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes: ASTM B 210, 6063 alloy, T6

temper, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Aluminum-Alloy Bars: ASTM B 211, 6061 alloy, T6 temper, except as

otherwise indicated. 5. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: Stainless steel. 6. Welding Materials: AWS D1.2; type required for materials being welded.

2.02 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. For fabrication of miscellaneous metal work which will be exposed to view,

use only materials which are smooth and free of surface blemishes including, but not necessarily limited to, pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names and roughness.

2. Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. Pre-assemble items in shop to greatest extent possible, to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

3. Shear and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs. 4. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless

otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible


without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. 5. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 6. Continuously seal joined members by continuous welds. Weld corners and

seams continuously to comply with the following: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop

strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and

blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

7. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius.

8. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to secure metal fabrications rigidly in place, and to support imposed loads.

9. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications to receive required finish hardware, screws and similar items.

10. Allow for thermal movement resulting from the following change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening up of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Engineering calculations to be based on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. a. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees

F, material surface. 11. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces

and straight sharp edges. 12. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts;

unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise.

13. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.

B. Workmanship: 1. Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required

to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. Use type of materials shown or specified for various components of work.

2. Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch, unless otherwise indicated. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

3. Weld corners and seams continuously, complying with AWS recommendations. At exposed connections, grind exposed welds smooth and flush to match and blend with adjoining surfaces.

4. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners wherever possible. Use exposed fasteners of type


shown or, if not shown, Phillips flathead (countersunk) screws or bolts. a. Provide for anchorage of type shown, coordinated with supporting

structure. Fabricate and space anchoring devices to provide adequate support for intended use.

b. Cut, reinforce, drill and tap miscellaneous metal work as indicated to receive finish hardware and similar items.

5. Structural Steel: a. No splices permitted unless approved by Consultant. b. Steel tube columns shall be seamless and concrete filled with vents top,

middle, and bottom.

C. Galvanizing: 1. Provide a zinc coating for those items shown or specified to be galvanized,

as follows: a. ASTM A 153 for galvanizing iron and steel hardware. b. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing rolled, pressed and forged steel shapes,

plates, bars and strips 1/8 inch thick or heavier. c. ASTM A 123 for galvanizing assembled steel products.

D. Shop Painting: 1. Shop paint miscellaneous metal work, except members or portions of

members to be embedded in concrete or masonry, surfaces and edges to be field welded, and galvanized surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Remove scale, rust and other deleterious materials before applying shop coat. Clean off heavy rust and loose mill scale in accordance with SSPC SP-2 or SSPC SP-3.

3. Remove oil, grease and similar contaminants in accordance with SSPC SP-1.

4. Immediately after surface preparation, brush or spray on primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, and at a rate to provide uniform dry film thickness of 2.0 mills for each coat. Use painting methods that will result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges and exposed surfaces.

5. Apply one shop coat to fabricated metal items, except apply 2 coats of paint to surfaces inaccessible after assembly or erection. Change color of second coat to distinguish it from the first.

2.03 FABRICATED ITEMS

A. Rough Hardware: 1. Furnish bent or otherwise custom fabrication bolts, plates, anchors, hangers,

dowels and other miscellaneous steel and iron shapes as required for framing and supporting woodwork, and for anchoring or securing woodwork to concrete or other structures.

2. Fabricate items to sizes, shapes and dimensions required. Furnish malleable iron washers for heads and nuts that bear on wood structural connections; elsewhere, furnish steel washers.

B. Loose Bearing and Leveling Plates: Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction, made flat, free from warps or twists, and of required thickness and bearing area. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting as required. Galvanize after fabrication.

C. Slotted Channel Framing: Fabricate channels and fittings from structural steel complying with the referenced standards; hot-dipped galvanized per ASTM A


653, Grade G90 finish.

D. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. Provide miscellaneous steel framing and supports as required to complete

the work. 2. Fabricate miscellaneous units to sizes, shapes and profiles shown or if not

shown, of required dimensions to receive adjacent other work to be retained by framing. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill and tap units to receive hardware and similar items.

3. Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Miscellaneous Steel Trim: 1. Provide shapes and sizes for profiles shown. Except as otherwise indicated,

fabricate units from structural steel shapes and plates and steel bars, with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Use concealed field splices wherever possible. Provide cutouts, fittings and anchorages as required for coordination of assembly and installation with other work.

2. Galvanize miscellaneous steel trim where indicated.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MECHANICAL ANCHORS

A. General: 1. Provide zinc-coated fasteners, except as otherwise indicated.

a. Provide stainless steel fasteners where fastener will be installed in contact with pressure-treated wood.

2. Select fasteners for type, grade and class as appropriate for application and use intended.

B. Bolts and Nuts: Except as otherwise indicated, provide regular hexagon head type, ASTM A 307, Grade A, with hex nuts, ASTM A 563, and flat washers. 1. At structural connections requiring high-strength bolts, provide regular

hexagon head type, ASTM A 325, Grade A. 2. At aluminum connections, provide stainless steel bolts, nuts, and washers. 3. At connections with pressure-treated wood, provide stainless steel bolts,

nuts, and washers.

C. Lag Bolts: Square head type, FS FF-B-561.

D. Machine Screws: Cadmium-plated steel, FS FF-S-92; ASME B18.2.1.

E. Wood Screws: Flat-head carbon steel, FS FF-W-111, except as follows: 1. Provide stainless steel screws for use with pressure-treated wood.

F. Plain Washers: Round, carbon steel, FS FF-W-92; ASME B18.22.1.

G. Stainless Steel Bolts (and Nuts): ASTM A 320, Type 304.

H. Stainless Steel Fasteners: 1. Bolts and hex cap screws: ASTM F 593. 2. Nuts: ASTM F 594. 3. Socket head cap screws: ASTM F 837. 4. Socket button and flat countersunk head cap screws: ASTM F 879. 5. Socket set screws: ASTM F 880.


I. Toggle Bolts: Tumble-wing type, FS FF-B-588; type, class and style as appropriate for application and use intended.

J. Lock Washers: Helical spring type carbon steel, FS FF-W-84; ASME B18.21.1.

K. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Not allowed.

L. Concrete Mechanical Anchors: As indicated in Drawings. 1. Manufacturers / Products: Use wedge-type expansion anchors such as:

a. Hilti Kwik Bolt III. b. Illinois Tool Works (ITW) Ramset Red Head Trubolt Wedge. c. Powers Power Stud. d. Simpson Strong Tie Wedge All.

2. Provide type, size and quantity as appropriate for base material (e.g., concrete, CMU), performance (e.g., heavy duty, shear, tension), usage (e.g., permanent, finished appearance), installation (e.g., through fixture, flush surface) and corrosion resistance (e.g., galvanized).

3. Refer to Structural Drawings for additional information.

2.06 FINISHES

A. Steel: 1. Galvanized Finish:

a. Galvanize the following items: (1) Items specified for galvanized finish, or where galvanized finish is

indicated. (2) Items indicated to be embedded in concrete or masonry. (3) Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. (4) Items installed at locations not within air-conditioned spaces.

b. Unless otherwise specified or noted, items indicated to be galvanized shall receive a zinc coating by the hot-dip process, after fabrication, complying with the following: (1) ASTM A 123 for plain and fabricated material, and assembled

products. (2) ASTM A 153 for iron and steel hardware.

B. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin polish, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Aluminum: Except as otherwise indicated, provide Class I natural anodized, AAMA 611 AA-M12C22A41, not less than 0.7 mils (0.018 mm) thick. 1. Comply with AA DAF-45 for aluminum finishes required.

2.07 FABRICATION TOLERANCES

A. General: 1. Squareness: 1/8 inch (3 mm) maximum difference in diagonal

measurements. 2. Maximum Offset Between Faces: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 3. Maximum Misalignment of Adjacent Members: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm). 4. Maximum Bow: 1/8 inch (3 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m). 5. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) in 48 inches (1.2 m).

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. 1. Applicator must examine the areas and conditions under which metal

fabrications are to be installed and notify the Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.

2. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to applicator. Starting of this work will be construed as installer’s acceptance of the surfaces and conditions within any particular area; any corrections that may be required will be at the expense of this installer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Clean and strip primed steel items to bare metal and aluminum where site

welding is required. 2. Supply setting templates to the appropriate entities for steel items required to

be cast into concrete or embedded in masonry.

B. Isolate non-ferrous metal surfaces to be permanently fastened in contact with ferrous metal surfaces, concrete, or masonry by coating non-ferrous metal surface with bituminous mastic, prior to installation. 1. Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code,

including but not limited to FBC-B Section 2003.8.4.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. 2. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain

true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments.

3. Fit exposed connections accurately to form tight hairline joints. 4. Field weld components indicated on shop drawings. 5. Obtain approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 6. After erection, prime welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or

galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete.

B. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing miscellaneous metal fabrications to in-place construction, including threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts, toggle bolts, through-bolts, lag bolts, wood screws, and other connectors as required. 1. Cut off exposed threaded portion of bolts flush with nut.

C. Connections: 1. Fit exposed connections accurately together for form tight hairline joints.

Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints, but cannot be hop welded because of shipping size limitations.

2. Grind exposed joints smooth and touch-up shop paint coat. 3. Do not weld, cut or abrade the surfaces of exterior units which have been

hot-dip galvanized after fabrication, and are intended for bolted or screw filled connections.

D. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Code for procedures of manual shielded


metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, and methods used in correcting welding work. 1. Weld connections which are not intended to be left as exposed joints, but

cannot be shop welded because of size limitations. 2. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1. 3. Grind welded joints smooth.

E. Cutting, Fitting and Placement: 1. Perform cutting, drilling and fitting required for installation of miscellaneous

metal fabrications. 2. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, plumb, level, true

and free of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 3. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be

built into concrete, masonry or similar construction.

F. Setting Loose Plates: 1. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of any bond-reducing

materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of bearing plates.

2. Set loose leveling and bearing plates on wedges, or other adjustable devices. After the bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten the anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut-off flush with the edge of the bearing plate before packing with grout in concealed locations where not exposed to moisture; use non-metallic non-shrink grout in exposed locations, unless otherwise indicated.

3. Pack grout solidly between surfaces and plates, to ensure that no voids remain.

G. Concrete Mechanical Anchors: 1. Prior to drilling hole for expansion anchor, confirm the absence of reinforcing

steel by drilling a 1/4 inch diameter pilot hole. Do not cut reinforcing steel without approval of the Structural Engineer.

2. Refer to manufacturer’s installation instructions for appropriate drill size. 3. Provide anchor embedment, spacing and edge distance as shown on the

Drawings.

H. Adhesive Anchors: 1. Drill holes of proper diameter and depth, in accordance with adhesive

manufacturer's published structural design information. 2. Blow out and brush holes, removing dust and debris. 3. In Concrete:

a. Using nozzle of appropriate size for hole, dispense adhesive into the hole, from bottom up, filling approximately five-eighths of the hole while withdrawing nozzle.

b. Insert anchor into hole, to the bottom, while turning clockwise. 4. In Hollow Masonry:

a. Using screen and nozzle of appropriate size for hole, dispense adhesive into screen, filling completely while withdrawing nozzle.

b. Insert screen into hole. c. Insert anchor into screen, to the bottom, while turning clockwise.

5. Do not disturb anchors until minimum cure time to loading has passed.

3.04 PROTECTION


A. Protect installed products until completion of project.

B. Replace damaged and defective anchors and anchors not adequately adhered.

3.05 ADJUST AND CLEAN

A. Touch-up Painted Surfaces: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness (DFT) of 2.0 mils.

B. Touch-up Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded areas, and apply 2 coats of galvanizing repair paint.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06100 - 1 of 8 ROUGH CARPENTRY

SECTION 06100

ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Non-structural dimension lumber framing.

B. Rough opening framing for doors, windows, and roof openings.

C. Preservative treated wood materials.

D. Miscellaneous framing and sheathing.

E. Concealed wood blocking, nailers, and supports.

F. Miscellaneous wood nailers, furring, and grounds.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 06400 – Architectural Woodwork & Custom Cabinets

B. Section 06620 – Solid Surface Fabrications

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit data on proprietary connection devices. 2. Provide technical data on wood preservative materials and application

instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate framing connection details, fasteners, connections and dimensions. 2. Indicate roof deck framing system, loads and cambers, bearing details, and

framed openings. 3. Indicate dimensions, wood species and grades, component profiles, drilled

holes, fasteners, connectors, details, and sequence of erection.

D. Samples: For rough carpentry members that will be exposed to view, submit two samples, 6 x 12 inch in size illustrating wood grain, color, and general appearance.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed

specified requirements. 2. Submit certificates attesting that products meet the grade requirements

specified in lieu of grade markings where appearance is important and grade marks will deface material.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of governing


building code, including but not limited to the following: 1. Materials, design, construction and quality of wood members and their

fasteners shall conform to applicable requirements of FBC-B CHAPTER 23. 2. Connections for wood members shall be designed and constructed in

accordance with the appropriate methodology in FBC-B SECTION 2301.2. The number and size of nails connecting wood members shall not be less than that set forth in FBC-B TABLE 2304.9.1.

B. Lumber: 1. Grade: Comply with PS 20 and approved grading rules and inspection

agencies. 2. Grade Mark: Lumber used for load-supporting purposes, including machine

stress-rated or machine evaluated lumber, shall be identified by the grade mark of a lumber grading or inspection agency that has been approved by an accreditation body that complies with PS 20 or equivalent. Grading practices and identification shall comply with rules published by an agency approved in accordance with the procedures of PS 20 or equivalent procedures, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Nominal Size: The commercial size designation of width and depth, in standard sawn lumber grades; somewhat larger than the standard net size of dressed lumber, in accordance with PS 20 for sawn lumber.

C. Exposed-to-View Rough Carpentry: 1. Grade Mark: In lieu of a grade mark on the material, submit manufacturer's

certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements, in lieu of grade stamping. a. Comply with applicable requirements of FBC-B SECTION 2303.1.1.

D. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

E. Manufacturer's Certificates of Compliance: 1. Certify that wood products supplied for rough carpentry meet or exceed

specified requirements. 2. Include data for wood-preservative and fire-retardant treatment from

chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to the site in an undamaged condition.

B. Cover wood products to protect against moisture. Support stacked products to prevent deformation and to allow air circulation.

C. Stack plywood and other board products so as to prevent warping.

D. Locate stacks on well drained areas, supported at least 6 inches above grade and cover with well ventilated sheds having firmly constructed over hanging roof with sufficient end wall to protect lumber from driving rain.

E. Remove defective and damaged materials and provide new materials.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. Dimension Lumber: Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 1. If no species is specified, provide any species graded by the agency

specified; if no grading agency is specified, provide lumber graded by any grading agency meeting the specified requirements.

2. Grading Agency: Any grading agency whose rules are approved by the Board of Review, American Lumber Standard Committee (www.alsc.org) and who provides grading service for the species and grade specified; provide lumber stamped with grade mark unless otherwise indicated.

2.02 LUMBER

A. General: 1. Comply with PS 20 and requirements of specified grading agencies. 2. Grading Agency:

a. Southern Pine: Southern Pine Inspection Bureau, Inc. (SPIB). b. Douglas Fir (DF): Western Wood Products Association (WWPA).

3. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Surfacing: S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Dimension Lumber for Concealed Applications: 1. Species: Southern Pine, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes / Surfacing: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 3. Moisture Content: S-dry or MC19. 4. Grade:

a. Joist, Rafter and Small Beam Framing (2 x 6 inches through 4 x 16 inches): No. 1 or Better.

b. Miscellaneous Blocking, Furring, and Nailers: 1) Lumber: No. 2 or Standard. 2) Boards: Standard or No. 3.

C. Dimension Lumber and Boards for Exposed Applications: 1. Species: Douglas Fir (DF), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Sizes: Nominal sizes as indicated on drawings, S4S. 3. Moisture Content: MC12. 4. Grade:

a. Structural Light Framing (used where high-strength design values are required in light framing sizes, such as in engineered wood trusses): Select Structural.

b. Structural Joists and Planks (e.g., floor and ceiling joists, rafters, headers, small beams, trusses and general framing applications): Select Structural.

c. Miscellaneous Other Lumber and Boards (Appearance Grade): B and Better Select.

2.02 CONSTRUCTION PANELS

A. Plywood - General: 1. Comply with PS 1.


2. Panels shall bear the mark of a recognized association or independent inspection agency that maintains continuing control over quality of plywood which identifies compliance by veneer grade, group number, span rating where applicable, and glue type.

B. Other Applications: 1. Concealed Plywood: PS 1, C-C Plugged, exterior grade. 2. Plywood Concealed from View but Located within Exterior Enclosure: PS 1,

C-C Plugged or better, exterior grade. 3. Plywood Exposed to View but Not Exposed to Weather: PS 1, A-D, or

better. 4. Other Locations: PS 1, C-D Plugged or better, exterior grade.

2.06 ROUGH HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Metal: Fasteners/anchors shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, except as

otherwise indicated. a. Stainless Steel: At locations where used with stainless steel

connectors, or where in contact with preservative-treated wood, fasteners/anchors shall be fabricated of Type 305 stainless steel.

2. Nails: Comply with requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1517.5; size and type best suited for purpose unless noted otherwise. a. ASTM F 1667:

1) Common: Type I, Style 10. 2) Concrete: Type I, Style 11. 3) Barbed: Type I, Style 26. 4) Underlayment: Type I, Style 25. 5) Masonry: Type I, Style 27. 6) Use special nails designed for use with framing and timber

connectors (e.g., ties, strap anchors, joists hangers) and similar items, per connector manufacturer’s recommendations.

7) Nails not less than 1-1/4 inches long, 8d and deformed or annular ring shank.

3. Screws: a. For Fastening Wood to Wood: ANSI B18.6.1, or ASTM C 1002. b. For Fastening Wood to Steel:

1) For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch (0.835 mm) thick, attach wood in accordance with ASTM C 1002.

2) For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick, attach wood in accordance with ASTM C 954.

4. Drywall Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing.

5. Anchor Bolts: a. ASME B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2 galvanized, 1/2 inch unless shown

otherwise. b. Extend at least 8 inches into masonry or concrete, with ends bent 2

inches. 6. Expansion Bolts / Anchors and Miscellaneous Bolts:

a. CID A-A-55615; expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to


solid masonry or concrete. 1) Use 1/2-inch diameter bolt, unless otherwise indicated. 2) Embedment into masonry or concrete at least 2-1/2 inches, unless

otherwise indicated. 7. Washers: ASTM F 844, except as otherwise indicated.

a. Washers Used With Galvanized Steel Bolts: Galvanized steel. b. Washers Used With Stainless Steel Bolts: Stainless steel.

B. Die-Stamped Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 1. Anchors: Expansion shield and lag bolt type for anchorage to solid masonry

or concrete. 2. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide

minimum G185 (Z550) galvanizing per ASTM A 653.

C. Joist Hangers: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to fit the supported member, of sufficient strength to develop the full strength of the supported member in accordance with governing building code, and furnished complete with any special nails required. 1. For contact with preservative treated wood in exposed locations, provide

minimum G185 (Z550) galvanizing per ASTM A 653.

D. Clip Angles: Steel, 3/16 inch thick, size as indicated; or zinc-coated steel or iron commercial clips designed for connecting wood members.

E. Tie Straps: For joists supported by the lower flange of steel beams, provide 1/8 by 1-1/2 inch steel strap, 2 feet long, except as indicated otherwise.

F. Metal Bridging: Where not indicated or specified otherwise, No. 16 U.S. Standard gage, cadmium-plated or zinc-coated.

2.07 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT

A. Treated Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements of AWPA U1 - Use Category System for wood treatments determined by use categories, expected service conditions, and specific applications. 1. Preservative-Treated Wood: Provide lumber and plywood marked or

stamped by an ALSC-accredited testing agency, certifying level and type of treatment in accordance with AWPA standards.

A. Preservative Treatment: 1. General:

a. Kiln dry lumber/plywood after treatment to maximum moisture content of 19 percent.

b. Treat lumber/plywood in contact with masonry, concrete, or plaster. c. Treat wood sills, sole plates, furring, and sleepers that are less than 18

inches from ground; nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.

d. Treat wood nailers, edge strips, blocking, crickets, curbs, cant, vent strips and other members used in connection with roofing and flashing materials.

e. Treat lumber/plywood in other locations as indicated.


2. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Lumber: AWPA Use Category UC3B, Commodity Specification A (AWPA C2) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention.

3. Preservative Pressure Treatment of Plywood: AWPA Use Category UC2 and UC3B, Commodity Specification F (AWPA C9) using waterborne preservative to 0.25 lb/cu ft (4.0 kg/cu m) retention.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of rough carpentry members specified in other sections.

3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL

A. Fit framing lumber and other rough carpentry, set accurately to the required lines and levels, and secure in place in a rigid manner.

B. Frame members for the passage of pipes, conduits, and ducts.

D. Provide adequate support as appropriate to the application, climate, and modulus of elasticity of the product.

E. Do not cut or bore structural members for the passage of ducts or pipes without approval.

F. Reinforce all members damaged by such cutting or boring by means of specially formed and approved sheet metal or bar steel shapes, or remove and provide new, as approved.

3.03 FRAMING INSTALLATION

A. Set structural members level, plumb, and true to line. Discard pieces with defects that would lower required strength or result in unacceptable appearance of exposed members.

B. Make provisions for temporary construction loads, and provide temporary bracing sufficient to maintain structure in true alignment and safe condition until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

C. Install structural members full length without splices unless otherwise specifically detailed.

D. Comply with member sizes, spacing, and configurations indicated, and fastener size and spacing indicated, but not less than required by applicable codes and AFPA (WFCM).

E. Install horizontal spanning members with crown edge up and not less than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) of bearing at each end.

F. Construct double joist headers at floor and ceiling openings and under wall stud partitions that are parallel to floor joists; use metal joist hangers unless otherwise detailed.

G. Frame wall openings with two or more studs at each jamb; support headers on


cripple studs.

3.04 FASTENERS

A. Nails: 1. Use 8d or larger nails for nailing through 1-inch thick lumber, and for toe

nailing 2 inch thick lumber. 2. Use 16d or larger nails for nailing through 2-inch thick lumber. 3. Nailing Schedule; Using Common Nails:

a. Bridging to joist, toe-nail each end two-8d. b. Ledger strip to beam or girder three-16d under each joint.

B. Bolts: 1. Fit bolt heads and nuts bearing on wood with washers. 2. At concrete and solid masonry, use expansion bolts.

C. Do not anchor to wood plugs or nailing blocks in masonry or concrete. Use metal plugs, inserts or similar fastening.

D. Screws: 1. Where shown, or option to nails. 2. ASTM C 1002; sized to provide penetration into anchorage member per

governing building code or 1 inch, whichever is greater. 3. Spaced same as nails.

3.04 BLOCKING, NAILERS, AND SUPPORTS

A. Install furring, blocking, nailers, and grounds where shown. 1. Use longest lengths practicable. 2. Where a ceiling is to be attached to wood stripping which is nailed to the

underside of the bottom chord of trusses with two-8d common nails at each intersection, stripping shall be not less than 1 x 3 inches spaced not more than 24 inches apart.

B. Provide framing and blocking members as indicated or as required to support finishes, fixtures, specialty items, and trim. 1. Specifically, provide the following non-structural framing and blocking:

a. Wall brackets. b. Handrails.

2. Layers of Blocking or Plates: a. Stagger end joints between upper and lower pieces. b. Nail at ends and not over 24 inches between ends. c. Stagger nails from side to side of wood member over 5 inches in width.

C. In framed assemblies that have concealed spaces, provide solid wood fireblocking as required by applicable local code, to close concealed draft openings between floors and between top story and roof/attic space; other material acceptable to code authorities may be used in lieu of solid wood blocking.

D. In metal stud walls, provide continuous blocking around door and window openings for anchorage of frames, securely attached to stud framing.

E. In walls, provide blocking attached to studs as backing and support for wall-mounted items, unless item can be securely fastened to two or more studs or


other method of support is explicitly indicated.

F. Where ceiling-mounting is indicated, provide blocking and supplementary supports above ceiling, unless other method of support is explicitly indicated.

3.05 ROUGH BUCKS

A. Install rough wood bucks at opening in masonry or concrete where wood frames or trim occur, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Brace and maintain bucks plumb and true until masonry has been built

around them or concrete cast in place. a. Cut rough bucks from 2 inch thick stock, of same width as partitions in

which they occur and of width shown in exterior walls. b. Extend bucks full height of openings and across head of openings;

fasten securely with anchors specified.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Framing Members: 1/4 inch (6 mm) from true position, maximum.

B. Surface Flatness of Floor: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (1 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.

C. Variation from Plane (Other than Floors): 1/4 inch in 10 feet (2 mm/m) maximum, and 1/4 inch in 30 feet (7 mm in 10 m) maximum.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Do not leave any wood, shavings, sawdust, etc. on the ground or buried in fill.

B. Prevent sawdust and wood shavings from entering the storm drainage system.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06400 - 1 of 15 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK & CUSTOM CABINETS

SECTION 06400

ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK AND CUSTOM CABINETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Finish carpentry items, including but not necessarily limited to standing and running trim, wood casings and moldings, shelving, and countertops.

B. Custom built-in cabinets and casework.


A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel sections, including but not limited to posts, plates, etc. for support and bracing of architectural woodwork; bolts, anchors and other metal components not specified elsewhere.

B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood stud framing and plywood sheathing, used in conjunction with wood cabinets, casework, and other architectural woodwork.

C. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical distribution, power and datacomm outlets, lighting, and other related electrical work.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Provide data on wood treatment materials and application instructions. 2. Provide data for attachment hardware and finish hardware.

a. Include evidence that products to be installed in this project meet or exceed BHMA 156.9 Grade 1 requirements.

b. Provide data and instructions for attachment hardware and finish hardware.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete and detailed shop drawings for all custom built-in cabinets and casework, modular cabinets and casework, and architectural woodwork. 1. Indicate plan layouts and elevations, assembly methods, accessory listings,

hardware locations, and schedule of finishes. 2. Indicate materials, component profiles, fastening methods, jointing details,

accessories, to a minimum scale of 1-1/2 inch to 1 ft (1:8). 3. Coordination:

a. Coordinate shop drawings for custom cabinets with shop drawings for the following: 1) Miscellaneous steel posts, plates and other components specified

in Section 05500. 2) Wood stud framing and other rough carpentry specified in Section

06100. b. Shop drawings are to be unified and submitted jointly with product data.


D. Samples: 1. Plastic Laminate:

a. Preliminary Selection Samples: Submit three samples each, at least 2 x 3 inches in size, of complete range of plastic laminate manufacturer's plastic laminate materials, for preliminary selections.

b. Final Selection / Verification Samples: Submit three samples each, 12 x 12 inches in size, of preliminary selections, for final selections, verification and acceptance.

2. Wood Veneer: Submit three samples, at least 12 x 12 inches in size, of wood veneer manufacturer's veneer materials in specified specie and finish, for selection, verification and acceptance.

3. Hardware: Submit three samples of each type of hardware to be provided. 4. All samples will be reviewed by Consultant before fabrication for Project, with

final selection samples used for comparison inspections.


A. Wood Materials: 1. Forest Certification: Provide wood materials produced from wood obtained

from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001.

2. Composite wood and agrifiber products (e.g., particleboard, medium density fiberboard, plywood, wheatboard, strawboard, panel substrates, door cores) used in the interior of the building shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

3. Laminating adhesives used to fabricate on-site and shop-applied composite wood and agrifiber assemblies shall contain no added urea-formaldehyde resins.

B. Perform work in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom grade.

C. Manufacturer/Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in fabricating the products specified in this section with minimum five years of documented experience. 1. Architectural woodwork fabricator/manufacturer shall be certified by the AWI

Quality Certification Program as competent to perform the work specified. a. Certification shall be evidenced through the application of AWI Quality

Certification labels and/or the issuance of an AWI letter of certification for the project.

b. As documentation, manufacturer shall submit neutral Pre-qualification Form found in the Appendix in the AWI (QSI).

2. Contractor's personnel engaged in the work shall be able to demonstrate successful experience with work of comparable extent, complexity, and quality to that shown and specified.

3. Manufacturer shall be a member in good standing of the American Woodwork Institute.

4. Manufacturer shall be a company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION

A. Protect work from moisture damage and exposure to sunlight, humidity, and other conditions detrimental to appearance of wood.

B. Modular cabinets and casework must be delivered, stored, and handled in a manner that will prevent damage and disfigurement.

1.06 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install paneling when temperature or humidity conditions may have a detrimental affect on paneling.


A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

C. Coordinate the work with plumbing rough-in, electrical rough-in, and installation of associated and adjacent components.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS

A. Softwood Lumber: Refer to Section 06100.

B. Hardwood Lumber: Graded in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality; Red Oak species, plain sawn, worked to shapes indicated, maximum moisture content of 6 percent; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

2.02 SHEET MATERIALS

A. Softwood Plywood: Refer to Section 06100.

B. Hardwood Plywood / Veneer Plywood: HPVA HP-1, Grade AA, Type as indicated; Graded in accordance with AWI P-200, Custom quality; Veneer core, type of glue recommended for application; Red Oak face species, plain cut, smooth; with vertical grain, of quality suitable for transparent finish.

C. Hardboard: AHA A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, Class 1 - Tempered, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, smooth two sides (S2S). 1. Comply with AWI P-200, Grade 1.

2.03 LAMINATE MATERIALS

A. Manufacturers: 1. Formica Corp: www.formica.com. 2. Nevamar, International Paper: www.nevamar.com. 3. Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonart.com.

B. Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD 3, HGP; through color; color as selected; textured, low gloss finish.

C. Laminate Backing Sheet: NEMA LD 3, BKL; undecorated plastic laminate; color


white.

D. Sheet Metal: Sheet steel galvanized to 1.2 oz/sq ft (380 gm/sq m); 0.396 inch (1.0 mm) thick.

2.04 FASTENERS AND ANCHORS

A. General: 1. Select material, type, size, and finish required by each substrate for secure

attachment/anchorage. 2. Use only stainless steel fasteners/anchors in the following applications,

except as otherwise indicated: a. When connecting to treated wood. b. In concealed locations. c. In exterior locations.

B. Fasteners: 1. Wood Screws: ANSI B18. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ANSI B18 and ASTM A 307. 3. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. 4. Screws: Select material, type, size and finish required to suit application.

Comply with FS FF-S-111 for applicable requirements. 5. Nails: Select material, type, size, and finish required to suit application.

Comply with FS FF-N-105 for applicable requirements.

C. Anchors: 1. Provide nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside

face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. 2. Provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place

anchors. 3. Furnish anchors and inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry

work for subsequent woodwork anchorage.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Low VOC type recommended by AWI to suit application. 1. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)

content than required by the more stringent of the SCAQMD 1168 and BAAQMD 8-51.

B. Lumber for Shimming, Blocking, Sleepers and Grounds: Refer to Section 06100.

C. Wood Filler: Solvent base, tinted to match surface finish color.

D. Miscellaneous Metal Attachment Accessories: See Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications.

2.06 HARDWARE

A. General: Comply with BHMA A156.9, and as specified herein.

B. Manufacturers: 1. Hinges:

a. Hager Hinge Company: St. Louis, MO 63104. b. Soss Invisible Hinges, by Universal Industrial Products Company: Tel:


800-922-6957; Local Rep: Access International Sales, Tel: 954-796-1683.

c. Stanley Hardware, by The Stanley Works: 480 Myrtle Street; New Britain, CT 06053; Tel: 800-337-4393.

2. Drawer and Door Pulls: a. Colonial Bronze Company: 511 Winsted Road; Torrington, CT 06790;

Tel: 860-489-9233. b. Garcy c. Stanley Hardware, by The Stanley Works: 480 Myrtle Street; New

Britain, CT 06053; Tel: 800-337-4393. 3. Catches:

a. Hager Hinge Company: St. Louis, MO 63104. b. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company: 2700 Oak Industrial Drive

NE; Grand Rapids, MI 49505; Tel: 800-253-1561. c. Stanley Hardware, by The Stanley Works: 480 Myrtle Street; New

Britain, CT 06053; Tel: 800-337-4393. 4. Drawer Slides:

a. Accuride International Inc.: 12311 Shoemaker Avenue; Santa Fe Springs, CA 90670; Tel: 562-903-0200.

b. Grant Slides & Track c. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company: 2700 Oak Industrial Drive

NE; Grand Rapids, MI 49505; Tel: 800-253-1561. 5. Wood Gate Hinges:

a. Soss Invisible Hinges, by Universal Industrial Products Company: Tel: 800-922-6957; Local Rep: Access International Sales, Tel: 954-796-1683.

6. Shelf Hardware: a. Grant Slides & Track b. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company: 2700 Oak Industrial Drive

NE; Grand Rapids, MI 49505; Tel: 800-253-1561. c. Stanley Hardware, by The Stanley Works: 480 Myrtle Street; New

Britain, CT 06053; Tel: 800-337-4393. 7. Assembly Fasteners:

a. Knape and Vogt Manufacturing Company: 2700 Oak Industrial Drive NE; Grand Rapids, MI 49505; Tel: 800-253-1561.

8. Concealed Hinges for Wood Casework: a. Blum, by Julius Blum, Inc.: 7733 Old Plank Road; Stanley, NC 28164;

Tel. 800-438-6788. b. Grass America, Inc.: P.O. Box 1019; 1202 Hwy 66 South; Kernersville,

NC 27284; Tel: 800-334-3512. c. Salice America, Inc.: 2123 Crown Centre Drive; Charlotte, NC 28227;

Tel. 800-222-9652. d. Soss Invisible Hinges, by Universal Industrial Products Company: Tel:

800-922-6957; Local Rep: Access International Sales, Tel: 954-796-1683.

9. Countertop Support Brackets: a. Rakks Counter Support Brackets, by Ragine Corporation: Millis,

Massachusetts 02054; Tel: 800-826-6006.


C. Hinges: 1. Doors Under 4 Feet High: Provide one pair per leaf. 2. Doors Over 4 Feet High: Provide 1-1/2 pair per leaf. 3. Overlay Doors: Provide pivot type hinges. 4. Product:

a. Horizontal Stiles: Hager No. 1043-US26D, or equal. b. Vertical Stiles: Hager No. 1044-US26D, or equal.

D. Drawer and Door Pulls: Bent rod type; 4 inches (100 mm) centers. 1. Drawers Under 24 Inches Wide: Provide 1 pull per drawer. 2. Drawers Over 24 Inches Wide: Provide 2 pulls per drawer. 3. Doors: Provide 1 pull per door leaf. 4. Product: Colonial Bronze No. 753-US28, or equal.

E. Catches: Magnetic type. 1. Product: Hager No. 1438, or equal.

F. Drawer Slides: 1. Slides for Box Drawers, with Full Travel: Medium duty slides with steel ball

bearings, lever disconnects, hold-in detents, and 0.50 inch side space. a. Load Rating (Capacity): 100 lbs / pair. b. Product: Accuride Model 3832, or equal.

2. Slides for Box Drawers, with 3/4 Travel: Light duty slides with steel ball bearings, lever disconnects, hold-in and hold-out detents, and 0.50 inch side space. a. Load Rating (Capacity): 75 lbs / pair. b. Product: Accuride Model 2132, or equal.

3. Slides for File Drawers, with Full Travel: Heavy duty slides with steel ball bearings, rail disconnects, hold-in detents, and 0.50 inch side space. a. Load Rating (Capacity): 150 lbs / pair. b. Product: Accuride Model 4032, or equal.

4. Keyboard Drawers, with 3/4 Extension: Keyboard system with fully concealed slides, removable palm rest, built-in cable management, mounting brackets with adjustable height feature. a. Product: Accuride Model CBERGO-Tray 200, or equal.

G. Drawer Stops: Manufacturer's standard type.

H. Wood Gate Hinges: Heavy-duty type. 1. Provide 3 hinges per leaf. 2. Product: Soss Model 220 Invisible Hinge with Invisible Closer, or equal;

finish US26D.

I. Cabinet Door and Drawer Locks: Provide one lock for each cabinet drawer and door, where locks are indicated. 1. Product: Garcy No. 413-US26D, or equal. 2. Keying: Provide two keys for each lock; key each lock differently, or key

each group of locks differently as directed; master key system and provide two master keys.

J. Adjustable Shelf Hardware: 1. General:


a. Provide adjustable shelves for cabinets with the following hardware, to provide shelf adjustment on 1/2 inch centers, except where drawings indicate fixed shelving.

b. Provide cantilever type shelf standards and cantilever brackets where indicated. For shelves longer than 48 inches, support at intermediate points at not more than 48 inches spacing by cantilever shelf standards and cantilever brackets.

2. Shelf End Standards: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 255AL, or equal.

3. Shelf Support Clips: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 256AL, or equal.

4. Shelf Standards for Cantilever Brackets: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 80A, or equal.

5. Cantilever Shelf Brackets: a. Product: Knape and Vogt No. 180A, or equal.

K. Concealed Hinges for Wood Casework: Concealed, zinc die-cast, screw-on, self-closing type; degree of opening as selected. 1. Provide 1-1/2 pair per leaf. 2. Product:

a. For door thickness 3/4 inch to 1-1/32 inches: Salice Series 200, or equal.

b. For door thickness up to 1-1/2 inches, and other special applications: Salice Series F, or equal.

L. Countertop Support Brackets: Provide heavy-gage welded aluminum low-profile support brackets where indicated on Drawings. Brackets shall conform to the following: 1. Material: 6063 T-6 "T"-shaped extruded aluminum. 2. Construction: Continuous MIG-welded. 3. Dimensions:

a. Height: 18 inches (450 mm). b. Length: 20 inches (500 mm). c. Width: 2 inches (50 mm). d. Depth: 2 inches (50 mm). e. Gage: 0.25 inch

4. Capacity: 450 lbs / bracket. 5. Finish: Mill aluminum. 6. Mounting Configuration / Application: Bracket shall be configured for flush

mount installation; vertical leg of bracket shall mount directly to side of stud within stud-framed partition, and shall be concealed by sheathing.

7. Product: Rakks Counter Support Bracket Model EH-1818-FM by Ragine Corporation, or equal.

M. Fasteners: 1. Assembly Fasteners:

a. Product: Knape and Vogt Type 516 Tite-Joint, or equal. 2. Screws: ASME B18.6.1, Group, Type and Class as applicable. 3. Anchoring Devices: FS FF-S-325, Group, Type and Class as applicable. 4. Toggle Bolts: FS FF-B-588, Type I, Class A, Style 2.


5. Nuts: ASTM A 594, corrosion-resistant steel. 6. Bolts: ASTM A 325, heavy, hexagon head bolts, corrosion-resistant steel.

N. Plastic Grommets: Provide quantity and sizes as required for miscellaneous cut-out openings; color as selected by Consultant.

O. Paper Lots: Provide molded plastic, paper lot liner with 1/4 inch lip; color as selected by Consultant.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate work of this Section in conformance with AWI P-200, Custom

Grade quality. a. Architectural Cabinets and Casework:

1) Thicknesses of material shall be not less than minimums indicated in AWI P-200, Section 400-G-8 standards.

2) Thickness of shelving material shall be not less than minimums indicated in AWI P-200, Section 400-G-8 standards for type of material used. (a) All shelves in each cabinet unit shall be of same thickness,

based on longest span. 3) Casework dimensions as indicated on drawings, or if not indicated

as per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-9 standards for "Casework Standard Dimensions". (a) Comply with height and clearance requirements of ATBCB

ADAAG, FBC-BUILDING CHAPTER 11, and other applicable accessibility requirements.

(b) Where there is a discrepancy between dimensions indicated on drawings and referenced AWI standards, request direction from Consultant.

4) Fabricate cabinets per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-10 standards for "Flush Overlay Construction"; provide optional blocking for pivot hinges. (a) HPDL cabinets and casework to be finished per AWI P-200,

Section 400C-series standards. (b) Direction and matching of pattern/grain of Type 2 HPDL finish

shall be per AWI P-200, Section 400-B-S-1 for Custom Grade; door and drawer face matching per "door set match" pattern.

5) Fabricate and install cabinet hardware per AWI P-200, Section 400-G-14 standards.

6) Where plastic laminate finish is indicated for cabinets, direction and matching of pattern/grain shall be per AWI P-200, Section 400-B-S-1 for Custom Grade; door and drawer face matching per "door set match" pattern.

2. Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for moisture content of lumber in relation to relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation areas

3. Field Dimensions: Woodwork manufacturer to be responsible for details and dimensions not controlled by job conditions and to show on shop drawings all required field measurements beyond his control. Contractor and


woodwork manufacturer to cooperate as necessary to establish and maintain these field dimensions.

4. Complete fabrication processes, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, prior to shipment to project site, to maximum extent possible. Dissemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation, permitting passage through building openings.

5. Fit exposed sheet material edges with matching veneer edging. Use one piece for full length only.

6. Shop-prepare and identify paneling sheets and other wood components for sequenced grain matching during site erection.

7. Factory-cut openings to maximum extent possible, to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. a. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample

allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. b. Smooth edges of cutouts and other openings, where located in

countertops. 8. Apply plastic laminate finish in full, uninterrupted sheets consistent with

manufactured sizes. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises.

9. Coordinate with electrical requirements and provide raceways, with complete access panels for electrical.

B. Standing and Running Trim: 1. AWI P-200, Section 300, Custom grade; solid hardwood lumber stock. 2. Base:

a. Profile: BAS-1034 (per AWI P-200, Section 300). b. Dimensions:

1) Height: 4.5 inches. 2) Thickness: 3/4 inch.

3. Chair Rail: a. Profile: CHR-6015 (per AWI P-200, Section 300). b. Dimensions:

1) Height: 3-1/8 inches. 2) Thickness: 3/4 inch.

C. Custom Built-in Architectural Cabinets and Casework: 1. Wood Finish Cabinets and Casework:

a. AWI P-200, Section 400A, Custom grade. b. Use solid lumber stock and veneer-faced plywood where indicated on

drawings. c. Exposed Surfaces: AWI, Grade AA, Red Oak specie, quarter-sliced,

sequenced. 1) Run and match grain vertically for drawer fronts, doors and fixed

panels, per specified grade and standard. 2) Slip match veneer panels.

d. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Match specie and cut indicated for exposed surfaces.

2. Plastic Laminate (HPDL) Cabinets and Casework:


a. AWI P-200, Section 400B, Custom grade. b. Core: Particleboard or plywood, per specified grade and standard. c. All interior and exterior surfaces shall be finished with plastic laminate

(HPDL). d. Plastic Laminate Color Schedule: To be selected by Consultant, from

manufacturer's complete range of colors, textures, and sheens. 3. Plastic Laminate Countertops, Backsplashes and Endsplashes:

a. AWI P-200, Section 400C, Custom grade for quality of fabrication. b. Core: 3/4 inch thick plywood with 3/4 inch x 2-1/2 inch frame attached to

bottom surface. c. Finish: Plastic laminate with backer sheet.

4. Cabinet Hardware and Accessory Materials: a. Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials to comply with

requirements indicated for design, material, finish, and manufacturer. b. Hinges: Concealed, self-closing. c. Drawer Slides: Side-mounted, self-closing.

1) Capacity (per pair): (a) Box Drawers, 3/4 Travel: 75 lbs. (b) Box Drawers, Full Travel: 100 lbs (c) File Drawers, Full Travel: 150 lbs.

d. Pulls: Aluminum wire type. e. Locks: Custom grade, master key capabilities. f. Exposed Finishes: Satin chrome.

D. Closet and Utility Shelving: 1. AWI P-200, Section 600 series, Custom grade. 2. Where utility shelving in closets is indicated, provide not less than 3/4 inch

thick clear fir shelving of widths indicated, with hardwood edges; refer to minimum thicknesses specified in AWI P-200, Section G-600 Shelf Deflection standards for type of material used and span.

3. Where shelving is wider than 14 inches nominal width, provide 3/4 inch clear fir plywood with hardwood exposed edges.

4. Provide appropriate standards with hardwood exposed edges. 5. Provide appropriate standards, clips, and brackets where adjustable shelving

is indicated, and suitable cleats for fixed shelving. 6. Provide not less than one 12 inch nominal width shelf for each closet, unless

otherwise indicated. Closet shelf cleats to be not less than 1 inch by 4 inches wood, to receive hanging rods.

2.08 WOOD TREATMENT

A. Wood Preservative by Pressure Treatment (PT Type): AWPA Treatment C2 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage.

B. Redry wood after pressure treatment to maximum 15 percent moisture content.

2.09 SHOP FINISHING

A. Factory Finishing: To the greatest extent possible, finish work of this Section at factory. Defer only final touch-up, cleaning, and polishing until after installation.

B. Quality Standard:


1. Cabinets and Casework (except cabinets and casework with HPDL finish), Standing and Running Trim, and Architectural Woodwork: Factory-applied transparent finish; comply with AWI P-200, Section 1500 standards for Custom Grade.

2. Cabinets and Casework with High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL) Finish: Comply with AWI P-200, Section 400B-S-1 standards for Custom Grade.

C. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of architectural woodwork.

D. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.

E. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations.

F. Back prime woodwork items to be field finished, prior to installation.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Openings for Cabinetwork: Supplier to make request to Contractor, for temporary openings in walls or windows which may be required for passing large sections of cabinetwork into building and spaces where work will be installed. This applies only to such items that cannot be accommodated through permanent openings.

B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing.

C. Condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas before installing.

D. Deliver concrete inserts and similar anchoring devices to be built into substrates well in advance of time substrates are to be built.

E. Prior to installing work of this Section, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including back priming and removal of packing.

F. Verify mechanical, electrical, and building items affecting work of this section are placed and ready to receive this work.

G. See Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry, for installation of recessed wood blocking.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install work in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1700, Custom quality. 2. Verify dimensions before proceeding and obtain measurements at site for

work required to be accurately fitted to other construction. 3. Coordinate work with other trades affected by this installation.

a. Moving Items: If it is necessary for other trades to move cabinetwork to make final connections, cabinetwork supplier shall assist such trades in moving such cabinetwork and shall be on the job to carefully level and


adjust cabinetwork as last connections are made. 4. Give particular attention to work of supporting and attachment items, so as

not to delay progress. 5. Discard materials which are unsound, warped, bowed, twisted, improperly

treated, too small to fabricate work with minimum joints, or defective fabrication with respect to surface, size, profile, or pattern.

6. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level. 7. Set and secure materials and components in place, plumb and level.

a. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates.

b. Secure to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.

c. Except where prefinished matching fastener heads are required, use fine finishing nails for exposed nailing, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish where transparent finish is indicated.

d. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components.

e. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and countertops.

f. Secure cabinet bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. g. Countersink anchorage devices at exposed locations. Conceal with

solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces.

h. Install prefinished paneling with nails at 16 inch (400 mm) on center, except as otherwise indicated; where indicated, install paneling with beveled wood rails.

8. Coordinate the installation of firestopping behind paneling. 9. Carefully scribe work abutting other components, with maximum gaps of

1/32 inch (1 mm). Do not use additional overlay trim to conceal larger gaps. a. Refinish cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.

10. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and accepted shop drawings.

B. Standing and Running Trim: 1. Set wood trim straight, plumb or level, in perfect alignment, joints closely

fitted and drawn tight against finished surfaces. 2. Install with minimum joints using full length pieces.

a. Door and window trim to be in single lengths. b. Chair rails, base and molding running trim to be in long commercial

lengths, joined only where solid fastenings can be made, and not splicing pieces shorter than three feet.

3. Stagger joints in adjacent and related members. 4. Cope at returns and miter at corners. 5. Use scarf joints for end-to-end joints. 6. Apply flat grain lumber with back side exposed. 7. Secure to grounds, stripping, and blocking with concealed and blind nails

using fine finishing nails. a. Space nails at 16 inches on center. b. Secure with glue and screws where required.


c. For painted work, set nails for putty stopping. d. For transparent work, set fasteners to receive wood plugs; glue

matching wood plugs over fastener heads.

C. Cabinets and Casework: 1. General:

a. Install without distortion for proper opening and accurate alignment of doors and drawers.

b. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers. c. Anchor tops to base units and other support systems. d. Erect straight, level and plumb to tolerances, and securely anchor in

place. e. Scribe and closely fit to adjacent work. f. Cut and fit around pipes, ducts, and other items.

2. Base Cabinets: a. Set base cabinets in line and plumbed and leveled by means of wood

shims, or by levelers provided in each cabinet unit. b. Secure base units together with concealed galvanized steel bolts,

washers and nuts. c. Secure base cabinets to masonry walls and to concrete floors at

concealed locations, near each end, with 1/4 inch diameter zinc-plated anchors or toggles.

d. Secure base cabinets to wood blocking in metal stud partitions and furred areas at concealed locations near each end, with 1/4 inch diameter zinc-plated screws.

3. Cabinet Tops: a. Field cut and scribe cabinet tops and splashes as required to fit job

conditions. Plastic laminate tops to be placed on base cabinets, carefully fitting all field joints.

b. Draw countertop and backsplash joints tight with concealed "tite-joint" type fasteners.

c. Plastic laminate countertop, backsplash and endsplash field joints to be sealed watertight on assembly with mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Stainless steel sinks to be set in mildew-resistant silicone sealant. Secure tops to base cabinets with galvanized screws from inside cabinets.

d. Cabinet tops not supported on base cabinets to be secured to walls at side and rear with wood cleats. Support and secure countertops at intermediate points with metal brackets and zinc-plated screws.

4. Wall Cabinets: a. Install wall cabinets with sheet metal screw anchors into metal studs or

furring spaced approximately 16 inches on center, with not less than 4 screws per unit, two (minimum) anchors to be installed in top mounting rail and two (minimum) in bottom rail. Carefully align wall units, level and firmly anchor to wood blocking between supporting metal studs in partitions and to furring in furred walls.

b. Secure wall cabinets to masonry walls with sheet metal screws or machine screws in concrete expansion anchors or toggles.

c. Scribe fillers where required, fit and install, to produce a neat closure


between building walls and cabinet units. 5. Adjustable Shelving:

a. Install wood and plastic laminate finished wood shelving where indicated in cabinetwork, supported by specified end standards and clips.

b. For shelves longer than 48 inches, support at intermediate points at not over 48 inches spacing by specified cantilever shelf standards and cantilever brackets.

c. Erect shelf standards plumb, and secure with zinc-plated steel screws. 6. Fixed Shelving:

a. Install wood and plastic laminate shelving where indicated in cabinetwork.

b. Fixed shelving in open and closed cabinets to be factory-built into cabinets.

D. Closet and Utility Shelving: 1. Adjustable Shelving:

a. Install wood and plastic laminate finished wood shelving where indicated in closets, supported by specified end standards and clips.

b. For shelves longer than 48 inches, support at intermediate points at not over 48 inches spacing by specified cantilever shelf standards and cantilever brackets.

c. Erect shelf standards plumb, and secure with zinc-plated steel screws. d. At masonry walls, provide suitable concrete expansion anchors.

2. Fixed Shelving: a. Install wood and plastic laminate shelving where indicated in closets. b. Fixed wood shelving in closets to be supported on not less than 1 inch

by 4 inches continuous wood cleats at ends and at back. Install metal clothes hanger rods at ends and at back; rods to be attached to wood cleats where indicated.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/16 inch (1.5 mm).

B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch (0.7 mm).

C. Maximum Offset in Surface Alignment: 1/16 inch.

D. Maximum Offset in Revealed Adjoining Surface: 1/8 inch.

E. Plumb and Level: 1/8 inch in 8 ft., maximum.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Repair damaged work or replace with new to eliminate defects.

B. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

C. Clean, lubricate and adjust hardware.

D. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

E. Touch-up factory applied finishes, to restore finish on joints and damaged or soiled areas. Completed work shall have uniform finish throughout.


3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean all surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Provide protection and maintain installed condition until Substantial Completion.

C. Remove all protective coatings at time of Final Acceptance.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 06620 - 1 of 5 SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

SECTION 06620

SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Solid surfacing fascia, bullnose edging, counter top and related trim components associated with custom cabinets.

B. Solid surfacing window sills.



C. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork and Custom Cabinets.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: 1. Data on specified component products, physical characteristics, fabrication

characteristics, and connection requirements. a. Indicate compliance with specified performance requirements.

2. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 3. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 4. Specimen warranty. 5. Test Reports: Chemical resistance testing, showing compliance with

specified requirements. 6. Installation Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions and

recommendations.

C. Shop Drawings: Complete details of materials and installation. 1. Indicate dimensions, thickness, required clearances, tolerances, materials,

colors, finishes, fabrication details, field jointing, adjacent construction, methods of support, integration of cabinetry components, and anchorages.

2. Combine with shop drawings of cabinets and casework specified in other sections.

D. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, color chips

representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 2. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, minimum size 6

inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and pattern.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation of opening required, rough-in sizes; tolerances for item placement, temporary bracing of components.

F. Maintenance Data: Indicate list of approved cleaning materials and procedures required; list of substances that are harmful to the component materials.


G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of the products specified in this section, and approved by manufacturer.


A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.

B. Store and dispose of solvent-based materials, and materials used with solvent-based materials, in accordance with requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.



B. Sequence Work to permit installation of adjacent affected construction, utility rough-ins. Coordinate the installation of vanity countertops with plumbing installation, toilet partition erection and other related work.

C. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.

1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide warranty against defects in materials,

fabrication and installation, including but not limited to cracking (including thermal cracking), warping, blistering, loss of color, or fading. 1. Manufacturer’s warranty shall provide for replacement or repair of material

and labor. 2. Warranty Duration: 10 years.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 SOLID SURFACING MATERIALS

A. Description: Cast, 100 percent acrylic solid surfacing material composed of acrylic polymer, mineral fillers, and pigments.

B. Manufacturer: a. Basis of Design:

1) Formica: http://www.formica.com/publish/site/na/us/en/index.html; Product: Solid Surfacing Material.

b. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent products by one of the following manufacturers may be used, subject to approval by Consultant. 1) Corian Surfaces, by The DuPont Company, E.I. DuPont de Nemours

and Company, Inc. 2) Swanstone Reinforced Solid Surface Products, by The Swan

Corporation.


3) Wilsonart International, Inc: www.wilsonartsolidsurface.com; Product: Gibraltar Solid Surface Sheet.

c. Substitutions: See General Conditions and Section 01600 - Material and Equipment, for product options and substitution procedures.

C. Performance Requirements: 1. Flammability (ASTM E 84): Class I or A, and as follows:

a. Flame Spread: 25, maximum. b. Smoke Developed: 30, maximum.

2. Indentation Hardness, Barcol (ASTM D 2583): 60 to 63. 3. Tensile Modulus (ASTM D 638): 1045 kpsi, minimum. 4. Flexural Modulus (ASTM D 790): 1221 kpsi, minimum. 5. Impact Resistance, Ball Drop (NEMA LD 3): 113.5 inches, minimum. 6. Liquid Absorption (ASTM D 570):

a. Weight in 2 hrs: 0.04 percent, maximum. b. Weight in 24 hrs: 0.15 percent, maximum.

7. Specific Gravity (ASTM D 792): 1.6709 to 1.8161. 8. Fungus Resistance (ASTM G 21): Pass. 9. Bacterial Resistance (ASTM G 22): Pass. 10. Sanitation (NSF 51): "Food Contact" approval.

D. Material Patterns and Colors: Pattern and color shall occur, and shall be consistent in appearance, throughout the entire depth (thickness) of the solid surfacing material. 1. Color/Pattern: To be selected by Consultant.

E. Surface Finish: Exposed finished surfaces and edges shall have a uniform semi-gloss finish; gloss rating of 25-50.

2.02 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. General:

1. Accessory products and materials shall be manufactured by the solid surfacing manufacturer or shall be products approved by the solid surfacing manufacturer for use with the solid surfacing materials being specified.

B. Adhesives and Sealants: 1. General:

a. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the SCAQMD 1168 and BAAQMD 8-51.

2. Seam Adhesive: For use when solid surfacing materials are being bonded together. a. Seam adhesive shall be a two-part adhesive kit to create permanent,

inconspicuous, non-porous, hard seams and joints by chemical bond between solid surfacing materials and components to create a monolithic appearance of the fabrication.

b. Color: 1) At locations where solid-colored, solid surfacing materials are being

bonded together, adhesive shall be color-matched to the surfaces being bonded.

2) At solid surfacing materials are being bonded together, adhesive shall be clear or color matched where particulate patterned, per


Consultant’s direction. 3. Panel Adhesive: For use in bonding solid surfacing components to adjacent

and underlying substrates. a. Panel adhesive shall be neoprene-based panel adhesive meeting TCNA

(HB), Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) listed. 4. Joint Sealer: For use in sealing joints between solid surfacing components

and other adjacent surfaces such as walls, floors, ceiling, and plumbing fixtures. a. Sealant Type I-2 (Bathtub/Tile Sealant), as specified in Section 07900. b. Color: White, except as otherwise indicated.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: 1. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and

shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's printed instructions and technical bulletins.

2. Form joints between components using manufacturer's standard joint adhesive; joints shall be inconspicuous in appearance and without voids. Reinforce with strip of solid surfacing material, at least 2 inches wide.

3. Provide factory cutouts for electrical fittings and accessories as indicated in drawings.

4. Rout and finish edges, cutouts, radii and contours to template. Smooth edges. Repair or reject defective and inaccurate work.

5. Radius exterior component corners and edges, as indicated on drawings. Rout and finish other component edges with clean, sharp returns.

B. Sills: 1. Join lengths of units using best method recommended by manufacturer. 2. Fabricate window sills to overhang edge of wall opening 3/4 inch (18 mm)

except where top butts against window frame or wall. 3. Prepare all cutouts accurately to size; replace tops having improperly

dimensioned or unnecessary cutouts or fixture holes.

2.04 FINISH

A. Provide surfaces with a uniform finish.

B. Provide matte finish, except where semi-gloss finish is indicated on drawings. 1. Matte: Gloss range of 5-20. 2. Semi-gloss: Gloss range of 20-50.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Provide anchoring devices for installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install components in accordance with shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions.


B. Align work plumb, level and rigid, and scribed to adjacent finishes.

C. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work. Reinforce joints as recommended by manufacturer.

D. Provide countertops, backsplashes, endsplashes, fascias and other components as indicated on drawings. Adhere to substrate using manufacturer's standard color-matched silicone sealant.

E. Rigidly anchor to substrate to prevent misalignment.

F. Keep components clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Keep clean until date of Substantial completion. Replace stained and damaged components.

G. Securely attach window sills to blocking using full bed of compatible construction adhesive. Make flat surfaces level; shim where required.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Clean and polish fabrication surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.04 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect surfaces from damage until date of Substantial Completion. Repair work or replace damaged work which cannot be repaired to Project Manager's satisfaction.

B. Do not permit construction near unprotected surfaces.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07140 - 1 of 4 FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

SECTION 07140

FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fluid-applied membrane waterproofing.

B. Cant strips and other accessories.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. General: 1. For submittal procedures, refer to Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions

and Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions. 2. Submittals for this section are to be coordinated with submittals required in

Section 09302.

B. Product Data: Provide data for waterproofing membrane, surface primer/sealer, patching and leveling compound, and accessories. 1. Include material description, physical properties, and application details for

system and components. 2. Include copies of current Product Approval NOA.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate special joint or termination conditions and conditions of interface with other materials.

D. Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention, and acceptable installation temperatures.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacture of fluid-applied waterproofing membranes with three years experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installation of fluid-applied waterproofing approved by waterproofing manufacturer. 1. All work shall be performed by a contractor licensed to do roofing/

waterproofing. 2. Application shall be performed solely by factory-trained and approved

applicators, and only with applicator’s equipment approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. The waterproofing system shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B Section 1519.16. 1. The waterproofing system must possess a current and valid Product

Approval.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures above 50 degrees F for 24 hours before and


during application and until cured. 1. Waterproofing systems shall not be installed if the ambient or surface

temperature is below 50 degrees F.

B. Do not apply waterproofing to wet concrete surfaces.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall correct defective Work within a five year period after effective date of Substantial Completion; remove and replace materials concealing waterproofing at no cost to City.

B. Manufacturer’s Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that waterproofing will not fail to resist penetration of water. 1. Manufacturer agrees to make, or cause to be made at its own expense,

repairs necessary to correct leaks resulting from ordinary wear and tear and the effects thereof and improper workmanship by the installer.

2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years, commencing on the effective date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Synthetic Rubber Waterproofing Membrane and Surface Primer/Sealer: 1. General:

a. Membrane system must be approved by Drainage Mat and Thick Mortar Bed manufacturer for use as primary waterproofing membrane in its Plaza and Deck System and Balcony Deck System. Refer to Section 09302 for additional information.

2. Basis of Design: Sealoflex Waterproofing Systems, Inc.; 2516 Oscar Johnson Dr.; Charleston, SC 29405; Tel. 800-770-6466.

3. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent systems by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration in accordance with requirements for substitutions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Synthetic Rubber Waterproofing Membrane: Three-stage, fabric-reinforced, flexible, synthetic-rubber coating, liquid-applied in successive stages to form a continuous, seamless, watertight membrane.

1. Components: a. Base and Saturation Liquid Coat: Solvent-borne, rubber-based, single

component coating, meeting the requirements specified in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 143 and Product Approval NOA.

b. Top Waterproofing Coating: Solvent-borne, rubber-based, single component coating with enhanced UV and Ozone resistance characteristics, meeting the requirements specified in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 143 and Product Approval NOA.

c. Fabric: Minimum 3.3 oz. per square yard, non-woven, stitch-bonded and heat-set polyester reinforcing fabric, designed for use in fluid-applied waterproofing system.


2. Performance Requirements (cured membrane): In addition to requirements specified in FBC-TPHVHZ TAS 143, cured membrane shall meet the following: a. Tensile Strength (ASTM D 412): Minimum 3100 PSI. b. Elongation (ASTM D 412): Minimum 60 percent. c. Dimensional Stability (ASTM D 1204): Less than 0.44 percent change. d. Weathering (ASTM G 26): No effect on physical properties after 3600

hrs. e. Moisture Vapor (ASTM E 96): 6.3 x 10-3 grains/SF at 45 mils DFT. f. Wind Uplift (FM 4470): Shall meet FM Class 1-690 over concrete. g. Fire Rating (ASTM E 108): Class A.

3. Acceptable Product: Sealoflex CT System, conforming to requirements of Miami-Dade Product Approval NOA No. 10-0608.04 System Type 2 or Type 3 (as applicable), or equal.

B. Surface Primer/Sealer: Deep-penetrating, low-viscosity, 100-percent solids, two-component, epoxy sealer; designed to provide excellent adhesion to suitably prepared concrete substrates; compatible with membrane materials. 1. Product: Dampseal 101 by Sealoflex, or equal:

C. Patching and Leveling Compound: Latex-portland mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 and designed for screeds, patching and leveling beds, and scratch/plaster coats; featheredge to 3 inch thickness. 1. Performance Requirements (28 days):

a. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109): Minimum 4,000 PSI. b. Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348): Minimum 1,200 PSI. c. Water Absorption (ANSI A118.6): Maximum 5 percent. d. TCNA Service Rating (ASTM C 627): Extra Heavy.

2. Product: As recommended by membrane manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify substrate surfaces are free of dampness, loose particles, cracks, pits, projections, penetrations, or foreign matter detrimental to adhesion or application of waterproofing system.

C. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth, free of honeycomb or pitting, and not detrimental to full contact bond of waterproofing materials.

D. Verify that items that penetrate surfaces to receive waterproofing are securely installed.

E. Verify that concrete substrate is dry in accordance with waterproofing manufacturer’s recommended level. 1. Test concrete substrate in accordance with ASTM D 4263.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces not designated to receive waterproofing.

B. Clean and prepare surfaces to receive waterproofing in accordance with


manufacturer's instructions. Vacuum substrate clean.

C. Do not apply waterproofing to surfaces unacceptable to manufacturer.

D. Seal cracks and joints with sealant using methods recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Apply waterproofing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and accepted shop drawings, and coordinate with requirements for installation of exterior tile surfacing; refer to Section 09302 for additional requirements.

B. Prime the entire surface per manufacturer’s recommendation. 1. Apply primer or surface conditioner at a rate recommended by manufacturer. 2. Protect conditioner from rain until dry.

C. Apply base coat, fabric, and saturation coat centrally over junctions between horizontal and vertical surfaces as flashing.

D. Extend membrane up intersecting surfaces at membrane perimeter minimum 6 inches (150 mm) above horizontal surface for first ply and 3 inches (75 mm) at subsequent plies laid in shingle fashion. Ensure that overlaps are fully saturated.

E. Apply extra thickness of waterproofing material at corners, intersections, and angles.

F. Extend waterproofing material into drain clamp flange, apply adequate coating of liquid membrane to assure clamp ring seal. Coordinate with drain installation in Section 15420.

G. Seal membrane and flashings to adjoining surfaces. Install termination bar at all edges. Install counterflashing over all exposed edges.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Flood Testing: The waterproofing system shall be flood tested in accordance with ASTM D 5957 and FBC-B Section 1519.16. 1. The flood test shall take place after installation of the waterproofing

membrane and prior to the installation of any above membrane components, wearing surface or overburden.

2. An approved testing lab shall provide written report confirming that the flood test was performed along with the results, prior to final inspection by the building official. a. Contractor shall provide copies of the written report to the building

official, Consultant, and Project Manager.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect finished waterproofing from weather until cured.

B. Do not permit traffic over unprotected or uncovered membrane.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07212 - 1 of 9 BUILDING INSULATION

SECTION 07212

BUILDING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Thermal batt insulation. 1. Board insulation at exterior wall behind gypsum wallboard wall finish. 2. Batt insulation for filling perimeter window and door shim spaces and

crevices in exterior wall and roof. 3. Batt insulation installed as part of roof/ceiling/attic system.

B. Sound attenuation blankets, installed at interior stud-framed partitions.

C. Reflective insulation, installed at exterior wall behind gypsum wallboard wall finish.



B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

C. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit properly identified manufacturer's product data for each type of

insulation, fasteners, and accessories to be used. a. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and product

limitations. 2. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include information on special

environmental conditions required for installation and installation techniques. 3. Evaluation Reports: Submit International Code Council (ICC) Evaluation

Service reports including trade name, application, and thermal protection requirements of insulation used.


A. General: 1. Insulating materials, including facings such as vapor retarders and vapor-

permeable membranes, similar coverings, and all layers of single and multi-layer reflective foil insulations, shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 719 and 2603.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics (ASTM E 84): a. Thermal Batt Insulation and Reflective Insulation:

1) Flame Spread: 25 or less.


2) Smoke Development: 450 or less.

B. Foam Plastic Insulation: 1. Labeling and Identification: Packages and containers of foam plastic

insulation and foam plastic insulation components delivered to the job site shall bear the label of an approved agency showing the manufacturer’s name, the product listing, product identification and information sufficient to determine that the end use will comply with the code requirements.

2. Surface-burning Characteristics: Unless otherwise indicated in the governing building code, foam plastic insulation shall have a flame spread index of not more than 75 and a smoke-developed index of not more than 450 where tested in the maximum thickness intended for use in accordance with ASTM E 84.

3. Fire-resistance-rated Walls: Where the wall is required to have a fire-resistance rating, data based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 119 shall be provided to substantiate that the fire-resistance rating is maintained.

4. Thermal Barrier: Foam plastic insulation shall be separated from the building interior by a thermal barrier meeting the provisions of FBC-B SECTION 2603.4, unless special approval is obtained on the basis of FBC-B SECTION 2603.8.

5. Plenums: Foam plastic insulation shall not be used as interior wall or ceiling finish in plenums, except as permitted in FBC-B SECTION 2604 or when protected by a thermal barrier in accordance with FBC-B SECTION 2603.4.

C. Materials used shall contain no formaldehyde.


A. Delivery: Deliver materials to site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers and packaging, with labels clearly identifying material name and manufacturer.

B. Storage: Store materials in a clean, dry area indoors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Handling: Protect materials during handling and installation to prevent damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. The Celotex Corporation (4010 Boy Scout Blvd; Tampa, FL 33607; Tel. 813-873-1700; www.celotex.com).

B. CertainTeed Corporation (P.O. Box 860; 750 East Swedesford Road; Valley Forge, PA 19482; Tel. 610-341-7000).

C. Dow Chemical Company (1881 West Oak Parkway; Marietta, Georgia 30062; Tel. 770-428-2684).

D. Environmentally Safe Products, Inc. (New Oxford, PA; Tel. 800-289-5693).

E. Fi-Foil Company, Inc. (P.O. Box 800; Auburndale, FL 33823; Tel. 800-448-3401 or 863-965-1846; www.fifoil.com).


F. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp. (Tel. 800-GET-PINK).

G. Thermal-Shield (Tel. 800-875-7750).

H. U.S. Gypsum Corporation. (550 West Adams Street; Chicago, IL 60661; Tel. 312-436-4000).

2.02 BOARD INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Extruded Polystyrene Wall Insulation: 1. Physical Data:

a. Thermal Resistance, "R" Value (ASTM C 518): 5.0 per inch minimum at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean.

b. Size: 48 inches wide x 96 inches long. c. Board Thickness: As indicated on drawings; if not indicated, provide 1-

1/2 inches (37.5 mm). d. Material: Extruded polystyrene foam board, conforming to ASTM C 578

Type IV. Beadboard is not acceptable. e. Water Absorption (ASTM C 272): 0.1 percent by volume, maximum. f. Moisture Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96): 1.1 perm, maximum. g. Compressive Resistance (ASTM D 1621): 15 PSI.

2. Products: a. Insulation: Styrofoam SE by Dow Chemical, or equal. b. Adhesive for Wall Insulation: Styrofoam No.11 Brand Mastic by Dow

Chemical, or equal; as recommended by insulation manufacturer.

B. Foil-Faced Low-Density Polyethylene Foam Insulation: 1. Physical Data:

a. "R" Value: As indicated on Drawings. b. Single layer of low-density polyethylene foam with highly polished

aluminum foil on both sides. c. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96): 0.02 perms maximum.

2. Product: Low "E" by Environmentally Safe Products, or equal.

C. Polyisocyanurate Wall Insulation: 1. Physical Data:

a. "R" value: As indicated on Drawings; 7.2 per inch minimum, at 75 degrees Fahrenheit mean.

b. Board Density (ASTM D 1622): 2 PCF. c. Compressive Resistance (ASTM D 1621): 25 PSI, minimum. d. Water Absorption (ASTM C 209): 0.3 percent by volume maximum. e. Moisture Vapor Transmission of Vapor Retarder (ASTM E 96): 0.03

perm maximum. 2. Product: Thermax or Tuff-R by Celotex, or equal.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL BATT INSULATION (SOUND ATTENUATION FIRE BLANKET INSULATION / SOUND ATTENUATION BATT INSULATION)

A. Type: Un-faced mineral fiber (SAFB) or un-faced glass fiber acoustical insulation complying with: 1. ASTM C 665, Type I. 2. FS HH-I-521F, Type 1, Class A.

B. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread / Smoke developed index of not


more than 10 / 10, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

C. Combustion Characteristics: Pass ASTM E 136.

D. Fire Resistance Ratings: Acoustical Insulation shall pass ASTM E 119 as part of a complete fire tested wall assembly.

E. Thickness: As indicated in drawings; if not indicated, thickness shall be equal to full depth of stud framing.

F. Products: 1. Mineral Fiber Acoustical Insulation (SAFB): "Thermafiber Sound Attenuation

Fire Blanket" insulation by U.S. Gypsum, or equal. 2. Glass Fiber Acoustical Insulation (SAB): "Sound Attenuation Batt" insulation

by Owens-Corning, or equal.

2.03 REFLECTIVE INSULATION

A. Description: 1. Reflective Insulation shall expand to form 3 reflective air spaces. Layers shall

have internal expanders that separate paper from foil creating reflective air spaces. This air space adjacent to outside wall is to be dependent on thickness of furring strip.

2. Layers: a. 35 pound natural kraft paper coated with polyethylene. b. 30 pound natural kraft paper laminated to 0.00025 inch pure aluminum

foil with a fire-retardant adhesive. c. Minimum 0.00035 inch pure aluminum foil.

B. Compliance: Insulation shall comply with the following: 1. ASTM C 1224. 2. ICC Legacy Report # 2133A. 3. Miami-Dade County Report # 01-0828.12.

C. Performance Requirements: Insulation shall meet the following: 1. R-Value, Nominal, Heat Flow Horizontal (ASTM C 236):

a. 1-1/2 Inch Cavity, Vapor Retarder: 7.1, minimum. b. 1-1/2 Inch Cavity, Non-vapor Retarder: 7.0, minimum.

2. Water Vapor Permeance (ASTM E 96): a. Vapor Retarder: 0.20. b. Non-vapor Retarder: 5.0.

3. Flammability (ASTM E 84): a. Flame Spread Rating: 20, maximum. b. Smoke Developed Rating: 10, maximum. c. Interior Wall and Ceiling Finish Classification: Class A.

4. Corrosivity (ASTM D 3310): None. 5. Adhesive Performance (ASTM C 1224, 9.2.1 and 9.2.2):

a. Bleeding: None. b. Delamination: None. c. Pliability: No signs of cracking or delamination.

6. Mold and Mildew (ASTM C 1338): Pass. 7. Foil Emittance (ASTM C 1371): 0.034.

D. Product:


1. Vapor Retarder: Fi-Foil VR Plus Shield by Fi-Foil, or equal. 2. Non-vapor Retarder: VR Plus Shield Hi-Perm Version by Fi-Foil, or equal.

2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Tape: Bright aluminum self-adhering type, mesh reinforced, 2-inch (50 mm) wide.

B. Insulation Fasteners: Impaling clip of galvanized steel with washer retainer and clips, to be adhered to surface to receive insulation, length to suit insulation thickness and substrate, capable of securely and rigidly fastening insulation in place.

C. Adhesives and Sealants: 1. General:

a. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by the more stringent of the SCAQMD 1168 and BAAQMD 8-51.

2. Adhesive: Type recommended by insulation manufacturer for application. 3. Acoustical Sealant: Sealant Type I-3, as specified in Section 07900.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine the areas and conditions under which work of this section will be installed. 1. Verify that adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. 2. Verify mechanical and electrical utilities works within the furred wall cavities

and stud-framed partitions, and above ceilings has been installed, tested and inspected.

B. Do not proceed with the work of this Section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Blocking at Attic Vents and Access Panels/Doors: Prior to installation of insulation, install permanent blocking to prevent insulation from slipping over, clogging, or restricting air flow through soffit vents at eaves. 1. Install permanent blocking around attic trap doors. 2. Install permanent blocking to maintain accessibility to equipment or controls

that require maintenance or adjustment.

B. Blocking around Heat Producing Devices: Install non-combustible blocking around heat producing devices to provide the following clearances: 1. Recessed lighting fixtures, including wiring compartments, ballasts, and

other heat producing devices, unless these are certified by the manufacturer for installation surrounded by insulation: 3 inches (75 mm) from outside face of fixtures and devices or as required by NFPA 70, and, if insulation is to be placed above fixture or device, 24 inches (600 mm) above fixture.

2. Vents and vent connectors used for venting the products of combustion, and flues: Minimum clearances as required by NFPA 211.



A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of installation in each case.

B. Install the accepted insulation according to the manufacturer's printed instructions for the specific product. 1. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for particular conditions of

installation in each case.

C. Electrical Wiring: Do not install insulation in a manner that would sandwich electrical wiring between two layers of insulation.

3.04 INSTALLATION - VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Installation of Insulation with Integral Vapor Retarder Facing: 1. Maintain vapor retarder integrity by tightly abutting adjacent insulation.

Overlap joints at least 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with pressure sensitive tape.

2. Seal at sill, header, windows, doors and utility penetrations. 3. Repair punctures or tears in vapor retarder facing by taping with pressure

sensitive tape. Follow tape manufacturer's application recommendations. 4. Roof/Ceiling/Attic: Where batt insulation is to be installed between roof

trusses/rafters, use only Roof/Attic/Ceiling Thermal Batt Insulation.

3.05 INSTALLATION - BOARD INSULATION

A. Continuity of Insulation: Butt tightly against adjoining boards, studs, sill plates, headers and obstructions. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling joint, roof, and floor. Avoid creating any thermal bridges or voids.

B. Wall/Partition Insulation: 1. Installation Using Furring Strips: Install insulation between furring members,

as recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2. Installation on Masonry Walls: Apply board directly to masonry with

adhesive or fasteners, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. a. Fit between obstructions without impaling board on ties or anchors. b. Apply in parallel courses with joints breaking midway over course below. c. Put ends in moderate contact with adjoining insulation without forcing. d. Cut and shape as required to fit around wall penetrations, projections or

openings to accommodate conduit or other services. e. Seal around cut-outs with sealant. Install board in wall cavities so that it

leaves at least a nominal 1 inch (25 mm) free air space outside of the insulation to allow for cavity drainage.

3. Adhesive Attachment to Concrete and Masonry Walls: Apply adhesive to wall and completely cover wall with insulation, as recommended by the insulation manufacturer. a. Butt all edges of insulation and seal edges with tape.

4. Mechanical Attachment on Concrete and Masonry Walls: a. Cut insulation to cover walls. b. Apply adhesive to wall and set clip or other mechanical fastener in

adhesive as recommended by manufacturer.


c. After curing of adhesive, install insulation over fasteners, bend split prongs flush with insulation.

d. Butt all edges of insulation and seal with tape.

3.06 INSTALLATION - THERMAL BATT INSULATION

A. General: 1. Continuity of Insulation:

a. Install batt insulation to butt tightly against adjoining batts and to studs, rafters, joists, sill plates, headers and any obstructions.

b. Where insulation required is thicker than depth of joist, provide full width batts to cover across top of joists.

c. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling joints, roof, and floor.

d. Avoid creating thermal bridges/leaks. 2. Installation at Bridging and Cross Bracing: Insulate at bridging and cross

bracing by splitting batt vertically at center and packing one half into each opening. Butt insulation at bridging and cross bracing; fill in bridged area with loose or scrap insulation. a. Walls/Partitions: Use only unfaced batts. b. Roof/Ceiling/Attic: In addition to Roof/Attic/Ceiling Thermal Batt

Insulation, provide additional layers of unfaced batts to insulate gaps between Roof/Attic/Ceiling Thermal Batt Insulation and trusses/rafters and bridging and cross bracing as specified above. Patch and repair gaps in vapor retarder material per manufacturer’s instructions, and tape all joints with pressure sensitive tape to provide air and vapor tightness.

3. Insulation Batt With Affixed Vapor Retarder: Locate vapor retarder as indicated. Install Roof/Attic/Ceiling Thermal Batt Insulation batts at roof/attic locations only, except as otherwise indicated. Staple flanges of vapor retarder at 6 inch (150 mm) intervals flush with face or set in the side of roof truss/rafter/joist. a. Avoid gaps and bulges in insulation and “fishmouth” in vapor retarders. b. Overlap both flanges when using face method. Seal joints and edges of

vapor retarder with pressure sensitive tape. Stuff pieces of insulation into small cracks between trusses, joists, studs and other framing, such as at attic access doors, door and window heads, jambs, and sills, band joists, and headers. Cover these insulated cracks with vapor retarder material and tape all joints with pressure sensitive tape to provide air and vapor tightness.

4. Insulation Without Affixed Vapor Retarder: Provide snug friction fit to hold insulation in place. Stuff pieces of insulation into cracks between trusses, joists, studs, and other framing (e.g., at attic access doors, door and window heads, jambs, and sills, band joists, headers).

5. Sizing of Batts: Provide only full width batts when insulating between trusses, joists, or studs. Size width of batts for a snug fit where trusses, rafters, joists or studs are irregularly spaced.

B. Wall/Partition Insulation: 1. Mechanical Fasteners: Apply insulation directly to the interior surface of the

exterior wall with appropriate spindle or prong-type anchors. a. Fasten anchors to wall by welding the pin to metal and then impale the


insulation, or by using pre-attached heads and welding them through the insulation.

b. Fasten anchors to wall with adhesive. Follow manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.

c. Impale insulation on anchor and secure with washer. Select pin lengths to ensure tight fit. Protect pin tips where subject to human contact. See manufacturer's diagram for impaling pin pattern.

2. Adhesive Fastening: Apply insulation with adhesives. Follow adhesive manufacturer's recommendations for surface preparation and adhesive pattern.

3. Furring Strips: Install insulation between furring strips, hat channels, or Z-shaped furring in areas where finish surface will be applied. a. Contact the furring strip manufacturer for recommendations on the

appropriate fastener system to use. 4. Between Metal Studs: Friction-fit insulation between studs after cover

material has been installed on one side of the cavity. a. When unfaced insulation is used, and in applications without a cover

material or where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness, use wire or metal straps to hold insulation in place.

b. When faced insulation is used, the attachment flanges may be taped to the face of metal stud prior to applying the interior finish.

c. Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish surface is applied when insulation is installed in heights over 8 feet.

3.07 INSTALLATION - ACOUSTICAL BLANKET/BATT INSULATION

A. Install blanket/batt insulation as required to achieve designated STC rating at all interior stud-framed partitions, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Continuity of Insulation: 1. Install blanket/batt insulation to butt tightly against adjoining blankets/batts

and to studs, sill plates, headers and any obstructions. 2. Provide continuity and integrity of insulation at corners, wall to ceiling joints,

roof, and floor. 3. Avoid creating acoustical bridges/leaks.

C. Provide snug friction fit to hold insulation in place. Stuff pieces of insulation into cracks between studs and other framing (e.g., at door and window heads, jambs, and sills, headers). 1. Where the stud depth is larger than the insulation thickness, use wire or

metal straps to hold insulation in place. 2. Provide supplementary support to hold the product in place until finish

surface is applied when insulation is installed in heights over 8 feet.

D. Sizing of Blankets/Batts: Provide only full width blankets/batts when insulating between stud framing. Size width of blankets/batts for a snug fit where studs are irregularly spaced. Blankets/Batts shall extend to full height of stud framing.

3.08 INSTALLATION - REFLECTIVE INSULATION

A. Install Reflective Insulation as required to achieve minimum thermal resistance rating of R-7 at all exterior cast-in-place concrete wall areas, except as otherwise indicated.


B. Install reflective insulation and vapor barrier in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 727 at locations indicated on the Drawings.

C. Splice reflective insulation and vapor barrier in wall cavities in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to avoid gaps. Tape seams if splice has been butted.

3.09 PROTECTION

A. Protect insulation from damage and from becoming wet before, during and after installation.

B. During storage and installation, good fire safety procedures should be followed. Care should be taken to make certain all broken or damaged products are replaced.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07840 - 1 of 8 FIRESTOPPING

SECTION 07840

FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Firestopping materials.

B. Firestopping of all penetrations and interruptions to fire rated assemblies, whether indicated on drawings or not.


A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Gypsum wallboard fireproofing.

1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-rated Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor fire resistance ratings including resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces or types of construction, at separations required to permit building movement and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

B. Smoke Barrier Construction: Maintain barrier and structural floor resistance to cold smoke at all penetrations, connections with other surfaces and types of construction and at all separations required to permit building and sound or vibration absorption, and at other construction gaps.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall show typical installation details for methods of installation and type of firestop materials used. 1. Schedule of Firestopping: List each type of penetration, fire rating of the

penetrated assembly, and firestopping test or design number. 2. Engineering Judgment:

a. Manufacturer's Engineering Judgment identification number and drawing details, when no UL system is available for an application.

b. Engineer Judgment must include both project name and the name of the contractor who will install firestop system as described in drawing.

C. Product Data: Provide data on product characteristics, performance ratings, and limitations.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate preparation and installation instructions.

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Fire Testing: Provide firestopping assemblies of designs which provide the


specified fire ratings when tested in accordance with methods indicated, ASTM E 814, and ASTM E 119. 1. Listing in the current-year classification or certification books of UL will be

considered as constituting an acceptable test report. 2. Submission of actual test reports is required for assemblies for which none

of the above substantiation exists.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section, and listed in UL (FRD).

C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section, and trained and approved by the firestopping products manufacturer. 1. Installer is to have been provided the necessary training to install

manufacturer's products per specified requirements. a. A supplier's willingness to sell its firestopping products to the Contractor

or to an installer engaged by the Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on the buyer.

2. Installer shall be approved by FM 4991, Approval of Firestop Contractors. 3. Installer shall be a member of Firestop Contractors International Association.

D. Single-Source: To ensure proper planning and coordination of firestop work, all firestopping required for entire Project shall be installed by a single installer.

E. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having jurisdiction.

F. Firestop systems do not re-establish the structural integrity of load bearing partitions/assemblies, or support live loads and traffic. Installer shall consult the structural engineer prior to penetrating any load bearing assembly.

G. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through a manufacturer, an engineering judgment derived from similar UL system designs or other tests shall be prepared by Contractor and submitted to Consultant and to authority having jurisdiction for review and approval prior to installation. Engineer judgment submittal drawings must follow requirements set forth by the IFC (GEFSEJ), and as required by the authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where an engineering judgment is proposed, the Contractor shall provide an

independent review and analysis by a qualified third party testing agency acceptable to Consultant and Project Manager, and such independent review and analysis (of proposed engineering judgment design) shall include a recommendation for use of the proposed engineering judgment design for the application proposed by the Contractor.

H. Firestopping materials shall not contain lead, PCBs, ethylene glycol, or lead.

I. Products containing solvents or requiring hazardous waste disposal are not allowed.


A. Comply with firestopping manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and conditions during and after installation. Maintain minimum temperature before, during, and for 3 days after installation of materials.

B. Provide ventilation in areas where solvent-cured materials are being installed.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 2.01 GENERAL

A. Provide firestopping composed of components that are compatible with each other, the substrates forming openings, and the items, if any, penetrating the firestopping under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by the firestopping manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Provide components for each firestopping system that are needed to install fill material. Use only components specified by the firestopping manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing agency for the designated fire-resistance-rated systems.

C. Firestopping materials are either "cast-in-place" (integral with concrete placement) or "post installed". Provide cast-in-place firestop devices prior to concrete placement.

D. Fire Resistance Ratings: 1. See drawings for required assemblies, systems and ratings.

a. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or ASTM E 814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

b. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

2. Use only firestop products and assemblies that are appropriate for application, and that have been tested in accordance with the requirements of UL 1479, ASTM E 814, or UL 2079, for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type(s), annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

2.02 FIRESTOPPING ASSEMBLIES

A. Firestopping: Any material meeting requirements. 1. Fire Ratings: Use any system listed by UL or tested in accordance with

ASTM E 814 that has F Rating equal to fire rating of penetrated assembly and minimum T Rating of 1 and that meets all other specified requirements.

2.03 MATERIALS

A. Firestopping Sealants: Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC) content than required by SCAQMD 1168.

B. Primers, Sleeves, Forms, Insulation, Packing, Stuffing, and Accessories: Type required for tested assembly design.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Verify openings are ready to receive the work of this section.


1. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

2. Verify penetrations are properly sized and in suitable condition for application of materials.

3. Surfaces to which firestop materials will be applied shall be free of dirt, grease, oil, laitance, release agents, water repellents, and any other substances that may affect proper adhesion.

4. Provide masking and temporary covering to prevent soiling of adjacent surfaces by firestopping materials.

5. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for temperature and humidity conditions before, during and after installation of firestopping.

6. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location and proper selection of cast-in-place firestop devices with trade responsible for the work. Ensure device is installed before placement of concrete.

B. Responsible trade to provide adequate spacing of field run pipes to allow for installation of cast-in-place firestop devices without interferences.

3.03 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter which may affect bond of firestopping material.

B. Remove incompatible materials which may affect bond.

C. Install backing materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

3.04 APPLICATION

A. General: Apply fire safing insulation, fire and smoke barrier caulk, and fire barrier wrap/strips according to manufacturer's published installation details, directions, UL classified fire test data, and as specified. 1. Use only firestop products and assemblies that have been tested in

accordance with the requirements of UL 1479, ASTM E 814, or UL 2079, for specific fire-rated construction conditions conforming to construction assembly type, penetrating item type(s), annular space requirements, and fire-rating involved for each separate instance.

2. Fire Resistance Rating: a. Provide a firestop system with a "F" Rating as determined by UL 1479 or

ASTM E 814, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

b. Provide a firestop system with an Assembly Rating as determined by UL 2079, which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated.

c. Install materials in manner described in fire test report and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, completely closing openings. 1) Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and

water resistant seal. 2) Consult with Consultant, mechanical engineer, and damper

manufacturer prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might


hamper the performance of fire/smoke dampers as it pertains to ductwork.

3) Protect materials from damage on surfaces subjected to traffic. d. Do not cover installed firestopping until inspected by authority having

jurisdiction. e. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with

UL (FRD). 1) Install labeling required by governing building code.

B. Membrane Penetrations: 1. Penetrations of membranes that are part of a fire-resistance-rated horizontal

assembly shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 712 and the following: a. Fire-resistance-rated Assemblies: Penetrations shall be installed as

tested in an approved fire-resistance-rated assembly. b. Through-penetration Firestop System: Through penetrations shall be

protected by an approved through-penetration firestop system installed and tested in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inch (2.49 Pa) of water. 1) The system shall have an F rating and a T rating of not less than 1

hour but not less than the required rating of the floor penetrated. 2. Where floor/ceiling assemblies are required to have a minimum 1-hour fire-

resistance rating, recessed fixtures shall be installed such that the required fire resistance will not be reduced.

C. Gaps at Floor and Roof Edges Abutting Exterior Walls: 1. Install specified fire safing insulation continuously at each floor level above

first floor and at roof between back of precast concrete wall panels, concrete beams, and columns of depth in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to achieve required fire resistance rating.

2. Install fire stop insulation across exterior faces of columns at each floor level above first floor including roof before erection of precast concrete wall panels. Secure insulation in place across columns with suitable waterproof adhesive with flame spread rating of 25 or less and with impaling clips at each side of columns.

3. Secure fire safing insulation to exterior faces of slab edges and beams with suitable impaling clips spaced 24 inches on center, and adhesive with flame spread rating of 25 or less.

4. Provide fire safing insulation of required thickness as required to compress insulation in joints.

5. Where gap is less than approximately 2 inches, bend clips slightly upward. Where gap is less than approximately 1 inch, apply adhesive to sides of joint and tightly pack safing insulation into joint.

6. Recess top surface of fire safing insulation to receive fire and smoke barrier caulk as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating, in accordance with manufacturer's directions manufacturer's directions.

7. Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over horizontal surfaces of fire safing insulation at each floor level above first floor and roof. Smooth surface of caulk at exposed areas.

8. Floor and Roof Expansion Joints: a. Provide 10-gage galvanized steel hat shaped wire support hangers at 8

inches o.c. with bottom of wire near bottom of slab or beam.


b. Install specified fire safing insulation tightly packed in each suspended floor expansion joint and roof expansion joint with insulation resting on hardware cloth support and of depth in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

c. Apply fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over horizontal surfaces of fire safing insulation packed in suspended floor expansion joints. Fire and smoke barrier caulk is not required in roof expansion joints.

9. Gaps at Tops of Non-Load Bearing Concrete Fire Walls: a. Coordinate installation of solid concrete block or solid brick top course to

provide solid back up for fire safing insulation. b. Pack space between top of masonry and underside of overhead

structure with specified fire safing insulation. Recess insulation on each side of wall to receive fire and smoke barrier caulk in accordance with caulk manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

c. Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk or putty of required uniform thickness on each side of walls in accordance with manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

10. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Metal Pipes, Conduits, and HVAC Duct Perimeters: a. Where gaps between metal pipes, conduits, and duct openings are 1/4-

inch or less, seal gaps with specified fire and smoke barrier caulk. b. Where gaps between metal pipes, conduits and ducts are more than

1/4-inch: 1) Pack space between opening and pipe, conduit and duct with

specified fire safing insulation and of depth of insulation according to fire safing manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

2) Apply specified fire and smoke barrier caulk of required uniform depth over fire safing insulation support, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating. Smooth surface of caulk at exposed areas.

3) In place of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk, provide fire and smoke barrier wrap/strips, wire tied in place and covered with of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk according to manufacturer's directions.

11. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Plastic Pipe and Conduit Perimeters and Insulated Metal Pipe Perimeters: a. Where gaps between plastic pipes and plastic conduits and floor and

wall openings are 1/4-inch or less and where insulated metal pipes occur, provide sheet metal fire barrier restricting collar wrap/strip with fire and smoke barrier caulk on both sides of wall and at bottom of floor only according to manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating. 1) Provide number of wrap/strips around pipes and conduits according

to wrap/strip manufacturer's tables. 2) Enclose wrap/strips with sheet metal restricting collars bolted to

each side of wall for fire wall penetrations and to underside of floor for floor penetrations. Bend support tabs back to pipe or insulation


and secure collar with metal hose clamp. 3) Seal all seams and edges at wall and floor with 1/4-inch bead of

specified fire and smoke barrier caulk. 4) Where gaps between plastic pipes and plastic conduits and floor

openings are more than 1/4-inch: (a) Pack space between floor opening and pipe or conduit with

specified fire safing insulation and of depth of insulation to provide required fire resistance rating. Recess insulation 2-1/4 inches below floor to receive fire barrier wrap/strips according to wrap/strip manufacturer's directions, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

(b) Support fire safing insulation with "Z" shaped galvanized sheet metal clips at 3 locations around pipes and conduits.

(c) Provide number of specified fire barrier wrap/ trips around pipes and conduits according to wrap/strip manufacturer's tables. Wire wrap/strips in place and slide down into opening to proper depth.

(d) Cover surface and seams of wrap/strip around pipe or conduit with uniform 1/4-inch depth of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk.

5) Plastic pipe and insulated cable penetrations to fire walls: (a) Provide galvanized steel pipe sleeves equivalent to EMT, sized

to allow annular space of not less than 3/4-inch around pipe or cable. Project pipe sleeve 3 inches on each side of wall. Tightly fit pipe sleeves to wall. Grout sleeves into masonry and fill openings in gypsum board with fire caulk.

(b) Fill space around pipe and cable to within 2-1/4 inches of end of pipe sleeve with fire safing insulation.

(c) Provide number of specified fire barrier wrap/ trips around pipes and cable on each side of wall according to wrap/strip manufacturer's table, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating. Wire wrap/strips in place and slide into pipe sleeve, recessing 1/4-inch.

(d) Cover surface of wrap/strip around pipe and cable with uniform 1/4-inch depth of specified fire and smoke barrier caulk.

12. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Bus Ducts: a. Where cable trays and bus ducts penetrate floors and fire walls, provide

necessary fiber packing and other materials required by manufacturers installation details and appropriate for conditions encountered, as necessary to provide required fire resistance rating.

b. Where "packing material" is shown on the manufacturer's details, only specified fire stop mineral wool shall be used. Depth of "packing material" shall be of minimum 1-inch depth.

13. Floor and Fire Wall Penetrations - Cable Trays: a. Where cable trays penetrate floors and fire walls, provide fire prevention

pillow system placed into opening in a staggered brick style and other materials required by the manufacturer.


A. Examine sealed penetration areas to ensure proper installation before concealing


or enclosing areas. 1. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code

authorities. 2. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by

cutting or penetrating of existing firestop systems already installed by other trades.


A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

B. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 07900 - 1 of 8 JOINT SEALERS

SECTION 07900

JOINT SEALERS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Joint sealants and backing.

1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 07840 - Firestopping: Firestopping sealants.

B. Section 08800 - Glazing: Glazing sealants and accessories.

C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Acoustic sealant.

D. Section 09300 - Tile: Sealant used as tile grout.

1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASTM C 919 - Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications; 2008.

B. ASTM C 1193 - Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.

C. ASTM D 1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber; 2007.

D. ASTM D 1667 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Poly(Vinyl Chloride) Foam (Closed-Cell); 2005.

E. SCAQMD 1168 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1168; current edition; www.aqmd.gov.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Manufacturers' Project Review Services Report: Prior to product selection, all adhesive and sealant applications must be reviewed by manufacturers' technical service staff. 1. Review all joint details for compliance with manufacturer's recommended

design principles. Provide suggestions or changes and/or identify limitations of the designs.

2. Test Reports: a. Submit results of Laboratory Pre-Construction Testing. b. Submit results of Field Pre-Construction Testing. c. Submit manufacturer's recommendations for joint preparation, priming,

and joint accessory materials based on test results. d. Submit manufacturer's recommended installation procedure

modifications resulting from field adhesion tests.

C. Product Data: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section;


2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements.

3. Provide data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, substrate preparation, limitations, color availability,, and primer data.

4. Provide a copy of the Material Safety Data Sheet for each solvent, primer or sealant material.

D. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit details to show installation and interface between sealants and

adjacent work.

E. Samples: 1. Submit color charts for each sealant type for initial selection. 2. Submit standard cured color samples for each sealant type illustrating

selected colors.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's published installation procedures. 1. Indicate special procedures, surface preparation, perimeter conditions

requiring special attention,, and warranty requirements. 2. Include instructions for completing sealant intersections when different

materials are joined. 3. Include instructions for removing existing sealants and preparing joints for

new sealant.

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: 1. Certify products are suitable for intended use and products meet or exceed

specified requirements. 2. Certify applicator is approved by manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience.

B. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum three

years documented experience, minimum three successfully completed projects of similar scope and complexity, and approved by manufacturer.

2. Designate one individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation.

C. Laboratory Pre-Construction Testing: 1. Test sealants, joint accessories, and joint substrates in accordance with the

following, before starting work of this section: a. Obtain samples of joint substrate products specified in other sections. b. Adhesion: ASTM C 794 and ASTM C 719; determine surface

preparation and required primer. c. Compatibility: ASTM C 1087; determine materials forming joints and

adjacent materials do not adversely affect sealant materials and do not affect sealant color.

d. Staining: ASTM D 2203, ASTM C 510, or ASTM C 1248; determine


sealants will not stain joint substrates.

D. Field Pre-Construction Testing: 1. Test each elastomeric sealant and joint substrate in accordance with the

following, before beginning work of this section: a. Install sealants in field samples or mockups using joint preparation

methods determined by laboratory pre-construction testing. 2. Remove existing sealant, clean joint, and install new sealant using

manufacturer's recommended joint preparation methods. 3. Install field-test joints in inconspicuous location as approved by Consultant. 4. Test Method: Manufacturer's standard field adhesion test to verify joint

preparation and primer required to obtain optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrate.

5. When test indicates sealant adhesion failure, modify joint preparation, primer, or both and retest until joint passes sealant adhesion test.

E. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C 1193 and manufacturer's installation instructions.

F. Joint Tolerance: Provide joint tolerances in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.

G. Manufacturers' Field Services: Material or product suppliers or manufacturers shall provide qualified staff personnel to observe site conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship,, and to initiate instructions when necessary. 1. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Report observations and site decisions or

instructions given to applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' written instructions. a. Indicate date and time present at project site. b. Include observations, indicate compliance with manufacturer's

installation instructions, and supplemental instructions provided to installers.

1.05 MOCK-UPS

A. Provide mock-up of sealant joints in conjunction with window, wall, and tile work. 1. Construct mock-ups with specified sealant types and with other components

noted. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted mock-ups may remain as part of the Work.

a. Repair seal joint mockups used for field adhesion testing.

1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Schedule work so painting, waterproofing, water repellents and preservative finishes are installed after sealants, unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. 1. Ensure sealants are cured before covering with other materials.

B. Do not install primers or sealants when atmospheric temperatures or joint surface temperatures are less than 40 degrees F.

C. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer


during and after installation.

1.07 DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver materials to the job site in unopened manufacturers' external shipping containers, with brand names, date of manufacture, color, and material designation clearly marked thereon.

B. Label elastomeric sealant containers to identify type, class, grade, and use.

C. Carefully handle and store materials to prevent inclusion of foreign materials or subjection to sustained temperatures exceeding 90 degrees F or less than 0 degrees F.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Submit signed copies of the following warranties against adhesive and cohesive failure of sealant and against infiltration of water and air through sealed joint for period of 3 years from date of completion. 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials. 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship.

B. Correct defective work within a five year period after Date of Substantial Completion.

C. Include coverage for installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve airtight seal and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. BASF Construction Chemicals-Building Systems: www.chemrex.com.

B. Bostik Inc: www.bostik-us.com.

C. Dow Corning: www.dowcorning.com

D. Momentive Performance Materials, Inc (formerly GE Silicones): www.momentive.com.

E. Pecora Corporation: www.pecora.com.

F. Tremco Global Sealants: www.tremcosealants.com.

2.02 SEALANTS

A. General: 1. Provide sealant that has been tested and found suitable for the substrates to

which it will be applied. 2. Provide only products having lower volatile organic compound (VOC)

content than required by SCAQMD 1168 (4% by weight VOC or less in less than 16 oz. package, or less than 250 g/L in larger package). a. All non-porous sealant primers must be below 250g/L, and primers for

porous substrates less than 775 g/L.


B. Polyurethane Sealants: 1. Sealant Type P-1: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50; Uses T, M,

A, and O; two component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. b. Product: Dymeric 240/240FC manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

2. Sealant Type P-2: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, M, A, and O; two component, chemical curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. b. Product: Vulkem 227 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

3. Sealant Type P-3: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50; Uses NT, M, A, O; single component, moisture curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for interior dynamic joints. b. Product: Dymonic FC manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

4. Sealant Type P-4: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T; self leveling, multi-component, chemical curing, nonstaining, nonbleeding; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for horizontal joints:

1) Control, expansion, and soft joints in masonry or plaster. 2) Joints between concrete and other materials. 3) Joints between metal frames and other materials. 4) Other exterior joints for which no other sealant is indicated.

b. Product: THC-900, THC-901 or Vulkem 245 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

5. Sealant Type P-5: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 100/50; self leveling, single component, moisture curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for horizontal concrete paving joints. b. Product: Vulkem 45 SSL manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

C. Silicone Sealants: 1. Sealant Type S-1: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50; Uses NT, M,

G, A and O: multi-component, neutral curing, non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. b. Product: Spectrem 4-TS manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

2. Sealant Type S-2: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50; Uses NT, M, G, A and O: single component; moisture curing; non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for air barrier connection sealant at window frames to

ExoAir 110 flashing. b. Product: Spectrem 1 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

3. Sealant Type S-3: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50; Uses NT, M, G, A and O: single component; neutral curing; non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for exterior and interior precast panel joints and

exterior window perimeters. b. Product: Spectrem 3 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

4. Sealant Type S-4: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, G, A and O: single component; neutral curing; non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected.


a. Applications: Use for Interior sanitary applications; countertops, backsplashes lavatories, plumbing fixtures.

b. Product: Tremsil 200 manufactured by Tremco, or equal. 5. Sealant Type S-4: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; Uses NT, G,

A and O: single component; moisture curing; non-staining, non-bleeding; color as selected. b. Product: Tremsil 600 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

6. Sealant Type S-5: Low modulus, high performance, single component; gun grade, as appropriate; sealant. b. Product: Spectrem 800 manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

7. Sealant Type S-6: Low modulus, high performance, single component; self leveling, as appropriate; sealant. b. Product: Spectrem 900SL manufactured by Tremco, or equal.

8. Sealant Type S-7: White silicone; ASTM C 920, Uses I, M and A; mildew resistant. a. Applications: Use for:

1) Joints between plumbing fixtures and floor and wall surfaces. 2) Joints between kitchen and bath countertops and wall surfaces.

D. Other Sealants: 1. Sealant Type L-1: ASTM C 834; single component, solvent curing, non-

staining, non-bleeding, non-sagging; color as selected. a. Applications: Use for:

1) Interior general purpose applications. 2) Interior wall and ceiling control joints. 3) Joints between door and window frames and wall surfaces. 4) Interior wood, vinyl and plastic joints. 5) Other interior joints for which no other type of sealant is indicated.

b. Product: Tremflex 834 manufactured by Tremco, or equal. 2. Sealant Type B-1: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 12-1/2, Uses M and A;

single component, solvent release curing, non-skinning. a. Acoustical sealant must have a consistency of 250 to 310 when tested

in accordance with ASTM D 217, and must remain flexible and adhesive after 500 hours of accelerated weathering as specified in ASTM C 734, and must be non-staining.

b. Applications: Use for concealed locations only: 1) Sealant bead between top stud runner and structure and between

bottom stud track and floor. 2) Sealant bead between outlet boxes and gypsum board.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

B. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 1. Denatured alcohol is not acceptable.

C. Joint Backing: 1. General:

a. Provide backing materials free from oil or other staining elements, of


types recommended by sealant manufacturer. b. Provide 25 to 33 percent oversized backing for closed cell, and 40 to 50

percent oversized backing for open cell material, unless otherwise indicated.

c. Make backing material compatible with sealant. d. Do not use oakum or other types of absorptive materials as joint

backing. 2. Rubber: Conform to ASTM D 1056, Class [A] [B] [D], Grade [_____], round

cross section for [_____] cellular rubber sponge backing. a. Type 1, open cell. b. Type 2, closed cell.

3. PVC: Conform to ASTM D 1667, Grade [VO 12] [_____], open-cell foam, round cross section for [_____] Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) backing. a. Do not use open cell vinyl foam in moist areas or below grade.

4. Synthetic Rubber: Conform to ASTM C 509, Option I, Type I preformed rods for [_____] Synthetic rubber backing.

5. Neoprene: Conform to ASTM D 1056, [closed cell expanded neoprene cord Type 2, Class C, Grade [2C2] [_____]] [open cell neoprene sponge Type 1, Class C, Grade [1C3] [_____]] for [_____] Neoprene backing.

6. Silicon Rubber Base: Provide Silicon Rubber Based Sealants of single component, solvent release, color [as selected] [_____], conforming to ASTM C 920, Non-sag, Type [_____], Grade [_____], Class [25] [_____].

D. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces and joint openings are ready to receive work.

B. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove loose materials and foreign matter that could impair adhesion of sealant.

B. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Perform preparation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193.

D. Protect elements surrounding the work of this section from damage or disfigurement.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in accordance with sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and material installation instructions.

B. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C 1193.

C. Perform acoustical sealant application work in accordance with ASTM C 919.

D. Measure joint dimensions and size joint backers to achieve width-to-depth ratio,


neck dimension, and surface bond area as recommended by manufacturer, except where specific dimensions are indicated.

E. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used.

F. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags.

G. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

H. Tool joints concave.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent soiled surfaces.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect sealants until cured.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08110 - 1 of 5 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

SECTION 08110

STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Steel doors and frames.

B. Accessories, including glazing, louvers, and matching panels.




. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

D. Section 08800 - Glass and Glazing: Glass for doors and borrowed lites.

E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies: Non-loadbearing metal framing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard details and catalog data demonstrating compliance with referenced standards. 1. Include manufacturer’s recommended installation instructions.

C. Shop Drawings: Provide complete shop drawings showing all steel door and frame assemblies indicated in the drawings. 1. Indicate the following:

a. Door, frame, and hardware schedule, in accordance with SDI 111. b. Door frame types and profiles; materials and details of design and

construction; and hardware locations, and reinforcement type and locations.

c. Interface with wall construction, including furring, framing, and interior wall finishes; anchorage and fastening methods; and methods of assembling sections, and finish requirements.

2. Glazed Openings, Lights and Transoms: Indicate glass and glazing materials, and removable and non-removable glazing stops.

3. Fire-Rated Openings: Indicate applicable fire-rating and label.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide all products from a single manufacturer who is a member of the Steel Door Institute.

B. Fire-rated Assemblies: 1. Where fire-rated door assemblies are indicated or required, provide fire-rated

door and frame assemblies complying with NFPA 80, and tested, listed and labeled according to UBC-43-2 and ISO-3008 by a nationally recognized independent testing and inspection agency.

2. The label shall comply with requirements of NFPA 80, and shall be


permanently affixed to the door or frame.

C. Certifications: 1. Label Construction Certification: For door assemblies required to be fire-

rated and exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, submit manufacturer's certification for each door and frame assembly constructed to conform to design, materials, and construction equivalent to requirements for labeled construction.

2. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturer's certification that products comply with referenced standards.

D. Manufacture products only after receipt of approved hardware schedule and templates.


A. Deliver steel doors and frames cartoned or crated to provide protection during transit and job storage. Provide additional sealed plastic wrapping for factory-finished doors.

B. Inspect steel doors and frames upon delivery for damage. Minor damage may be repaired if refinished items are equal in all respects to new work and acceptable to Consultant and Project Manager. Remove and replace damaged items as directed.

C. Store doors and frames at building site under cover. Place units on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Avoid use of non-vented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If cardboard wrapper on door becomes wet, remove carton immediately. Provide 1/4-inch spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation.

D. Deliver all doors and frames to the jobsite in a timely manner to not delay progress of other trades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Firedoor Division of Amweld International, LLC (formerly Ark II Manufacturing, LLC): Tel. 888-775-2397.

B. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with the contract requirements, equivalent product manufactured by other listed manufacturers may be substituted as equal. 1. Steelcraft Manufacturing Company: 9017 Blue Ash Road; Cincinnati, OH

45242. 2. Ingersoll-Rand.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet for Doors and Frames: 1. Cold rolled steel: ASTM A 1008, Designation CS. 2. Hot rolled steel: Pickled and oiled, ASTM A 1011, Designation CS Type B. 3. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated

(galvannealed), ASTM A 653, with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum).


B. Steel Sheet for Anchors and Accessories: Electrolytically deposited zinc coated steel; ASTM A 591, coating 40Z (12G), minimum.

C. Finish Materials: 1. Primer: Rust-inhibiting, complying with ANSI A250.10, door manufacturer's

standard. Coordinate with paint to be used for field finishing; refer to Section 09900.

2. Bituminous Coating: Asphalt emulsion or other high-build, water-resistant, resilient coating.

D. Grout for Frames: 3000 PSI concrete conforming to requirements of the Product Approval NOA; refer to Section 03300 for additional information. 1. Portland cement grout of maximum 4-inch slump for hand troweling; thinner

pumpable grout is prohibited.

E. Silencers: Resilient rubber, fitted into drilled hole; 3 on strike side of single door, 3 on center mullion of pairs, and 2 on head of pairs without center mullions.

2.03 DOORS AND FRAMES

A. General Requirements: 1. Combined Requirements: If a particular door and frame unit is indicated to

comply with more than one type of requirement, comply with all the specified requirements for each type; for instance, an exterior door that is also indicated as being sound-rated must comply with the requirements specified for exterior doors and for sound-rated doors; where two requirements conflict, comply with the most stringent.

2. Grade: a. Interior: ANSI A250.8 Level 2, Model 2 (heavy-duty, seamless design,

with minimum 16 gage frame. 3. Accessibility: Comply with ANSI/ICC A117.1 and Florida Accessibility Code

for Building Construction (FBC-B CHAPTER 11). 4. Door Top Closures: Flush with top of faces and edges, at all exterior doors

and as indicated. 5. Door Edge Profile: Beveled on both edges. 6. Door Texture: Smooth faces. 7. Glazed Lights: Non-removable stops on non-secure side, or as directed by

Consultant or Project Manager; sizes and configurations as indicated on drawings.

8. Hardware Preparation: In accordance with DHI A115 Series, with reinforcement welded in place, in addition to other requirements specified in door grade standard.

9. Galvanizing: All components hot-dipped zinc-iron alloy-coated (galvannealed), ASTM A 653, with A60/ZF180 coating (minimum).

10. Finish: All components to be factory-primed, ready for field finishing. 11. Comply with ANSI A250.8.

B. Fire-Rated Openings: Comply with NFPA 80; UL listed. 1. Affix permanent labels attesting to fire resistance. 2. At stairway enclosures, provide units listed for 450 degree F (232 degree C)

maximum temperature rise rating for 30 minutes of exposure. 3. Provide manufacturer's certificate that oversized openings have been

constructed in accordance with all other applicable requirements for labeled door construction.


C. Interior Openings: 1. STC Rating: 35, calculated in accordance with ASTM E 413, tested in

accordance with ASTM E 336 or ASTM E 1408. 2. Steel stiffened grid core and stile and rail units are exempt from thermal

rating requirements.

D. Frames: Provide welded unit type frames. 1. Lights and Transoms: Provide tubular mullions and transom bars with heads

and jambs.

2.04 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Interior Opening at Concrete Walls, where such opening is not subject to

wind load or missile impact: a. Provide concealed existing opening type anchors with 3/8 inch

(minimum) diameter bolt and expansion shield; provide plastic plug at each anchor hole.

b. Provide one jamb anchor at 6 inches from top of jamb and one at 6 inches from bottom, plus one jamb anchor per 24 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof between top and bottom anchors; not less than 4 anchors per jamb.

2. Interior Opening at Stud-framed Drywall Partition: a. Manufacturer's standard compression type anchors, to accommodate

frame jamb depth and face dimension on fully-welded frame; galvanized.

b. Provide one jamb anchor per 30 inches of jamb height or fraction thereof; not less than 3 anchors per jamb.

B. Head/ Ceiling Strut Anchors: Provide where indicated in drawings; if not indicated, provide per manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Floor/ Mullion Stirrup Anchors: Steel angle clip type; provide one anchor per jamb. 1. Metal Thickness: 16 gage, minimum. 2. Fasteners: Two per jamb, minimum. 3. Weld anchor to bottom of each jamb, except as otherwise indicated; weld

prior to galvanizing of frame assembly.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that project conditions are suitable before beginning installation of frames. 1. For wrap-around frames, verify that completed openings are of correct size

and thickness. 2. For butt type frames, verify that completed openings are of correct size.

B. Correct unsatisfactory condition before proceeding with installation.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors plumb and in true alignment and fasten to achieve the maximum operational effectiveness and appearance of the unit. 1. Install frames as recommended in ANSI A250.11 and DHI A115.1G.


2. Maintain clearances specified in ANSI A250.8 and NFPA 80, whichever is more restrictive.

3. Shim as indicated in DHI A115.1G and SDI 122.

B. Grouting of Frames: 1. Preparation:

a. Brace or fasten frame in such a way to prevent pressure of the grout from deforming frame

b. Prior to installation, field coat the inside of frames with a bituminous compound to prevent corrosion.

c. Mix grout to provide 4-inch (100 mm) maximum consistency and hand trowel into place. Do not use grout mixed to thin "pumpable" consistency.

2. Frames at openings in stud-framed drywall partitions shall be filled with grout as work progresses.

C. Install hardware in accordance with hardware manufacturer's recommendations and templates. 1. Consult DHI A115.1G and ANSI A250.6 as necessary.


A. Prime Coat Touch-Up: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touch-up of compatible air-drying primer.

B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection, remove protective plastic wrappings from prefinished doors.

C. Fill all dents, holes, etc. with metal filler and sand smooth flush with adjacent surfaces-paint to match.

D. Adjust doors for proper operation, free from binding or other defects.

E. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating finish hardware items, leaving steel doors and frames undamaged and in complete and proper operating condition. Provide final adjustment as follows: 1. Door Contact with Silencers: Doors shall strike a minimum of two silencers

without binding lock or latch bolts in the strike plate. 2. Head, Strike, and Hinge Jamb Margin: 1/8 inch. 3. Meeting Edge Clearance, Pairs of Doors: + 1/16 inch. 4. Bolts and Screws: Leave tight and firmly seated. 5. Soundseal gasketing.

F. Clean and restore soiled surfaces.

G. Remove scraps and debris, and leave site and a clean condition.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08211 - 1 of 4 WOOD DOORS

SECTION 08211

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Flush wood doors; flush and flush glazed configuration; fire rated and non-rated.


A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel frames for wood doors.

B. Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

C. Section 08800 - Glazing.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: 1. Include product data for doors, including but not limited to door core

materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; finishing specifications and materials.

2. Include product data for glass and glazing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show doors and frames, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts, beveling, blocking for hardware, factory machining, factory finishing, cutouts for glazing and other details. 1. Illustrate door opening criteria; glazing details; hardware types and locations,

and hardware blocking requirements and location. 2. Provide the information required by AWI Architectural Woodwork Standards. 3. Include certification program label.

C. Samples: 1. Color Selection Samples (for factory pre-finishing): Submit samples of not

less than 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size on representative veneer, with sample date indicated. a. Make adjustments in color as requested by Consultant, and submit

revised color samples. 2. Door Construction Samples: Submit two samples of door construction, 12 x

12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size cut from top corner of door. 3. Finish Verifications Samples: Submit two samples of door veneer, 12 x 12

inch (300 x 300 mm) in size illustrating wood grain, stain color, and sheen.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special installation instructions.

E. Warranty, executed in City's name.


A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Installed Fire Rated Door and Transom Panel Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as indicated.



A. Package, deliver, store and protect doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and WDMA I.S.1-A, and as follows: 1. Do not deliver doors to job site until needed. Coordinate delivery with job

progress. 2. Ship doors individually wrapped/cartoned. 3. Store doors flat and off the floor on a level surface in a dry, well-ventilated

building. Do not store on edge. Protect doors from dirt, water and abuse. a. Store doors in a flat position elevated a minimum of 4 inches above

cured concrete slab. 4. Protect doors from exposure to light (artificial or natural) after delivery. 5. Do not subject interior doors to extremes in either heat or humidity. HVAC

systems should be operational and balanced, providing a temperature range of 50 to 90 degrees Fahrenheit, and 30 to 50 percent relative humidity.

6. When handling doors, always lift and carry. Do not drag across other doors or surfaces. Handle with clean hands or gloves.

7. Identify each door by number/tag according to accepted shop drawings. Each door is to be marked on top rail with opening number.

B. Accept doors on site in manufacturer's packaging. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect doors with resilient packaging. Do not store in damp or wet areas; or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. Seal top and bottom edges with tinted sealer if stored more than one week. Break seal on site to permit ventilation.


A. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer's warranty for the life of the installation.

B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Assa Abloy Graham: www.grahamdoors.com.

B. Eggers Industries: www.eggersindustries.com.

C. Haley Brothers: www.haleybros.com.

D. Marshfield Door Systems: www.marshfielddoors.com.

2.02 DOORS AND PANELS

A. General: 1. Provide solid core doors at all locations. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Tested to ratings indicated on drawings in accordance


with International Building Code ("positive pressure"); UL labeled without any visible seals when door is open.

B. Quality Level: Premium Grade, in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300.

C. Thickness: 1. Swing Doors: 1-3/4 inches (44 mm) thick unless otherwise indicated; flush

construction.

2.03 DOOR FACINGS

A. Wood Veneer Facing for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade Description: AA, in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1300. 2. Specie: Red oak. 3. Veneer Cut: Flat cut (plain sliced). 4. Vertical Edges: Same species as face veneer. 5. Matching:

a. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Book match. b. Doors in Pairs or Sets:

(1) Pair match each pair. (2) Set match pairs within 10 feet (3 m) of each other when doors are

closed.

2.04 DOOR AND PANEL CORES

A. Non-Rated Solid Core and 20 Minute Rated Doors: Type structural composite lumber core (SCLC), plies and faces as indicated above.

B. Fire Rated Doors: Mineral core, Type FD, plies and faces as indicated above; with core blocking as required to provide adequate anchorage of hardware without through-bolting.

2.05 ACCESSORIES

A. Glazing Stops: Wood, of same species as door facing, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws.

2.06 DOOR CONSTRUCTION

A. Fabricate doors in accordance with door quality standard specified.

B. Cores Constructed with Stiles and Rails: 1. Provide solid blocks at lock edge and top of door for closer for hardware

reinforcement.

C. Fit door edge trim to edge of stiles after applying veneer facing.

D. Factory machine doors for hardware other than surface-mounted hardware, in accordance with hardware requirements and dimensions.

E. Factory fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings, with edge clearances in accordance with specified quality standard. 1. Exception: Doors designated to be field-finished.

F. Provide edge clearances in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1700.


2.07 FACTORY FINISHING

A. Finish System: Transparent System TR-6 (catalyzed polyurethane) in accordance with AWI P-200, Section 1500. 1. AWI Grade: Premium. 2. Sheen (ASTM D 523): Satin. 3. Flame Spread (ASTM E 84): Finish system shall not affect wood flame

spread.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable.

C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out-of-tolerance for size or alignment.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and specified quality standard. 1. Install fire-rated doors in accordance with NFPA 80 requirements.

B. Do not field cut or trim factory-finished doors; if fit or clearance is not correct, replace door.

C. Use machine tools to cut or drill for hardware.

D. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames and hardware.

E. Coordinate installation of glazing.

3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Conform to specified quality standard for fit and clearance tolerances.

B. Conform to specified quality standard for maximum diagonal distortion.

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust doors for smooth and balanced door movement.

B. Adjust closers for full closure.

3.05 SCHEDULE - See Drawings

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08310 - 1 of 4 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

SECTION 08310

ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Wall access panels.

B. Ceiling access panels.

C. Related hardware and attachments.


A. Section 09220 - Portland Cement Plaster.

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings.

D. Division 15 - Mechanical.

E. Division 16 - Electrical.

1.03 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Verification: Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors and frames from trades, including mechanical and electrical, requiring access to concealed equipment and indicate on submittal schedule.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Door and panel units: Show types, elevations, thickness of metals, full size

profiles of door members. 2. Hardware: Show materials, finishes, locations of fasteners, types of

fasteners, locations and types of operating hardware, and details of installation.

3. General: Show connections of units and hardware to other Work. Include schedules showing location of each type and size of door and panel units.

C. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for each type of access door and panel assembly, including setting drawings, templates, fire-resistive characteristics, finish requirements, and details of anchorage devices. 1. Include complete schedule, types, locations, construction details, finishes,

latching or locking provisions, and other pertinent data.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation requirements and rough-in dimensions.


A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain access door and panel units, and frames for


entire Project from one source and one single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Wherever a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide access door and panel assemblies with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in Underwriter’s Laboratories (UL), “Building Materials Directory” for rating shown. 1. Provide 90 minute UL label at 2-hour rated partitions. 2. Provide 3 hour Warnock-Hersey label at horizontal applications, up to 24

inch wide x 36 inch high. 3. Provide 2 hour Warnock-Hersey label at horizontal applications greater than

24 inch wide x 36 inch high.

D. Size Variations: Obtain Consultant’s acceptance and approval of manufacturer’s standard size units that may vary slightly from sizes indicated on Drawings.

E. Coordination: Provide inserts and anchoring devices that will be built into other Work for installation of access door assemblies. Coordinate delivery with other Work to avoid delay.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Package and ship per manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. Store per manufacturer’s instructions. 1. Store in dry area out of direct sunlight.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: 1. Nystrom Building Products: www.nystrom.com

B. Other Manufacturers: 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, equivalent products by one of the

following manufacturers may be used: a. Acudor Products Inc.: www.acudor.com. b. Karp Associates, Inc.: www.karpinc.com. c. Milcor Inc.: www.milcorinc.com.

2. Manufacturer shall comply with minimum levels of material, color selection, and detailing indicated in Specifications or on Drawings. Consultant will be sole judge of appropriateness of substitutions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Commercial quality, cold steel sheet with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer.

B. Galvanized, bonderized steel with baked on rust inhibitive gray primer.

C. Type: No. 304 stainless steel with No. 4 satin polish finish.

2.03 ACCESS PANELS

A. Type 1 Access Panel (Interior, Flush - Walls and Ceilings): 1. Product:

a. Wallboard Surfaces: Nystrom NW (or equal).


2. Size: As indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 20 x 30 inches. 3. Door: Fabricate from 14-gauge cold rolled sheet steel. 4. Frame: Fabricate from 16-gauge cold rolled sheet steel. Provide 1/4 inch

mounting holes. a. Wallboard Surfaces: 22-gauge galvanized drywall bead at perimeter. c. Plaster Surfaces: 22-gauge galvanized plaster bead at perimeter.

5. Hinge: Concealed continuous piano hinge. 6. Latching/Locking Devices: Key-operated cylinder cam lock with 2 keys per

lock, keyed alike. 7. Finish: Galvanized, bonderized steel, with factory applied prime coat.

B. Type 2 Access Panel (Interior, Recessed): 1. Product:

a. Wallboard Surfaces: Nystrom RW (or equal). 2. Size: As indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 20 x 30 inches. 3. Door: Fabricate from 16-gauge cold rolled sheet steel recessed 5/8 inch for

in-fill of material. 4. Frame: Fabricate from 16-gauge cold rolled sheet steel of configuration to

suit material application. a. Wallboard Surfaces: 22-gauge galvanized drywall bead at perimeter. b. Plaster Surfaces: 22-gauge galvanized plaster bead at perimeter.

5. Hinge: Concealed pivoting rod. 6. Latching: Key-operated cylinder cam lock with 2 keys per lock, keyed alike. 7. Finish: Phosphate dipped with factory applied prime coat.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Manufacture each access panel assembly as an integral unit ready for installation.

B. Welded construction: Furnish with a sufficient quantity of 1/4 inch mounting holes to secure access panels to types of supports indicated.

C. Recessed panel: Form face of panel to provide specified recess for application of finish material. Reinforce panel as required to prevent buckling.

D. Furnish number of latches required to hold door in flush, smooth plane when closed.

PART 3 -EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that rough openings for door and frame are correctly sized and located.

B. Verify mechanical and electrical requirements for ceiling or wall access panels.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Advise installers of work relating to access panel installation including rough opening dimensions, locations of supports, and anchoring methods. Coordinate delivery with other work to avoid delay.

3.03 INSTALLATION


A. Install access door and frame units per manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install frames plumb and level in opening. Secure rigidly in place.

C. Position units to provide convenient access to concealed Work requiring access.

D. Fire-rated Units: Include UL or Warnock-Hersey labels.


A. Adjust panel after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace panels or frames that are warped, bowed, or damaged.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 008450 - 1 of 7 ALL GLASS ENTRANCES

SECTION 08450

ALL-GLASS ENTRANCES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Scope: Provide design and engineering, labor, material, equipment, related services, and supervision required, including, but not limited to, manufacturing, fabrication, erection, and installation for all-glass entrances as required for the complete performance of the work and as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified.

B. Section Includes: The work specified in this Section includes, but shall not be limited

to, the following: 1. Vestibule doors matching entrance doors.

2. Sidelites. 1.02 REFERENCES

A. General: The publications listed below form a part of this Specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only. The edition/revision of the referenced publications shall be the latest date as of the date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise specified. 1. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):

a. AAMA 611, "Voluntary Specifications for Anodized Architectural Aluminum (Revised).”

2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): a. ANSI Z97.1, "Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for

Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings." 3. ASTM (ASTM):

a. ASTM A 666, "Standard Specification for Austenitic Stainless Steel, Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar."

b. ASTM B 36/B 36M, "Standard Specification for Brass Plate, Sheet, Strip, and Rolled Bar."

c. ASTM B 221/B 221M, "Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes."

d. ASTM C 1048, "Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass."

e. ASTM E 329, "Standard Specification for Agencies Engaged in the Testing and/or Inspection of Materials Used in Construction."

4. Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association, Inc. (BHMA): a. ANSI/BHMA A156.4, "Door Controls - Closers" (copyrighted by BHMA, ANSI

approved). 5. Code of Federal Regulation (CFR):

a. 16 CFR Part 1201, "Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Material" (Consumer Products Safety Commission).

6. Glass Association of North America (GANA): a. GANA GM, "Glazing Manual."


7. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): a. NAAMM MFM, "Metal Finishes Manual."

1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Safety Glass Standard: Provide tempered glass components that comply with ANSI Z97.1 and testing requirements of 16 CFR Part 1201, Category II.

B. Testing Criteria for Door Rail: The door rail shall be tested to perform

1,000,000 cycles without any failures. The door rail shall also be subject to a temperature pulloff test at temperatures from -10 °F (-23 °C) to 150 °F (66 °C). The rail shall remain stationary throughout this test while a 500 pound (227 kg) pressure is applied.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit product data showing material proposed. Submit sufficient information to determine compliance with the Drawings and Specifications. Product data shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturer’s standard details and fabrication method. 2. Data on finishing, hardware, and accessories. 3. Recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior finish surfaces.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each product and accessory required.

Include information not fully detailed in manufacturer’s standard product data, including, but not limited to, the following: a. Layout and installation details. b. Elevations at 1/4 inch equals 1 foot (1:48) scale. c. Detail sections of fittings. d. Hardware mounting heights. e. Anchorage and reinforcement. f. Glazing details.

C. Samples:

a. Submit samples for initial color selection. Submit samples of each specified finish. Submit samples in form of manufacturer’s color charts showing full range of colors and finishes available. Where finishes involve normal color variations, include samples showing the full, range of variations expected.

b. Submit samples for verification. Submit samples of size indicated below and of

same thickness and material indicated for work. Show the full range of color and texture variations expected. a. Submit pairs of samples of each specified metal color and finish on 12 inch

(305 mm) long sections of extrusions or formed shapes. b. Submit samples of glass approximately 6 inches (152 mm) square showing the

edge conditions. c. Submit samples for exposed hardware of each type, in specified finish, full size.

D. Quality Control Submittals:

a. Qualification Data: Submit qualification data for firms and persons specified in Quality Assurance Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience.


Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names of architects and owners, and other information specified.

b. Product Test Reports: Submit certified product test reports based on tests performed by an accredited inspecting and testing laboratory clearly describing in written form, and in shop drawing form, compliance of the all-glass entrances with requirements indicated based on comprehensive testing.


A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications: Manufacturer shall be a firm engaged in the

manufacture of all-glass entrances of types and sizes required, and whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for a minimum of 15 years.

2. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be a firm that shall have a minimum of five years of successful installation experience with projects utilizing all-glass entrances similar in type and scope to that required for this Project.

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable requirements of the laws,

codes, ordinances, and regulations of Federal, State, and local authorities having jurisdiction. Obtain necessary approvals from such authorities.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to commencing the installation, meet at the

Project site to review the material selections, installation procedures, and coordination with other trades. Pre-installation conference shall include, but shall not be limited to, the Contractor, the Installer, and any trade that requires coordination with the work. Date and time of the pre-installation conference shall be acceptable to the Owner and the Architect.

D. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of all-glass entrance and required

accessories from a single source with resources to produce products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the work.


A. Deliver materials to the Project site in supplier’s or manufacturer’s original wrappings and containers, labeled with supplier’s or manufacturer’s name, material or product brand name, and lot number, if any. Do not deliver units until the work is ready for their installation. 1. Inspect components for damage upon delivery. Unless minor defects in metal

components can be made to meet the Architect’s satisfaction, damaged parts shall be removed and replaced.

2. Store materials in their original, undamaged packages and containers, inside a

well-ventilated area protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity.


A. Environmental Requirements: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly to be performed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.


B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to fabrication of the work and

preparation of shop drawings, to ensure proper fitting of the work. Show recorded measurements on final shop drawings. Notify the Owner and the Architect, in writing, of any dimensions found which are not within specified dimensions and tolerances in the Contract Documents, prior to proceeding with the fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the work. 1. Where necessary, proceed with fabrication without measurement and

coordinate fabrication tolerances to ensure proper fit. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Product specified is tempered glass swing safety entrances “Style P” with door rail system, all as manufactured Doralco Architectural Metal Solutions, a Div. of Doralco; 5919 W. 118th Street, Alsip, IL 60803; Phone: 888-443-6725; Fax: 708-388-9392; Web Site: www.doralco.com. Items specified are to establish a standard of quality for design, function, materials, and appearance. Equivalent products by other manufacturers are acceptable. The Architect will be the sole judge of the basis of what is equivalent.

B. Other Manufacturers: Subject to conformance with contract requirements

(including but not limited to Product Approval), equivalent products by the following manufacturers may be used. 1. Blumcraft of Pittsburgh- www.blumcraft.com 2. C.R. Laurence Company – www.crlaurence.com

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Glass: Provide flat, fully tempered glass in thickness indicated for doors and sidelites. Comply with requirements of ASTM C 1048 for Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type 1 (transparent), Class 1 (clear) glass. Provide products of thickness indicated that have been tested for surface and edge compression according to ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength according to 16 CFR Part 1201 for Category II materials.

1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). 2. Edge Treatment: Provide machine ground and polished edges for exposed

glass edges of doors and sidelites and flat ground edges for butting glass edges.

B. Fittings, General: Provide fittings fabricated from aluminum extrusions of alloy and

temper recommended by manufacturer for use intended and required for application of finish indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard fittings for configurations required, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Aluminum: Provide alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for use

and finish indicated, but not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221/B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5. a. Stainless Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304.


C. Door Rail Systems: Provide door rail systems matching metal and finish of door

fittings. The system shall offer pre-vinyled glazing for specified glass. Systems shall include, but shall not be limited to, door rails, patches, vertical stiles, center locks, and strike housings. Comply with GANA guidelines, GANA GM, and hardware manufacturer requirements for size restrictions. Door rails shall allow for 1/2 inch (13 mm) adjustability each way (1 inch [25 mm] overall) for standard hardware. System shall include, but shall not be limited to, end caps, blocking, and preparation. 1. Profile: Square. 2. Height: 4 inches (102 mm). 3. Glass Sizing: Glass sizing shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written

recommendations. 4. Assembly: Assembly shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s written

recommendations. Rails shall be assembled together with a tongue-and-groove method to ensure proper alignment and shall be mechanically joined with stainless steel bolts at strategically located positions as determined by procedures.

5. Type: Provide two-part dry-glazed system complete with hardware and miscellaneous items/equipment as herein specified or as required for a complete installation. Door rails shall have a minimum gasket thickness of 0.625 inch (15.88 mm) with a minimum thickness of 0.187 inch (4.75 mm) for the aluminum at the clamping portion on both sides of the glass. a. Basis of Design: “Sure-Grip Dry-Glazed,” Doralco Architectural Metal Solutions, a Div. of Doralco.

D. Sidelite Systems: Provide sidelite systems matching metal and finish of door

fittings. The system shall offer pre-vinyled glazing for specified glass.

E. Door Fittings: Provide fittings of the profile and arrangement indicated. Comply with requirements indicated for kind and form of metal finish.

F. Accessory Fittings: Provide manufacturer’s standard accessory fittings of the type

indicated. Comply with requirements indicated for kind and form of metal and finish of door fittings.

G. Anchors and Fastenings: Provide manufacturer’s standard concealed anchors and

fastenings. Do not use exposed fasteners.

H. Lock Cylinders: Lock cylinders for tempered glass entrance doors are specified in Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

2.03 HARDWARE

A. General: Prep for heavy-duty hardware units as indicated, scheduled, or required for operation of type of door, including, but not limited to, the following items of sizes, number, and type recommended by the manufacturer for the type of service required. Provide metal and finish for exposed parts to match finish of overhead fittings. For any related auxiliary hardware which is not work of this Section, see Section 08710 - Door Hardware.

B. Concealed Overhead Closer: Provide manufacturer's standard heavy duty,

concealed overhead closer complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.4 requirements. An auxiliary stop must be used when the door has an overhead concealed closer.


C. Overhead Door Stop: Provide overhead door stop systems.

D. Locks: Equip exterior doors with manufacturer’s locksets that accept a standard

cylinder with related components. Comply with the following. 1. Location and Function: Provide round throw deadbolt in continuous bottom fitting. Key outside and thumbturn inside shall operate lock with endload capability.

E. Cylinders: Cylinders are supplied under another section, for keying into building

system.

F. Threshold: Provide manufacturer’s standard extruded aluminum threshold in mill finish. Coordinate cutouts with operating hardware. Include anchors and jamb clips.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate all-glass entrance components to designs and sizes indicated. Sizes of door and profile requirements of fittings and hardware shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 1. Locate and provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware before

tempering glass. Do not permit cutting, drilling, or other alterations to glass after tempering.

2. Fabricate work to accommodate required fittings, hardware, anchors, reinforcement, and accessory items.

B. Prefabrication: Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work to the greatest extent possible before shipment to the site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.

1. Continuity: Maintain accurate relation of planes and angles with hairline fit of

contacting members. 2.05 FINISHES

A. Comply with NAAMM MFM for architectural metal products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

1. Stainless Steel Finishes: Remove or blend tool marks, die marks, and stretch

lines into finish. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean. a. Bright, Directional Polish: No. 4 finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which the work is to be installed, and notify the Contractor in writing, with a copy to the Owner and the Architect, of any conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


1. Beginning of the work shall indicate acceptance of the areas and conditions as satisfactory by the Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install all-glass entrance doors and associated components in accordance reviewed

product data, final shop drawings, as indicated on the Drawings, and in accordance with manufacturer’s printed instructions and recommendations. 1. Set units level, plumb, and true-to-line. 2. Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.

3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust doors and hardware to provide a tight fit at contact points and at

weatherstripping for smooth operation and weathertight closure. 1. Hardware: Adjust operating hardware to ensure proper operation. Set, seal,

and grout floor closer cases. Coordinate cylinder installation.

B. Cleaning: Clean door and frame surfaces after installation, exercising care to avoid damage to finish. 1. Clean glass surfaces after installation, complying with requirements contained

in Section 08800 - Glazing for cleaning and maintenance. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt, and other substances.

C. PROTECTION

1. Provide final protection and maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the

Installer, which shall ensure that the all-glass entrances shall be without damage at time of Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08710 - 1 of 13 DOOR HARDWARE

SECTION 08710

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Door hardware for steel doors, wood doors, and glass entrance doors.

C. Lock cylinders for doors for which hardware is specified in other sections.


A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.

B. Section 08211 - Wood Doors.

C. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels.

D. Section 08450 – All Glass Entrances.

1.03 REGULATORY AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Door hardware shall comply with applicable requirements Federal, State, and local codes, and the following standards: 1. Accessibility: Governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B

CHAPTER 11. a. ANSI/ICC A117.1.

2. Life Safety: Governing building code, including but not limited to the following: a. FBC-B SECTIONS 1008, and 1027. b. FBC-B CHAPTER 36, and FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE.

1) Applicable provisions of NFPA 1 (FL). 2) Applicable provisions of NFPA 101 (FL).

3. Structural: Governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 1714.5.

4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Hardware for Fire-Rated Openings: Door hardware shall comply with the following: 1. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with FLORIDA

BUILDING CODE (FBC), NFPA 80, and UL 10C. a. This requirement takes precedence over other requirements for such

hardware. b. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for the

types and sizes of doors required, and complies with the requirements of the door and door frame labels. 1) Where panic exit devices are required on fire-rated doors, provide

supplementary marking on door UL label indicating Fire Door to be equipped with fire exit hardware, and provide UL label on exit device indicating "Fire Exit Hardware".

1.04 SUBMITTALS



B. Hardware Schedule: Detailed hardware schedule, vertical format. 1. Prepare under the supervision of a registered Architectural Hardware

Consultant. 2. List and describe each opening separately. Include all doors with identical

hardware, except hand, in a single heading. Include door number, room designations, degree of swing, and hand.

3. List related details. Include dimensions, door and frame material, and other considerations affecting hardware.

4. List all hardware items to be supplied. Include manufacturer's name, quantity, product name, catalog number, size, finish, and related details needed to specifically identify what is being supplied.

5. Attach copies of catalog information for each item that include graphics to help visually identify each item.

6. For each opening with electrical hardware: Prepare and include a riser diagram showing each electrical item in its rough location in relation to the door, all conductor requirements, and the type of back box needed to be supplied by electrical. Each riser diagram should include a detailed written description of the operation of the opening.

7. Resubmit (5) copies of the corrected schedule when required.

C. Keying Schedule: Submit keying schedule after completion of the following: 1. Receipt of approved hardware schedule. 2. Keying meeting between the Project Manager and the hardware supplier

D. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware,

schedules, catalog cuts, electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists and templates.

E. Samples: 1. Submit 1 sample of hinge, latchset, lockset, and closer illustrating style,

color, and finish. 2. Samples will be incorporated into the Work.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

G. Keys: Deliver with identifying tags to Project Manager by security shipment direct from hardware supplier.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in City's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.

B. Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Company specializing in supplying commercial door hardware with five years of documented experience.


1. Hardware Supplier Personnel: Employ an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) to assist in the work of this section.

C. Fasteners: 1. Hardware as furnished, shall conform to published templates generally

prepared for machine screw installation. 2. Furnish each item complete with all screws required for installation. 3. Insofar as practical, concealed type fasteners for hardware units that have

exposed screws shall be furnished with Phillips flat head screws, finished to match adjacent hardware.


A. Package hardware items individually; label and identify each package with door opening code to match hardware schedule.

B. Wrap, protect finishing hardware items for shipment. Deliver to manufacturing contractors, all hardware items required by them for their application; deliver balance of hardware to the job site. Each item shall be clearly marked with its intended location.

C. Keys: Do not package keys with the individual hardware sets.

D. Store hardware in a secure location.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with other directly affected sections involving manufacture or fabrication of internal reinforcement for door hardware.

B. Furnish templates for door and frame preparation.

C. Sequence installation to ensure utility connections are achieved in an orderly and expeditious manner.

D. Coordinate City's keying requirements during the course of the Work.

1.08 MAINTENANCE PRODUCTS

A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component.

B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hinges: Hager, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Locks and Latches (except electronic security type): Schlage. 1. Keying and Cylinders: Everest Primus.

C. Locks and Latches (electronic security type): Kaba Access Control.

D. Push/Pulls: Rockwood.

E. Exit Devices (Panic Hardware): Falcon/Monarch/Dor-O-Matic.


F. Closers: LCN.

G. Overhead Stops / Holders: Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg. Inc.

H. Wall Stops / Floor Stops: Hager or Trimco (Triangle Brass Mfg Co., Inc.).

I. Manual Bolts: Hager or Rockwood.

J. Gasketing / Weatherstripping: Hager or Pemko.

K. Thresholds: Hager or Pemko.

L. Protection Plates: Hiawatha, Inc. or Rockwood

2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DOOR HARDWARE PRODUCTS

A. Provide products that comply with the following: 1. Applicable provisions of Federal, State, and local codes. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: NFPA 80. 3. All Hardware on Fire-Rated Doors: Listed and classified by UL as suitable

for the purpose specified and indicated. 4. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

B. Finishes: Identified in schedule at end of section.

2.03 BUTT HINGES

A. General Requirements: 1. Size: 4.5 x 4.5 inches, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Quantity per Door Leaf: Furnish number of hinges indicated in Door

Hardware Schedule, but not fewer than the following: a. Interior Doors: For each door, furnish number of hinges indicated in

Door Hardware Schedule or as follows, which ever is greater. 1) Doors that are more than 60 inches to 90 inches in height: Three

(3) hinges per door leaf, except as otherwise indicated.

B. Hinges at Interior Doors: Full mortise, standard weight; five knuckle; two ball bearings; non-rising removable concealed pin and plug. 1. At interior doors, except doors to rooms that are exposed to high humidity

and/or water: a. Product: Hager BB1279BB. b. Finish: 652 (US26D).

2. At interior doors to rooms that are exposed to high humidity and/or water (e.g., Toilet Rooms): a. Product: Hager BB1191BB. b. Finish: 630 (US32D).

2.04 LOCKS, LATCHES AND CYLINDERS

A. Bore-In Deadbolt Locks: 1. General:

a. Deadbolt locks shall not be used on labeled doors. b. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. c. Finish: 626 (US26D), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Product: Schlage B663P. a. Function: Classroom Deadbolt.


b. Latch: Schlage 12-631 (for 2-3/4 inch backset).

B. Locksets: 1. General:

a. Locksets shall be furnished and assembled with cylinder and labeled with door tag number and key symbol from hardware supplier, and shall meet Regulatory and Performance Requirements.

b. Backset: 2-3/4 inches. c. Tactile Warning (knurling) is required on outside levers at doors into

Mechanical Rooms, Electrical Rooms, and other hazardous rooms. d. Finish: 626 (US26D), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Product: Schlage D Series, Rhodes lever design. a. Non-keyed Locks: Not applicable.

1) Passage Lock: Schlage ND10S-RHO. 2) Bath/Bed Privacy: Schlage ND40S-RHO.

b. Keyed Locks: 1) Entrance/Office Lock: Schlage ND50PD-RHO. 2) Classroom Function: Schlage ND70PD-RHO. 3) Storeroom Function: Schlage ND80PD-RHO (or ND80PD-8RO,

where tactile warning is required). 4) Entrance/Office Lock w/ VandalGuard feature (locked lever freely

rotates up and down while remaining securely locked): Schlage ND91PD-RHO.

5) Classroom Lock w/ VandalGuard feature (locked lever freely rotates up and down while remaining securely locked): Schlage ND94PD-RHO.

C. 3-Point Locking System: 1. General: Comply with applicable Regulatory and Performance

Requirements, including but not limited to specified accessibility requirements, wind load pressure ratings, and Product Approval requirements.

2. For Exterior Storefront Entrances: Per door manufacturer’s Miami-Dade County Product Approval NOA. a. Refer to Section 08410 for additional requirements.

D. Lock Cylinders: Provide cylinders for new locks, including locks provided under other sections of the technical specifications. 1. General:

a. Type: Six-pin and single ring only. b. Finish: 626 (US26D), unless otherwise indicated.

2.05 EXIT DEVICES

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable Regulatory and Performance Requirements,

including but not limited to specified accessibility requirements, wind load pressure ratings (exit devices at exterior doors), and Product Approval requirements (exit devices at exterior doors).

2. Special Features: a. Glass Bead Kit: Provide glass bead kit for use on doors with raised

glass beads. b. Vertical Rod and Latch Guard: Where surface-mounted vertical rod is


installed, provide Vertical Rod and Latch Guard to protect the bottom rod and latch.

3. Finish: a. Lock Stile Cover, Touch Bar End Cap, and Mechanism End Cap:

Stainless steel. b. Touch Bar: 630 (US32D). c. Mechanism Housing: Aluminum, clear anodized finish.

B. Products: 1. Interior Doors: Falcon/Monarch/Dor-O-Matic HH1590 Series Rim Touchbar

Exit Device with keyed cylinder and pull, or equal.

2.06 DOOR BOLTS

A. General: 1. Comply with applicable Regulatory and Performance Requirements,

including but not limited to specified accessibility requirements, wind load pressure ratings (door bolts at exterior doors), and Product Approval requirements (door bolts at exterior doors).

2. Install head/foot bolts at LHR leaf in each pair of doors without a center mullion, at openings into telephone closets, mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, and interior storage rooms. a. Comply with NFPA 80, section 2.8-2.5.

3. Provide dustproof strikes for bottom bolts, except for doors having metal thresholds.

B. Surface-Mounted Head/Foot Bolts: 1. Shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L04161 or L84161. 2. Finish: 630 (US32D). 3. Product: Hager 275D (UL).

C. Flush Head/Foot Bolts: 1. Shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L14251.

a. Dustproof floor strikes shall meet BHMA A156.16 requirements for L04251.

2. Finish: 626 (US26D). 3. Product: Rockwood 555, with 570 Dust Proof Strike (to prevent dirt blocking

bottom strike).

2.07 CLOSERS

A. General: 1. Provide closer(s) at fire-rated doors, aluminum storefront entrance doors,

and other designated doors. a. Pair Doors: Install one closer at each leaf in pair of doors, except when

leaf is equipped with head and foot bolts. 3. Provide closers with metal covers, extra-duty arms, installation accessories

(e.g., plates, brackets, supports, spacers, shoes, adaptors), fasteners, and other components necessary for complete installation at each particular application.

4. Size: Non-sized cylinder shall be fully adjustable (i.e., Sizes 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6) for exterior doors to 48 inches wide, and for interior doors to 60 inches


wide. 5. Reduced Opening Force: Shall be adjustable; maximum opening force shall

comply with applicable accessibility requirements of ANSI/ICC A117.1 and FBC-BUILDING CHAPTER 11.

6. Closers shall be UL listed for self-closing doors; tested and certified under BHMA A156.4, Grade 1.

7. Warranty: Provide manufacturer's 10-year warranty.

B. Product: LCN Series P4041 x EDA.

2.08 AUXILIARY HARDWARE - DOOR PULLS, DOOR PROTECTION PLATES, DOORSTOPS AND HOLDS

A. Door Pulls / Door Protection Plates: 1. General:

a. Material: 18-gage (0.050 inch) thick stainless steel. b. Plates at fire labeled doors shall be UL-labeled. c. Shall meet the following BHMA A156.6 requirements:

1) Metal Armor Plate: J101. 2) Metal Kickplate: J102. 3) Metal Push Plate: J301. 4) Door Pull: J401.

d. Finish: 630 (US32D). 2. Kick Plates:

a. Size: 1) 18 inches high x width of door less 2 inches, except at doors with

louvers or as otherwise indicated. 2) 4 inches high x width of door less 2 inches, at doors with louvers.

b. Product: Hiawatha metal kick plate. 3. Push Plates:

a. Size: 4 inches wide x 16 inches high. b. Product: Rockwood 70C.

4. Door Pull / Plates: a. Size: 4 inches wide x 16 inches high. b. Product: Rockwood 122 x 70C.

B. Doorstops and Holds: 1. General:

a. Wall-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Provide at all doors, except at doors where a wall-mounted stop is impractical. 1) Include adequate concealed backing reinforcement where doorstop

is to be installed on drywall or plaster wall surface. 2) Finish - Base: US32D.

b. Floor-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Provide at doors only where wall-mounted stop is impractical. 1) At carpeted floors, provide 3/8-inch (10 mm) thick riser plate, with

machined finish. 2) Finish: US26D.

c. Overhead Doorstop and Hold: Provide at doors only where wall-mounted stop and floor-mounted stop is impractical. 1) Surface mounted. 2) Finish: US26D.

2. Products:


a. Wall-Mounted Doorstop: 1) Convex Type (for doors not having push button lockset): Hager

230W. 2) Concave Type (for doors having office function or push-button

lockset): Hager 234W. b. Floor-Mounted Doorstop and Hold: Hager 258F. c. Overhead Doorstop and Hold: ABH 3324.

2.09 SILENCERS, WEATHER STRIPPING, THRESHOLDS, AND MISCELLANEOUS TRIM

A. Silencers: 1. General:

a. Provide three silencers for each single door, two for each pair. 2. Product: Hager 307D.

B. Weather Stripping, Thresholds, Door Bottoms, and Astragals: 1. General:

a. Thresholds shall comply with accessibility requirements specified in Regulatory and Performance Requirements; in addition, thresholds installed at exterior openings shall comply with Product Approval requirements.

b. Provide rain drips for all exterior doors not having overhead roof protection.

c. Stop-applied soundseals or weather stripping shall not exceed 5/16-inch thickness.

2. Product: a. Thresholds:

1) Panic Type Thresholds, 5 inches wide x 1/2 inch high (for exterior and sound control use): Hager 520SAS. Pemko 2005AV, or equal.

2) Saddle Type Thresholds: (a) 3 inches wide x 1/4 inch high (only for interior use at change of

floor finishes): Hager 418SA, Pemko 151A, or equal. (b) 5 inches wide x 1/4 inch high (only for interior use at change of

floor finishes): Hager 413SA, Pemko 271A, or equal. 3) Marble Threshold (for toilet rooms): Marble, white or gray, honed

finish; 2 inches (50 mm) wide by full width of wall or frame opening; 1/2 inch (12 mm) thick thick; beveled one long edge with radiused corners on top side; without holes, cracks, or open seams.

b. Door Bottoms: 1) Brush Type Sweep: Hager, 801S, Pemko ____, or equal. 2) Automatic, Low Closing Force: Hager 740S, Pemko 4131CSL, or

equal. c. Weather Stripping / Soundseals:

1) Rigid Weather Stripping: Hager 891SAS, Pemko 303DS, or equal. 2) Press-On Weather Stripping: Hager 736S, Pemko S88W, or equal. 3) Brush Type Weather Stripping: Hager 801S, Pemko ___, or equal. 4) Soundproofing: Hager 862-SXN or -SDN, Pemko

d. Astragals: Hager 837SAV.

C. Miscellaneous Fasteners and Trim: 1. Fasteners:

a. Hollow Metal Doors: Accepted machine.


b. Kick Plates: O.H. Phillips recess Type A SMS. c. Thresholds: Hager FHSL 25-1/4 x 1/4-20 x 2 inches cadmium-plated

expansion screw in one unit, or accepted equivalent. d. Brush Type Weather Stripping: As recommended by manufacturer. e. Finish: Match finish of surfaces to which fastener is applied.

2. Rain Drip Guards: a. General:

1) Material: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.08 inch (2.03 mm) thick.

2) Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. 3) Overhead Drip Guards: Approximately 1.5 inches (38 mm) high x

2.5 inches (64 mm) projection, with length equal to width of door frame; align bottom of drip guard with door frame rabbet, unless otherwise indicated.

4) Door Rain Drips: Approximately 1.5 inches (38 mm) high x 5/8-inch (16 mm) projection, with length equal to width of door; align bottom edge of drip with bottom edge of door.

b. Product: 1) Overhead Drip Guards: Hager 810S.

2.10 CYLINDERS AND CORES

A. Provide cylinders and cores for new locks, including locks provided under other sections. Provide cylinders and cores with six pin tumblers. 1. Product: Schlage Full Size Interchangeable Core.

b. Interior Doors: Schlage Everest Primus conventional keys.

B. Provide cylinders from products of one manufacturer, and provide cores from the products of one manufacturer.

C. Rim cylinders, mortise cylinders, and knobs of bored locksets shall have interchangeable cores which are removable by special control keys.

D. Stamp each interchangeable core with a key control symbol in a concealed place on the core.

2.11 KEYING

A. Meeting: The Hardware Supplier shall prepare a preliminary keying schedule, then meet with the Project Manager and Consultant to review it and make changes to accommodate the City’s requirements. 1. Prior to meeting, submit proposed keying schedule to Project Manager and

Consultant.

B. Master key cylinders and key in groups, unless otherwise specified. Factory-masterkey with manufacturer retaining permanent keying records. 1. Provide 6 masterkeys for each masterkey set. 2. Provide 3 change keys for each lock. 3. Provide 2 control keys for core removal. 4. Stamp keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE."

C. Cylinders shall meet the requirements of UL 437.

D. Delivery of Keys: Change keys shall be packed and delivered with each lock or cylinder. Master keys shall be sent by Registered Mail, or otherwise as


requested by the Project Manager, to the individual and address that the Project Manager specifies at the keying meeting.

2.12 KEY CABINET

A. Cabinet Construction: Sheet steel construction, piano hinged door with lock master keyed to building system.

B. Cabinet Size: Size for project keys plus 10 percent growth.

C. Horizontal metal strips for key hook labeling with clear plastic strip cover over labels.

D. Finish: Baked enamel, color as selected.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings.

B. Verify that electric power is available to power operated devices and of the correct characteristics.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Florida

Building Code. 2. Use templates provided by hardware item manufacturer. 3. Install hardware on fire-rated doors and frames in accordance with Florida

Building Code and NFPA 80. 4. Mounting heights for hardware from finished floor to center line of hardware

item: a. For Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI (LOCS).

1) Designated Interior Doors: Where mounting height(s) indicated in applicable Product Approval Installation Instructions conflict with mounting height(s) recommended in DHI (LOCS), the requirements of the Product Approval Installation Instructions shall prevail.

b. Push Plates: 1-inch above pushpad, and 1-inch from exit device head. c. Push Plate with a Vision Panel: 1-inch above exit device, and centered

between vision panel and edge of door. d. Door Pulls: Top hole of door pull shall be 2 inches above the bottom of

exit device casing, at casing centerline. e. Kick Plates / Armor Plates:

1) Push side of single-acting doors; both sides of double acting doors. 2) 1-inch from door bottom, or 1/2-inch from top of surface mounted

automatic door bottom. f. Mop Plates: Bottom, flush with bottom of door. g. Key Cabinet: Locate where directed. Tag one set of file keys and one

set of duplicate keys; place other keys in appropriately marked envelopes, or tag each key. Furnish complete instructions for setup and use of key control system. On tags and envelopes, indicate door and room numbers, or master or grand master key.


3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Adjust hardware for smooth operation.


A. Protect finished Work under provisions of Section 01700.

B. Do not permit adjacent work to damage hardware or finish.

3.05 HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Quantity Description Model Number Finish

Hardware Set 1: Not used.

Hardware Set 3: Interior Single Door – Mechanical. 4 ea Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 630 1 ea Storeroom Lock ND96RD RHO 626 1 ea Surface Closer 4111 SCUSH SRI 689 1 set Weatherstrip PS-074 SINGLE BLK 1 set Door Bottom 8424 GRY 1 ea Threshold 950V AL

Hardware Set 4: Exterior Single Door – Electrical. 4 ea Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 630 1 ea Storeroom Lock ND96RD RHO 626 1 ea Surface Closer 4111 SCUSH SRI 689 1 set Weatherstrip PS-074 SINGLE BLK 1 set Door Bottom 8424 GRY 1 ea Threshold 950V AL 1 ea Lock Guard LG10 630



Hardware Set 8: Interior Single Door – Janitor. 4 ea Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 1 ea Storeroom Lock ND96PD RHO 626 1 ea Surface Closer 1461 689 1 ea Wall Stop 1270CVPV 630 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY




Hardware Set 12: Interior Single Door – Restrooms (Men / Women). 4 ea Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 1 ea Push Plate 8200 8” x 16” 630 1 ea Pull Plate 8303-0 4” x 16” 630 1 ea Surface Closer 1461 689 1 ea Kick Plate 8400 10” x 2” LDW 630 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CVX 630 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY



Hardware Set 14: Interior Single Door – Bathroom. 4 ea Hinge 5PB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 1 ea Privacy Set ND40S RHO 626 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CVX 630 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY

Hardware Set 15: Interior Single Door – Office. 4 ea Hinge 5PB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 NRP 652 1 ea Office Lock ND91PD RHO 626 1 ea Wall Stop WS407CVPV 630 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY GRY

Hardware Set 17: Interior Single Door – Storage. 4 ea Hinge 5BB1 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 652 1 ea Storeroom Lock ND96PD RHO 626 1 ea Surface Closer 1461 CUSH 689 1 ea Wall Stop 1270CVPV 630 3 ea Silencer SR64 GRY

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 08800 - 1 of 7 GLASS & GLAZING

SECTION 08800

GLASS AND GLAZING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Glass and related glazing.


A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.

C. Section 08450 – All Glass Entrances

1.03 DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Safety Glazing: Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 2403.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. General: Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations for setting blocks,

spacers and edge clearance, and installation instructions. 2. Product Data on Glass Types: For each type of glass product to be used,

provide complete product data including but not limited to structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. In addition, provide fire resistance testing reports and performance characteristics for fire resistance rated glass products.

3. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: For each type of glazing compound to be used, provide complete product data including but not limited to chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.

C. Samples: 1. Color Charts: For preformed glazing materials and glazing sealant. 2. Glass: Submit two samples 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size of each type

of glass unit to be used, showing coloration and design.

D. Certifications: 1. Certification of tempered and laminated glass complying with Consumer

Product Safety Commission 16CFR 1201-CII.

E. Pre-construction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: Submit glazing sealant manufacturer’s test report indicating glazing sealants were tested for adhesion to glass and glazing channel substrates and for compatibility with glass and other glazing materials.



A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (LGDG) for glazing installation methods.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.

C. Labels: Comply with labeling requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 1707 and 2403, and as follows: 1. Label each unit of glass with manufacturer's sticker showing quality, grade,

thickness, and type of glass. 2. Labels shall remain in place until approval by the Consultant. 3. Temporary labels:

a. Provide temporary label on each light of glass identifying manufacturer or brand and glass type, quality and nominal thickness.

b. Label in accordance with NFRC (National Fenestration Rating Council) label requirements.

c. Temporary labels shall remain intact until glass is approved by building official.

4. Permanent labels: a. Locate in corner for each pane, except as otherwise required by the

governing building code. b. Label in accordance with ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC (Safety Glass

Certification Council) label requirements. 1) Tempered glass. 2) Laminated glass (or have certificate for panes without permanent

label). 3) Organic coated glass.

D. Manufacturer's Certificates: 1. Certificate stating that safety glass meets the applicable requirements for

safety glazing material as specified in ANSI Z97.1. 2. Certificate on shading coefficient. 3. Certificate on "R" value when value is specified.

E. Glass of each type shall be supplied by the same manufacturer


A. Delivery: Schedule delivery to coincide with glazing schedules so minimum handling of crates is required. Do not open crates except as required for inspection for shipping damage.

B. Storage: Store cases according to printed instructions on case, in areas least subject to traffic or falling objects. Keep storage area clean and dry.

C. Handling: Unpack cases following printed instructions on case. Stack individual windows on edge leaned slightly against upright supports with separators between each.


A. Field Measurements: Field measure openings before ordering tempered glass products. Be responsible for proper fit of field-measured products.


B. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F (10 degrees C).

C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

D. All glass panels used in each type of glazing application (e.g., curtain wall, storefront, etc.) shall be of the same thickness; minimum thickness shall meet specified performance requirements.

PART 2 PRODUCT

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Glass: 1. Basis of Design:

a. PPG Industries. 2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to conformance with contract requirements

(including but not limited to Product Approval), equivalent products by the following manufacturers may be used. a. Guardian Industries. b. Oldcastle Glass. c. Viracon. d. Saf-Glas, LLC.

B. Glazing Sealant: Dow Corning 999-A or 995 Silicone Building and Glazing Sealant, or General Electric Contractors 1000 Sealant.

C. Backer Rod: Dow Corning Ethafoam SB polyethelene cord or butyl rubber foam cord.

D. Edge Protection Tape for Laminated Glass: "Scotch Brand Cellopane Tape", manufactured by 3M Company.

2.02 FULLY-TEMPERED GLASS

A. General: 1. Impact Safety Rating: ANSI Z97.1 and CPSC 16 CFR 1201 (Cat. I & II);

obtain safety glazing ANSI Z97.1 and SGCC label. 2. Use horizontal tempering to eliminate tong marks, and install temper

direction parallel to floor to minimize visual distortion effect.

B. Glass Type 1CFT - Clear Tempered Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3. 1. Thickness: As indicated in Glazing Schedule; minimum 13 mm (1/2 inch).

2.03 GLAZING COMPOUNDS AND ACCESSORIES

A. As required to supplement the accessories provided with the items to be glazed and to provide a complete installation. Ferrous metal accessories exposed in the finished work shall have a finish that will not corrode or stain while in service.

B. Setting Blocks: ASTM C 864: 1. Channel shape; having 1/4-inch (6 mm) internal depth. 2. Shore a hardness of 80 to 90 Durometer.


3. Block Lengths: Two inches (50 mm), except four to six inches (100 to 150 mm) for insulating glass.

4. Block width: Approximately 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) less than the full width of the rabbet.

5. Block thickness: Minimum 3/16 inch (4.8 mm). Thickness sized for rabbet depth as required.

C. Spacers: ASTM C 864: 1. Channel shape having a 1/4-inch (6 mm) internal depth. 2. Flanges not less 3/32 inch (2.4 mm) thick and web 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick. 3. Lengths: One to one to three inches (25 to 76 mm). 4. Shore a hardness of 40 to 50 Durometer.

D. Sealing Tapes: 1. Semi-solid polymeric based material exhibiting pressure-sensitive adhesion

and withstanding exposure to sunlight, moisture, heat, cold, and aging. 2. Shape, size and degree of softness and strength suitable for use in glazing

application to prevent water infiltration.

E. Spring Steel Spacer: Galvanized steel wire or strip designed to position glazing in channel or rabbeted sash with stops.

F. Glazing Clips: Galvanized steel spring wire designed to hold glass in position in rabbeted sash without stops.

G. Glazing Points (Sprigs): Pure zinc stock, thin, flat, triangular or diamond shaped pieces, 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum size.

H. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 864; compression gaskets, closed cell, neoprene, EPDM or silicone rubber composition designed to provide a water-resistant seal between glass and frame. 1. Firm dense wedge shape for locking in sash. 2. Soft, closed cell with locking key for sash key. 3. Flanges may terminate above the glazing-beads or terminate flush with top

of beads.

I. Lock-Strip Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C 542, shape, size, and mounting as indicated. 1. Do not use non-skinning sealants.

J. Glazing Sealants: ASTM C 920, silicone neutral cure: 1. Type S. 2. Class 25 3. Grade NS. 4. Shore A hardness of 25 to 30 Durometer.

K. Structural Sealant: ASTM C 920, silicone acetoxy cure: 1. Type S. 2. Class 25. 3. Grade NS. 4. Shore a hardness of 25 to 30 Durometer.

L. Neoprene or EPDM Glazing Gasket: ASTM C 864.


1. Channel shape; flanges may terminate above the glazing channel or flush with the top of the channel.

2. Designed for dry glazing.

M. Glazing Compounds and Accessories for Fire-Resistant Glass: 1. Glazing Tape: Closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) foam tape, with adhesive

on two sides. 2. Silicone Sealant: One-part neutral curing silicone.

a. “Dow Corning 795” by Dow Corning Corp. b. “Siliglaze-II 2800” by General Electric Co. c. “Spectrum 2” by Tremco Inc.

3. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, EPDM, calcium silicate, or hardwood; as tested for compatibility with glazing compound.

4. Cleaner, Primer, and Sealant: Type recommended by manufacturer of glass and gaskets.

N. Color (Glazing Compounds, Gaskets, and Sealants): 1. Color of glazing compounds, gaskets, and sealants used for aluminum color

frames shall match color of the finished aluminum and be non-staining. 2. Color of other glazing compounds, gaskets, and sealants that will be

exposed in the finished work and unpainted shall be black, gray, or neutral color.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify that openings for glass and glazing units are of proper size; plumb;

square; and level before installation is started. 2. Verify that glazing openings conform to details, dimensions and tolerances

indicated on manufacturer’s approved shop drawings.

B. Advise Contractor of conditions that may adversely affect glass and glazing unit installation, prior to commencement of installation. 1. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been

corrected.

C. Verify that wash down of adjacent wall construction (e.g., tilt-up precast concrete) is completed prior to erection of glass and glazing units, to prevent damage to glass and glazing units by cleaning materials.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. For sealant glazing, prepare glazing surfaces in accordance with GANA (SM).

B. Determine glazing unit size and edge clearances by measuring the actual unit to receive the glazing.

C. Shop-fabricate and cut glass with smooth, straight edges of full size required by openings to provide GANA recommended edge clearances.

D. Verify that components used are compatible.

E. Clean and dry glazing surfaces.


F. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealants, as determined by pre-construction sealant-substrate testing.


A. Install in accordance with GANA (GM) and GANA (SM), unless specified otherwise.

B. Glass Cutting: Make cuts clean, only moderately convoluted, with flare or bevel not exceeding 1/8 of glass thickness. 1. Unacceptable defects:

a. Impact chips, spalls, or nipped edges. b. Flake chips or shark teeth deeper than 1/4 of glass thickness. c. Serration hackle deeper than 1/8 of glass thickness.

C. Do not attempt to cut, seam, nip, or abrade glass tempered or heat strengthened.

D. Remove and replace glass broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction.

E. Glaze in accordance with recommendations of glazing and framing manufacturers, and as required to meet the Performance Test Requirements specified in other applicable sections of specifications.

F. Set glazing without bending, twisting, or forcing of units.

G. Do not allow glass to rest on or contact any framing member.

H. Glaze doors until sealant, glazing compound, or putty has thoroughly set.

I. Tempered Glass: Install with roller distortions in horizontal position unless otherwise directed. .

3.04 INSTALLATION - DRY METHOD (TAPE AND GASKET SPLINE GLAZING)

A. Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing pane. Seal corners by butting and sealing junctions with butyl sealant.

B. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points with edge block no more than 6 inches 150 mm) from corners, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact.

D. Install removable stops without displacing glazing spline. Exert pressure for full continuous contact.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Trim protruding tape edge.

3.05 REPLACEMENT AND CLEANING

A. Replace cracked, broken, and imperfect glass, or glass which has been installed improperly.


B. Remove temporary labels, paint spots, and defacement.

C. After glass has been inspected and approved, remove labels and wash and polish glass on both faces before the Board's approval of the project. 1. Comply with glass manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials

and methods.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Protect finished surfaces from damage during erection, and after completion of work. Strippable plastic coatings on colored anodized finish are not acceptable.

3.07 GLAZING SCHEDULE

A. Entrances: 1. Interior Storefront:

a. Glass: Type 1CFT. b. Glazing Method: Interior Dry Method, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Interior Entrance: a. Glass: Same as Interior Storefront. b. Glazing Method: Interior Dry Method, except as otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09260 - 1 of 25 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

SECTION 09260

GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Gypsum board and accessories.

B. Metal studs and furring.

C. Metal shaftwall systems.

D. Sound-rated construction and accessories.

E. Gypsum board finishing.

F. Trim and accessories.



B. Section 07212 - Building Insulation.

C. Section 07840 - Firestopping.

D. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers.

E. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames.

F. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels.

G. Section 09300 - Tile: Cementitious tile backer board attached to stud framing or furring.

H. Section 09511 - Suspended Acoustical Ceilings.

I. Section 09650 - Resilient Base and Moldings.

J. Section 09900 - Paints and Coatings: Gypsum board prime and finish coats.

K. Section 10400 - Identifying Devices: Fire / Smoke Barrier Identification Signs, to be installed within concealed spaces above decorative ceiling.

L. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories: 1. Concealed anchor plates for attaching and supporting toilet accessories;

grab bars and other toilet accessories to be mounted on or installed in drywall partitions.

M. Division 15 - Mechanical: Plumbing and HVAC devices to be mounted or installed in drywall ceilings or partitions.

N. Division 16 - Electrical: Electrical outlets, cover plates, junction boxes and other devices to be mounted or installed in drywall ceilings or partitions.

1.03 SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS


A. Fabricate and install systems as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following conditions: 1. Framing assemblies and components shall be of sufficient strength to

support the loads and forces encountered, or combinations thereof, without exceeding in any of its structural elements the stresses prescribed the governing building code and referenced standards.

2. Stud framing assemblies for interior partitions shall be designed to resist all loads to which they are subjected, but not less than uniform live load of 5 PSF (240 Pa) applied perpendicular to the walls. a. Deflection of stud framing members at this load shall not exceed L/240. b. When sheathed with brittle finish material (e.g., tile, plaster, etc.),

deflection of stud framing members at this load shall not exceed L/360. c. Cavity Shaftwall Systems: Withstand minimum positive and negative

pressure of 5 PSF. d. Interior Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Maximum deflection of L/360 of

distance between supports. e. Exterior Soffits: Withstand minimum positive and negative pressure of

20 PSF with maximum deflection of L/360 of distance between supports. 3. Limiting heights for studs (based on stress, stress and deflection) are to be

calculated using specified uniform live load (e.g., 5 PSF) perpendicular to studs, based on studs alone; the use of composite action with collateral materials (e.g., gypsum wall board) may not be used to achieve minimum requirements. Sress calculations are to be based on capacity of studs alone.

4. Maximum end bearing reaction load shall be calculated with minimum safety factor of 3.

B. Fire Resistance Ratings: Where fire resistance classification is indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to that listed by UL or tested in accordance with ASTM E 119 for the type of construction shown.

C. Acoustical Ratings: Where sound ratings are indicated, provide materials and application procedures identical to those tested by manufacturer to achieve Sound Transmission Class (STC) scheduled or indicated in accordance with ASTM E 90.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate prefabricated work, component details, stud layout, framed

openings, anchorage to structure, acoustic details, type and location of fasteners, accessories, and items of other related work.

2. Describe method for securing tracks to building structure, and studs to tracks, and for blocking and reinforcement of framing connections.

3. For each stud framing condition, include product identification per SSMA 4-part identification code, and yield strength.

4. For locations where steel stud ceiling framing is proposed for spans greater than 8 feet, submit shop drawings and engineering calculations signed and sealed by a qualified structural engineer licensed in the State of Florida.


5. Indicate related work specified in other sections, including but not limited to concealed anchor plates, metal fabrications, backing for wall-mounted items (e.g., grab bars; electric hand dryers; diaper changing tables) required to withstand design loads.

6. Indicate special details associated with fireproofing, acoustic seals, and draftstopping, fireblocking and firestopping.

C. Product Data: Submit properly identified product data, including materials specifications for each product specified, installation recommendations, and other data as may be required to show compliance with specifications. 1. For each type of framing and furring system, provide data describing

materials and finish, product criteria, load charts, and limitations. a. Limiting Wall Height Charts and Tables. Indicate stud selections for

each stud framing condition, and coordinate with shop drawings. 1) Where height of partition is greater than heights in Charts and

Tables, provide engineering design by a qualified Florida-registered engineer, and submit design calculations.

b. Limiting Span Charts and Tables for Steel Stud Ceiling Systems / SSMA (PTI) “Ceiling Span Table”. Indicate stud selections for each ceiling framing condition, and coordinate with shop drawings. 1) Where framing system with span greater than 8 feet is proposed,

provide engineering design by a qualified Florida-registered engineer, and submit design calculations.

c. Limiting Span Charts and Tables for Suspended Ceiling Grillage Systems. Indicate furring and channel selections for each ceiling framing condition, and coordinate with shop drawings.

2. For each type of head-of-partition system, provide manufacturer's data on partition head-to-structure connectors, showing compliance with requirements.

3. Provide product data for screws and fasteners. a. Power-Actuated Fasteners: Include allowable loads, embedment, and

spacing criteria. 4. Include the following:

a. Materials list of items to be provided under this section. b. Manufacturer’s product information and other data needed to provide

compliance with specified requirements. c. Manufacturer’s recommended installation procedures.

5. Provide data on partition assemblies, showing compliance with specified acoustic attenuation and fire resistance rating performance requirements.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1. Metal framing manufacturer shall be a firm or company that is currently a Full

Member of the Steel Stud Manufacturers Association (SSMA). 2. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of gypsum board and related

joint treatment material from a single manufacturer.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience, and approved by manufacturer.


C. Contractor shall provide full time quality control over all fabrication and erection to ensure compliance with applicable requirements of the governing building code and regulations of the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Provide all accessories including, but not limited to, tracks, clips, web stiffeners, anchors, fastening devices, resilient clips, and other accessories required for a complete and proper installation, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the steel members used.

E. Reference Standards: 1. Install steel framing in accordance with applicable requirements of ASTM C

754. 2. Install gypsum board in accordance with applicable requirements and

recommendations of Gypsum Association GA 216, except for more stringent requirements of manufacturer.

3. Apply acoustical sealant in accordance with applicable requirements of ASTM C 919.

F. Fireblocking and Draftstopping: 1. Provide fireblocking or draftstopping as necessary to resist the free passage

of flame to other areas of the building through concealed spaces. 2. Comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including

but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 717.

G. Shaft Wall: Configure and install components as required to achieve the following performance levels: 1. Air Pressure Within Shaft: Intermittent loads of 10 lbf/sq ft (0.48 kPa) with

maximum mid-span deflection of L/240. 2. Acoustic Attenuation: STC of 40-44 calculated in accordance with ASTM E

413, based on tests conducted in accordance with ASTM E 90.

H. Fire Resistance Rating: 1. Where drawings indicate a partition or other assembly with a specific Fire

Resistance Rating (e.g., 1-Hour Fire Rated), such Fire Resistance Rating refers to the fire-resistivity of that assembly as determined by testing in accordance with UL 263 (equivalent to ASTM E 119; NFPA 251).

2. Materials used in fire resistive assemblies shall meet product requirements specified in the referenced UL Assembly Design; product containers and packaging for materials used in fire resistive assemblies shall include the Classification Marking of Underwriters Laboratories Inc.

3. For any assembly design where a specific UL Design No. is indicated, the materials and construction details used shall meet or exceed requirements of the specified UL Design as described in the UL (FRD). Where there is a discrepancy between requirements of the specified UL Design and the drawings or specifications, and where such discrepancy may be in conflict with the requirements of the specified UL Design, the requirements of the specified UL Design shall govern.

I. Perform work in accordance with ASTM C 840. Comply with requirements of GA-600 for fire-rated assemblies.

J. Finish work shall be subject to inspection using a lighting level of not less than 50 foot candles at the surface of the gypsum board. Surfaces judged to be


unsuitable for finishing, even if finish has been applied, shall be rejected.


A. Deliver in original unopened packages. Provide protection from damage and exposure to the elements.

B. Prevent damage to edges and surfaces. Do not bend or damage metal corner beads and trim.


A. Environmental Requirements: Proceed with installation of gypsum board materials only after building is weather tight. 1. Maintain temperature in areas receiving gypsum board materials between 55

degrees and 90 degrees F. during and after installation and provide adequate ventilation.

B. Coordinate the placement of components to be installed within stud framing system.

C. Coordinate layout and installation of suspension system components for suspended ceilings with other work supported by or penetrating through ceiling.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Metal Framing: Subject to compliance with Contract requirements and conformance with applicable requirements of governing building code, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Allsteel & Gypsum Products Inc.: 1250 NW 23 Avenue; Ft. Lauderdale, FL

33311; Tel. 954-587-1900; www.studco.com. 2. Clark Steel Framing Systems: 101 Clark Boulevard; Middletown, OH 45044;

Tel. 513-539-2900; www.clarksteel.com. 3. Dietrich Metal Framing, a Worthington Industries Company: 500 Grant

Street #2226; Pittsburgh, PA 15219; Tel. 412-281-2805. 4. Marino-Ware: 400 Metuchen Road; South Plainfield, NJ 07080; Tel. 908-

757-9000 www.marinoware.com.

B. Metal Framing Connectors and Accessories: Subject to compliance with Contract requirements and conformance with applicable requirements of governing building code, provide products by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Same manufacturer as metal framing. 2. The Steel Network Inc: www.SteelNetwork.com.

C. Gypsum Wallboard: 1. CertainTeed Corporation. 2. Gold Bond Building Products of National Gypsum Company. 3. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum Corporation (G-P). 4. United States Gypsum Company (USG).

D. Drywall Trim and Moldings: 1. Alabama Metal Industries Corporation (Amico): www.amico-online.com. 2. Dura-Trim by WW Systems Corporation


3. Fry Reglet Corporation 4. Gordon Interior Specialties Division 5. Plastic Components, Inc. (PCI): 9051 NW 97 Terrace, Miami, FL 33178; Tel.

305-885-0561. 6. Vinyl Corporation: 8255 NW 70 Street, Miami, FL 33166; Tel. 305-477-6464

2.02 MATERIALS - GENERAL

A. Steel Studs, Ceiling Supports and Track Runners: 1. Structural properties of studs and runners shall comply with ASTM C 645. 2. The unsupported height of partitions shall comply with the loads and

deflections set forth in FBC-B CHAPTER 16 (HVHZ). 3. Steel ceiling supports shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 2514.5. 4. Steel studs, track runners and ceiling supports in walls shall comply with

ASTM A 525.

B. Attachments: 1. Screws used for attaching gypsum wallboard shall, without substantially

fracturing the surface paper, be driven below the surface and spotted with finishing joint compound.

2. Attachment to metal members shall be in accordance with the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 2517.6.4. a. Gypsum wallboard shall be attached to metal members by self-drilling,

self-tapping sheet metal screws. b. The spacing of screws attaching gypsum wallboard to metal studs and

runners, shall be not more than 12 inches (305 mm) on center. c. Screw for attaching gypsum wallboard to metal studs shall be not less

than 7/8 inch (22.2 mm) long for 1/2 inch (17.7 mm) wallboard or 1 inch (25.4 mm) long for 5/8 inch (17.1 mm) wallboard.

d. Screws attaching gypsum wallboard shall be driven below the surface and spotted with finishing compound.

C. Fire Rated Assemblies: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code,

including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 7, and as indicated on drawings.

2. Provide completed assemblies with the following: a. Stud-framed Partitions: In accordance with the UL Design Assembly

indicated on the Drawings b. Shaftwall Partitions: In accordance with the UL Design Assembly

indicated on the Drawings c. Horizontal Shaftwall Assemblies:

1) 1-hour rating: Fire test number WHI 495-PSH-0154/0167, and report number NER-258 and ER-5693.

2.03 METAL FRAMING MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: 1. Metal framing materials shall conform to requirements of governing building

code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 2503 and 2510. 2. Ceiling Hangers: Type and size as specified in ASTM C 754 for spacing

required.


B. Metal Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645, G60 galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with maximum deflection of wall framing as specified in SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS, except as otherwise indicated. 1. Studs: Extra-Duty, C-shaped steel studs.

a. Depth (flange): 1-1/4 inches (35 mm) minimum, except as follows: 1) Where stud depth greater than 1-1/4 inches is required per UL

Design assembly referenced on Drawings, provide studs of depth specified in the UL FRD assembly description for the referenced UL Design assembly.

b. Return: Provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum folded back return flange leg at each side of stud, except as follows: 1) Stud Size 2-1/2 Inches Wide or Smaller: Return is not required.

c. Size (width): 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), 4 inches (102 mm), or 6 inches (152 mm), as indicated on Drawings.

d. Thickness (gage): As required to meet or exceed applicable requirements of governing building code (including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 25) and specified SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load, deflection), except as follows: 1) Where Thickness Is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not

less than 20 gage (33 mils). 2) Where Thickness Is Indicated on Drawings: Minimum thickness to

be not less than gage indicated on Drawings. e. Yield Strength:

1) Stud Size 3-5/8 Inches Wide or Larger: 33 ksi, minimum. 2) Stud Size 2-1/2 Inches Wide or Smaller: 30 ksi, minimum.

2. Runners: U-shaped, sized to match studs. a. Depth: Leg height to be not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm).

1) Where greater track depth is required per UL Design assembly referenced on drawings, provide tracks of depth specified in the UL FRD assembly description for the referenced UL Design assembly.

b. Size (width): Same as studs. c. Metal Thickness (gage): Same as studs.

3. Extended Leg Runners (Partition Head-to-Structure Connections): Provide mechanical anchorage devices that accommodate deflection using slotted holes, screws and anti-friction bushings, preventing rotation of studs while maintaining structural performance of partition. a. Structural Performance: Maintain lateral load resistance and vertical

movement capacity required by applicable requirements of the governing building code, when evaluated in accordance with AISI SG02-1.

b. Provide components UL-listed for use in UL-listed fire-rated head of partition joint systems of fire rating and movement required. 1) Allow for vertical deflection of structure of up to 1-1/2 inches (3/4

inch up and 3/4 inch down), except as otherwise indicated. c. Provide top track pre-assembled with connection devices spaced to fit

stud spacing indicated on drawings; minimum track length of 12 feet (3660 mm).


d. Material: ASTM A 653 steel sheet, SS Grade 50, with G60/Z180 hot dipped galvanized coating.

e. Size (width): Same as studs. f. Metal Thickness (gage): Same as studs.

C. Shaft Wall Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements. 1. Studs:

a. Shape: "CH", “J” or “E”, or as standard with manufacturer. b. Size (width): 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), 4 inches (102 mm) or 6 inches (152

mm), as indicated on drawings. c. Metal Thickness (gage): As required to meet or exceed applicable

requirements of the governing building code and specified SYSTEM DESIGN AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load, deflection), except as follows: 1) Where Thickness Is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not

less than 20 gage (33 mils). 2) Where Thickness Is Indicated on Drawings: Minimum thickness to

be not less than gage indicated on Drawings. 2. Tracks: J-shaped shaftwall track, sized to match studs.

a. Size (width): Same as studs. b. Metal Thickness (gage): Same as studs.

D. Furring Systems: ASTM C 645; galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 and specified performance requirements. 1. Furring: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm).

a. Size (width): 7/8 inch (22 mm) or 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 7/8 inch (22 mm).

b. Metal Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, as indicated on drawings, except as follows: 1) Where Thickness is Not Indicated on Drawings: Minimum to be not

less than 20 gage (33 mils). 2) Where Furring is to Receive Cementitious Backer Board: Minimum

to be not less than 20 gage (33 mils). 2. Resilient Furring Channels: Double-leg sections, designed to reduce

airborne sound through a partition or ceiling assembly, or to comply with requirements for fire-rated assembly. a. Size (width): 1/2 inch (12 mm). b. Metal Thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, as indicated on drawings;

if gage is not indicated, provide 20 gage. 3. Z Furring: Z-shaped sections.

a. Size (width): 1 inch (25 mm), 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), 2 inches (51 mm) or 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), as indicated on drawings; if size is not indicated, provide 1-1/2 inch (38 mm).

b. Leg Dimensions: 3/4 inch (19 mm) x 1-1/4 inches (32 mm); the 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) leg is to be slightly toed in for a positive grip on the insulation.

c. Metal Thickness (gage): 20 gage.


E. Soffit and Ceiling Support Materials: ASTM C 645, G60 galvanized sheet steel, of size and properties necessary to comply with ASTM C 754 for the spacing indicated, with specified deflection limits. 1. General:

a. Steel ceiling support shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 2514.5.

b. Hanger Anchorage Devices: Screws, clips, bolts or other devices compatible with indicated structural anchorage for ceiling hangers and whose suitability has been proven through standard construction practices or by certified test data.

c. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hangers and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10x calculated loads.

d. Post-tensioned Concrete Slabs: 1) For inserts placed in post-tensioned concrete work, maintain 3 inch

clearance between inserts and prestressing strands. 2) If insert is in conflict with strand, insert must be moved to avoid

strand. Do not move strands to avoid inserts. e. Hangers:

1) Steel wire or rods, sizes to comply with requirements of ASTM C 754 for ceiling or soffit area and loads to be supported.

2) Wire: ASTM A 641, soft, Class 1 galvanized. 3) Rods and Flats: Mild steel components; Galvanized with G40 hot-

dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525. f. Framing System:

1) Main Runners: Cold-rolled, "C" shaped steel channels, 16 gauge minimum; galvanized with G40 hot-dip galvanized coating per ASTM A 525; form to required radius at curved gypsum board construction (e.g., curved walls, soffits).

2) Cross Furring: Hat-shaped steel furring channels, ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch high, 25 gauge, galvanized.

3) Furring Anchorages: 16 gauge galvanized wire ties, manufacturer's standard wire-type clips, bolts, nails or screws recommended by furring manufacturer and complying with ASTM C 754.

2. Braced Soffit System: a. Framing: C-shaped steel studs and runners.

1) Depth (flange): 1-1/4 inches (35 mm) minimum. 2) Return: 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum folded back return flange leg at

each side of studs. 3) Size (width): 3-5/8 inches (92 mm), except as otherwise indicated

on Drawings. 4) Metal Thickness (gage): As required to meet or exceed applicable

requirements of the governing building code and SSMA (PTI) “Ceiling Span Table”, based on stud spacing, stud size, and load; deflection to be less than L/240. Check manufacturer’s literature to verify that the selected framing member is capable of the indicated span.

3. Steel Stud Ceiling and Soffit Support System: a. Framing: C-shaped steel studs and runners.


1) Depth (flange): 1-1/4 inches (35 mm) minimum. 2) Return: Provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) minimum folded back return flange

leg at each side of stud. 3) Size (width): 1-5/8 inches (41 mm), 2-1/2 inches (64 mm), 3-5/8

inches (92 mm), 4 inches (102 mm), or 6 inches (152 mm), as indicated on Drawings.

4) Metal Thickness (gage): As required to meet or exceed applicable requirements of the governing building code and SSMA (PTI) “Ceiling Span Table”, based on stud spacing, stud size, and load; deflection to be less than L/240 for gypsum board ceiling, or L/360 for plaster ceiling. Check manufacturer’s literature to verify that the selected framing member is capable of the indicated span.

4. Fire-Rated Roof/Ceiling Support System: Resilient Furring Channels; conform to requirements of UL Design No. P533, except that furring channel depth shall be 1/2 inch.

5. Suspended Grillage Ceiling Support System: a. Hanger Devices for Concrete: Post-installed, expansion anchor or

chemical anchor, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with holes or loops for attaching hanger wires. 1) Hanger devices shall be capable of sustaining, without failure, a

load equal to not less than 10 times that imposed by construction, as determined by testing in accordance with ASTM E 488 by a qualified independent testing agency.

c. Hanger Wire: Galvanized, annealed, pre-straightened steel wire, conforming to FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.4. 1) Minimum No. 8 gage where supporting up to 12.5 square feet of

ceiling. 2) Minimum No. 6 gage where supporting up to 16 square feet of

ceiling. d. Tie Wire: Tie wire shall comply with applicable requirements of the

governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 2514.5.3.1. 1) Cross furring shall be securely saddle-tied to the main runners by

not less than two strands of No. 16 W and M gauge galvanized wire or equivalent approved attachments.

2) Cross furring shall be attached to joists or beams with double No. 14 W and M gauge galvanized wire or equivalent approved attachments.

3) Splices in cross furring shall be lapped 8 inches and tied, each end, with double loops of No. 16-gauge wire.

e. Main Carrying Channels (Runners): Main runners or carriers shall be minimum 1-1/2 inch rolled galvanized steel channels of weights not less than set forth in FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.2.

f. Cross Furring - Metal Lath and Plaster Ceiling: Cross furring for various spacing of main runners or other supports shall be 3/4-inch galvanized steel channels conforming to FBC-B TABLE 2514.5.3.

g. Cross Furring - Gypsum Board Ceiling: Hat-shaped sections, minimum depth of 7/8 inch (22 mm). 1) Furring size (width): 7/8 inch (22 mm) or 1-1/2 inches (38 mm), as

indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 7/8 inch (22 mm).


2) Furring thickness (gage): 25 gage or 20 gage, per ASTM C 754 and manufacturer’s Limiting Ceiling Span Charts and Tables; if gage is not indicated, provide 20 gage.

F. Accessories and Fasteners: 1. Miscellaneous Furring and Bracing Members: Of same material as studs;

thickness to suit purpose; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 754.

2. Metal Angle (for shaftwall construction, corner framing at braced soffits, and other similar applications): Of same material as studs; 24-gage thickness; size 2-1/2 x 2-1/2 inches, unless otherwise indicated; complying with applicable requirements of ASTM C 754.

3. Fasteners: ASTM C 1002 self-piercing tapping screws; shall comply with applicable requirements of governing building code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 25. a. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to steel runners shall be Type S (for

25- and 22-gage) pan head or Type S-12 (for 20-gage or thicker) low profile head.

b. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to door frames shall be Type S-12 pan head.

c. Fasteners for attaching steel studs to jamb anchors shall be Type S-12 low profile head.

d. Fasteners for attaching gypsum board to metal framing shall be Type S bugle-head, or length appropriate for thickness of board(s).

e. Fasteners used for attaching cementitious tile backer board to metal studs shall be corrosion-resistant, wafer head type with countersinking ribs, specifically designed to allow for flush seating while preventing strip-outs; length and product per backer board manufacturer’s recommendation. Do not use standard drywall screws.

f. Powder-driven fasteners are not allowed. 4. Anchorage Devices: High-quality power-actuated fastener for attaching

metal framing components (e.g., drywall runners) to concrete. a. Embedment: 1 inch, minimum. b. Allowable Service Load (based on 1 inch embedment into 4,000 psi

concrete): 1) Tension: 90 lbs, minimum. 2) Shear: 200 lbs, minimum.

c. Product: Hilti X-ZF, or equal. 5. Tie Wires: Use tie wires not less than 16 gage galvanized annealed wire.

2.04 BOARD MATERIALS

A. General: 1. All types of gypsum board materials shall comply with applicable

requirements of ASTM C 1396 and ASTM C 36. 2. All types of gypsum board panels shall be mold and mildew resistant.

a. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D 3273): Panel score of 8 or better, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Panel sizes to minimize joints in place; ends square cut, except as otherwise indicated.

4. LEED Requirements:


a. Use gypsum board and joint compound with little or no VOCs and formaldehyde emissions.

b. Gypsum board shall have a minimum of 5 percent Post-consumer and 20 percent Post-industrial (nation-wide average for company) as defined by FTC (Federal Trade Commission).

B. Gypsum Board: 1. ASTM C 1396 (Section 5), regular type, except where Type X fire-resistant

type is indicated or required to meet UL assembly types. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: Use 5/8 inch thick for all applications, except where otherwise

indicated on Drawings or as follows: a. Where curved gypsum board construction (e.g., curved walls, soffits) is

indicated, use 1/4 inch thick flexible facing board. 4. Acceptable Products:

a. Typical Partitions and Ceilings: SHEETROCK® brand SW, FIRECODE® or FIRECODE® "C" Core gypsum panels by USG, or equal.

b. OR [depends on edge condition option]: SHEETROCK® brand Regular, FIRECODE® or FIRECODE® "C" Core gypsum panels by USG, or equal.

c. Fire-Rated Walls: 3/4 inch thick ULTRACODE® Core by USG, or equal. d. Curved Gypsum Board Construction (e.g., Curved Walls, Soffits): 1/4

inch thick Flexible Gypsum Panels by USG, or equal.

C. High Impact Abuse Resistant Gypsum Board (VHI A-R Gypsum Board): 1. Performance Requirements (based on Type X VHI A-R Gypsum Board with

joint treatment only): a. Surface Damage - Abrasion Resistance (ASTM D 4977, modified per

USG test method): Minimum 30 cycles to failure. b. Surface Damage - Indentation Resistance (ASTM D 5420, modified per

USG test method): Maximum 0.11 inch. c. Penetration Resistance - Hard Body Impact (USG Impact Test): 175 ft-

lbs. d. Penetration Resistance - Soft Body Impact (ASTM E 695): No surface

creasing, partition deformation or structural failure at 480 ft-lbs. e. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D 3273): Panel score rating of 10.

3. Thickness: 5/8 inch (16 mm). 4. Edges: Tapered; ends square cut. 5. Mold and Mildew Resistance (ASTM D 3273): Panel score rating of 10,

minimum. 6. Acceptable Products:

a. Non-Fire Rated Walls: FIBEROCK® brand VHI Abuse-Resistant gypsum panels by USG, or equal.

b. Fire-Rated Walls: FIBEROCK® brand Type X VHI Abuse-Resistant gypsum panels by USG, or equal..

D. Ceiling Board: 1. ASTM C 1396 (Section 12), non-sag type. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. 3. Acceptable Product: Interior Gypsum Ceiling Board by USG, or equal.


E. Moisture and Mold Resistant Board: 1. ASTM C 1396 (Section 5), regular type, except where Type X fire-resistant

type is indicated or required to meet UL assembly types. 2. Edges: Tapered. 3. Thickness: 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch, as noted on Drawings; if not noted, use 5/8

inch. 4. Acceptable Product: Sheetrock® brand Mold Tough™ Firecode (Type X),

Firecode® C Core or ULTRACODE® Core gypsum panels by USG, or equal.

F. Shaftwall: 1. Liner Boards:

a. ASTM C 442, Type SLX. b. Edges: Beveled. c. Thickness: 1 inch. d. Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® gypsum liner panels by USG, or

equal. 2. Face Boards:

a. ASTM C 1396 (Section 5), Type X. b. Thickness: 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch, as noted on Drawings; if not noted, use

5/8 inch. c. Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® brand FIRECODE® C Core and

FIRECODE® Core gypsum panels by USG, or equal.

G. Cement Backer Board: 1. Aggregated Portland cement board with woven glass fiber mesh facing;

complying with ANSI A118.9. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Acceptable Product: Durock Cement Board by USG, or equal.

2.05 GYPSUM JOINT TREATMENT AND FINISH PRODUCTS

A. General: 1. Joint materials shall conform to ASTM C 475. 2. Joint Treatment Tape: Type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer

for project conditions. 3. Joint Compound: Type recommended by gypsum board manufacturer for

project conditions.

B. Adhesives and Joint Treatment Materials: 1. Conform to requirements of ASTM C 475. 2. Joint Compounds:

a. Drying-Type (ready-mixed): 1) Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® brand taping joint compound

and topping joint compound, or SHEETROCK® all purpose joint compound by USG, or equal.

b. Setting-Type (chemically-hardening): 1) Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® brand setting-type joint

compound by USG, or equal. c. Primer Surfacer: A spray-applied vinyl acrylic latex-based coating,

designed especially for interior application over new drywall in lieu of two-step skim coat of joint compound and paint primer coat, to provide


the highest quality drywall Finish Level 5 (GA-214 / ASTM C 840) drywall surface. 1) Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® brand TUFF-HIDE™primer-

surfacer by USG, or equal. d. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive or joint compound specifically

recommended for laminating gypsum boards and for adhering gypsum boards to solid substrates.

3. Reinforcing Joint Tape: a. ASTM C 475, 2 inch nominal width. b. For backer board, provide fiberglass tape as recommended by board

manufacturer and acceptable to manufacturer of ceramic tile setting materials.

2.06 TRIM, MOLDINGS AND ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Metal Trim for Gypsum Board: Products shall comply with ASTM C 1047. 1. Conform to profile and dimensions indicated. 2. Material: Galvanized steel or zinc, as indicated; if not indicated, provide

zinc, minimum base steel 0.014 inch (0.35 mm). 2. Corner Bead: L-shaped, for face fastening and finishing with joint treatment. 3. Casing Bead: J-shaped, for face fastening and finishing with joint treatment 4. Control Joints:

a. Roll-formed zinc with perforated flanges. b. Size: 1-3/4 inch wide, with 1/4 inch wide center channel. c. Provide with removable tape strip over channel.

B. Paper-Faced Metal Trim for Gypsum Board: Products shall comply with ASTM C 1047. 1. Conform to profile and dimensions indicated.

C. Extruded Aluminum Trim and Reveals: 1. Conform to profile and dimensions indicated. 2. Material: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T5.

D. Plastic (PVC) Trim for Gypsum Board: One-piece extruded vinyl trim manufactured of high-impact resistant PVC, and conforming to ASTM D 3678 and ASTM C 1047; supplied by board manufacturer. 1. Flanges of PVC trim components shall have punch hole pattern for positive

bonding of joint compound and other finishes to surface of gypsum board; PVC material shall have excellent paintability.

2. Physical Characteristics: a. Tensile Strength / Tensile Modulus, min. (ASTM D 638): 6,200 psi /

390,000 psi. b. Flexural Strength / Flexural Modulus, min. (ASTM D 790): 11,000 psi /

35,000 psi. c. Flammability (ASTM E 84):

1) Flame Spread: 18, maximum. 2) Fuel Contribution: ND. 3) Smoke Density, at 35 mils: 250, maximum. 4) Fire Rating: Class A.

3. Components:


a. "J" Bead (Casing Bead): Tapered face return; back flange 1-3/16 inch; front return 1/2 inch. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 200-X series, or equal; size as

appropriate for thickness of gypsum board. b. Fillable "J" Bead: For use in encasing raw edges of drywall so as to

prevent moisture from migrating into board; 1-1/16 inch wide perforated flange; back flange 3/8 inch. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 201-X series, or equal; size as

appropriate for thickness of gypsum board. c. Fillable "L" Bead: For use in creating a clean detail at any point of

termination of drywall into windows, doors, etc.; 1-1/16 inch wide perforated flange. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 221-X series, or equal; size as

appropriate for thickness of gypsum board. d. Shadow Molding ("Z" Molding): For use in creating a reveal or relief

detail around windows, doors, etc., and wall to wall details; 1-1/8 inch wide perforated flange; reveal size as indicated on drawings. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 202/203/204 series, or equal;

size as appropriate for thickness of gypsum board. e. Corner Bead: For use on 90 degree outside corners; 1-1/4 inch

perforated and striated tapered legs for better adhesion. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 209, or equal.

f. Inside Corner Bead: For use on 90 degree inside corners; 1-1/4 inch perforated and striated tapered legs for better adhesion. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 209-IC, or equal.

g. Splayed Corner Bead: For use on 120 to 135 degree inside corners; 1-1/4 inch perforated and striated tapered legs for better adhesion. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 209-135, or equal.

h. Drywall Reveal: Perforated flanges with a "U" channel; built-in stops for proper finish thickness. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc.

225/226/227/228/229/235/236/237 series, or equal. i. Control Joint: 1 inch wide perforated flanges with a "V" channel; built-in

stops for proper finish thickness. 1) Product: Plastic Components, Inc. 2027-16 series, or equal; where

joint movement is indicated, provide Plastic Components, Inc. PL093-16 series, or equal

E. Backer Plates: Shall be provided where necessary for proper attachment and support of all toilet compartments (e.g., toilet compartment wall brackets, urinal screen wall brackets, head rail brackets), surface-mounted toilet accessories (e.g., grab bars, baby changing tables, etc.), and other surface-mounted fittings and accessories fastened to stud-framed or furred walls. 1. Material: Galvanized steel sheet, of dimensions as follows:

a. Width: 6 inches or 12 inches, as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 12 inches.

b. Length: As necessary for proper attachment and support of surface-mounted fittings and accessories.

c. Metal Thickness: 16 or 20 gage, as indicated on Drawings; if not indicated, provide 16 gage.


2. Elimination of backer plates or direct attachment of accessories or equipment to studs will not be allowed.

F. Hanger Wire Sound Isolators: Provide where indicated for sound-rated suspended ceilings.

G. Gypsum Board Screws: Self-drilling, self-tapping steel screws. 1. For Steel Framing Less Than 0.03 Inch Thick: Comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For Steel Framing from 0.033 Inch Thick to 0.112 Inch Thick: Comply with

ASTM C 954. 3. Provide Type S or Type S-12 screws.

H. Backer Board Accessories: Provide accessories and corrosion-resistant-coated steel screws as recommended by backer board manufacturer and required for complete installation.

I. Acoustical Sealant: A highly elastic, water-based caulking for sound-rated partition and ceiling systems, and sealing exterior walls to reduce infiltration; non-bleeding and non-staining; pumpable; easily applied in beads. 1. Shall provide excellent adherence to most surfaces, permanent flexibility and

lasting seal. 2. Shall meet or exceed ASTM C 919 and ASTM C 834. 3. Acceptable Product: SHEETROCK® acoustical sealant by USG, or equal.

J. Sound Attenuation Blankets: Paperless, semi-rigid mineral fiber mats designed to improve STC ratings when installed in partitions 1. Mineral fiber, conforming to ASTM C665, Type I. 2. Surface burning characteristics per ASTM E84:

a. Flame spread: 15 or less. b. Smoke developed: 0.

3. Thicknesses: As indicated. 4. Acceptable product and manufacturer: Equivalent to Thermafiber LLC

Sound Attenuation Fire Blankets SAFB (Fire Safety FS-15 Blankets).

K. Z-Furring Insulation: See Section 07212.

L. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide as required for complete installations.

M. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, Type I - Inorganic.

2.07 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate assemblies of framed sections to sizes and profiles required.

B. Fit, reinforce, and brace framing members to suit design requirements.

C. Fit and assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site, ready for installation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and adjoining construction and conditions under which work is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.


3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install in accordance with reference standards and manufacturer's instructions and as required to comply with HVHZ requirements.

B. Tolerances: 1. Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 8 ft variation from plumb or level in exposed lines

of surface, except at joints between gypsum board units. 2. Do not exceed 1/16 inch variation between planes of abutting edges or ends. 3. Shim as required to comply with specified tolerances.

C. Install in accordance with the following: 1. Metal Framing: ASTM C 754. 2. Gypsum Board and Joint Treatment: ASTM C 840. 3. Cement Board and Joint Treatment: ANSI A108.11. 4. Gypsum panel manufacturer's published recommendations.

D. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Install in accordance with specified UL Design as described in the UL (FRD).

E. Finishing: Perform in accordance with ASTM C 840, to achieve finish levels specified in Finish Level Schedule included at end of this Section.

F. Install Backer Plates and supplementary framing, blocking and bracing at terminations in gypsum board assemblies to support fixtures, equipment, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings or similar construction.

3.03 METAL SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Metal Runners: 1. Align and secure runner tracks accurately to partition layout at both floor and

ceiling. 2. Provide fasteners appropriate to substrate construction as recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Metal Studs: 1. Position metal studs vertically in the runners, spaced as indicated.

a. Install studs at the following spacing, except where manufacturer's load tables indicate that stud spacing must be less in order to meet specified Design Requirements (e.g., load and deflection criteria). 1) Partitions less than 13 feet in height: Install studs vertically at

maximum 24 inches on center. Where 1-5/8 inch studs are installed adjacent to exterior concrete wall, each stud shall be attached to concrete wall with steel angle clip at mid-height of stud, using Tapcon fasteners sized for application.

2) Partitions 13 to 16 feet in height: Not applicable. 3) Partitions more than 16 feet in height: Not applicable. 4) Soffits, Braced: Install studs as indicated on drawings, at maximum

16 inches on center. Unbraced soffits are not allowed. 5) Curved Gypsum Board Construction (e.g., Curved Walls, Soffits):

Install studs at maximum 9 inches on center. 6) Shaftwall Partitions: Install studs vertically at 24 inches on center.

b. Where manufacturer's load tables indicate that stud spacing must be less than indicated above in order to meet specified SYSTEM DESIGN


AND PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (e.g., load and deflection criteria), comply with spacing indicated in manufacturer’s load tables.

c. Provide double stud at the following locations: 1) Wall openings. 2) Door and window jambs; storefront mullions. 3) Not more than 2 inches from each side of openings. 4) Locations where necessary to provide adequate anchorage, bracing

or support for wall-mounted items (e.g., handrail brackets, plumbing fixtures, toilet compartment partitions, wall cabinets, shelving standards, toilet accessories, hardware, etc.).

5) Other locations as indicated on Drawings. 2. Place studs so that flanges face in same direction. 3. Cut studs 1/2 inch short of full height to provide perimeter relief. 4. Align and plumb partition framing accurately. 5. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural

elements, provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended by stud manufacturer to prevent transfer of structural loads or movements to partitions, and to provide lateral support.

6. Where studs are installed directly against exterior walls, install asphalt felt strips or glass fiber strips between studs and wall.

7. Provide horizontal bracing where necessary for lateral support. 8. Chase Walls:

a. Position steel studs on opposite sides of chase directly across from each other.

b. Cut cross-bracing from gypsum board 12 inches high by chase wall width.

9. Backer Plates and Blocking: a. Where handrails, grab bars, cabinets, wall-mounted door stops, or other

wall-hung items are attached to partitions, install backer plates or wood blocking accurately positioned and firmly secured to metal studs, whether or not such backer plates or blocking are indicated on Drawings.

b. Install as indicated on Drawings, using manufacturer’s recommended fasteners and fastener spacing.

c. Do not use wood blocking in fire-rated construction. 10. Curved Gypsum Board Construction (e.g., Curved Walls, Soffits):

a. Use pre-curved runners (e.g., Radius Track) or fabricate curved runners as follows: 1) Cut top and bottom runners through leg and web at 2-inch intervals

for arc length. 2) Bend runners to uniform curve of radius indicated and locate

straight lengths tangent to arcs. 3) Support outside (cut) leg of runners by clinching a 1-inch high x 25

gauge thick sheet steel strip to inside of cut legs using metal lock fasteners.

b. Attach studs to runners with 3/8 inch long pan head framing screws. c. On straight lengths at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches on center with

last stud left free standing.

C. Hat Channel Furring:


1. Attach hat-shaped furring channels either vertically or horizontally with fasteners through alternate wing flanges (staggered).

2. Space furring channels at 24 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. Where furring is indicated to receive backer board with ceramic tile or veneer plaster, space at 16 inches on center.

3. Install furring channels within 4 inches of floor line and ceiling line.

D. Z-Furring: 1. Securely attach narrow flanges of members to wall with concrete stub nails

or power-driven fasteners, except as otherwise indicated. 2. Sequence furring installation with installation of insulation.

E. Ceiling and Soffit Support Systems (Suspended Ceiling Grillage System): 1. Secure hangers or rods to structural support by connecting directly to

structure where possible; otherwise connect to inserts, clips or other anchorage devices or fasteners indicated.

2. Space main runners, hangers and furring according to requirements of ASTM C 754, except as otherwise indicated.

3. Where spacing of structural members, or width of ducts or other equipment, prevents regular spacing of hangers, provide supplemental hangers and suspension members and reinforce nearest affected hangers to span extra distance.

4. Limitations: a. Steel studs are not designed to carry live loads, mechanical equipment or

material storage. b. Maximum Spacing:

1) 1-1/2 inch cold-rolled channels and hangers: 48 inches on center. 2) For single-layer panels, maximum steel stud and furring channel

spacing is 24 inches on center for perpendicular application and 16 inches on center for parallel application.

3) For panels used as base for spray-applied ceiling texture finish, maximum frame spacing is 16 inches on center for 1/2 inch thick panels perpendicularly applied (parallel panel application not recommended); 24 inches on center for 5/8 inch thick panels perpendicularly applied, 16 inches on center for parallel application.

5. Attach directly to structural elements only; do not attach to metal deck. Loop hangers and wire-tie directly or provide anchors or inserts.

6. Exterior Ceilings and Soffits: Install compression posts, splay wires and other accessories as required to comply with wind load requirements.

7. Extend runners to within 6 inches of walls. 8. Wire-tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural

supports indicated. In fire resistance rated assemblies, wire-tie furring members; do not clip.

9. Do not permit furring or runners to contact masonry or concrete walls. 10. Provide 1 inch clearance between furring or runners and abutting walls and

partitions. 11. Curved (vaulted) Applications:

a. Install furring channels to provide indicated radius for finished ceiling. b. Space furring channels maximum 16 inches on center. Provide closer

spacing if recommended by manufacturer for veneer base thickness and application method.


F. Steel Stud Ceiling System: 1. Steel stud framed ceilings may be installed at interior spaces not wider than

(8) eight feet. 2. At spans greater than 8 feet, install Suspended Ceiling Grillage System

unless framing members and spacing are specifically designed and recommended by manufacturer for proposed span and loading with specified deflection limits.

3. Install runner channels around perimeter of ceiling area where steel stud framing is to be installed.

4. Space main framing members at 16 inches o.c., with cross bracing at 48 inches o.c.

5. Where 25-gage steel studs are used, stud-end stiffeners are required. Install per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Shaftwall: 1. Provide slip or cushioned joints to isolate shaftwall system. Comply with

manufacturer's instructions. 2. Seal joints and penetrations on both sides of shaftwall system. 3. Elevator Shaft Requirements:

a. Support elevator hoistway door frames independently of shaftwall framing system, or reinforce system in accordance with system manufacturer's instructions.

b. Where shaftwall system cannot be positioned within 2 inches of shaft face of structural beams, floor edges and similar projections into elevator shaft, provide continuous 5/8 inch gypsum board cants to cover tops of projections.

3.04 BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Single Layer Gypsum Board on Metal Studs: 1. Loosely butt gypsum board joints together and neatly fit. 2. Do not place butt ends against tapered edges. 3. Maximum allowable gap at end joints: 1/8 inch. 4. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 5. Apply ceiling boards first where gypsum board ceilings and wall occur. 6. Cut openings in gypsum board to fit electrical outlets, plumbing, light fixtures

and piping snugly and small enough to be covered by plates and escutcheons. Cut both face and back paper.

7. Screw board in place securely with screws spaced according to manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Single Layer Gypsum Board on Furring: 1. Apply gypsum board with long dimension at right angles to furring channel. 2. Center end joints over channel web; stagger end joints from those in

adjacent rows of board. 3. Fasten boards to furring channels with screws spaced according to

manufacturer's recommendations.

C. Double Layer Gypsum Board: 1. Fasten base layer to studs or furring with screws, and attach face layer using

laminating adhesive and screws, applied according to manufacturer's instructions.


2. Offset face-layer joints at least 10 inches from parallel base-layer joints. 3. Screw both layers to metal supports at double layer ceiling applications and

where required for fire-rated construction.

D. Direct Gypsum Board Adhesive Application: 1. Apply adhesive with manufacturer's recommended spreader to backs of

gypsum boards in band of four beads each to center of each board and along edges.

2. Position boards vertically and press firmly in place to insure good bond. 3. Fasten top and bottom of board if required.

E. Cementitious Backer Board Installation: 1. Install as indicated to comply with ANSI A108.11 and in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. 2. Complete plumbing rough-in before boards are erected. 3. Separate board from rough-in and fixtures and fill space as recommended by

manufacturer. 4. Securely fasten boards to substrate as required. 5. Follow manufacturer's instructions for treatment of edge terminations. 6. At joints and corners, embed fiberglass tape in skim coat of mortar.

F. Gypsum Shaftwall:

1. Erect gypsum board shaft liner for use as temporary shaft enclosure.

2. Screw attach base and face layers according to manufacturer's instructions, for both vertical (shaft enclosure) and horizontal (duct enclosure) applications.

3. Seal perimeters and openings to provide airtight installation.

4. Install sloped gypsum board cants on hoistway side of shaftwall where slabs or beams project beyond shaftwall.

3.05 INSTALLATION - SOUND-RATED CONSTRUCTION

A. Insulation: 1. Install sound attenuation blankets in sound-rated partitions and ceilings

where indicated. 2. Completely fill space between studs and framing to full height of partition

wall or full area of ceiling. 3. Fit carefully behind electrical outlets and other work penetrating sound-rated

construction. 4. Install sound attenuation blankets in gaps between steel deck flutes and tops

of sound-rated partitions, which are not fire-rated. Attach blankets in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Gypsum Board: 1. Install gypsum board same as for interior partitions and ceilings. 2. Coordinate with installation of perimeter sealants.

C. Acoustical Sealant: 1. At partition walls, provide continuous beads of acoustic sealant at juncture of

both faces of runners with floor and ceiling construction, and wherever


gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials, prior to installation of gypsum board.

2. At ceilings, provide continuous beads of sealant wherever gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.

3. Provide continuous bead of sealant behind faces of control joints prior to installation of control joint accessories.

4. After installation of gypsum board base layers, cut face layer sheets 1/2 inch less than floor-to-ceiling height and position with 1/4 inch open space between gypsum board and floor, ceiling and dissimilar vertical construction. Fill 1/4 inch open space with continuous sealant beads after installation of face layer.

5. At openings and cutouts, fill open spaces between gypsum board and fixtures, cabinets, ducts and other flush or penetrating items, with continuous bead of sealant.

6. Seal sides and backs of electrical boxes to completely close off openings and joints.

D. Sound Flanking Paths: 1. Where sound-rated partition walls intersect non-rated gypsum board partition

walls, extend sound-rated construction to completely close sound flanking paths through non-rated construction.

2. Seal joints between face layers at vertical interior angles of intersecting partitions.

3.06 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Trim: 1. Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten

gypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.

2. Install metal corner beads at external corners. 3. Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum board would

otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed.

B. Control Joints: 1. Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or

partitions of other finish material. 2. Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits at

approximately 30 ft on center or as indicated. 3. Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells, provide

horizontal control joints at each floor level.

C. Special Trim: Install as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.07 INSTALLATION - TRIM AND ACCESSORIES

A. General: Apply accessories according to manufacturer's instructions. Sand after application of final joint treatment coat and leave surface smooth and ready for work by other trades. 1. Use longest practical lengths. 2. Place components consistent with lines of building spaces, except as

indicated on drawings.


3. Treat metal accessories with not less than two coats of joint compound in the same manner as joints. Feather joint compound out from 8 to 10 inches on both sides of corners.

4. Apply metal trim at intersections where gypsum board abuts other materials, unless detailed otherwise, and at all other locations indicated. Neatly fit and secure corner beads over external corners.

B. Control Joints and Expansion Joints: 1. Install control joints and expansion joints as detailed. 2. Install at locations where indicated, and as follows:

a. Install control joints at junction of gypsum board partitions with walls or partitions of other finish material.

b. Install control joints within long runs of partitions, ceilings or soffits at approximately 30 ft on center or as indicated.

c. Where gypsum board is vertically continuous, as at stairwells, provide horizontal control joints at each floor level.

C. Corner Beads: Install at inside and outside corners.

D. Edge Trim: Install at locations where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials and as indicated.

E. Reveals: Install at locations where indicated; match existing.

F. Accessories: Install/apply accessories according to manufacturer's instructions. Sand after application of final joint treatment coat and leave surface smooth and ready for work by other trades. 1. Treat metal accessories with not less than 2 coats of joint compound in the

same manner as joints. Feather joint compound out from 8 to 10 inches on both sides of corners.

2. Apply metal trim at intersections where gypsum board abuts other materials, unless detailed otherwise, and at all other locations indicated. Neatly fit and secure corner beads over external corners.

3. Install expansion joints as detailed. 4. Install control joints as detailed.

3.08 FINISHING

A. General: 1. Finish gypsum board surfaces in accordance with levels defined in GA 214 /

ASTM C 840, and as specified in the FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE. 2. Joint treatment and finishing of fire-rated assemblies shall conform to

requirements of specified UL Design Assembly as described in the UL (FRD).

B. Interior Gypsum Board: 1. Taping (Level 1):

a. Use taping or all purpose (conventional weight) compound. b. Butter taping compound into inside corners and joints. c. Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound. d. Remove excess compound. e. Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings.

2. First Coat (Level 2):


a. Use taping or all-purpose (conventional weight) drying-type compound, or setting-type joint compound.

b. Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound over body of tape and allow to dry completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

c. Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface.

3. Second Coat (Level 3): a. Use all purpose or topping (conventional weight) drying type joint

compound. b. After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of compound over

tape and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of first coat. 4. Third Coat (Level 4): a. Use all purpose or topping (conventional weight) drying type joint

compound. b. After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish

coat to joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of second coat.

c. Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch-up and sand, to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.

5. Skim Coat (Level 5): a. Apply skim coat of all-purpose (conventional weight) drying-type

compound or spray-applied Primer-Surfacer over exposed surfaces of gypsum board.

b. After skim coat has dried, touch-up and sand to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish.

C. Cementitious Backer Board: Prepare and finish joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Joint Compound: 1. After skim coat sets, apply finish coat of compound feathering 3 to 4 inches

beyond tape edges. 2. Feather coats onto adjoining surfaces so that camber is maximum 1/32 inch. 3. Allow joint compound to completely set before applying veneer plaster finish.

E. Trim: 1. Use same fasteners to anchor trim accessory flanges as required to fasten

gypsum board to supports, unless otherwise recommended by trim manufacturer.

2. Install metal corner beads at external corners. 3. Install metal casing bead trim whenever edge of gypsum base would

otherwise be exposed or semi-exposed, and where gypsum base terminates against dissimilar material.

F. Control Joints: Install where indicated and specified.

G. Special Trim and Reveal Joints: Install as indicated on drawings and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.09 ADJUSTING


A. Correct damage and defects which may telegraph through finish work.

B. Leave work smooth and uniform.

3.10 TOLERANCES

A. Support Metal and Framing: 1. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 2. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 3. Maximum Variation from Level: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m). 4. Spacing of Studs and Other Framing Members: Variation not to exceed 1/8

inch. 5. Fastening Surfaces: Variation between adjacent members not to exceed 1/8

inch.

B. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m) in any direction.

3.11 FINISH LEVEL SCHEDULE - GYPSUM BOARD SURFACES

A. Level 1: Gypsum board surfaces within ceiling plenum areas and other concealed areas, except provide higher level of finish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings.

B. Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at tile, except remove tool marks and ridges.

C. Level 3: 1. Gypsum board surfaces of fire-rated assemblies that are entirely concealed

from view; finishing system shall meet requirements of specified UL Design Assembly.

D. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces, except where another finish level is indicated

E. Level 5: Offices, Conference room and open areas 1. Gypsum board surfaces requiring extra sooth surface for critical light (e.g.,

surfaces designated to receive semi-gloss or gloss paint finish). 2. Gypsum board surfaces of curved gypsum board construction (e.g., curved

walls, soffits). 3. Gypsum board surfaces where Spray-Applied Primer-Surfacer is to be used;

a. Surface Preparation: Complete gypsum board surface to Level 4 before applying Spray-Applied Primer-Surfacer.

b. Spray-Applied Primer-Surfacer, Application: Machine apply with airless sprayer in conformance with manufacturer’s application instructions to a wet film thickness of 15 to 20 mils (9-12 mils dry film thickness).

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09300 - 1 of 15 TILE

SECTION 09300

TILE

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Tile. 1. Porcelain ceramic tile.

B. Mortar and setting materials.

C. Grout.

D. Membranes, including but not limited to: 1. Waterproofing membranes. 2. Membrane at walls.

e. Cementitious backer board as tile substrate.



B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Installation of tile backer board.

C. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.

D. Section 14201 - Passenger Elevator.

E. Section 15420 - Drainage and Vent Systems: Floor drain; roof drain.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



Sections 07140 and 14201.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturers' product data sheets and installation instructions for each of the following: 1. Tile (porcelain ceramic tile, porcelain mosaic tile, and flexible concrete tile).

a. Include physical and performance characteristics. b. Mark to identify each type, size, and shape required.

2. Mortar and grout materials. a. Include manufacturer’s instructions for mixing and installing. b. Include ISO 13007 classification for each type grout and mortar to be

used; coordinate with shop drawings to indicate which product will be used in each designated application.

3. Joint sealer and backer materials for use in movement joints. 4. Tile backer board materials. 5. Drainage mat. 6. Membranes (e.g., secondary waterproofing membrane) and associated

products. 7. Shower pan liner.


C. Shop Drawings: 1. Shop drawings for this section are to be coordinated with elevator cab

submittals required in Section 14201. a. Provide elevator manufacturer with elevator cab floor recess depth

dimension required for tile floor installation, and weight (dead load) of tile floor assembly.

2. Indicate field-verified dimensions for all surfaces to receive tile; coordinate with tile layout.

3. For each type installation, indicate applicable TCNA tile installation method. a. Indicate compliance with specified reference standards for materials and

installation specifications. b. Where installation method includes options or alternatives, indicate

selected options and alternatives. c. Indicate thickness of setting materials, and coordination with related

components (e.g., door threshold, floor drain, etc.). d. Indicate ISO 13007 classification for grout and mortar to be used in each

designated application. 4. Indicate accessory materials, including but not limited to patching and

leveling compound, waterproofing, shower pan liner, cement backer units, joint sealer, grout, etc.

5. Indicate tile layout, patterns, color arrangement, perimeter conditions, junction with dissimilar materials, movement joints, shower curb/threshold, and setting details. a. Indicate alignment of floor, base and wall joints.

6. Indicate interface between materials specified in this section and materials specified elsewhere, including but not limited to sheet metal flashing, shower drains, floor drains, promenade roof drains, railing assemblies, Portland cement plaster, and door thresholds.

D. Samples: 1. Selection Samples:

a. Tile: For each type of tile (except tile for which color and finish is specified), submit manufacturer's complete range of color samples (including samples of all Price Groups), for Consultant's initial selection.

b. Grout: For each type of grout, submit manufacturer's complete set of color samples for Consultant's initial selection.

2. Verification Samples: Mount selected tile and apply selected grout on plywood panels; each sample panel to be 24 x 24 inches (600 x 600 mm) in size, illustrating tile pattern, color variations, and grout joint size variations for each of the following conditions: a. Panel A: Interior dry area, floor tile. b. Panel B: Interior wet area, wall tile w/ one movement joint. c. Panel C: Interior wet area, floor tile w/ one movement joint. d. Panel D: Exterior; floor tile w/ one movement joint.

E. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning methods, cleaning materials, stain removal methods, and polishes and waxes.


A. Maintain one copy of TCNA (HB) and ANSI A108 Series/A118 Series on site.


B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the types of products specified in this section, with minimum 5 years of documented experience.

C. Installer Qualifications: 1. General: Company specializing in performing tile installation, with minimum

of 5 years of documented experience. 2. Exterior Tile Installer: Contractor shall have minimum 5 years experience in

successful installation of exterior plaza deck roofing systems. a. Coordinate with requirements specified in Section 07140. b. If requested by Consultant or Project Manager, provide evidence of

previous project experience with contact information for City. 3. Contractor shall be authorized by manufacturer to offer specified system

warranty.

D. Certifications: 1. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified

requirements. 2. Recycled Content Certification: Provide third-party (e.g., Scientific

Certification Systems) certification to verify recycled content claims.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s System Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that system components, including but not limited to primary waterproof membrane, drainage mat, thick mortar bed, wire reinforcing mesh, secondary waterproofing membrane, bond coat mortar, grout and joint sealant, will be free from manufacturing defects and will not break down or deteriorate under normal usage during the specified warranty period. 1. Manufacturer agrees to make, or cause to be made at its own expense,

repairs necessary to replace portions of the installation deemed to be defective.

2. Warranty Period: Twenty-five (25) years from the effective date of Substantial Completion.

B. Manufacturer’s Watertightness Warranty: Manufacturer shall warrant that the system will not fail to resist penetration of water. 1. Manufacturer agrees to make, or cause to be made at its own expense,

repairs necessary to correct leaks resulting from ordinary wear and tear and the effects thereof and improper workmanship by the installer.

2. Warranty Period: Ten (10) years, commencing on the effective date of Substantial Completion.

3. Exception: Tile installations within Interior Dry Areas (i.e., Office, Ship’s Store, Telephone, Mail, Lobby, Reading Rm, Closet, Breakroom, Conference Rm, Manager, Supervisor, Dockmaster, Reception, and Roof Access) are not required to be watertight.


A. Protect adhesives from freezing or overheating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.



A. Do not install adhesives in an unventilated environment.

B. Maintain ambient and substrate temperature of 50 degrees F (10 degrees C) during installation of mortar materials.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Porcelain Ceramic Tile and Porcelain Mosaic Tile: 1. Basis of Design: 2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to contract requirements, equivalent products

manufactured by one of the following may be used: a. American Olean: www.americanolean.com. b. DalTile: www.daltile.com. c. Summitville Tiles, Inc: www.summitville.com.

B. Drainage Mat, Thick Mortar Bed, Wire Reinforcing Mesh, Secondary Waterproofing Membrane, Bond Coat Mortar, Grout, and Joint Sealant: 1. General:

a. Products shall be by a single source manufacturer. 2. Basis of Design: Laticrete International, Inc.: www.laticrete.com.

a. Local Rep.: Patrick Blackburn; Blackburn Enterprise; 6951 Lakeside Rd. West Palm Beach, FL 33411; Tel. (cell): 561-324-7589; email: [email protected].

3. Other Manufacturers: Equivalent systems by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration in accordance with requirements for substitutions.

C. Grout Sealer: 1. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com. 2. Southern Grouts & Mortars, Inc.: www.sgm.cc.

D. Cement Backer Units (CBU): 1. United States Gypsum Company: www.usg.com. 2. Custom Building Products: www.custombuildingproducts.com.

2.02 PORCELAIN CERAMIC TILE

A. General: 1. All porcelain ceramic tile products shall be by the same manufacturer. 2. Porcelain ceramic tile shall be as defined in, and shall conform to the

requirements of, ANSI A137.1. 3. Performance Requirements:

a. Breaking Strength (ASTM C 648): Minimum 350 lbf. b. Bond Strength (ASTM C 482): Minimum 200 psi. c. Water Absorption (ASTM C 373): Maximum 0.10 percent. d. Abrasion Wear (ASTM C501): Minimum 270 lbf. e. Chemical Resistance (ASTM C 650): Resistant (unaffected). f. Scratch Hardness (MOH’s Scale): 6.

B. Wall Tile Type 1: 1. Product:


2. Size and Shape: 8 x 8 inches (nominal), square. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unpolished; Crossville “Cross-Sheen” (UPS), or equal. 6. Colors: Two colors, to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s

complete range.

C. Wall Tile Type 2: 1. Product: 2. Size and Shape:

a. Type 2A: 6 x 12 inches (nominal), square. b. Type 2B: 4 x 12 inches (nominal), square. c. Type 2C: 3 x 12 inches (nominal), square.

3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unpolished; Crossville “Cross-Sheen” (UPS), or equal. 6. Colors: Two colors, to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s

complete range.

D. Floor Tile Type 1: 1. Product: . 2. Size and Shape: 8 x 8 inches (nominal), square. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Unpolished; Crossville “Cross Sheen” (UPS), or equal. 6. Coefficient of Friction (ASTM C 1028):

a Dry: 0.6, minimum. b. Wet: 0.6, minimum.

7. Colors: Two colors, to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s complete range. b. Wet: 0.7, minimum.

E. Wall Base Tile: 1. Product: 2. Size and Shape: 6 x 8 inches (nominal); cove base. 3. Thickness: 5/16 inch. 4. Edges: Square. 5. Surface Finish: Same as Wall Tile. 6. Colors: Four colors, to be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s

complete range.

F. Trim: Matching shapes in sizes coordinated with wall tile. 1. Applications: Use matching trim in the following locations:

a. Open Edges: Bullnose; 4 x 8 inches. b. Top of Wainscot: Bullnose; 4 x 8 inches. c. Floor to Wall Joints: Cove base; refer to Wall Base Tile. d. Inside Corners, except Wall-To-Wall Tile: Square jointed; no special

trim piece required. e. Inside Corners, Wall-To-Wall Tile: Square jointed; no special trim piece

required. f. Inside Corners, Cove Base-To-Cove Base Tile: Inside cove base corner


trim; 1 x 6 inches; refer to Wall Base Tile. g. Outside Corners, Cove Base-To-Cove Base Tile: Outside cove base

corner trim; 1 x 6 inches; refer to Wall Base Tile. 2. Product: Use matching trim pieces from the same product series as Wall

Tile. 3. Surface Finish: Same as Wall Tile. 4. Colors: Trim color shall match color of adjacent Wall Tile or Base Tile, as

applicable (e.g., Cove Base-To-Cove Base Tile trim shall match Wall Base Tile).

2.03 MORTAR & SETTING MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Shall contain anti-microbial protection to inhibit the growth of stain-causing

mold and mildew in the substrate. 2. Primers, fillers, and reinforcement as required by manufacturer for

application and substrate condition. 3. Mortar materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements.

B. Thick Bed Mortar: Latex-portland mortar complying with ANSI A118.4, and as follows: 1. General:

a. Shall be compatible with mortar bond coat materials. b. Suitable for bonded or unbounded, screeded or sloped, and interior or

exterior applications. c. Consistency of Mix: Screed mortar.

2. Performance Requirements (28 days): a. Compressive Strength (ANSI A118.4 and ASTM C 109): Minimum

4,000 PSI. b. Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348): Minimum 1,100 PSI. c. Pull-out: Minimum 300 PSI.

3. Acceptable Product: 226 Thick Bed Mortar gauged with 3701 Mortar Admix by Laticrete, or equal.

C. Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar: 1. Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 1 (Floor): Latex-portland mortar complying

with ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007; C2-E-S2. a. Acceptable Product: Permalastic System by Laticrete, or equal.

2. Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 2 (Wall): Latex-portland mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 and ISO 13007; C2-T-E-S1. a. Acceptable Product: StayFlex 500 or 254 Platinum by Laticrete, or

equal.

D. Epoxy Mortar: 1. Epoxy Mortar Type 1: 100 percent solids, epoxy setting mortar complying

with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007; RG. a. Performance Requirements (ANSI A118.3):

(1) Tensile Strength: Minimum 1,700 psi. (2) Compressive Strength: Minimum 6,000 psi. (3) Thermal Shock Resistance: Minimum 1,200 psi. (4) Shrinkage: Maximum 0.1 percent.

b. Product: Latapoxy SP-100 by Laticrete, or equal.


2. Epoxy Mortar Type 2: 100 percent solids, epoxy setting mortar complying with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007; R2. a. Performance Requirements (ANSI A118.3):

(1) Tensile Strength: Minimum 1,400 psi. (2) Compressive Strength: Minimum 5,000 psi. (3) Thermal Shock Resistance: Minimum 600 psi. (4) Shrinkage: Maximum 0.1 percent.

b. Working Properties (70 degrees F): (1) Application Layer Thickness Range: 1/8 inch (3 mm) to 3/8 inch (9

mm). c. Product: Latapoxy 300 by Laticrete, or equal.

2.04 GROUT MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Shall contain anti-microbial protection to inhibit the growth of stain-causing

mold and mildew or mildew. 2. Grout materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements. 3. Color(s): As selected by Consultant.

B. Grout Type 1 (Interior Dry Areas): Premium-grade, pre-blended, polymer-modified sanded portland-cement tile grout for joints in wet- or dry-area applications, complying with ANSI A118.6 and ISO 13007; CG2WA. 1. Acceptable Product: PermaColor by Laticrete, or equal.

D. Grout Type 2 (Interior Wet Areas and Elevator): Premium-grade, non-sagging, stain-free, reaction resin grout for joints in wet-area applications, complying with ANSI A118.3 and ISO 13007; RG. 1. Acceptable Product: Latapoxy SP-100 by Laticrete, or equal.

E. Grout Type 3 (Exterior): Premium-grade, pre-blended, polymer-modified sanded portland-cement tile grout for joints in wet- or dry-area applications, complying with ANSI A118.6 and ISO 13007; CG2WA. 1. Acceptable Product: Same as specified in Section 07650.

2.05 MEMBRANE MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Membrane materials shall conform to specified warranty requirements, and

shall be compatible with other materials used in the assembly.

B. Synthetic Rubber Waterproofing Membrane: Refer to Section 07140.

C. Secondary Waterproof Membrane: Thin, flexible, seamless load-bearing waterproofing/ crack isolation membrane formed from a single component, self-curing, liquid rubber polymer; shall not require the use of fabric in the field, coves or corners. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. Hydrostatic Test, 7-day (ANSI A118.10): Pass. b. Tensile Strength, 7-day (ANSI A118.10): 265 to 300 PSI (1.8 to 2.0

MPa). c. Water Immersion, 7-day (ANSI A118.10): 95 to 120 PSI (0.7 to 0.83

MPa). d. Shear Bond, 7-day (ANSI A118.10): 200 to 275 PSI (1.4 to 1.9 MPa).


e. Shear Strength, 28-day (ANSI A118.10): 214 to 343 PSI (1.5 to 2.3 MPa)

f. System Crack Resistance Test (ANSI A118.12.5.4): Pass (High). g. Water Vapor Transmission (ASTM E 96, Procedure B): 0.515 grams/h-

ft2. h. Water Vapor Performance (ASTM E 96, Procedure B): 1.247 perms. i. Service Rating (TCNA; ASTM C 627): Extra Heavy/cycles 1-14.

2. Acceptable Product: Laticrete Hydro Ban, or equal.

D. Crack Suppression Membrane: Thin, cold-applied, two-part system consisting of a liquid rubber and reinforcing fabric; for interior or exterior use on floors and walls whenever hairline cracking or spider-webbing occurs in the substrate, and over shrinkage and other non-structural cracks up to 1/8 inch in width. Materials shall be non-toxic, non-flammable, and non-hazardous during storage, mixing, application, and when cured. 1. Physical and Performance Requirements:

a. System Crack Resistance (ANSI A118.12 5.4): Pass at 1/8 inch (3 mm). b. Elongation (ASTM D 751; 17.1): 20 to 30 percent. c. Breaking Strength, Cut Strip Method (ASTM D751; 16.1): 1700 to 1900

psi (11.72 to 13.10 MPa). d. Nominal Dry Thickness (LIL 1013): 0.020 inch (0.51 mm) e. 28 day Quarry/Concrete Shear Strength (ANSI A118.12 5.1.5): 125 psi

(0.86 MPa), minimum. f. Point Load (ANSI A118.12 5.2): 3200 lbf (14 kN), minimum. g. Service Temperature Range (LIL 1016): -20 to 280 degrees F (-28 to

137 degrees C). h. Service Rating (TCNA/ASTM C 627): Extra Heavy/cycles 1-14. i. Total VOC Content: Less than 0.05 mg/m3.

2. Acceptable Product: Laticrete Blue 92 Anti-fracture Membrane, or equal

E. Membrane at Walls: Membrane (ANSI A-2.1.8) of # 15 roofing felt or 4-6-mil polyethylene film is required behind CBU.

2.06 MOVEMENT JOINT MATERIALS

A. General: 1. Joint Cleaner: Non-corrosive and non-staining type, recommended by

sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 2. Primer: Non-staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit

application.

B. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application.

C. Backup Strip: A flexible and compressible type of closed cell foam polyethylene, butyl rubber, or open cell and closed cell polyurethane, rounded to contact sealant, as shown in TCNA Method EJ171 details, and as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 1. Backup strip must fit neatly into the joint without compacting and to such a

height to allow a sealant depth of 1/2 the width of the joint. 2. Sealant must not bond to the backup material.

D. Joint Sealant: High-performance, one-component, neutral-cure, 100-percent


silicone sealant designed for ceramic tile applications. 1. Shall conform to ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT, Use I,

Use M, Use G. 2. Adhesion: Shall conform to ASTM C 794. 3. Shall be equipped with fungicides to resist mold and mildew growth. 4. Shall be resistant to pool chemicals. 5. Colors: To be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s complete range. 6. Product: Latisil by Laticrete, or equal.

2.07 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Patching and Leveling Compounds: Latex-portland mortar complying with ANSI A118.4 and designed for screeds, patching and leveling beds, and scratch/plaster coats; suitable for repairing subfloors in commercial and institutional applications. 1. General:

a. Products containing gypsum are not acceptable. 2. Interior Patching and Leveling Compound: Engineered, polymer-modified,

fiber-reinforced, cement-based, skimcoating and patching compound. a. Thickness: Featheredge to 1/2-inch. b. Performance Requirements (28 days):

(1) Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109): Minimum 3,500 PSI. c. Acceptable Products: 816 Latipatch by Laticrete, or equal.

3. Interior Self-leveling Underlayment: High-strength, self-leveling, cement-based underlayment and repair mix. a. Thickness: Featheredge to 1-1/2 inches. b. Performance Requirements (28 days):

(1) Compressive Strength (ASTM C 109): Minimum 4,400 PSI. (2) Flexural Strength (ASTM C 348): Minimum 1,100 PSI.

c. Acceptable Products: 86 Latilevel by Laticrete, or equal. 4. Exterior Patching and Leveling Compound: Refer to Section 07140.

B. Reinforcing: 1. Wire Reinforcing: 2 inch x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) x 16 ASW gauge or 0.0625

inch (1.6mm) diameter galvanized steel welded wire mesh complying with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82.

2. Reinforcing Mesh: 2 x 2 inch (50 x 50 mm) size weave of 16/16 wire size; welded fabric, galvanized; complying with ASTM A 185.

3. Glass Fiber Mesh Tape: 2-inch (50 mm) wide self-adhesive fiberglass mesh tape.

C. Grout Sealer: Water-based grout sealer designed to resist water, oil and acid-based contaminants, and to simplify maintenance. 1. General:

a. Shall not change the appearance of the grout. b. Shall allow moisture vapor transmission. c. Suitable for cementitious sanded or unsanded grout joints, interior and

exterior applications, and walls or floors. d. Expected Wear Duration: 5 years, minimum.

2. Product: As recommended by grout manufacturer.

D. Cementitious Backer Board: ASTM C 1325, ANSI A118.9; High density,


cementitious, glass fiber reinforced. 1. Thickness: 1/2 inch or 5/8 inch, as indicated on drawings; if not indicated,

provide 1/2 inch. 2. Product:

a. DUROCK Brand Cement Board, by United States Gypsum Company. b. Wonderboard, by Custom Building Products. c. Accepted equal.

E. Fasteners (for attaching Cementitious Backer Board panels to stud framing): Non-corrosive and non-oxidizing, hot-dipped galvanized fasteners conforming to ASTM A 653. Refer to Section 09260 for additional requirements.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Sub-floor Surfaces: 1. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are:

a. Smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive tile.

b. Dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of setting materials to sub-floor surfaces.

2. Test concrete sub-floor surfaces for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not within the following limits: a. Moisture Emission Rate: Not greater than 3 lb per 1000 SF (7.1 kg per

100 sq m) per 24 hours when tested using calcium chloride moisture test kit for 72 hours.

b. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. 3. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location. 4. Verify that elevator floor recess conforms to depth indicated in the submittals

for that part of the work (refer to Section 14201).

B. Wall Substrate Surfaces: 1. Solid Substrate: Verify that wall substrate surfaces are smooth and flat

within the tolerances specified for that type of work, are dust-free, and are ready to receive tile.

2. Stud Framing: Verify that support metal and framing systems are installed to meet tolerances specified in Section 09111 or Section 09260, as applicable, and ready for installation of cementitious backer board.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: 1. Protect surrounding work from damage. 2. Vacuum clean surfaces and damp clean. 3. Seal substrate surface cracks with filler. Level existing substrate surfaces to

acceptable flatness tolerances.

B. Concrete and Masonry: 1. Cleaning:

a. Chip out loose material, clean off all oil, grease dirt, adhesives, curing compounds, and other deterrents to bonding by mechanical method, or


by using products specifically designed for cleaning concrete and masonry.

b. Use self-contained power blast cleaning systems to remove curing compounds and steel trowel finish from concrete slabs where ceramic tile will be installed directly on concrete surface with thin-set materials.

c. Steam cleaning or the use of acids and solvents for cleaning will not be permitted.

2. Patching and Leveling: a. Mix and apply patching and leveling compound in accordance with

manufacturer's instructions. b. Fill holes and cracks and align concrete floors that are out of required

plane with patching and leveling compound. 1) Thickness of compound as required to bring finish tile system to

elevation shown. 2) Float finish, except finish smooth for elastomeric waterproofing. 3) At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow

joint of same width to continue through underlayment. c. Apply patching and leveling compound to concrete and masonry wall

surfaces that are out of required plane. d. Apply leveling coats of material compatible with wall surface and tile

setting material to wall surfaces, other than concrete and masonry that are out of required plane.

C. Cementitious Backer Board / Cementitious Backer Units (CBU): 1. Prior to installation of CBU, install membrane (ANSI A.2.1.8) over entire wall

area where CBU is to be installed; refer to TCNA (HB) Method W244 and CBU manufacturer’s instructions for additional information.

2. Install CBU in accordance with ANSI A108.11, CBU manufacturer's instructions, and applicable requirements of the Florida Building Code.

3. Install CBUs horizontally or vertically to minimize joints, with end joints over framing members. a. CBUs with rounded edges: Face rounded edge away from studs, to

form a V-joint for joint treatment. 4. Secure CBUs to each framing member with screws spaced not more than 8

inches (200 mm) on center and not closer than 1/2 inch (13 mm) from the edge of the CBU, or as recommended by CBU manufacturer. Install screws so that the screw heads are flush with the surface of the backer unit.

5. Where CBU joins waterproofing, lap backer unit over turned up waterproof system. Install fasteners only through top one-inch of turned up waterproof systems.

6. Remove polyethylene wrapping from CBUs and separate to allow for air circulation. a. Allow moisture content of backer units to dry down to a maximum of 35

percent before applying joint treatment and tile. 7 Joint Treatment:

a. Do not install joint treatment for seven days after installation of CBU, to allow time for moisture content of backer units to dry down.

b. Fill horizontal and vertical joints and corners with latex-Portland cement mortar. Apply 2-inch wide glass fiber mesh tape over joints and corners, and embed with same mortar.


c. Leave 1/4 inch (6 mm) space for sealant at lips of sinks or other plumbing receptors.

D. Elevator Cab Floor: Prepare steel substrate in accordance with mortar manufacturer’s instructions (e.g., Laticrete TDS 146). 1. Inspect steel for any signs of rust or corrosion. Clean, remove, passivate

steel in accord with steel manufacturer’s guidelines to ensure that rust / corrosion is completely removed prior to tiling.

2. Ensure that surfaces to be tiled are sound, clean and free of dust, dirt, oil, grease, sealers, curing compounds, laitance, efflorescence, form oil, loose plaster, paint, and any other bond breaking material or debris. Clean metal surfaces with a strong detergent to ensure that all manufacturing oils are removed, rinse completely and allow it to dry.


A. Install tile and grout in accordance with applicable requirements of ANSI A108.1 through A108.13, manufacturer's instructions, and TCNA (HB) recommendations.

B. Lay tile to pattern indicated; if pattern is not indicated, lay tile to pattern as directed by Consultant after verification of field dimensions. Do not interrupt tile pattern through openings, except as otherwise indicated.

C. Workmanship: 1. Lay-out tile work so that no tile less than one-half full size is used. Make all

cuts on the outer edge of the field. 2. Set tile firmly in place with finish surfaces in true planes. Align tile flush with

adjacent tile unless shown otherwise. 3. Form intersections and returns accurately. 4. Form internal angles square and external angles bullnosed, except as

otherwise indicated. 5. Cut and fit tile to penetrations through tile, leaving sealant joint space. Form

corners and bases neatly. Align floor, base and wall joints. 6. Cut and drill tile neatly without marring surface. 7. Cut edges of tile abutting penetrations, finish, or built-in items:

a. Fit tile closely around electrical outlets, piping, fixtures and fittings, so that plates, escutcheons, collars and flanges will overlap cut edge of tile.

b. Seal tile joints water tight, around electrical outlets, piping fixtures and fittings before cover plates and escutcheons are set in place; refer to Section 07900 for additional information.

c. Completed work shall be free from hollow sounding areas and loose, cracked or defective tile.

d. Remove and reset tiles that are out of plane or misaligned. e. Floors:

1) Extend floor tile beneath casework and equipment, except built-in casework units mounted in wall recesses.

2) In areas where floor drains occur, slope to drains where shown. 3) Shove and vibrate tiles over 8 inches (200 mm) square to achieve

full support of bond coat. f. Walls:

(1) Cover walls and partitions, including pilasters, furred areas, and freestanding columns from floor to ceiling, or from floor to nominal


wainscot heights shown with tile. (2) Finish reveals of openings with tile, except where other finish

materials are shown or specified. (3) At window openings, provide tile stools and reveals, except where

other finish materials are shown or specified. (4) Finish wall surfaces behind and at sides of casework and

equipment, except those units mounted in wall recesses, with same tile as scheduled for room proper.

8. Joints: a. Keep all joints in line, straight, level, perpendicular and of even width,

unless shown otherwise. b. Joint Width:

(1) Grout Joints: 1/8 inch (3 mm), except as otherwise indicated. (a) Grout Joints - Flexible Concrete Tile Floors: 1/16 inch.

(2) Movement Joints: 1/4 inch (6 mm), except as otherwise indicated.

E. Place tile joints uniform in width, subject to variance in tolerance allowed in tile size. Make joints watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar, or excess grout.

F. Sound tile after setting. Replace hollow sounding units.

G. Keep control joints free of adhesive or grout. Apply sealant to joints.

H. Allow tile to set for a minimum of 48 hours prior to grouting.

I. Grout tile joints.

J. Apply silicone sealant to junction of tile and dissimilar materials, junction of dissimilar planes, and movement joints.

3.04 INSTALLATION - TILE

A. Interior Dry Areas 1. Floor: Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F113.

a. Mortar Bond Coat: Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 1. b. Tile: Floor Tile Type 1. c. Grout: Grout Type 1 with Grout Sealer.

2. Wall: N/A. 3. Wall Base: N/A.

B. Interior Wet Areas, 1. Floor: Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method F114.

a. Bonded Waterproof Membrane: Waterproof Membrane or Waterproof / Crack Isolation Membrane, per membrane manufacturer’s recommendation; slope to drain.

b. Mortar Bond Coat: Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 1. c. Tile: Floor Tile Type 2; slope to drain. d. Grout: Grout Type 3 with Grout Sealer.

2. Wall: Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244C. a. Membrane: #15 roofing felt or 6-mil polyethylene film, installed between

Cementitious Backer Board and studs. b. Cementitious Backer Board. c. Mortar Bond Coat: Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 2.


d. Tile: Wall Tile Type 1; also, Wall Tile Type 2 at locations indicated on drawings.

e. Grout: Grout Type 2. 3. Wall Base: Install in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method W244C.

a. Membrane: #15 roofing felt or 6-mil polyethylene film, installed between Cementitious Backer Board and studs.

b. Cementitious Backer Board. c. Mortar Bond Coat: Thin-set / Bond Coat Mortar Type 2. d. Tile: Wall Base Tile. e. Grout: Grout Type 2.

C. Elevator: 1. Floor: Install in accordance with tile and mortar manufacturers’ instructions.

a. Mortar Bond Coat: Epoxy Mortar Type 2. (1) Provide mortar thickness as necessary to establish overall tile floor

system installation equal to depth of elevator cab floor recess (i.e, mortar thickness shall equal elevator cab floor recess depth less tile thickness).

b. Tile: Floor Tile Type 4. c. Grout: Grout Type 2.

2. Wall: N/A. 3. Wall Base: N/A.

3.05 INSTALLATION - MOVEMENT JOINTS

A. Provide continuous movement joints in accordance with TCNA (HB) Method EJ171 at each of the following locations: 1. Where tile work abuts restraining surfaces (e.g., perimeter walls, dissimilar

floors, curbs, columns, pipes, ceilings), and where changes occur in backing materials.

2. Where joints occur at changes in plane of tile work, including but not limited to the following: a. Joints at junctions between adjacent walls (e.g., inside corner where wall

tile meets wall tile). b. Joints between walls and floors (e.g., where bottom of cove base tile

meets floor tile). c. Joints between columns, walls and floors. d. Expansion and control joints.

3. All expansion, control, construction, and cold joints in the construction shall continue through the tile work, including such joints at vertical surfaces. a. Joints through tile work directly over structural joints must not be

narrower than the structural joint.

B. Installation: 1. Movement joints shall be located over all cold joints and saw-cut control

joints. 2. To insure that location of joints in tile work align with existing joints in

substrate, joints in tile work should be constructed during installation of mortar beds and/or tile, rather than saw-cutting joints after installation.

3. Keep movement joint cavities open and free of dirt, debris, grout, mortar, and setting materials.


4. Set compressible back-up strip when mortar is placed or utilize removable wood strip to provide space for backup after mortar has cured.

5. Install sealant after tile work and grout are dry. Follow sealant manufacturer’s recommendations.

C. Joint Width: 1/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

3.06 TOLERANCES

A. Subsurface Tolerances: In order to accomplish grout joints of the width specified, variation in the substrate must be minimal. Therefore, Contractor shall comply with TCNA (HB) guidelines for “Subsurface Tolerance,” and the following criteria: 1. Concrete Sub-floor (Substrate for Floor Tile):

a. Finish slab free from small hollows or bumps and graded to the elevations called for, with depressions in floors between high spots not greater than 1/8 inch below a 10-foot straightedge in accordance with ACI 302 Surface Finish Tolerance, and not more than 1/4 inch between opposite exterior walls, unless otherwise called for on the Drawings.

b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges.

2. CMU/Concrete Wall (Substrate for Wall Tile / Wall Base Tile): a. Variation from required plane of the backer board surface shall not

exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet. b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more

than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges. 3. Cementitious Backer Board (Substrate for Wall Tile / Wall Base Tile):

a. Variation from required plane of the backer board surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

b. Subsurface shall not vary by more than 1/16 inch over 1 foot, nor more than 1/32 inch between adjoining edges.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Clean tile and grout surfaces.


A. Do not permit traffic over finished floor surface for 4 days after installation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09660-1 of 6 RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

SECTION 09660

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile. 2. Resilient wall base. 3. Resilient transition trim and moldings.

B. Related Sections: 2. Section 08710 - Finish Hardware. 3. Division 15 - Mechanical 4. Division 16 - Electrical.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static

Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method; 1996.

2. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2001.

3. ASTM E 648 - Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source; 2004.

4. ASTM E 662 - Test Method for Specific Optical Density of Smoke Generated by Solid Materials; 2005.

5. ASTM F 510 - Standard Test Method for Resistance to Abrasion of Resilient Floor Coverings Using an Abrader with a Grit Feed Method; 1993 (2004).

6. ASTM F 710 - Standard Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring; 2005.

7. ASTM F 1066 - Standard Specification for Vinyl Composition Floor Tile; 2004.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Submit properly identified product data, including installation

instructions before starting work. 2. Manufacturer's Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) for adhesive.

C. Samples: Submit manufacturer's standard size samples of each type, color, and finish of resilient flooring and required accessories including full range of flooring color and pattern variations available from proposed manufacturer.

D. Quality Control Submittals: Provide manufacturer's printed document


indicating compliance to slip-resistant coefficient requirements.

E. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports including test results indicating that moisture emission rate and alkalinity of concrete sub-floor surfaces are within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer, and certifying that concrete sub-floor is suitable and ready for resilient flooring installation.

F. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's written instructions for recommended maintenance practices for installed resilient flooring to include: 1. Schedule: Frequency and type of maintenance defined. 2. Equipment: Equipment and tools specified by generic language or

manufacturer's name. 3. Materials: Chemicals required to maintain flooring by brand name,

quantities, and proper solutions.


A. Slip Resistance: 1. Vinyl composition tile flooring shall comply with Coefficient of Friction

(COF) specified in this Section. 2. Non-compliance with specified slip-resistance requirements (i.e.,

Coefficient of Friction) will be grounds for removal and disposal of installed flooring system, properly preparing the floor substrate, and installation of required slip-resistant flooring system at no expense to the Board.

B. Taber Abrasionmeter Testing: 1. The weight loss of each tile shall average no more than 0.60 grams

when ten tiles are abraded with aluminum oxide grit and a S-39 leather wheel for 2000 cycles according to ASTM F 510.


A. Deliver products in manufacturer's unopened original dry packaging, with tags and labels intact.

B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle materials to prevent damage from dropping, careless storage, and handling.

C. Store material in weather protected space with temperature between 65 and 90 degrees F.

1.06 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Maintain room and material temperature between 65 degrees F. and 90 degrees F. for at least 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after installation. Maintain a minimum 65 degrees F. thereafter. Painting shall be completed, air-conditioning operational, and exterior thresholds installed.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Furnish manufacturer's standard warranty covering manufacturing defects for a period of 2 years.

B. Installer shall warrant in writing to correct conditions due to faulty


installation or replace defective materials after project completion, including any loss of adhesion to the substrate to the satisfaction of the Board.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 1. Manufacturers:

a. Standard Excelon by Armstrong, Lancaster, PA. b. Flex-thru by Flextile, Toronto, Ontario. c. Essentials by Mannington, Salem, NJ. d. Expressions by Tarkett, Parsippany, NJ.

2. 12 inches x 12 inches x 1/8-inch, marbleized pattern, composed of resin binder, fillers, and pigments. a. The marbleized pattern on the surface of the tile shall be

dispersed uniformly throughout the thickness of the tile to the back of the tile without significant change.

3. Color and Pattern: a. As shown on the drawings, colors/patterns shall be as per

approved color board, assume 30% multi-colored pattern in student occupied spaces.

b. Colors and patterns shall be judged accepted equivalent, as determined by the A/E, to those pre-selected or above specified patterns and colors by the manufacturers as specified.

4. Tile shall comply with the following: a. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square

centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648. b. Smoke Density: Not more than 450, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 662. c. Coefficient of Friction (COF): Minimum “wet” COF when tested

in accordance with ASTM C 1028 shall be as follows: 1) For level floors, except accessible route floors: 0.5 2) For accessible route floors, such as but not limited to

interior corridors: 0.6 3) For inclined floors, such as but not limited to ramps: 0.8

B. Resilient Base: ASTM F 1861, Type TS rubber, vulcanized thermoset; top set Style B, Cove, and as follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square

centimeter, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 648. 2. Height: 4 or 6 inches, as indicated on drawings. 3. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) thick. 4. Finish: Satin. 5. Color:

a. As shown on the drawings, colors shall be as per approved color board.

b. Colors shall be judged equivalent, as determined by the A/E, to those pre-selected or above specified colors.

6. Corners:


a. At all corners, provide inside/outside corners as applicable to the specific corner. Extend 4 inches minimum beyond corner.

b. Pre-molded corners are not allowed. 7. Manufacturers:

a. Armstrong. b. Flexco. c. Johnsonite. d. Burke Mercer. e. R.C.A. Rubber. f. Roppe.

C. Accessories: 1. Metal Transition (edge) Thresholds: Pemko #173A, Pemko #174C, or

accepted equivalent. 2. Tile Adhesive: Non-toxic, waterproof, stabilized type as

recommended by resilient tile flooring manufacturer, complying with EPA requirements.

3. Sub-floor Filler/Underlayment: Cementitious based or white pre-mix latex underlayment; type recommended by flooring manufacturer. a. Latex and powder shall be from the same manufacturer, and

as recommended by the manufacturer. 4. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof; types recommended by flooring

manufacturer. 5. Sealer and Wax: Types recommended by flooring manufacturer and

approved by M-DCPS.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion off the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances are ready to receive resilient flooring.

C. Verify that wall surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 09250, are dust-free, and are ready to receive resilient base.

D. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free, and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesive materials to sub-floor surfaces.

E. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for resilient flooring installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity in accordance with ASTM F 710; obtain instructions if test results are not within limits recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

F. Verify that required floor-mounted utilities are in correct location.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with ASTM F 710, manufacturer’s recommendations, and as


specified for surface preparation.

B. Concrete shall be smooth, flat, and level, with maximum surface variations not exceeding 1/8-inch in a 10-foot radius. 1. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps; grind down ridges and other

irregularities. 2. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with Sub-floor Filler/Underlayment

as recommended by the flooring manufacturer.

C. Seal concrete slabs to receive interlocking rubber flooring.

D. Remove paint, oils, bond breakers, waxes, and sealers from surface. Inorganic solvents are not to be used.

E. Moisture Tests: 1. Determine whether the concrete slab is adequately dry for resilient

flooring installation. 2. Test concrete slabs in new construction or existing slabs on grade for

manufacturer’s allowable moisture content by one of the following: a. The protimeter electrical conductivity survey master moisture

test instrument. b. Calcium chloride test.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Lay resilient flooring with adhesive cement according to manufacturer's recommendations with basketweave tile layout.

B. Lay interlocking rubber flooring over sealed concrete floor without adhesives.

C. Layout: 1. Butt tightly to vertical surfaces, thresholds, nosings, and edges. 2. Scribe, as necessary, around obstructions to produce neat joints, laid

tight, even, and straight. 3. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, into closets, and

similar openings. 4. Install border tiles next to walls of not less than one half tile and of

approximately equal size around the perimeter of the room.

D. Fill surface imperfections such as cracks, depressions, or rough areas with underlayment. 1. Provide ventilation in areas where adhesive is being used. When

natural ventilation is inadequate, use safety-spark-proof fans and prohibit smoking.

E. Transition (Edge) Strips: 1. Install metal transition (edge) thresholds with concrete screws at 6

inches o.c. wherever exposed edges of resilient flooring materials occur.

2. Where resilient flooring stops at doorways, set transition thresholds directly under the door in its closed position.


A. Remove excess adhesive and other soiling from floors and adjacent


surfaces, using neutral type cleaners as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer. 1. Do not use acids or other caustic solutions as cleaning agents.

B. Clean and apply 3 coats of M-DCPS approved liquid wax floor finish to VCT according to wax manufacturer’s printed instructions.

C. Before allowing traffic, protect installed flooring from damage by covering with clean, heavy duty building paper from time of cleaning until all work in the area is complete.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09680 - 1 of 6 CARPET

SECTION 09680

CARPET

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Carpet.

B. Accessories.


A. Section 06400 - Architectural Woodwork and Custom Cabinets.

B. Section 09648- Wood Strip Flooring

D. Section 09650 - Resilient Base and Moldings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following: 1. Dimensions of carpeted areas. 2. Pattern direction and layout. Note any additional colors. 3. Location of edge strips, moldings and edge bindings. 4. Seaming plan and method of joining seams.

C. Product Data: 1. General: Provide data on specified products, describing physical and

performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

2. Carpet: a. Provide data on specified products, describing physical and

performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation.

b. Provide installation, maintenance, and cleaning instructions as recommended by both carpet and fiber manufacturers.

3. Accessories: Manufacturer's technical information for all carpet accessories, adhesives, fillers, and other floor preparation materials. Describe physical and performance characteristics, sizes, patterns, color availability, and method of installation.

D. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: Submit two sets of samples showing manufacturer’s

complete range of colors and patterns for specified carpet material. 2. Verification Samples: Submit two samples 24 x 24 inch (600 x 600 mm) in

size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

F. Maintenance Data: Include maintenance procedures, recommended


maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing specified carpet with minimum three years documented experience.

B. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing carpet with minimum three years experience.

C. Testing: 1. Moisture Emission Rate and Alkalinity Test Reports: Submit copies of

moisture emission rate and alkalinity testing reports. a. Certificate of Compliance: Include a certificate of acceptance signed by

carpet installer assuring that concrete sub-floor meets applicable moisture emission rate and alkalinity criteria recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive manufacturer, and that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation

2. NFPA 253 Testing and Identification: Floor covering materials shall be tested by an approved agency in accordance with NFPA 253 and identified by a hang tag or other suitable method so as to identify the manufacturer or supplier and style, and shall indicate the interior floor finish or floor covering classification according to FBC-B SECTION 804.2. a. Carpet floor coverings shall be tested as proposed for use, including

underlayment. b. Test reports confirming the information provided in the manufacturer’s

product identification shall be furnished to the building official upon request.


A. Store materials in area of installation for minimum period of 24 hours prior to installation.

B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F (21 degrees C) ambient temperature 24 hours prior to, during and 24 hours after installation.

C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 72 hours after installation.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Provide written warranty from the carpet manufacturer including the following: 1. Excessive Surface Wear: 10 years. 2. Static Electricity: Life of the product. 3. Colorfastness:

a. Light: 10 years. b. Atmospheric Contamination: 5 years.

4. Delamination: 10 years. 5. Zippering: 10 years. 6. Edge Ravel: 10 years.

B. Excessive Surface Wear: Provide written 10-year warranty from the carpet manufacturer against surface pile wear exceeding 10 percent in any given area.


C. Static Electricity: Life-of-the-product guarantee for the carpet to maintain static below 3.5 kv @ 70 degrees F. and 20 percent relative humidity.

D. Colorfastness: In any given area, normal exposure to light will not cause a significant change in color for 10 years and exposure to normal atmospheric contaminants will not cause a significant change in color for 5 years.

E. Delamination (Construction): In any given area, the backing structure will not delaminate from the face structure nor will there be any shrinkage affecting performance of the face and backing structure for 10 years.

F. Adjustment: During guarantee period and within 15 days written notice, reset, and repair any areas of faulty manual skill.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Carpet: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Shaw Contract Group: 410 Old Mill Road,

Cartersville, GA 30120; Tel: 800-257-7429; Web: www.shawcontractgroup.com.

2. Other Acceptable Manufacturers: a. C&A (formerly Collins and Aikman), a Tandus Company: 311 Smith

Industrial Boulevard, P.O. Box 1447, Dalton, GA 30722; Tel: 800-248-2878; Web: www.cafloorcoverings.com.

b. InterfaceFLOR Commerical: 1503 Orchard Hill Road, P.O. Box 1503, LaGrange, GA 30241; Tel: 800-336-0225; Web: www.interfaceflorcommerical.com.

c. J & J Industries, Inc: 818 J&J Drive, P.O. Box 1287, Dalton, GA 30722; Tel: 800-241-4565; Web: www.jjindustries.com.

d. Milliken Floor Covering: P.O. Box 2956, LaGrange, GA 30241; Tel: 800-528-8453; Web: www.millikencarpet.com.

e. The Mohawk Group: 500 Townpark Lane, Suite 400, Kennesaw, GA 30144; Tel: 800-554-6637; Web: www.mokawkcommerical.com.

3. Subject to Contract requirements, equivalent products by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration.

.

2.02 CARPET

A. Carpet – Type CT-1: Conform to the following criteria: 1. Surface Flammability Ignition: Pass ASTM D 2859 (the "pill test"). 2. Surface Burning Characteristics (Flame spread): Class I, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 84 flooring radiant panel. 3. Critical Radiant Flux: Minimum of 0.22 watts/sq cm, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253. 4. Smoke Density Index (Smoke Developed): Less than 450, when tested in

accordance with ASTM E 662 NBS smoke chamber. 5. Electrostatic Propensity: <3.5 kV @ 20% R.H.; permanent conductive

filament. 6. Yarn Fiber: 100% nylon.


7. Construction: Multi-level pattern loop. 8. Protective Treatment(s): Soil protection. 9. Finished Pile Thickness: 0.085 inch (2.2 mm), average. 10. Gauge: 1/12 inch (2.1 mm). 11. Stitches: 9 per inch (3.54 per cm). 12. Backing:

a. Primary: Synthetic. b. Secondary:

1) Pre-Coat: High performance type. 2) First Layer: Thermoplastic polyolefin compound laminate. 3) Reinforcement, Stabilizer: Fiberglass mat. 4) Final Layer: Thermoplastic polyolefin compound laminate.

c. Thickness: 0.095 inch (2.4 mm), average. d. Weight: 75 oz per sq yd (____ kg per sq m).

13. Density: 7,624 oz per cu yd (_____ kg per cu m). 14. Weight Density: 137,232. 15. Dye Methods:

a. Solution Dyed: 90%. b. Spaced Dyed: 10%.

16. Product: Shaw no rules collection, tile 17. Pattern:

a. Style Name: b. Style Number:

18. Colorway(s): Two (2), maximum, as selected by the Architect. 19. Tile Dimensions: 24 x 24 inches (61 x 61 cm), die-cut.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Sub-Floor Filler: Type recommended by carpet manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: 1. General: Compatible with materials being adhered; CRI Green Label

certified. 2. Seam Adhesive: Recommended by manufacturer. 3. Contact Adhesive: Recommended by carpet manufacturer; releasable type. 4. Contact Adhesive: Releasable type, recommended by carpet manufacturer.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within the tolerances specified for that type of work and are ready to receive carpet.

B. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are dust-free and free of substances which would impair bonding of adhesives to sub floor surfaces.

C. Verify that concrete sub-floor surfaces are ready for carpet installation by testing for moisture emission rate and alkalinity; obtain instructions if test results are not


within limits recommended by carpet manufacturer and adhesive materials manufacturer.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps. Fill minor or local low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub-floor filler.

B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to achieve smooth, flat, hard surface. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

C. Clean substrate.


A. Install carpet and cushion in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CRI 104.

B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots.

C. Lay out carpet and locate seams in accordance with shop drawings: 1. Locate seams in area of least traffic, out of areas of pivoting traffic, and

parallel to main traffic. 2. Do not locate seams perpendicular through door openings. 3. Align run of pile in same direction as anticipated traffic and in same direction

on adjacent pieces. 4. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. 5. Provide monolithic color, pattern, and texture match within any one area.

D. Install carpet tight and flat on subfloor, well fastened at edges, with a uniform appearance.

3.04 INSTALLATION - CARPET

A. Double cut carpet seams, with accurate pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. Apply seam adhesive to cut edges of woven carpet immediately.

B. Apply carpet adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive.

C. Apply seam adhesive to the base of the edge glued down. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.

D. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing.

E. Trim carpet neatly at walls and around interruptions.

F. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. 1. Exposed edges of carpet shall be fastened to floor surfaces and have trim

along the entire length of the exposed edge. Carpet edge trim shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 11-4.5.2.

G. Follow manufacturer’s installation instructions and use and apply adhesive as per manufacturer’s specifications

3.05 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive from floor and wall surfaces without damage.


B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 09900 - 1 of 22 PAINTS AND COATINGS

SECTION 09900

PAINTS AND COATINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Surface preparation

B. Field application of paints, stains, and other coatings.



B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry.

C. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Shop-primed items.

D. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Shop-primed items.

E. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Surface preparation of gypsum board.

F. Division 15 - Mechanical: Painted identification.

G. Division 16 - Electrical: Painted identification.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. Provide complete list of all products to be used. 2. Provide data on all finishing products, including manufacturer’s Product Data

Sheet; indicate VOC content and Gloss Level for each paint product.

C. Samples: 1. Selection Samples: Submit two paper chip samples, 3 x 3 inches (75 x 75

mm) in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled. a. Designated Colors: If paint manufacturer is not the same as specified

Color System manufacturer, provide preliminary verification samples based on formulations developed using paint manufacturer’s advanced color matching system.

2. Verification Samples: Submit two painted samples, illustrating selected colors and textures for each color and system selected with specified coats cascaded. Submit on aluminum sheet, 12 x 12 inch (300 x 300 mm) in size. a. Designated Colors: If paint manufacturer is not the same as specified

Color System manufacturer, provide color formulation based on paint manufacturer’s advanced color matching system.

D. Certification: By manufacturer that all paints and coatings comply with VOC limits specified.


E. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate special surface preparation procedures and substrate conditions requiring special attention.


A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience and approved by manufacturer.

B. Conform to applicable requirements of the governing building code for flame and smoke rating requirements for products and finishes.

C. Safety during construction and the protection of adjacent public and private properties shall conform to applicable requirements of the following: 1. Florida Building Code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 13. 2. Industrial Health and Safety Regulations (current edition), issued by the

authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Local, State and Federal regulations.

D. Storage, mixing, application and disposal of all paint and related waste materials shall conform to requirements of local authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Definitions: Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.

F. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats.

G. Mock-Ups 1. General:

a. See Section 01400 - Quality Assurance Requirements, for general requirements for mock-up.

b. Locate where directed. c. Mock-ups may remain as part of the Work.

2. Gypsum Wallboard (Drywall) Walls: Provide panel, 10 feet long by 10 feet wide, illustrating coating color, sheen, and finish.

3. Steel Doors and Frames: Provide door and frame assembly illustrating paint coating color, sheen, and finish.


A. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptability.

B. Container Label: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, lot number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup requirements, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.

C. Paint Materials: Store at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in ventilated area, and as required by manufacturer's instructions.


A. Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the temperature ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.


B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain, or when relative humidity is outside the humidity ranges required by the paint product manufacturer.

C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Paints: 1. Apply water-based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be

painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 degrees F. 2. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be

painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 degrees F. 3. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist, or when the relative humidity exceeds

85 percent, or at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point, or to damp or wet surfaces. a. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to

be painted are enclosed and within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods.

D. Provide lighting level of 80 foot-candles measured mid-height at substrate surface. 1. Perform no painting or decorating work unless a minimum lighting level of 30

foot-candles is provided on surfaces to be painted. 2. Adequate lighting facilities shall be provided by the Contractor.

E. Follow manufacturer's recommended procedures for producing best results, including testing of substrates, moisture in substrates, and humidity and temperature limitations.

F. Concrete surfaces must be installed at least 28 days prior to painting and decorating work, and must be visually dry on both sides.

1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

A. Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Obtain information on these controls from applicable government authorities having jurisdiction.

B. All waste materials shall be separated and recycled. Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. Materials that cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner.

C. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste.

D. To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: 1. Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be

filtered out. In no case shall equipment be cleaned using free draining water.

2. Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal.

3. Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering.


4. Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations.

5. Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available).

6. Close and seal tightly partly used cans of materials including sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.

E. Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials not required by the City and deliver or arrange collection for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Supply 1 gallon of each color, type, and surface texture; store where directed.

B. Label each container with color, type, texture, and room locations in addition to the manufacturer's label.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design Manufacturer: PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc: www.ppgaf.com.

B. Other Manufacturers. 1. Benjamin Moore & Co: www.benjaminmoore.com. 2. Duron, Inc: www.duron.com. 3. The Flood Company: www.flood.com. 4. ICI Paints North America: www.icipaintsinna.com. 5. Minwax Company: www.minwax.com. 6. The Sherwin-Williams Company: www.sherwin-williams.com

2.02 PAINTS AND COATINGS - GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoaters, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Paints and Coatings: Ready mixed, except field-catalyzed coatings. Prepare pigments: 1. To a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly

dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. For good flow and brushing properties. 3. Capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags.

C. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content: 1. Provide coatings that comply with the most stringent requirements specified

in the following: a. 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. b. Architectural coatings VOC limits of State of Florida. c. USGBC LEED-NC; for interior wall and ceiling finish (all coats), anti-

corrosive paints on interior ferrous metal, clear wood stains and finishes,


sanding sealers, other sealers, shellac, and floor coatings. 2. Determination of VOC Content: Testing and calculation in accordance with

40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24), exclusive of colorants added to a tint base and water added at project site; or other method acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Provide Premium Grade systems (2 top coats) as defined in MPI (APSM), except as otherwise indicated. 1. Where a specified paint system does not have a Premium Grade, provide

Custom Grade system.

E. Gloss Level: Paint gloss shall be defined as the sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with the following MPI values: 1. Gloss Level G1: Matte or Flat finish.

a. Units at 60 degrees: 0 to 5. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 maximum.

2. Gloss Level G2: Velvet finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 0 to 10. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 to 35.

3. Gloss Level G3: Eggshell finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 10 to 25. b. Units at 85 degrees: 10 to 35.

4. Gloss Level G4: Satin finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 20 to 35. b. Units at 85 degrees: 35 minimum.

5. Gloss Level G5: Semi-Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 35 to 70.

6. Gloss Level G6: Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: 70 to 85.

7. Gloss Level G7: Gloss finish. a. Units at 60 degrees: Greater than 85.

F. Colors: 1. General: Provide colors as designated on the Drawings or as directed by

Consultant. a. Unless otherwise indicated, provide up to three different colors for each

system at no additional cost to City. Colors to be selected by Consultant.

b. Extend colors to surface edges; colors may change at any edge as directed.

2. Color Matching: Where specific color is designated on the Drawings or directed by Consultant in order to match Consultant’s sample, Contractor shall use paint manufacturer’s advanced color matching system (e.g., spectrophotometer with advanced optics technology) in order to match the color sample quickly and precisely. Paint manufacturer’s advanced computer color matching system shall: a. Take into account the characteristics of the base and sheen to provide

the truest color match. b. Analyze each color chip or sample material with a consistent color and

finish (not porous, mirrored, or high-gloss).


c. Provide the most accurate match for the designated colors, regardless of sheen selected.

d. Create a custom formula for each color, and archive formulas for 6 years for easy retrieval and replication.

2.03 INTERIOR PRIMERS

A. Interior Concrete and Masonry Primer: 1. Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior

application. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 4-603 PERMA-CRETE Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer (99 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer Sealer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Interior Water-Based Primer: 1. Factory-formulated, low-viscosity, waterborne, two-component, epoxy

primer/sealer for interior concrete floor application. 2. Product:

a. PPG 99-12800 MegaSeal WBPC (4.0 g/L), or equal.

C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: 1. Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: 1) PPG 4-603 PERMA-CRETE Interior/Exterior Alkali Resistant Primer

(99 g/L VOC) 2) PPG 6-2 Speedhide Interior Latex Primer 6-2 (98 g/l VOC) 3) Equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

D. Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic-Enamel and Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: 1. Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG SEAL GRIP Interior Latex Primer 17-951 (45 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

E. Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Enamel Finishes: 1. Factory-formulated acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 2. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG SEAL GRIP Interior Latex Primer 17-951 (45 g/L VOC), or equa).

b. Type 2: PPG 9-900 Pure Performance Interior Latex Primer (0.0 g/L VOC).

F. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: 1. Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 2. Product: PPG Pitt-Tech Int/Ext Industrial DTM Primer/Finish Enamel 90-712

Series (123 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.


2.04 INTERIOR FINISH COATS

A. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: 1. Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application. 2. Gloss Level: G1. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint (17 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-100 Series Pure Performance Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

B. Interior Flat Latex-Emulsion Size: 1. Factory-formulated flat latex-based interior paint. 2. Gloss Level: G1. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-70 Line SpeedHide Interior Wall Flat Latex Paint (17 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-100 Series Pure Performance Interior Flat Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G3. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-411 Series SpeedHide Eggshell Acrylic Latex Enamel (73 g/L VOC), or equal

b. Type 2: PPG 9-300 Series Pure Performance Interior Eggshell Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

D. Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated satin acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G4. 3. Product: PPG 6-3511 Series SpeedHide Satin Acrylic Latex Enamel (46 g/L

VOC), or equal.

E. Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated semi-gloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 2. Gloss Level: G5. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex (90 g/L VOC), or equal.

b. Type 2: PPG 9-500 Series Pure Performance Interior Semi-gloss Latex Paint (0.0 g/L VOC), or equal.

F. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: 1. Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel. 2. Gloss Level: G6. 3. Product:

a. Type 1: PPG 6-8534 SpeedHide Interior Latex 100 Percent Acrylic Gloss Enamel (90 g/L VOC), or equal.


b. Type 2: PPG 90-374 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Latex High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel (192 g/L VOC; anti-corrosive), or equal.

G. Interior Water-Based Epoxy Floor Coating: 1. Factory-formulated, spreadable, self-leveling, interior, epoxy floor coating. 2. Gloss Level: G6. 3. Color: To be selected by Consultant. 4. Product: PPG 99-12600 Series MegaSeal SL Self-Leveling Epoxy Floor

Coating (38 g/L VOC), or equal.

H. Interior Stain Semi-Transparent Oil: 1. Factory-formulated interior semi-transparent wood stain. 2. Product: PPG Olympic 44500 Premium Interior Oil-Based Wood Stain

44500 (240 g/L), or equal.

I. Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish: 1. Factory-formulated clear acrylic polyurethane. 2. Gloss Level: G4. 3. Product: PPG Olympic 42786 Premium Interior Water-Based Polyurethane

Clear (<250 g/L VOC), or equal.

2.05 ACCESSORY MATERIALS

A. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified; commercial quality.

B. Patching Material: Latex filler.

C. Fastener Head Cover Material: Latex filler.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive Work as instructed by the product manufacturer.

B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.

C. Test shop-applied primer for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.

D. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Concrete (except concrete floors): 12 percent or per coating manufacturer’s

recommendations, whichever is most stringent. 3. Concrete Floors: 8 percent. 4. Interior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442. 5. Exterior Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D 4442.

3.02 PREPARATION


A. Surface Appurtenances: Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.

B. Surfaces: 1. Correct defects and clean surfaces that affect work of this section. 2. Remove or repair existing coatings that exhibit surface defects. 3. Mask surfaces that are not to be finished, or that are to be finished at a later

time.

C. Marks: Seal with shellac that which may bleed through surface finishes.

D. Impervious Surfaces: 1. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tetra-sodium phosphate and

bleach. 2. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.

E. Concrete Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign

matter. 2. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well

and allow to dry. 3. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of

sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. 4. Allow to dry.

F. Gypsum Board Surfaces to be Painted: Fill minor defects with filler compound. Spot prime defects after repair.

G. Asphalt, Creosote, or Bituminous Surfaces to be Painted: Remove foreign particles to permit adhesion of finishing materials. Apply compatible sealer or primer.

H. Insulated Coverings to be Painted: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.

I. Concrete Floors to be Painted: Surfaces designated to be painted must be firm, free of any laitance or efflorescence, clean, free of adverse moisture conditions, have an appropriate surface profile, and be well cured before coating. 1. Newly poured concrete must age at least 30 days at temperatures over 70

degrees F before coating. 2. Form release agents, sealers, curing compounds, salts, hardeners and other

foreign matter will interfere with adhesion and must be removed. 3. Shotblasting, mechanical scarifications, suitable chemical means, or

sandblasting should be employed to prepare substrate. 4. Verify required acid-alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.

J. Aluminum Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Remove surface contamination by steam or high-pressure water. 2. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. 3. Apply etching primer immediately following cleaning.

K. Galvanized Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. 2. Apply coat of etching primer.


M. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces to be Painted: 1. Remove grease, mill scale, weld splatter, dirt, and rust. 2. Where heavy coatings of scale are evident, remove by hand wire brushing or

sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. 3. Apply a treatment of phosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts,

and nuts are similarly cleaned. 4. Prime paint entire surface; spot prime after repairs.

N. Shop-Primed Steel Surfaces to be Finish Painted: 1. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. 2. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. 3. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces. 4. Re-prime entire shop-primed item.

O. Interior Wood Items to Receive Opaque Finish: 1. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. 2. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. 3. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. 4. Back prime concealed surfaces before installation.

P. Interior Wood Items to Receive Transparent Finish: 1. Start with dry, bare wood. Sand surface smooth, always with the grain, using

medium and fine sandpaper. 2. Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy

sections with sealer. a. For soft wood (e.g., birch, maple, pine, fir), apply one coat of primer

sealer before staining, then sand lightly. b. For open grain woods (e.g., oak, mahogany) use a wood filler.

3. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sand lightly between coats.

Q. Metal Doors to be Painted: Prime metal door top and bottom edge surfaces.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Where adjacent sealant is to be painted, do not apply finish coats until sealant is applied.

C. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. Allow applied coats to dry before next coat is applied.

D. Apply each coat to uniform appearance. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.

E. Sand wood and metal surfaces lightly between coats to achieve required finish.

F. Vacuum clean surfaces of loose particles. Use tack cloth to remove dust and particles just prior to applying next coat.

G. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface.

3.04 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Refer to Divisions 15 and 16 for schedule of color coding of equipment, duct


work, piping, and conduit.

B. Paint shop-primed equipment, where indicated.

C. Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately.

D. Reinstall electrical cover plates, hardware, light fixture trim, escutcheons, and fittings removed prior to finishing.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Collect waste material that may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers, and remove daily from site.

3.06 SURFACES TO BE FINISHED

A. Do Not Paint or Finish the Following Items: 1. Items fully factory-finished unless specifically noted. 2. Fire rating labels, equipment serial number and capacity labels. 3. Stainless steel items. 4. Prefaced concrete masonry veneer.

B. Paint the surfaces described below under Painting Schedule.

C. Mechanical and Electrical: Use paint systems defined for the substrates to be finished. 1. Paint all insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and

exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, mechanical equipment, and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas to match background surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Paint shop-primed items occurring in finished areas. 3. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers,

with one coat of flat black paint to visible surfaces. 4. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, to match face panels.

D. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment.

3.07 PAINT SYSTEMS, INTERIOR

A. Concrete (except Concrete Floors) and Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete surfaces: 1. Paint CI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Concrete Primer (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film

thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3

mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry

film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:

1) Primer: Interior Concrete Primer (Type 2); 1.4 to 1.7 mils dry film thickness.


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.6 to 1.8 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.6 to 1.8 mils dry film thickness.

2. Paint CI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: 1) Primer: Interior Concrete Primer (Type 2); 1.4 to 1.7 mils dry film

thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to

1.8 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8

mils dry film thickness. 3. Paint CI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic-Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to

1.2 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils

dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option: N/A.

4. Paint CI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: 1) Primer: Interior Concrete Primer (Type 2); 1.4 to 1.7 mils dry film

thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2);

1.3 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 1.3 to 1.5

mils dry film thickness. 5. Paint CI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.0

to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.


3) Finish Coat: Interior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: N/A.

B. Concrete Floor: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete floors, except where applied floor finish (e.g., resilient tile) is indicated: 1. Paint CfI-OP-3E-G6 (Full-Gloss Epoxy Floor Coating):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Water-Based Primer; dry film thickness per

manufacturer’s recommendations. 2) Intermediate Coat: Water-Based Epoxy Floor Coating; 7 to 9 mils

dry film thickness; color to be selected by Consultant. 3) Finish Coat: Water-Based Epoxy Floor Coating; 7 to 9 mils dry film

thickness; color to be same as Intermediate Coat. b. Zero VOC Option: N/A.

C. Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over interior exposed concrete unit masonry surfaces: 1. Paint CmI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler (Type 2); 4.8 to 14 mils

dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3



1) Primer: Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler (Type 2); 4.8 to 14 mils dry film thickness.



2. Paint CmI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: 1) Primer: Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler (Type 2); 4.8 to 14 mils

dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 1.5

to 1.8 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8

mils dry film thickness. 3. Paint CmI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:



2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: N/A. 4. Paint CmI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Concrete Masonry Unit Block Filler (Type 2); 4.8 to 14 mils

dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9

to 1.2 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2

mils dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:




5. Paint CmI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Full Gloss Acrylic Enamel; 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.


D. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Paint GI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Gypsum Board Primer (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry

film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3



1) Primer: Interior Gypsum Board Primer (Type 2); 1.4 to 1.7 mils dry film thickness.



2. Paint GI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish):



film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.2

to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5





3. Paint GI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel; 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: N/A. 4. Paint GI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish):


film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9






5. Paint GI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.0 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness.


E. Wood - Opaque Finishes: Provide the following finish systems over interior wood surfaces:


1. Paint WI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:

1) Primer: Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamel and Semi-gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness.



b. Zero VOC Option: 1) Primer: Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamel and Semi-gloss

Alkyd-Enamel Finishes (Type 2); 1.4 to 1.7 mils dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.6 to 1.8


film thickness. 2. Paint WI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamel and Semi-gloss

Alkyd-Enamel Finishes (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1);

1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low Luster Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5





3. Paint WI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:




b. Zero VOC Option: N/A. 4. Paint WI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Wood Primer for Acrylic Enamel and Semi-gloss

Alkyd-Enamel Finishes (Type 1); 1.2 to 1.5 mils dry film thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1);

0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to

1.2 mils dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:





5. Paint WI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:





F. Wood - Transparent Finishes: Provide the following finish systems over interior wood surfaces: 1. Paint WI-TR-VS-G4 (Transparent, Varnish, Stain Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Filler Coat (for open grained wood only): As recommended by finish

manufacturer. 2) Stain: Interior Stain Semi-Transparent Oil; 0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film

thickness. 3) Base Coat: Interior Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish; 0.9 to 1.1 mils

dry film thickness. 4) Finish Coat: Acrylic Polyurethane Satin Finish; 0.9 to 1.1 mils dry

film thickness.

G. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior ferrous metal surfaces. 1. Paint MI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film


mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry film

thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:

1) Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.



2. Paint MI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.


3) Finish Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

b. Zero VOC Option: 1) Primer: Interior Ferrous Metal Primer; 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film

thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to

1.8 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8

mils dry film thickness. 3. Paint MI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2

mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils


4. Paint MI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:





thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 1.3


mils dry film thickness. 5. Paint MI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0

to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0

mils dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option: N/A.

H. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):


thickness.



3) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry film thickness.




film thickness. 2. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0

to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0



2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8 mils dry film thickness.

3. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:




b. Zero VOC Option: N/A. 4. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1);

0.9 to 1.2 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to

1.2 mils dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:





5. Paint MgI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:





I. Aluminum: Provide the following finish systems over interior aluminum surfaces: 1. Paint MaI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):



mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint; 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry film

thickness. b. Zero VOC Option:




2. Paint MaI-OP-3A-G3 (Low-Luster Acrylic Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:


2) Intermediate Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.

3) Finish Coat: Exterior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness.


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to

1.8 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.5 to 1.8

mils dry film thickness. 3. Paint MaI-OP-3A-G4 (Satin Acrylic Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2

mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Satin Acrylic Enamel (Type 1); 0.9 to 1.2 mils



4. Paint MaI-OP-3A-G5 (Semi-gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish): a. Standard LEED Compliant Option:





thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Semi-gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 1.3


mils dry film thickness. 5. Paint MaI-OP-3A-G6 (Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish):


thickness. 2) Intermediate Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0

to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. 3) Finish Coat: Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel (Type 2); 2.0 to 3.0

mils dry film thickness. b. Zero VOC Option: N/A.

J. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering: 1. Paint FI-OP-3A-G1 (Flat Acrylic Finish):

a. Standard LEED Compliant Option: 1) First Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry

film thickness. 2) Finish Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 1); 1.1 to 1.3 mils dry


1) First Coat: Interior Flat Acrylic Paint (Type 2); 1.6 to 1.8 mils dry film thickness.


3.08 PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Interior Surfaces: 1. General:

a. Concrete and Plaster: 1) Walls and Vertical Surfaces: Paint CI-OP-3A-G6; colors to be

selected by Consultant. 2) Ceilings and Soffits: Paint CI-OP-3A-G3; colors to be selected by

Consultant. b. Concrete Floor: Paint CfI-OP-3E-G6; one color to be selected by

Consultant.


c. Concrete Unit Masonry: Paint CmI-OP-3A-G6; one color to be selected by Consultant

d. Metal: 1) Steel Doors and Frames: Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; one color to be

selected by Consultant. 2) Access Doors and Panels: Same as Steel Doors and Frames,

except as otherwise indicated; colors to be selected by Consultant. 3) Ferrous Metal: Paint MI-OP-3A-G5; colors to be selected by

Consultant. 4) Galvanized Steel: Paint MgI-OP-3A-G5; colors to be selected by

Consultant. e. Wood:

1) Roof/Ceiling Framing and T&G Sheathing: Paint WI-TR-VS-G4; stain color to match color selected for WE-TR-POC.

2) Trim (except at roof framing, T&G sheathing): Paint WI-OP-3A-G5; colors to be selected by Consultant.

3) Panel Boards: Paint WI-OP-3A-G6, except as otherwise indicated; colors to be selected by Consultant.

f. All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Paint FI-OP-3A-G1; one color to be selected by Consultant.

2. Gypsum Board: a. General: All surfaces, except as otherwise indicated

1) Walls and Vertical Surfaces: Paint GI-OP-3A-G4; colors to be selected by Consultant.

2) Ceilings and Soffits: Paint GI-OP-3A-G3; colors to be selected by Consultant.

b. Storage; Mechanical Room: 1) Walls and Vertical Surfaces: Paint GI-OP-3A-G6; one color to be

selected by Consultant. 2) Ceilings and Soffits: Paint GI-OP-3A-G4; one color to be selected

by Consultant.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 10170 - 1 PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

SECTION 10170

PLASTIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Solid plastic toilet compartments.

B. Urinal screens.



B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Stud-framed partitions; blocking and supports; backer plates.

C. Section 09300 - Tile.

D. Section 10800 - Toilet Accessories.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire Resistance: Partition materials shall comply with the following requirements, when tested in accordance with the ASTM E 84. 1. Smoke Developed Index: Not to exceed 450 2. Flame Spread Index: Not to exceed 75 3. Material Fire Ratings:

a. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): Class B. b. International Code Council (ICC): Class B.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: 1. General: Indicate overall layout of restrooms, including toilet compartments

and urinal screens. a. Include field-verified dimensions for walls, plumbing fixtures, floor drains,

clean-outs, access panels, wall construction, blocking and supports, backer plates, and floor and wall tile.

2. Toilet Compartments and Urinal Screens: Include detailed compartment plan, elevation views, dimensions, details of wall supports, door swings, anchorage and fasteners, hardware and other components.

C. Product Data: Provide data on panel construction, hardware, and accessories.

D. Samples: Submit two samples of partition panels, 4x4 inch (100x100 mm) in size illustrating panel finish, color, and sheen.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and perimeter conditions requiring special attention.

1.05 COORDINATION


A. Coordinate the work with placement of support framing and anchors in wall.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Plastic Toilet Compartments: 1. Basis of Design: Santana Products Co., Inc: www.hinyhider.com. 2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Contract requirements,

equivalent products by one of the following may be used: a. Ampco Products, Inc: www.ampco.com. b. Mills Company, a subsidiary of Bradley Corporation:

www.bradleycorp.com. c. Comtec Industries: www.comtecindustries.com. d. Hadrian Manufacturing Inc.: www.hadrian-inc.com.

3. Substitutions: Section 2 - General Terms and Conditions and Section 3 - Supplemental Terms and Conditions.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Solid Molded Plastic: 1. Doors, panels and pilasters shall be 1-inch thick constructed from High

Density Polyethylene (HDPE) resins. a. HDPE solid plastic components shall be fabricated of minimum 10

percent post industrial recycled HDPE. 2. Partitions shall be fabricated from polymer resins compounded under high

pressure, forming a single component which is waterproof, nonabsorbent and has a self-lubricating surface that resists marks from pens, pencils, markers and other writing instruments.

3. All edges are to be machined to a radius of 0.250 inch. 4. All plastic components shall be covered with a protective plastic masking.

2.03 COMPONENTS

A. Toilet Compartments: Solid molded plastic panels, doors, and pilasters; floor-mounted headrail-braced. 1. Color: To be selected by Consultant from manufacturer’s standard range of

colors. 2. Door and Panel Dimensions:

a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). b. Door Width (except for Handicapped Use): 24 inches (clear opening). c. Door Width for Handicapped Use: 32 inches (clear opening). d. Panel Height: 55 inches. e. Door Height: 55 inches. f. Pilaster Height: 82 inches; shall allow for minimum 80 inches clear

headroom. 3. No-Sight Feature: Door and pilaster system shall eliminate gaps at stall

fronts, providing increased privacy. a. This feature shall consist of matching profiles on the hinge side and an

overlap on the strike side to prevent a line of sight. b. This feature shall not require any special floor or ceiling construction.


B. Urinal Screens: Solid molded plastic panels; wall-mounted with continuous panel brackets. 1. Dimensions:

a. Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). b. Width: 18 inches. c. Height: 42 inches.

2. Color: To match Toilet Compartments.

C. Pilaster Shoes: Formed ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, 3 in (75 mm) high, concealing floor fastenings. 1. Pilaster shoes shall be secured to the pilaster with a stainless steel tamper

resistant torx head sex bolt. 2. Provide adjustment for floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles

integral with pilaster.

D. Head Rails: Head rail shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy) with anti-grip design; clear anodized finish. 1. Head rail shall be fastened to the head rail bracket by a stainless steel

tamper resistant torx head sex bolt, and fastened at the top of the pilaster with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

E. Brackets: 1. Toilet Compartment Brackets:

a. Pilaster Bracket (for securing panel to pilaster): Continuous (54 inches long) bracket fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5); single-ear configuration at end/corner panel application, or double-ear configuration at intermediate panel application; bright dip anodized finish.

b. Panel Bracket (for securing panel to wall): Continuous (54 inches long) bracket fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5); single-ear configuration at end panel application, or double-ear configuration at intermediate panel application; bright dip anodized finish.

c. Headrail Brackets (for securing headrail to pilaster): Minimum 18-gauge thick ASTM A 666, Type 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish, and secured to the wall with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head screws.

2. Urinal Screen Brackets: a. Panel Bracket (for securing panel to wall): Continuous (41 inches long)

bracket fabricated from heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5); double-ear configuration; bright dip anodized finish.

F. Door Hardware: 1. Integral Hinge System:

a. Pilaster to be machined to accept door and hinge mechanism. b. Hinge mechanism to consist of a 2-piece 1/2 inch diameter nylon pin

with cam action, and 3/16 inch stainless steel pin inserted into lower portion of pilaster and door.

c. Door closure to be factory-set to accommodate all conditions and allow for a positive opening and closing action free of impediment.

2. Door Latch: Slide type with exterior emergency access feature.


a. Door strike/keeper shall be 6 inches long and made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6436-T5 alloy) with a bright dip anodized finish and secured to the pilasters with stainless steel tamper resistant torx head sex bolts. 1) Bumper shall be made of extruded black vinyl.

b. Latch and housing shall be made of heavy-duty extruded aluminum (6463-T5 alloy). 1) The latch housing shall have a bright dip anodized finish, and the

slide bolt and button shall have a black anodized finish. 3. Coat Hook/Bumper: Each door shall be supplied with one coat hook/bumper

and door pull made of chrome-plated zamak or stainless steel. 4. Door Pull: Each out-swing door shall be supplied with a second door pull

and door stop.

G. Fasteners: 1. General:

a. All exposed fasteners to be tamper-resistant type. b. All fasteners to be stainless steel; cadmium-plated fasteners are not

allowed. c. Fastener Size: Per manufacturer’s recommendation.

2. Panel Bracket: a. Shall be fastened to wall construction with tamper-resistant stainless

steel fasteners at maximum 13 inches on center, and 1 inch from each end; coordinate fastener location with installation of Backer Plates specified in Section 09260.

b. Shall be fastened to panel by through-bolting with tamper-resistant stainless steel torx head sex bolts at maximum 13 inches on center, and 1 inch from each end.

3. Pilaster Bracket shall be fastened to pilasters and panels by through-bolting with tamper-resistant stainless steel torx head sex bolts at maximum 13 inches on center, and 1 inch from each end.

4. Headrail Bracket: a. Shall be fastened to pilaster / panel by through-bolting with tamper-

resistant stainless steel torx head sex bolts at spacing recommended by manufacturer.

b. Shall be fastened wall construction with tamper-resistant stainless steel fasteners; coordinate fastener location with installation of Backer Plates specified in Section 09260.

5. Pilaster Shoe: a. Shall be fastened to floor with manufacturer’s recommended expansion

anchors. b. Shall be fastened to pilaster by through-bolting with tamper-resistant

stainless steel torx head sex bolts. 6. Door Hardware: Shall be fastened to pilaster by through-bolting with tamper-

resistant stainless steel torx head sex bolts.

H. Miscellaneous Accessories: 1. Accessibility Sign: Each accessible toilet stall shall have a sign bearing the

International Symbol of Access (ISA) pictogram permanently mounted on the outside face of the door panel; sign shall be 8 x 8 inches unless otherwise indicated.


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify correct spacing of and between plumbing fixtures, floor drains, clean-outs and access panels, as required for proper installation of toilet compartments and urinal screens.

C. Verify correct location of built-in framing, blocking and supports and backer plates, as required for proper attachment of toilet compartment fasteners and anchors.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install partitions secure, rigid, plumb, and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Maintain 3/8 to 1/2 inch (9 to 13 mm) space between wall and panels and between wall and end pilasters.

C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.

D. Attach panels and pilasters to brackets. Locate head rail joints at pilaster center lines.

E. Field touch-up of scratches or damaged finish will not be permitted. Replace damaged or scratched materials with new materials.

3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/4 inch (6 mm).

B. Maximum Variation from Plumb: 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edge of doors, not exceeding 3/16 inch (5 mm).

B. Adjust hinges to position doors in partial opening position when unlatched. Return out-swinging doors to closed position.

C. Adjust adjacent components for consistency of line or plane.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 10400 - 1 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

SECTION 10400

IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Room and door signs.

B. Interior directional and informational signs.

C. Fire / smoke barrier identification signs.

D. Three-dimensional fire extinguisher markers.

E. Building identification signs.

F. Building dedication plaque.


A. Section 08710 - Door Hardware: Embossed text message on face of exit devices.

B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies.

C. Division 15 - Mechanical: Mechanical identification; signs related to mechanical equipment and workplace safety.

D. Division 16 - Electrical: Illuminated exit, area of rescue assistance, and area of refuge signage; electrical identification; signs related to electrical equipment and workplace safety.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed product literature for each type of sign, indicating sign styles, font, foreground and background colors, materials, and installation methods of each sign type.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. Indicate the following:

a. The location of each individual sign in the project. b. Sign details, including overall dimensions and message layout for each

individual sign in the project. 2. Signage Schedule: Provide information sufficient to completely define each

sign for fabrication, including room number, room name, other text to be applied, sign and letter sizes, fonts, and colors. a. When room numbers to appear on signs differ from those on the

drawings, include the drawing room number on schedule. b. When content of signs is indicated to be determined later (e.g., fire

resistance rating information), request such information at least 2 months prior to start of fabrication; upon request, submit preliminary schedule.


c. Submit for approval prior to fabrication.

D. Samples: 1. Product Samples: Submit two samples of each type of sign, of size similar

to that required for project, illustrating sign style, font, and method of attachment.

2. Selection Samples: Where colors are not specified, submit two sets of color selection charts or chips.

3. Verification Samples: Submit samples showing colors specified.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Include installation templates and attachment devices.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Package signs as required to prevent damage before installation.

B. Package room and door signs in sequential order of installation, labeled by floor or building.

C. Store pressure-sensitive adhesive at normal room temperature.


A. Do not install pressure-sensitive adhesive when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer.

B. Maintain this minimum temperature during and after installation of signs.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. A.R.K. Ramos Architectural Signage Systems; Oklahoma City, OK ; Tel. 800-725-7266 or 405-235-5505; Fax. 405-232-8516; www.arkramos.com.

B. Best Sign Systems, Inc: www.bestsigns.com.

C. Gemini Incorporated; 103 Mensing Way; Cannon Falls, MN. 55009; Tel. 800-538-8377.

D. Mohawk Sign Systems, Inc: www.mohawksign.com.

E. InPro Signscape, InPro Corporation: www.inprocorp.com.

F. Safetysign (a division of Brimar Industries, Inc.); P.O. Box 467; 64 Outwater Lane; Garfield, NJ 07026; Tel. 800-274-6271; Fax. 800-279-6897; www.safetysign.com.

G. Seton Identification Products; 20 Thompson Road; P.O. Box 819; Branford, CT 06405; Tel. 203-488-8059; www.seton.com/aec.


H. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 GENERAL

A. Accessibility Requirements: 1. General: Signs shall comply with ATBCB (ADAAG) and ANSI/ICC A 117.1,

and FBC-B SECTION 11-4, unless otherwise indicated. a. In the event of conflicting requirements, comply with the most

comprehensive and specific requirements. 2. Signs which designate permanent rooms and spaces shall comply with the

applicable provisions of FBC-B SECTION 11-4.30, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 11-4.30.4 (Raised and Brailled Characters and Pictograms), 11-4.30.5 (Finish and Contrast) and 11-4.30.6 (Mounting Location and Height).

3. Other signs which provide direction to, or information about, functional spaces of the building shall comply with the applicable provisions of FBC-B SECTION 11-4.30, including but not limited to FBC-B SECTION 11-4.30.2 (Character Proportion), 11-4.30.3 (Character Height), and 11-4.30.5 (Finish and Contrast).

4. Elements and spaces of accessible facilities which shall be identified by the International Symbol of Accessibility and which shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 11-4.30.7 include: a. Accessible entrances when not all are accessible (inaccessible

entrances shall have directional signage to indicate the route to the nearest accessible entrance);

b. Accessible toilet and bathing facilities when not all are accessible. 5. Characters, Numbers and Pictorial Symbol Signs (Pictograms):

a. Character Proportion: Letters and numbers on signs shall have a width-to-height ratio between 3:5 and 1:1 and a stroke width-to-height ratio between 1:5 and 1:10.

b. Character Height: Characters and numbers on signs shall be sized according to the viewing distance from which they are to be read. The minimum height is measured using an upper case “X.” Lower case characters are permitted.

c. Raised and Brailled Characters and Pictograms: Letters and numerals shall be raised 1/32 inches (0.8 mm), upper case, sans serif or simple serif type and shall be accompanied with Grade 2 Braille. Raised characters shall be at least 5/8 inches (16 mm) high, but no higher than 2 inches (51 mm). Pictograms shall be accompanied by the equivalent verbal description placed directly below the pictogram. The border dimension of the pictogram shall be 6 inches (152 mm) minimum in height.

d. Finish and Contrast: The characters and background of signs shall be eggshell, matte, or other non-glare finish. Characters and symbols shall contrast with their background -- either light characters on a dark background or dark characters on a light background.

6. Mounting Location and Height: Where permanent identification is provided for rooms and spaces, signs shall be installed on the wall adjacent to the latch side of the door. Where there is no wall space to the latch side of the door, including at double leaf doors, signs shall be placed on the nearest adjacent wall.


a. Mounting height shall be 60 inches (1525 mm) above the finish floor to the centerline of the sign.

b. Mounting location for such signage shall be so that a person may approach within 3 inches (76 mm) of signage without encountering protruding objects or standing within the swing of a door.

7. Symbols of Accessibility: Facilities and elements required to be identified as accessible by FBC-B SECTION 11-4.1 shall use the international symbol of accessibility. a. The symbol shall be displayed as shown in FBC-B FIGURES 11-43(a)

and 11-43(b).

B. Characters, Numbers and Pictorial Symbol Signs: Unless otherwise indicated: 1. Character Font: Helvetica, Arial, or other sans serif font; comply with

Accessibility Requirements. 2. Character Case: Upper case only; comply with Accessibility Requirements. 3. Background Color: As indicated; comply with Accessibility Requirements. 4. Character Color: Contrasting color, as indicated; comply with Accessibility

Requirements.

2.03 SIGN TYPE 1 - ROOM AND DOOR SIGNS

A. General: 1. All signs shall be by same manufacturer. 2. Provide a sign for every doorway, whether it has a door or not. 3. All signs shall comply with applicable requirements of the governing building

code, including but not limited to FBC-B CHAPTER 11 (Accessibility Requirements). a. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm)

and Grade II Braille.

B. Signage Materials / Fabrication: 1. General:

a. Edges: Square. b. Corners: Square. c. Sign Size: 8 x 8 inches (200 x 200 mm), unless otherwise indicated. d. Colors:

1) Background: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer’s complete range of colors.

2) Text and Graphics: White. 2. Signage Panel:

a. Interior Signs: Provide Photopolymer panels composed of 0.032 inch thick moisture resistant, non-glare nylon photo polymer bonded to 0.080 inch thick Poly Ethylene Terephthalate Glycol (PETG) and 0.029 inch thick laminate base. 1) Overall panel thickness shall be 1/8 inch.

b. Exterior Signs: Provide exterior grade photopolymer panels composed of 0.032 inch thick exterior grade synthetic rubber based polymer integrally bonded to 0.017 inch aluminum alloy base. 1) Panel thickness shall be 0.017 inch.

3. Frame: a. Interior Signs: 6063-T5 aluminum.


b. Exterior Signs: 6063-T5 aluminum.

C. Sign Text and Graphics: As indicated in Signage Schedule; comply with Accessibility Requirements. 1. Graphics (Pictogram): International symbols for indicated information. 2. Lettering Height: 5/8 inch, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Product: 1. Tactile Signs:

a. w/o Graphic Symbol (Pictogram): InPro Style No. S120, or equal. b. w/ Graphic Symbol (Pictogram): InPro Style No. S320, or equal.

2. Non-tactile Signs: InPro Style No. S110, or equal.

2.04 SIGN TYPE 2 - INTERIOR DIRECTIONAL AND INFORMATIONAL SIGNS

A. General: 1. All signs shall be by same manufacturer. 2. All signs shall comply with specified Accessibility Requirements.

a. Provide "tactile" signage, with letters raised minimum 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) and Grade II Braille.

B. Signage Materials / Fabrication: 1. Engraved Plastic Panel (Tactile): Laminated colored plastic; engraved

through face to expose core as background color: a. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm). b. Panel Edges: Square. c. Panel Corners: Square. d. Mounting: Tape adhesive and tamper-proof screws.

2. Silk Screened Plastic Panel (Non-tactile): Letters and graphics silk-screened onto reverse side of plastic surface: a. Sign Color: Clear. b. Total Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm). c. Edges: Square. d. Mounting: Tape adhesive and tamper-proof screws.

3. Product: Seton Series 062xx, or equal.

C. Sign Type 2A - Maximum Occupant Capacity Signage: Each room or space that has an occupant load of 50 or more (i.e., assembly occupancy) shall have the occupant load of the room or space posted in a conspicuous place, near the main exit or exit access doorway from the room or space, in accordance with applicable requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1004.3. 1. Colors:

a. Background: Red. b. Characters: White.

2. Text Character Height: 5/8 inch. 3. Sign Size: 4 inches high x 12 inches wide. 4. Text Message:

a. Line 1: "MAXIMUM” b. Line 2: “OCCUPANT CAPACITY” b. Line 3: "__"; for each assembly space, determine applicable occupant

load per Drawings, and insert appropriate number (e.g., "151") in blank space.


D. Sign Type 2D - Elevator Fire Warning Signage: 1. An approved pictorial sign of a standardized design shall be posted adjacent

to each elevator call station on all floors, instructing occupants to use the exit stairways and not to use the elevators in case of fire, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 3002.3. a. The emergency sign shall not be required for elevators that are part of

an accessible means of egress complying with FBC-B SECTION 1007. 2. Colors:

a. Background: Black. b. Characters: White.

3. Text Character Height: 5/8 inch; raised 1/32 inch. a. Repeat message in Grade 2 dome-shaped Braille, beneath written text

message. 4. Graphic Symbol Area: 6 x 6 inches, above text message. 5. Sign Size: __ inches high x __ inches wide. 6. Text Message: Prior to submitting shop drawings, obtain acceptance for

sign wording from Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Line 1: "IN FIRE EMERGENCY, DO NOT USE ELEVATOR". b. Line 2: "USE EXIT STAIRS".

E. Sign Type 2E - Fire Alarm Pull Station Signage: 1. 2. Sign Size: __ inches high x __ inches wide. 3. Graphic Symbol Height: 5/8 inch. 4. Colors:

a. Background: Black. b. Characters: White.

5. Text Character Height: 5/8 inch; raised 1/32 inch. a. Repeat message in Grade 2 dome-shaped Braille, beneath written text

message.

F. Sign Type 2F - Fire Alarm Box Signage: 1. Where fire alarm system is not monitored by a supervising station, an

approved permanent sign shall be installed adjacent to each manual Fire Alarm Box, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 907.3.4. a. Exception: Where the manufacturer has permanently provided this

information on the manual fire alarm box. 2. Sign Size: __ inches high x __ inches wide. 3. Text Character Height: 5/8 inch; raised 1/32 inch.

a. Repeat message in Grade 2 dome-shaped Braille, beneath written text message.

4. Colors: a. Background: Black. b. Characters: White.

5. Text Message: a. Line 1: "WHEN ALARM SOUNDS". b. Line 2: "CALL FIRE DEPARTMENT".

G. Sign Type 2G (Access Controlled Egress Doors): 1. Type 2G1 - Doors with Manual Unlocking Device:

a. Where the entrance doors in a means of egress or entrance doors to


tenant spaces are equipped with an approved entrance and egress access control system, the manual unlocking device shall be clearly identified by a sign, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1008.1.3.4 and NFPA 101 (FL) SECTION 7.2.1.6.2.

b. Product: Text message to be embossed on face of exit device push pad; refer to Section 08710.

c. Colors: 1) Message:

(a) Background: US32D. (b) Characters (Text and Symbol): Red.

d. Text Message: "PUSH TO EXIT". 2. Type 2G2 - Delayed Egress Access Doors:

a. For each door in a means of egress that is equipped with an approved, listed, Delayed Egress Lock, a durable sign shall be provided on the door located within 12 inches of the release device, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1008.1.8.6 and NFPA 101 (FL) SECTION 7.2.6.1.

b. Product: Seton Model M7768, or equal. c. Sign Material: Durable; Tedlar-coated plastic. d. Sign Size: 4 inches high x (width as required for proper fit of message). e. Text Character Height / Stroke Width: 1 inch (25 mm) / 1/8 inch (3.2

mm) f. Colors:

1) Message: (a) Background: White. (b) Characters (Text and Symbol): Black.

g. Text Message: 1) Line 1: "PUSH UNTIL ALARM SOUNDS". 2) Line 2: "DOOR CAN BE OPENED IN __ SECONDS"; for each

door in a means of egress that is equipped with an approved, listed, Delayed Egress Lock, determine applicable time delay duration per contract documents, and insert appropriate number (e.g., "15" or "30") in blank space.

3. Type 2G3 - Stairway Doors: a. Doors not permitting re-entry shall be provided with a sign on the stair

side indicating the location of the nearest door, in each direction of travel, permitting re-entry or exit, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1008.1.8.8.

b. Product: Seton Model M6871, or equal. c. Sign Material: Flexible 4-mil thick pressure-sensitive vinyl. d. Sign Size: 7 inches high x 10 inches wide. e. Colors:

1) Header: (a) Background: Blue. (b) Characters (Text and Symbol): White.

2) Message: (a) Background: White. (b) Characters (Text and Symbol): Black.

f. Text Message: 1) Header: "NOTICE".


2) Lines 1 and 2: Provide the location of the nearest door, in each direction of travel, permitting re-entry or exit, as appropriate for each such location.

H. Sign Type 2H - Stairs: 1. In enclosed Stairways of buildings four or more stories in height, each floor

level landing shall be equipped with an approved sign in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 1009.5.3 and 1009.12. a. The sign shall indicate the floor level and the availability of roof access

from that stairway and an identification of the Stairway. The sign shall also state the floor level of and direction to exit discharge.

b. The sign shall be located at 5 feet (1524 mm) above the floor landing in a position which is readily visible when the door is in the open or closed position.

c. The floor level designation shall also be tactile in accordance with FBC-B CHAPTER 11.

2. Product: a. Sign: Seton Model 57715, or equal. b. Frame: Seton Model M1401, or equal.

3. Sign Material: a. Sign: One-piece acrylic plastic, with raised letters and braille. b. Frame: Plastic.

4. Sign Size: 12 inches high x 12 inches wide. 5. Text Character Height:

a. Line 1: 1 inch; raised 1/32 inch. 1) Repeat message in Grade 2 dome-shaped Braille, beneath written

text message. b. Lines 2, 3 and 4: 5/8 inch; raised 1/32 inch.

6. Graphic Symbol Area: 6 x 6 inches, above text message. 7. Colors:

a. Background and Frame: Black. b. Characters (Text and Symbol): White.

8. Text Message: Prior to submitting shop drawings, obtain acceptance for sign wording from Authority Having Jurisdiction. a. Line 1: "FLOOR __"; for each floor lending within stairway, determine

applicable floor level, and insert corresponding floor level number (e.g., "2") in blank space.

b. Line 2: "STAIR"; for each stairway, determine the applicable stair number per the Drawings, and insert corresponding stair number (e.g., "2") in blank space; coordinate with door and room signs (Section 10445).

c. Line 3: "ROOF ACCESS" or "UP TO TOP LANDING FOR ROOF ACCESS" or "NO ROOF ACCESS"; insert appropriate text.

d. Line 4: "DOWN TO FLOOR 1 FOR EXIT DISCHARGE".

I. Sign Type 2I - Exit Stair Door Tactile Signage: 1. Tactile signage shall be provided to meet the following criteria:

a. Tactile signage shall be provided at each door requiring an exit sign. b. Tactile signage shall read "EXIT". c. Tactile signage shall comply with applicable requirements of ANSI/ICC

A117.1 and NFPA 101 (FL) Section 7.10.3.


2. Product: a. Sign: Seton Model 57715, or equal. b. Frame: Seton Model M1401, or equal.

3. Sign Material: a. Sign: One-piece acrylic plastic, with raised letters and braille. b. Frame: Plastic.

4. Sign Size: 8 x 8 inches wide. 5. Text Character Height:

a. Line 1: 1 inch; raised 1/32 inch. 1) Repeat message in Grade 2 dome-shaped Braille, beneath written

text message. b. Lines 2, 3 and 4: 5/8 inch; raised 1/32 inch.

6. Graphic Symbol Area: 6 x 6 inches, above text message. 7. Colors:

a. Background and Frame: Black. b. Characters (Text and Symbol): White.

8. Text Message: a. Line 1: "EXIT" b. Line 2: "STAIR NO. __"; for each stairway, determine the applicable

stair number per the Drawings, and insert corresponding stair number (e.g., "2") in blank space; coordinate with door and room signs (Section 10445).

2.05 SIGNAGE TYPE 3 - EMERGENCY EVACUATION MAPS

A. General: 1. Allow for one map per elevator lobby. 2. Map content to be provided by Owner. 3. Use clear plastic panel silk-screened on reverse, in brushed aluminum

frame, screw-mounted.

B. The routes of evacuation shall be indicated in contrasting colors and only indicate the evacuation route from the applicable space.

C. Orient the map so when facing the mounting wall adjacent to the room exit, the "YOU ARE HERE" arrow will point up.

D. Text and numbers shall read from left to right.

E. Provide a metal frame with appropriate safety glazing.

2.06 SIGNAGE TYPE 3 - FIRE / SMOKE BARRIER IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. General: 1. All signs shall be by same manufacturer. 2. Each Fire Wall, Fire Barrier, Fire Partition, Smoke Barrier, Smoke Partition,

or other wall required to have protected openings shall be effectively and permanently identified with signs in a manner acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction, in accordance with requirements of FBC-B SECTION 712.5, and as follows: a. Signs shall be installed within concealed spaces above decorative

ceiling. b. Placement of signs shall be at minimum 30 feet on center, on both sides


of each such wall/partition required to have protected openings. c. Where signs are required on walls with no concealed space above

decorative ceiling, coordinate sign location with Architect prior to installation.

B. Sign Material: 40-mil thick aluminum; rounded corners with mounting holes.

C. Sign Size: 14 inches high x 20 inches wide.

D. Character Height: 5/8 inch.

E. Colors: 1. Header:

a. Background: Black. b. Characters (Text and Symbol): Yellow.

2. Message: a. Background: Yellow. b. Characters (Text and Symbol): Black.

F. Text Message: Prior to submitting shop drawings, obtain acceptance for sign wording from Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. Sign Type 3A - Fire Wall Signs:

a. Header: "CAUTION". b. Line 1: "FIRE WALL AND SMOKE BARRIER" c. Line 2: "PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" d. Line 3: "FIRE RESISTANCE RATING - _ HOURS"; for each

wall/partition determine applicable fire resistance rating per Drawings, and insert appropriate number (e.g., "1") in blank space.

e. Line 4: "DO NOT REMOVE THIS SIGN" 2. Sign Type 3B - Fire Barrier Signs:

a. Header: "CAUTION". b. Line 1: "FIRE AND SMOKE BARRIER" c. Line 2: "PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" d. Line 3: "FIRE RESISTANCE RATING - _ HOURS"; for each

wall/partition determine applicable fire resistance rating per Drawings, and insert appropriate number (e.g., "1") in blank space.

e. Line 4: "DO NOT REMOVE THIS SIGN" 3. Sign Type 3C - Fire Partition Signs:

a. Header: "CAUTION". b. Line 1: "FIRE PARTITION AND SMOKE BARRIER" c. Line 2: "PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" d. Line 3: "FIRE RESISTANCE RATING - _ HOURS"; for each partition,

determine applicable fire resistance rating per Drawings, and insert appropriate number (e.g., "1") in blank space.

e. Line 4: "DO NOT REMOVE THIS SIGN" 4. Sign Type 3D - Smoke Barrier Signs:

a. Header: "CAUTION". b. Line 1: "FIRE PARTITION AND SMOKE BARRIER" c. Line 2: "PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" d. Line 3: "FIRE RESISTANCE RATING - 1 HOUR" e. Line 4: "DO NOT REMOVE THIS SIGN"

5. Sign Type 3E - Smoke Partition Signs:


a. Header: "CAUTION". b. Line 1: "FIRE PARTITION AND SMOKE BARRIER" c. Line 2: "PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" d. Line 3: "FIRE RESISTANCE RATING - N/A" e. Line 4: "DO NOT REMOVE THIS SIGN"

G. Product: Seton Model M6873, or equal.

2.07 SIGN TYPE 4 - THREE-DIMENSIONAL FIRE EXTINGUISHER MARKERS

A. The location of each fire extinguisher shall be marked with an angular sign specifically designed for marking the location of fire extinguisher, in accordance with Section 1-6.6 of NFPA 10.

B. Sign Material: Rigid vinyl.

C. Sign Dimensions: 4 inches wide x 18 inches high.

D. Colors: 1. Background: White arrow on red field. 2. Text: Red.

E. Text Message: "FIRE EXTINGUISHER".

F. Product: Seton Model 39445, or equal.

2.08 SIGNAGE TYPE 5 - BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGNS

A. General: 1. Provide signs with the agency logo and the facility name and address,

located on both faces of the Entrance Sign, and on building façade above main entrance. Refer to Drawings for additional information.

B. Sign Type 5A - Agency Logo Plaques (Cast Metal Plaques): 1. Design and location of agency logo plaques shall be as shown on Drawings. 2. Fabrication: Agency logo plaques shall have the logo, emblem and artwork

cast in the flat relief technique. Agency logo plaques shall be fabricated from bronze. a. Size: Plaque size shall be as shown. b. Border: Border shall be plain edge. c. Background: Background texture shall be fine pebble.

3. Mounting: Mounting shall be concealed. 4. Finish: Finishes shall consist of bronze with dark finish oxidized background.

Letters shall be satin polished and entire plaque sprayed with two coats of clear lacquer.

C. Sign Type 5B - Dimensional Building Letters and Numbers: 1. Fabrication: Letters shall be fabricated from cast aluminum. Letters shall be

cleaned by chemical etching or cleaned ultrasonically in a special degreasing bath. Letters shall be packaged for protection until installation.

2. Typeface: Typeface shall be as indicated; if not indicated, helvetica medium. 3. Size: Letter size shall be as indicated. 4. Finish: AAMA 2605 multiple coat, thermally cured polyvinylidene fluoride

(PVDF) system. a. Color: To be selected by Architect.


5. Mounting: Threaded studs of number and size as recommended by manufacturer, shall be used for concealed anchorage. Letters which project from the building line shall have stud spacer sleeves. Letters, studs, and sleeves shall be of the same material. Templates for mounting shall be supplied.

2.09 SIGNAGE TYPE 6 - BUILDING DEDICATION PLAQUE

A. General: 1. Provide one building dedication plaque as indicated on Drawings.

B. Cast Metal Plaque: 1. Design of building dedication plaque shall be as shown on Drawings. 2. Fabrication: Cast metal plaque shall have the logo, emblem and artwork

cast in the flat relief technique. Plaques shall be fabricated from bronze. a. Size: Plaque size shall be as shown. b. Border: Border shall be plain edge. c. Background: Background texture shall be fine pebble.

3. Mounting: Mounting shall be concealed. 4. Finish: Finishes shall consist of bronze with dark finish oxidized background.

Letters shall be satin polished and entire plaque sprayed with two coats of clear lacquer.

2.10 ACCESSORIES

A. Installation accessories specified in manufacturer's instructions.

B. Concealed Screws: Stainless steel, galvanized steel, chrome-plated, or other non-corroding metal.

C. Exposed Screws: Stainless steel.

D. Tape Adhesive: Double sided tape, permanent adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that substrate surfaces are ready to receive work.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with accepted shop drawings, manufacturer's instructions, and applicable requirements of the governing building code.

B. Install neatly, with horizontal edges level.

C. Locate signs where indicated on Drawings. 1. Room and Door Signs: Locate on wall at latch side of door with centerline of

sign at 60 inches (1525 mm) above finished floor. 2. If no location is indicated, obtain Architect's instructions.

D. Protect from damage until Substantial Completion; repair or replace damage items.

3.03 SIGN SCHEDULE


A. See Signage Schedule on drawings

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 10523 - 1 OF 7

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS & ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10523

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Fire extinguishers.

B. Fire extinguisher cabinets.

C. Accessories.



B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Roughed-in wall openings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer’s data for each type of required fire extinguisher and fire extinguisher cabinet, with all related details, accessories and recommended operation manuals. 1. Include extinguisher operational features, color and finish, and anchorage

details. 2. Indicate compliance to specified requirements. 3. Warranty.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit fabrication and installation drawings for required fire extinguisher cabinets, brackets, and accessories. 1. Indicate cabinet types, locations and dimensions, finishes and trim, anchors

and fasteners, and related work by other trades (including but not limited to wall construction).

2. Provide mounting heights and installation methods, and conformance with applicable accessibility requirements.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special criteria and wall opening coordination requirements.


A. Manufacturer: Provide equipment manufactured by one manufacturer except where otherwise noted, uniform throughout as to method and type of construction used.

B. Equipment and installation shall conform to applicable codes, standards and ordinances, and as follows: 1. Comply with applicable requirements of the governing building code,

including but not limited to FBC-B SECTIONS 906 and 11-4, and FBC-B CHAPTER 36. a. Portable fire extinguishers shall be provided in accordance with

applicable requirements of the FLORIDA FIRE PREVENTION CODE



(FFPC), including but not limited to NFPA(FL) 101 SECTIONS 9.7.4 and 38.3.5, and NFPA 10.

2. Comply with applicable requirements of ATBCB (ADAAG).

C. Each extinguisher, together with a hanging bracket acceptable for wall mounting with a latching metal, retainer strap around the cylinder, shall be packed, ready for installation, in a sturdy cardboard box labeled to identify contents fully when delivered to the site

D. Provide extinguishers classified and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. for the purpose specified and indicated.

E. Store product in manufacturer's original protective packaging in a dry protected space until installed.

F. Service Tag: Each fire extinguisher shall bear a new standard service tag complying with applicable requirements of Chapter 633 of Florida Statutes, governing building code, and authority having jurisdiction. Service tag shall comply with State Fire Marshal's rule specifications as to the size, shape, color, and information and data contained thereon.

G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

H. Maintenance Data: Include test, refill or recharge schedules and re-certification requirements.

1.05 EXTRA STOCK

A. In addition to the fire extinguishers and fire extinguisher cabinets shown on the Drawings, Contractor shall provide and install two (2) additional fire extinguishers and two (2) additional fire extinguisher cabinets, at no additional cost to the Owner. 1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Type: To be selected by Architect, from products

specified in this section. 2. Fire Extinguisher Type: To be selected by Architect, from products specified

in this section. 3. Locations: Contractor shall install fire extinguisher cabinets in locations as

directed by Architect.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Ansul Incorporated: One Stanton Street; Marinette, Wisconsin 54143; Tel. 715-735-7411 or 800-862-6785; Fax. 715-732-3471; www.ansul.com.

B. JL Industries, Inc: www.jlindustries.com.

C. Larsen's Manufacturing Co: www.larsensmfg.com.

D. Potter-Roemer: www.potterroemer.com.

E. Substitutions: See Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

2.02 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS



A. Fire Extinguisher - Type 1 (FE-1): Dry chemical, multi-purpose. 1. Heavy duty cylinder with epoxy finish; chrome valve and siphon tubes,

replaceable molded valve steam seal; large pressure indicating gages, pull pin; up-right squeeze-grip operation.

2. UL Rating(s): a. FE-1A: 2A-10B:C, 5 lb capacity. b. FE-1B: 4A-60B:C, 10 lb capacity.

B. Fire Extinguisher - Type 3 (FE-3): Portable fire extinguisher with clean, electrically nonconductive, environmentally-friendly agent, for use in high-value applications such as computer areas, telecommunications rooms, process control rooms, etc. 1. Product: Ansul Model FE13 "CleanGuard 13".

a. Extinguisher Part No.: Ansul 429022. b. Bracket Part No.: Ansul 30937.

2. UL Rating: 2-A:10-B:C. 3. Agent Capacity: 13.25 lb. (6 kg). 4. Charged Weight: 25.63 lb. (11.63 kg). 5. Agent Flow Rate: 1.12 lb/sec (0.51 kg/sec). 6. Listing: UL. 7. Effective Range: 14 to 16 ft (4.3 to 4.9 m). 8. Components:

a. Shell: Heavy-duty, seamless, welded steel cylinder; polyester-urethane powder paint finish. 1) 100 percent hydro-tested, and 100 percent leak tested.

b. Valve: Extruded aluminum, with anodized finish; steel pick-up tube and plated steel valve stem, ring pin and chain; replaceable molded valve steam seal.

c. Name Plate: Glare-resistant mylar, with bar-coded serial number / model.

d. Pressure Gage: Large, color-coded pressure-indicating gage. e. Agent: DuPont FE-36

1) Chemical Family: HFC-236fa. 2) Cardiac Sensitization:

(a) No Observed Adverse Effects Level (NOAEL): 10 percent. (b) Lowest Observable Adverse Effects Level (LOAEL): 15

percent.

2.03 FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

A. General: 1. Cabinet Equipment Identification: Cabinets shall be identified in an approved

manner by a permanently attached sign with letters not less than 2 inches (51 mm) high in a color that contrasts with the background color, indicating the equipment contained therein. a. Doors not large enough to accommodate a written sign shall be marked

with a permanently attached pictogram of the equipment contained therein.

b. Doors that have either an approved visual identification clear glass panel or a complete glass door panel are not required to be marked.

2. Where indicated on Drawings and/or the Schedule included at the end of this Section, provide Type 1 (Recessed), Type 2 (Semi-Recessed), or Type 3



(Surface Mounted) fire extinguisher cabinet equipped with specified fire extinguisher. a. Provide fire-rated cabinets where cabinet is recessed or semi-recessed

in fire-rated wall or partition. Cabinet to be fabricated and installed in accordance with ASTM E 814, to meet fire-resistive performance; fire-resistive performance of cabinet shall match or exceed that of wall or partition in which it is installed.

b. Install one fire extinguisher within each cabinet. Refer to Schedule for Fire Extinguisher Type to be installed; where no Fire Extinguisher Type is indicated, provide Type 1 dry chemical multi-purpose fire extinguisher sized in accordance with requirements of applicable regulatory requirements.

B. FEC Type 1 - Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC-1): Larsen's "Architectural Series" Model No. SS-2409-R2, or equal. 1. Cabinet: Cold-rolled heavy-gauge steel; white baked enamel finish.

a. Inside Box Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 24 inches x 9-1/2 inches x 6 inches.

b. Outside Trim Dimensions (Height x Width): 27-1/2 inches x 13 inches. c. Recessed; rough opening depth 6-1/4 inches

2. Mounting: a. Recessed Mounting: Recessed, ADA-compliant; flat frame with return

covers wall opening, 5/16 inch (8 mm) projection; except where "trimless recessed mounting" is indicated on Drawings.

b. Trimless Recessed Mounting: Trimless recessed, ADA-compliant; door face flush with wall. Applies only where specifically indicated on Drawings.

3. Door: a. Material: Stainless steel. b. Type: Vertical glazing panel in door, opposite hinge side (Larsen

Vertical Duo, or equal). c. Glazing: Tempered float glass, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, clear.

4. Lettering: Die-cut letters. a. Legend: "FIRE EXTINGUISHER". b. Placement: Vertical, on hinge side of door face.

C. FEC Type 1FR - Recessed Fire-Rated Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC-1FR): Larsen's "Architectural Series" Model No. SS-FS-2409-R2, or equal. 1. Cabinet: Cold-rolled heavy-gauge steel; white baked enamel finish.

a. Outside Trim Dimensions (Height x Width): 27 inches x 12-1/2 inches. b. Inside Box Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 24 inches x 9-1/2

inches x 6 inches. c. Recessed; rough opening depth 7-1/8 inches.

2. Mounting: a. Recessed: ADA-compliant; flat frame with return covers wall opening,

5/16 inch (8 mm) projection; except where "trimless recessed mounting" is indicated on Drawings.

b. Trimless Recessed: ADA-compliant; door face flush with wall. Applies only where specifically indicated on Drawings.

3. Door: a. Material: Stainless steel.



b. Type: Vertical glazing panel in door, opposite hinge side (Vertical Duo). c. Glazing: Tempered float glass, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, clear.


D. FEC Type 2 - Semi-Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC-2): Larsen's "Architectural Series" Model No. SS-2409-R4, or equal. 1. Cabinet: Cold-rolled heavy-gauge steel; white baked enamel finish.


b. Outside Flange Dimensions (Height x Width): 27-1/2 inches x 13 inches c. Semi-recessed; rough opening depth 3 inches.

2. Mounting: Semi-recessed, ADA-compliant; frame with radiused return covers wall opening, 3-1/2 inch projection.




E. FEC Type 2FR - Fire-Rated Semi-Recessed Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC-2FR): Larsen's "Architectural Series" Model No. SS-FS-2409-R4, or equal. 1. Cabinet: Cold-rolled heavy-gauge steel; white baked enamel finish.


b. Outside Flange Dimensions (Height x Width): 27-1/2 inches x 13 inches. c. Semi-recessed; rough opening depth 4 inches.

2. Mounting: Semi-recessed, ADA-compliant; frame with radiused return covers wall opening, 3-1/2 inch projection.




F. FEC Type 3 - Surface Mounted Fire Extinguisher Cabinet (FEC-3): Larsen's "Architectural Series" Model No. SS-2409-SM, or equal. 1. Cabinet: Cold-rolled steel stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.

a. Inside Box Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 27-1/2 inches x 13 inches x 6 inches.

b. Outside Trim Dimensions (Height x Width): 27-1/2 inches x 13 inches. 2. Mounting: Surface; full frame covering cabinet and returning to wall. 3. Door:

a. Material: Stainless steel. b. Type: Vertical glazing panel in door, opposite hinge side (Larsen





2.04 ACCESSORIES

A. Extinguisher Theft Alarm: Battery operated alarm, 10-second delay for disarming, activated by opening cabinet door. 1. Install per cabinet manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Acceptable Product:

a. "Vigilante Alarm", by Larsen's. b. "Model 660 Cabinet Alarm", by Modern Metal Products. c. "Mini-Theft Stopper" Model STI-6255 cabinet alarm, by National Fire

Equipment Limited. 3. Description: Battery-powered 85-decibel alarm activated when cabinet door

is opened, with key-deactivation; red polycarbonate housing having appearance of traffic "STOP" sign, with warning decal.

B. Fire Extinguisher Sign: Provide one sign above each extinguisher; sign shall be visible from side approach to extinguisher.

C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Each fire extinguisher shall be provided with a suitable fire extinguisher mounting bracket.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Install in accordance with NFPA 10, ATBCB (ADAAG), accepted shop

drawings, and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install cabinets accurately, without warpage, true to line, plumb and level. 3. Install extinguishers using mounting brackets, true to line, plumb and level. 4. Secure cabinets rigidly in place.

B. Install cabinets in wall openings, at elevation shown on Drawings; mounting height for operating parts of cabinets (e.g., pull for opening of cabinet) and of handle used for removal of fire extinguisher shall comply with forward reach height requirements specified in Florida Building Code section 11-4 (e.g., the maximum allowable high forward reach is 48 inches above finish floor).

C. Cabinets Located In Fire-Rated Walls: Use cabinet manufacturer's retaining brackets.

D. Place extinguishers and accessories in cabinets, except as otherwise indicated.

E. Position cabinet signage at locations indicated on drawings.



3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, ensure extinguishers are fully charged and bear tag recording date of charging and signature of verifying entity.

B. Adjust cabinets to provide tight fit at contact points and to ensure smooth operation, closure and locking.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean metal surfaces and glass promptly after installation exercising care to avoid damage to protective coatings and finishes.

B. Remove excess glazing and sealant compounds, dirt and other substances.

C. Lubricate hardware and moving parts.

3.05 PROTECTION

A. Protect exposed finishes of cabinets from damage by subsequent construction activities

B. Repair minor damage to finishes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; replace components that cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction.

3.06 SCHEDULE

A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Fire extinguisher cabinets installed in non-fire rated walls/partitions 7 inches

thick or thicker shall be FEC Type 1 (FEC-1), except as otherwise indicated. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets installed in fire-rated walls/partitions 7 inches thick

or thicker, shall be FEC Type 1FR (FEC-1FR), except as otherwise indicated.

3. Fire extinguisher cabinets installed in walls/partitions which are between 4 and 7 inches thick shall be FEC Type 2 (FEC-2), except as otherwise indicated.

4. Fire extinguisher cabinets installed in fire-rated walls/partitions which are between 4 and 7 inches thick shall be FEC Type 2FR (FEC-2FR), except as otherwise indicated.

5. Fire extinguisher cabinets installed within utility rooms (e.g., Mechanical Room; Electrical Room) shall be FEC Type 3 (FEC-3), except as otherwise indicated.

B. Fire Extinguishers: Install one FE-1B fire extinguisher within each fire extinguisher cabinet, except as otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 10800 - 1 TOILET ACCESSORIES

SECTION 10800

TOILET ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Accessories for toilet rooms, showers and janitor closets.

B. Grab bars.

C. Concealed anchor plates, fasteners.

D. ADA piping protection systems.

E. Framed mirrors.


A. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood blocking.


C. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Assemblies: Concealed supports for accessories; placement of concealed anchor devices, including in wall framing and plates.

D. Section 09300 - Tile.

E. Section 10170 - Plastic Toilet Compartments.

F. Division 15 - Mechanical: Plumbing fixtures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: 1. General: Provide data on accessories describing size, finish, details of

function, attachment methods. 2. Mirror Types: Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics,

size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 3. ADA Piping Protection Systems: Provide data describing product

specifications, materials, colors, accessories, extensions, and code compliances.

C. Shop Drawings: 1. General: For each type of toilet accessory:

a. Plans: Locate each specified unit in project. b. Elevations: Indicate mounting height of each specified unit in project. c. Details: Indicate anchoring and fastening details, required locations and

types of anchors and reinforcement, and materials required for correct installation of specified products not supplied by manufacturer of products of this section.

d Coordinate with applicable substrate and framing conditions. Include


load calculations confirming adequacy of wall/partition framing, internal wall reinforcement, concealed supports, and backing plate details, based on specified design loads.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures and conditions requiring special attention.


A. Provide and install in accordance with applicable requirements of ICC/ANSI A117.1.

1.05 ACCESSIBILITY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to applicable regulatory requirements for accessibility, including FBC-B CHAPTER 11, ATBCB (ADAAG), and ANSI/ICC A117.1.

B. Plumbing Fixtures: 1. Water Closets: Water closets in accessible stalls shall comply with FBC-B

SECTION 11-4.16. 2. Urinals: Accessible urinals shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 11-4.18. 3. Lavatories and Vanities:

a. Lavatory fixtures, vanities, and built-in lavatories shall comply with the requirements of FBC-B SECTION 11-4.19.

b. Hot water and drainpipes under lavatories shall be insulated or otherwise configured to protect against contact.

4. Faucets: Faucets shall comply with FBC-B SECTION 11-4.27.4.

C. Operating Force: 1. Soap dispensers shall operate with a maximum five-pound operating force.

D. Wall Mounted Grab Bars and related fasteners and mounting devices: 1. Grab Bars comply with FBC-B SECTION 11-4.26. 2. Grab bars shall comply with the length and positioning requirements shown

in FBC-B FIGURES 11-30(a), 11-30(c), and 11-30(d). a. Grab bars shall have a gripping surface at the locations shown and do

not obstruct the required clear floor area. 3. The diameter or width of the gripping surfaces of grab bars shall be 1-1/4 in.

to 1-1/2 in. (32 mm to 38 mm). Where grab bars are mounted adjacent to a wall, the space between the wall and the grab bar shall be 1-1/2 in. (38 mm).

4. The structural strength of Grab Bars, Shower Seats, Baby Changing Stations, and related fasteners and mounting devices shall meet the specifications of FBC-B SECTION 11-4.26.3, and as follows: a. Bending stress induced by the maximum bending moment from the

application of 250 lbf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the assembly.

b. Shear stress induced by the application of 250 lbf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable shear stress for the assembly. If the connection between the assembly and its mounting bracket or other support is considered to be fully restrained, then direct and torsional shear stresses shall be totaled for the combined shear stress, which shall not exceed the allowable shear stress for the material.

c. Bending stress induced by the maximum bending moment from the


application of 250 lbf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable stress for the material of the assembly.

d. Shear force induced in a fastener or mounting device from the application of 250 lbf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable lateral load of either the fastener or mounting device or the supporting structure, whichever is the smaller allowable load.

e. Tensile force induced in a fastener by a direct tension force of 250 lbf (1112N) plus the maximum moment from the application of 250 lbf (1112N) shall be less than the allowable withdrawal load between the fastener and the supporting structure.

f. Grab bars shall not rotate within their fittings.

E. Toilet Paper Dispensers: 1. All toilet paper dispensers shall meet the requirement to be free spinning.

Dispensers that control delivery, or that do not permit continuous paper flow, shall not be used.

2. All dual roll toilet paper dispensers shall be fully automatic and shall not require the end user to perform any function to obtain the second roll.

F. Mirrors: 1. Mirrors shall be mounted with the bottom edge of the reflecting surface no

higher than 40 inches (1015 mm) above the finish floor, per FBC-B FIGURE 11-31.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work with the placement of internal wall reinforcement, concealed ceiling supports, and reinforcement of toilet partitions to receive anchor attachments. 1. Provide concealed mounting plates, backplates, anchor plates, or other

approved reinforcement for support of accessories to be anchored to stud wall, furred wall, or other hollow wall assembly.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Toilet Room Accessories and Grab Bars: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: Bobrick Washroom Equipment:

a. Products specified in this Section to be manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; model numbers have been cited to establish type of accessory and acceptable level of quality, performance, function and appearance.

2. Other Manufacturers: a. Equivalent products by other manufacturers listed herein may be

submitted for consideration, provided that such products are equal in quality, performance, function and appearance; however, manufacturer's literature and samples for each unit proposed as equal shall be submitted for review and approval by Architect.

b. Other Manufacturers: 1) A & J Washroom Accessories Inc: www.ajwashroom.com. 2) American Specialties, Inc: www.americanspecialties.com.


3) Bradley Corporation: www.bradleycorp.com. c. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements.

B. ADA Protection Systems: 1. Basis of Design Manufacturer: TrueBro, Inc.; 7 Main Street, Ellington, CT

06029; Tel. 860-875-2868 or 800-340-5969; Fax. 860-872-0300; internet: www.truebro.com.

2. Subject to compliance with Contract requirements, equivalent products by other manufacturers may be submitted for consideration in accordance with Section 01600.

C. All items of each type to be made by the same manufacturer.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Accessories - General: Shop assembled, free of dents and scratches and packaged complete with anchors and fittings, steel anchor plates, adapters, and anchor components for installation. 1. Grind welded joints smooth. 2. Fabricate units made of metal sheet of seamless sheets, with flat surfaces.

B. Keys: Provide three keys for each accessory to Owner; master key all lockable accessories.

C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A 269, Type 304 or 316.

E. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A 653, with G90/Z275 coating.

F. Adhesive: Two-component epoxy type, waterproof.

G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized, tamper-proof, security type.

H. Expansion Shields: Fiber, lead, or rubber as recommended by accessory manufacturer for component and substrate.

I. Manufacturer's identification logo must be permanently stamped into each accessory to provide positive identification to end user for replacement or matching equipment in the future. Such stamping shall be no larger than 1 x 1 inch, and shall be unobtrusively located on accessory. Lavatory mounted soap dispensers shall have the manufacturer's name permanently molded into the container. Adhesive slickers shall not be acceptable.

2.03 FINISHES

A. Stainless Steel: No. 4 satin brushed finish, unless otherwise noted.

B. Chrome/Nickel Plating: ASTM B 456, SC 2, satin finish, unless otherwise noted.

C. Baked Enamel: Pre-treat to clean condition, apply one coat primer and minimum two coats epoxy baked enamel.

D. Galvanizing for Items Other than Sheet: Comply with ASTM A 123; galvanize ferrous metal and fastening devices.

E. Shop Primed Ferrous Metals: Pre-treat and clean, spray apply one coat primer


and bake.

F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis.

2.04 TOILET ROOM ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1. Type: Surface wall-mounted toilet tissue dispenser. 2. Material: 22-gauge, stainless steel sheet 3. Capacity: Two 5-1/4 inch diameter rolls (vertically), with standard 3-inch core. 4. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-4288. 5. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "T6".

B. Soap Dispenser: 1. Type: Surface wall-mounted soap dispenser. 2. Material: 20-gauge stainless steel sheet with satin finish. 3. Capacity shall be 40 fl oz (1.2 L). 4. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-4112. 5. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "T3".

C. Mirrors: 1. Stainless Steel Channel Framed Mirrors:

a. Materials: 1) Frame: Mirror shall have one-piece, polished stainless steel 1/2 inch

x 1/2 inch x 3/8 inch (13 x 13 x 9.5 mm) channel frame. Mirror frame shall have 90-degree uniform corners; open or uneven mitered corners are not acceptable.

2) Mirror: No. 1 quality, 1/4 inch (6-mm) float/plate glass. All mirror edges shall be protected by filler strips. Mirror back shall be protected by full-size shock absorbing, water-resistant, non-abrasive 1/8 inch (3-mm) thick polyethylene padding. Galvanized steel back with formed edges for additional strength shall have integral hanging brackets for mounting on concealed one-piece rectangular wall hanger(s).

b. Size (Width x Height): 18 x 30 inches. c. Product: Bobrick B-165 1830. d. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "T1". e. Size (Width x Height): 48 x 36 inches f. Product: Bobrick b-165 4836 g. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T2”.

D. Sanitary Napkin Disposal: 1. Material: 22-gauge stainless steel sheet; exposed surfaces to have satin

finish. 2. Service Access Door: secured to cabinet with full-length stainless steel piano

hinge and be equipped with a tumbler lock. 3. Disposal Door: Unit shall have a self-closing panel covering disposal

opening. Panel shall be secured to door with spring-loaded, full-length stainless steel piano hinge and be equipped with international graphic symbol identifying usage.


4. Receptacle: Napkin disposal shall be furnished with a removable, leak-proof, molded polyethylene receptacle. Capacity: 1.2 gal. (4.6 liters).

5. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-270. 6. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "T7".

E. Paper Towel Dispenser/Waste Receptacle: 1. Type: Recessed roll paper towel dispenser and waste receptacle. 2. Materials:

a. Cabinet and Flange: 18-8 S, type-304, heavy-gauge stainless steel; all-welded construction. Exposed surfaces have satin finish.

b. Door: 18-8 S, type-304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin finish; 9/16 inch (14mm) 90-degree return for maximum rigidity. 1) Secured to cabinet with a concealed, full-length stainless steel

piano-hinge. 2) Equipped with a stainless steel cable door-swing limiter and two

tumbler locks keyed like other washroom accessories. c. Waste Container: Removable, leak-proof, rigid molded plastic.

1) Capacity: 3.0 gal (11.3 L). 3. Operational Features:

a. 350 C-Fold or 475 multifold paper-towel dispenser . 4. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-4369 5. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T5”.

F. Paper Towel Dispenser 1. Type: Surface-mounted 2. Materials:


b. Door: 18-8 S, type-304, 18-gauge (1.2mm) stainless steel with satin finish; 9/16 inch (14mm) 90-degree return for maximum rigidity. 1) Secured to cabinet with a concealed, full-length stainless steel

piano-hinge. 2) Equipped with a stainless steel cable door-swing limiter and two

tumbler locks keyed like other washroom accessories. 3. Operational Features:

a. C-Fold or multifold paper-towel dispenser . 4. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-4262 5. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T4”.

G. Waste Receptacle: 1. Type: Recessed 2. Materials:


b. Waste Container: Removable, leak-proof, rigid molded plastic. 1) Capacity: 12.8 gal (484.3 L).

3. Product: Bobrick Contura Series B-43644 5. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T10”.


2.05 GRAB BARS

A. General: 1. Fabricate and install to provide 1.50 inches (38 mm) clearance between wall

and inside of grab bar. 2. Fabricate and install to comply with ASTM F 446, and to withstand a 900-

pound (4 000 N) force. 3. Each grab bar is to be provided with concealed anchor devices or backings

and fastening system, as recommended by manufacturer for applicable condition and as required to meet specified structural strength requirements. a. For each grab bar, provide concealed anchor devices or backings as

specified or required in accordance with local building codes, before wall is finished.

B. Material/Fabrication: 1. Grab Bars: Type 304, 18-8 S alloy, 18-gage, stainless steel with satin finish;

1-1/4 inches (32 mm) outside diameter; minimum 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) wall thickness; non-slip grasping surface finish; concealed flange mounting; a. Ends to be heliarc welded to exposed mounting flanges.

2. Exposed Mounting Flanges: Stainless steel plate, Type 304, 18-8 S alloy, 1/8 inch thick; 3 inch (75 mm) diameter, with three screw holes for attachment to wall.

3. Backplates: a. For installation of grab bar through solid wall 3 to 8 inches thick: 3 x 4

inches (75 x 100 mm), 10-gage steel plate with bonderized zinc-chromate finish.

b. For installation of grab bar through toilet partition panel: 18-8 S, type 304, 16-gage stainless steel with satin finish.

4. Anchor Plates: a. For installation of grab bar through stud-framed partition: 3 inches (75

mm) x 12-gage galvanized steel plate with 1/4-20 (6 mm) threaded holes extruded and tapped to give minimum 0.200 inch (5 mm) of usable thread per hole; length of anchor plate to be per manufacturer's standard for grab bar span.

b. For installation of grab bar through solid wall 3 to 8 inches thick: 3.25 x 3 inches (85 x 75 mm), 12-gage galvanized steel plate.

5. Fastening System: As required per manufacturer's standard for each condition.

C. Products: 1. Stainless Steel Grab Bar - Horizontal, 36 Inches:

a. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). b. Product: Bobrick B-6806 x 36. c. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "G1".

2. Stainless Steel Grab Bar - Horizontal, 42 Inches: a. Length: 42 inches (1200 mm). b. Product: Bobrick B-6806 x 42. c. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item "G2".

2.07 ADA PIPING PROTECTION SYSTEMS

A. Undersink Piping Protective Covers:


1. General: Comply with requirements of FBC-BUILDING CHAPTER 11, ATBCB (ADAAG), ANSI/ICC A117.1, and as follows: a. Lavatory P-traps and angle valve assemblies shall be covered with

undersink protective pipe cover assemblies. 1) Cover assemblies shall include P-trap cover, two angle valve

covers, offset grid drain cover, tailpiece cover, and extensions as necessary to cover all undersink piping and valves.

b. Covers shall be secured with snap-clip flush reusable fasteners, and angle stop shall have locking access cover. Cable ties or baggie tie fasteners are not acceptable.

c. Covers shall be installable and removable without requiring disassembly of P-trap or angle stop.

d. Covers shall allow for emergency and maintenance access to the plumbing P-trap clean-out and angle stop valve without removing piping covers.

2. Specifications: a. Material: Molded closed cell vinyl. b. Nominal Wall Thickness: 1/8 inch. c. Durometer: 60 - 70 Shore A. d. Finish: Smooth, high gloss. e. UV Protection: Will not fade or discolor. f. Durability: Virtually indestructible. g. Fasteners: Reusable snap clips. h. Color: White. i. Compatibility: Shall fit all 1.25 to 1.50 inch cast brass or tubular P-trap

assemblies and 3/8 to 1/2 inch angle stop assemblies. Coordinate with specified plumbing fixtures.

j. Flame Characteristics (ASTM D 635): ATB, 0 sec.; AEB, 0 mm. k. Thermal Conductivity: K value of 1.17 plus dead air space. l. Bacteria/Fungus Resistance (ASTM G 21 and G22): Anti-microbial vinyl

formula; Result 0. 3. Product: TrueBro Lav-Guard Undersink Protective Pipe Covers, or equal.

2.08 UTILITY ROOM / JANITOR CLOSET ACCESSORIES

A. Combination Utility Shelf/Mop, Broom Holder and Hooks: 18-8 S, Type 304 stainless steel, 18-gauge (1.2mm) -3/4 inch returned edges, with steel wall brackets. Mount securely to back wall. 1. Shelf: 8 inches deep. 2. Hooks: 4 stainless steel rag hooks 3. Mop/broom holders: 3 spring-loaded rubber cam holders at shelf front. 4. Length: 34 inches; manufacturer's standard length for number of

holders/hooks. 5. Product: Bobrick B-239x34, or equal. 6. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T9”.

B. Stainless Steel Shelf/: 18-8 S, Type 304 stainless steel, 18-gauge (1.2mm) -3/4 inch returned edges, with steel wall brackets. Mount securely to back wall. 1. Shelf: 8 inches deep. 2. Length: 24 inches; manufacturer's standard length for number of

holders/hooks.


5. Product: Bobrick B-298x24, or equal. 6. Refer to Accessories Legend on drawings, Item “T8”.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION


B. Verify exact location of accessories for installation.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to site for timely installation.

B. Provide templates and rough-in measurements as required.

C. Coordinate placement and installation of blocking, reinforcement plates, and concealed anchors required for installation of accessories, with construction of related work specified in other sections.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories, grab bars, and ADA piping protection systems in accordance with manufacturers' instructions and as indicated on drawings.

B. Install plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.

C. Mounting Heights and Locations: As required by accessibility regulations, as indicated on drawings, and as follows: 1. Toilet Tissue Dispensers: Except as otherwise indicated, top of dispenser to

be mounted at 31.0 inches above finish floor. a. Mount toilet tissue dispenser so that top of dispenser is at 3.0 inches

below top of grab bar; clearance between bottom of grab bar and tissue dispenser to be not less than 1.5 inches.

D. Mirrors: 1. Install mirrors in accordance with NAMM recommendations. 2. Set mirrors plumb and level, free of optical distortion. 3. Set mirrors with edge clearance free of surrounding construction including

countertops or backsplashes.

3.04 ADJUSTMENT AND CLEANING

A. After installation, remove all traces of protective coating paper, and clean accessories in manner not to damage finish.

B. Adjust accessories for proper operation. Test mechanisms, hinges, locks, and latches and where necessary adjust and lubricate.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 14201 - 1 of 14 PASSENGER ELEVATOR

SECTION 14201

PASSENGER ELEVATOR

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Complete electric traction elevator system.

B. Hoistway I-beam.

C. Pit ladder.

D. Elevator maintenance.


A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: 1. Grating cover at pit sump. 2. Guide rail bracket supports. 3. Lifeline attachments.

B. Section 7140 – Fluid applied waterproofing

D. Section 07840 - Firestopping.

D. Section 08310 - Access Doors and Panels: Fire-rated access door, as required for access to governor.

E. Section 09300 - Tile: Tile floor finish.

F. Section 13850 - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System

G. Section 13900 - Fire Protection

H. Division 15 - Mechanical.

I. Division 16 - Electrical: 1. Electrical service for elevator and related components. 2. Pit Lighting: Fixture with switch and guards.

a. Provide illumination level equal to or greater than that required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000, or applicable version.

3. Control Space Lighting: Fixture with switch.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



Section 09300.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate the following information: 1. Locations of machine room equipment: driving machines, controllers,

governors and other component. 2. Hoistway Components: Car, machine beams, guide rails, buffers, ropes,


and other components. Include the following: a. Clear inside hoistway and pit dimensions. b. Clearances and travel of car. c. Car, guide rails, buffers and other components in hoistway.

3. Rail bracket spacing; maximum loads imposed on guide rails requiring load transfer to building structural framing.

4. Individual weight of principal components; load reaction at points of support. 5. Loads on hoisting beams. 6. Clearances and over-travel of car and counterweight. 7. Locations in hoistway and machine room of traveling cables and connections

for car light. 8. Location and sizes of access doors, doors, and frames. 9. Expected heat dissipation of elevator equipment in machine room. 10. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 11. Show arrangement of equipment in machine room so rotating elements,

sheaves, and other equipment can be removed for repairs or replaced without disturbing other components. Arrange equipment for clear passage through access door.

12. Location and layout of equipment and signals. 13. Maximum loads imposed on building structure. 14. Hoistway I-beam requirements and installation details. 15. Lifeline attachment location and installation details. 16. Location and sizes of access doors. 17. Location and details of hoistway door and frames. 18. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements. 19. Cab interior details.

a. Indicate provisions for tile floor installation, including recessed subfloor; coordinate with submittal requirements specified in Section 09300.

C. Product Data: Provide data on the following items: 1. Controls, signals and operating system. 2. Signal and operating fixtures, operating panels, indicators. 3. Cab design, dimensions, layout, and components.

a. Include finishes, accessories and available options. 4. Cab and hoistway door and frame details. 5. Electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

D. Samples: Submit two samples, 6 x 6 inch in size, for each of the following: 1. Cab floor material, illustrating manufacturer’s complete range of colors;

coordinate with submittal requirements for specified flooring materials. 2. Cab interior finishes, illustrating manufacturer’s complete range of colors,

patterns and sheens. 3. Cab and hoistway door and frame finishes.

E. Maintenance Contract.

F. Maintenance Data: Include: 1. Parts catalog with complete list of equipment replacement parts; identify

each entry with equipment description and identifying code. 2. Technical information for servicing operating equipment. 3. Legible schematic of wiring diagrams of installed electrical equipment and


changes made in the Work. List symbols corresponding to identity or markings on machine room and hoistway apparatus.


A. Perform Work in accordance with applicable requirements of the governing building code and ASME A17.1 and as supplemented in this section.

B. Design guide rails, brackets, anchors, and machine anchors under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of work of this type and licensed in the State of Florida.

C. Perform structural steel design, fabrication, and installation in accordance with AISC 360, Specification for Structural Steel Buildings.

D. Perform welding of steel in accordance with AWS D1.1.

E. Fabricate and install door and frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA 80.

F. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum ten years documented experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators of the type and performance specified herein.

G. Installer Qualifications: The equipment manufacturer shall install the elevator.

H. Products Requiring Fire Resistance Rating: Listed and classified by UL.

I. Perform electrical work in accordance with NFPA 70.

J. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

K. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain required permits, inspections and tests.


A. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed ship date, provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area.

B. Delivered elevator materials shall be stored in a protected environment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

1.07 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer’s Warranty: During the warranty period, manufacturer will replace any part which proves to be defective in material and/or workmanship. 1. Warranty Period: One year, commencing upon the effective date of

Substantial Completion.

1.08 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 3 months after the effective date of Substantial Completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer.

B. Maintenance service shall be performed during regular working hours of regular


working days, and shall include regular time call back service.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Elevator manufacturers may include but are not limited to one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Otis Elevator – Holeless Hydraulic 2. Other acceptable holeless products:

a. Kone Elevator b. Schindler Elevator Corp..

B. All components to be manufactured by same entity, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Exception: Finish flooring.

2.02 ELEVATOR A. Performance Requirements and General Characteristics:

1. Type: Holeless: Twin direct acting hydraulic cylinder without well

holes. Cantilevered or telescoping applications

are not acceptable.

2. Number of Stops: Two (2)

3. Number of Openings: Two (2) front openings

4. Rise: 14‘ 3” (verify travel in plans)

5. Rated Load: 2100 lb.

6. Rated Speed: 100 FPM (feet per minute)

7. Car Dimensions (inside): 5’ 8” wide x 4’ 3” deep

8. Canopy / Ceiling: 8’ 0” (h) / 7’ 4-3/4” (h) to underside of ceiling

9. Hoistway Dimensions: 7’ 8” wide x 5’ 9” deep

10. Entrance Dimensions: 3’ 6”(w) x 7’ 0”(h)

11. Entrance Type: Single Slide Side Opening

12. Stopping Accuracy: ±1/4" under any loading condition or direction of

travel.

13. Main Power Supply: 3 Phase (confirm voltage with electrical drawings)

±5% of normal, 3 Phase, with a separate

equipment-grounding conductor.

14. Lighting Power Supply: 120 Volts, 1 Phase, 15 Amp, 60 Hz.

2.03 EQUIPMENT - CONTROL COMPONENTS AND CONTROL SPACE

A. Controller: Provide microcomputer-based control system to perform all of the functions.


1. All high voltage (110V or above) contact points inside the controller cabinet shall be protected from accidental contact in a situation where the controller doors are open.

2. Controller shall be separated into two distinct halves; Motor Drive side and Control side. High voltage motor power conductors shall be routed and physically segregated from the rest of the controller.

3. Provide a serial cardrack and main CPU board containing a non-erasable EPROM and operating system firmware.

4. Variable field parameters and adjustments shall be contained in a non-volatile memory module.

B. Drive: Provide Variable Voltage Variable Frequency (VVVF) AC drive system to develop high starting torque with low starting current.

C. Controller Location: Remote room (Elevator Control Room), as indicated on Drawings. 1. Per manufacturer’s design criteria, controller is to be located within 100 ft

(140 ft wire feet) of the elevator machine.

D. Door Controls: 1. Program door control to open doors automatically when car arrives at floor. 2. Render "Door Close" button inoperative when car is standing at dispatching

terminal with doors open. 3. If doors are prevented from closing for approximately ten seconds because

of an obstruction, automatically disconnect door reopening devices, close doors more slowly until obstruction is cleared. Sound buzzer.

4. Door Safety Devices: Moveable, retractable safety edges, quiet in operation; equip with photo-electric light rays.

E. Hall Call Buttons: Illuminating type; one for originating UP and one for originating DOWN calls, except one button only at terminating landings; marked with arrows. 1. Call buttons shall be centered at 42 inches above the floor. 2. Call buttons shall have visual signals to indicate when each call is registered

and when each call is answered. 3. Call buttons shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch in the smallest dimension. 4. Buttons shall be raised or flush.

F. Interconnect elevator control system with building fire alarm systems.

2.04 EQUIPMENT - HOISTWAY COMPONENTS

A. Machine: AC gearless machine, with permanent magnet synchronous motor, direct current electro-mechanical disc brakes and integral traction drive sheave, mounted to the car guide rail at the top of the hoistway.

B. Governor: Friction type over-speed governor rated for the duty of the elevator specified.

C. Buffers, Car and Counterweight: Polyurethane buffer.

D. Hoistway Operating Devices: 1. Emergency stop switch in the pit 2. Terminal stopping switches. 3. Emergency stop switch on the machine.


E. Positioning System: System consisting of magnets and proximity switches.

F. Hoistway I-beam: ASTM A 36; to be provided by elevator manufacturer.

G. Guide Rails and Attachments: Steel rails with brackets and fasteners. 1. Guide Rail Support shall be structurally adequate to extend from pit floor to

top of hoistway, with spans in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction and final layouts.

H. Lifeline Attachment: 4 x 4 x 3/8 inch (100 x 100 x 9.6 mm) tube steel lifeline beam, supplied by elevator manufacturer. 1. Each lifeline attachment shall be capable of withstanding 5000 lb load in

accordance with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.502.

2.05 EQUIPMENT - HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Sills: Extruded.

B. Doors: Hollow metal construction with vertical internal channel reinforcements.

C. Fire Rating: Entrance and doors shall be UL fire-rated for 1-1/2 hour.

D. Entrance Finish: Stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.

E. Entrance Markings Jamb Plates: Provide standard entrance jamb tactile markings on both jambs, at all floors. 1. Plate Mounting: Refer to manufacturer drawings.

2.06 EQUIPMENT - CAR COMPONENTS

A. Car Frame: Provide car frame with adequate bracing to support the platform and car enclosure.

B. Platform: Platform shall be per manufacturer’s standard construction; see also “Floor Plan of Elevator Car.”

C. Car Guides: Provide guide-shoes mounted to top and bottom of both car and counterweight frame. Each guide-shoe assembly shall be arranged to maintain constant contact on the rail surfaces.

D. Load weighing device shall be strain gauge type mounted to dead-end hitch attached atop the hoistway guide-rail.

E. Floor Plan of Elevator Car: The floor area shall provide space for wheelchair users to enter the car, maneuver within reach of controls, and exit from the car. Acceptable door opening and inside dimensions shall be as shown in FBC-B CHAPTER 11 (see Figure 22). 1. Minimum Clear Inside Dimensions of Elevator Car:

a. Depth: 54 inches, except 51 inches at Front Return Wall. b. Width: 80 inches. c. Height (clear height from finished floor to underside of suspended

ceiling): 91 inches. 2. The clearance between the car platform sill and the edge of any hoist way

landing shall be no greater than 1.25 inches.

F. Steel Cab: 1. Wall Panels: Non-removable vertical panels, plastic laminate selected from


standard manufacturer’s catalog of choices. 2. Front Return Wall: 16 gage stainless steel, wall(s) containing car station to

swing out vertically for access; #4 satin finish; key locked. 3. Car Front Finish: Stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish. 4. Car Door Finish: Stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish. 5. Ceiling: Stainless steel three-panel suspended ceiling with two holes per

panel for round LED lights. a. The level of illumination at the car controls, platform, and car threshold

and landing sill shall be at least 5 footcandles. 6. Handrail: Custom 2-inch diameter round stainless steel; No. 4 satin finish.

a. Rail to be located on back wall of car. 7. Finish Flooring: Tile.

a. Floor Pan Recess: 1/2-inch (nominal); coordinate with tile flooring system specified in Section 09300.

b. Weight: Ensure that the weight of tile floor installation is included when calculating counterweight stack.

8. Threshold / Sill: Natural finish extruded aluminum. 9. Certificate Frame: Universal card size, stainless steel; #4 satin finish.

G. Emergency Car Signals: 1. Emergency Siren: Siren mounted on top of cab that is activated when the

alarm button in the car operating panel is engaged. Siren shall have rated sound pressure level of 80 dB(A) at a distance of three feet from device. Siren shall respond with a delay of not more than one second after activation of alarm button.

2. Emergency Car Lighting: Provide emergency power unit employing a 12-volt sealed rechargeable battery and totally static circuits shall illuminate the elevator car and provide current to the alarm bell in the event of building power failure.

3. Emergency Exit Contact: An electrical contact shall be provided on the car-top exit.

H. Ventilation: Fan.

2.07 EQUIPMENT - SIGNAL DEVICES AND FIXTURES

A. Car Operating Panel: Provide car operating panel with all push buttons, key switches, and message indicators for elevator operation. 1. Full height car operating panel shall contain a bank of round, mechanical,

illuminated buttons marked to correspond to landings served, emergency call button, door open button, door close button, and key switches for lights, inspection, and exhaust fan. Buttons have amber illumination (halo) and shall be car operating panel button type. All buttons to have raised text and Braille marking on left hand side. The car operating display panel shall be amber Dot Matrix. All texts, when illuminated, shall be amber. The full height car operating panel shall have a polycarbonate face plate that is shatterproof and impact resistant in a color and pattern per manufacturer’s standard selection.

2. Additional features of car operating panel shall include: a. Car Position Indicator within operating panel (amber). b. Elevator Data Plate marked with elevator capacity on car top.


c. Help button markings with raised markings. d. In car Stop Switch, per governing building code. e. Firefighter's Hat. f. Firefighter's Phase II key-switch. g. Firefighter's Phase II emergency in-car operating instructions.

B. Hall Fixtures: Wall mounted hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. Wall-mounted hall fixtures shall have a brushed stainless steel finish. 1. Hall fixtures shall feature round, mechanical, illuminated buttons in raised

fixture housings. Hall fixtures shall correspond to options available from that landing. Buttons shall be flat flush in vertically mounted fixture. Hall fixtures should not be jamb-mounted.

2. Call buttons shall be centered at 42 inches above the floor.

C. Car Lantern and Chime: A directional lantern visible from the corridor shall be provided in the car entrance. Hall lanterns shall feature amber illumination. 1. When the car stops and the doors are opening, the lantern shall indicate the

direction in which the car is to travel and a chime will sound once for up and twice for down.

2.08 EQUIPMENT - ELEVATOR OPERATION AND CONTROLLER

A. Elevator Operation: Simplex Collective Operation. 1. Using a microprocessor-based controller, operation shall be fully automatic

by means of the car and hall buttons. 2. Stop registered by the momentary actuation of the car or landing buttons

shall be made in the order in which the landings are reached in each direction of travel after the buttons have been actuated.

3. All stops shall be subject to the respective car or landing button being actuated sufficiently in advance of the arrival of the car at that landing to enable the stop to be made.

4. The first car or landing button actuated shall establish the direction of travel for an idle car. “UP” landing calls shall be answered while the car is traveling in the up direction and “DOWN” landing calls shall be answered while the car is traveling down.

5. The car shall reverse after the uppermost or lowermost car or landing call has been answered, and shall proceed to answer car calls and landing calls registered in the opposite direction of travel.

6. If all calls in the system have been answered, the car shall park at the last landing served.

B. Standard Operating Features to include: 1. Full Collective Operation.

a. The car shall answer calls in the order in which floors are reached, irrespective of the time sequence in which the calls were registered.

b. Only car calls and up hall calls shall be answered when the car is traveling in the up direction, and only car calls and down hall calls hall be answered when the car is traveling in the down direction, except in the case of the highest or lowest calls which are answered as soon as they are reached, regardless of the direction of travel of the car.


c. When the car reaches the last registered call for the established direction, it shall reverse and proceed to answer calls in the opposite direction if they are present.

2. Fan and Light Control. a. The cab's fan and light shall automatically turn off if the car is idle for a

selectable period of time. 3. Load Weighting Bypass.

a. When the car is loaded to a predetermined percent of capacity, the weight sensing devices shall operate causing the car to bypass further hall calls.

b. Operation of the weight sensing devices shall not affect the stopping of the car in response to car calls.

4. Ascending Car Uncontrolled Movement Protection. 5. Top of Car Inspection Station.

a. Enabling switches in the car operating panel and on top of the car shall make the car and hall buttons inoperative and allow the controls in a fixture on the top of the car to be used to move the car at reduced speed for installation, inspection, and maintenance.

b. This operating station shall include a push-button which must be continuously depressed to permit the elevator to move in either the up or down direction.

c. The top-of-car inspection station shall include a 125V, 15 Amp convenience outlet with ground-fault-circuit-interrupter protection and a convenience light with switch.

d. The top of car fixture shall also include an emergency stop button.

C. Additional Operating Features to include: 1. Independent Service Control:

a. Provide key-operated "Independent Service" on car operating panel. Key activation will remove that car from normal operation and cancel all pre-registered car calls.

b. Car will respond to selected floor. Car will not respond to any calls from hall call buttons. Car will only respond to calls placed on the car operating panel. Doors will remain open at last landing requested. Doors will close with a constant pressure on "DOOR CLOSE" button.

c. Key activation to normal operation will return car to normal operation. 2. Hoistway Access Bottom Landing.

a. This feature, activated by a keyswitch located at the landing, shall permit the operation of the car at the landing with the hoistway door and the car door or gate open, in order to permit access to the hoistway pit.

b. Movement of the car away from the landing shall be limited or "zoned" as required by applicable codes.

3. Hoistway Access Top Landing. a. This feature, activated by a keyswitch located at the landing, shall permit

the operation of the car at the landing with the hoistway door and the car door or gate open, in order to permit access to the top of the car.

b. Movement of the car away from the landing shall limited or "zoned" as required by applicable codes.

4. Automatic Standby Power Operation with Manual Override. a. This operation shall return the car automatically to a designated landing


when the system is initially switched to standby power. b. Manual Override of Standby Power Operation is achieved by a manual

input for the car via a strip switch.

D. Firefighters' Service Operation Features: 1. Firefighters' Service Phase I:

a. When a building smoke sensor or a key switch located at the designated return landing is activated, the car shall perform an emergency return to the designated landing. The return operation shall be in compliance with applicable codes.

b. Passengers shall be alerted that the car is returning by a buzzer and a message indicator showing "Please Exit When Doors Open" and a Fireman's Hat light is also illuminated.

2. Alternate Return Landing for Phase I: The car, while responding to a Phase 1 Firefighters' Service operation, shall return to a preselected alternate landing if the smoke detector at the designated return landing has been activated.

3. Firefighters' Service Phase II: a. This feature shall be activated by the fire fighting personnel using a key

switch in the car and shall place the elevator under their control. b. The operation shall be in compliance with applicable codes. c. This feature shall include a Call Cancel push-button. d. When the button is activated, all registered calls will be canceled and the

traveling car will stop at the next landing.

E. Elevator Control System for Inspections and Emergency: 1. Provide devices within controller to run the elevator in inspection operation. 2. Provide devices on car top to run the elevator in inspection operation. 3. Provide within controller an emergency stop switch to disconnect power from

the brake and prevent motor from running. 4. Provide the means from the controller to mechanically lift and control the

elevator brake to safely bring car to nearest available landing when power is interrupted.

5. Provide the means from the controller to reset the governor over speed switch and also trip the governor.

6. Provide the means from the controller to reset the emergency brake when set because of an unintended car movement or ascending car over speed.

2.09 EQUIPMENT - DOOR OPERATOR AND CONTROL

A. Door Operator: A closed-loop permanent magnet VVVF high-performance door operator shall be provided to open and close the car and hoistway doors simultaneously. Door movement shall be cushioned at both limits of travel. Electro-mechanical interlock shall be provided at each hoistway entrance to prevent operation of the elevator unless all doors are closed and locked. An electric contact shall be provided on the car at each car entrance to prevent the operation of the elevator unless the car door is closed.

B. The door operator shall be arranged so that, in case of interruption or failure of electric power, the doors can be readily opened by hand from within the car, in accordance with governing building code. Emergency devices and keys for opening doors from the landing shall be provided as required by governing


building code.

C. Doors shall open automatically when the car has arrived at or is leveling at the respective landings. Doors shall close after a predetermined time interval or immediately upon pressing of a car button. A door open button shall be provided in the car. Momentary pressing of this button shall reopen the doors and reset the time interval.

D. Door hangers and tracks shall be provided for each car and hoistway door. Tracks shall be contoured to match the hanger sheaves. The hangers shall be designed for power operation with provisions for vertical and lateral adjustment. Hanger sheaves shall have polyurethane tires and pre-lubricated sealed-for-life bearings.

E. Electronic Door Safety Device: The elevator car shall be equipped with an electronic protective device extending the full height of the car. When activated, this sensor shall prevent the doors from closing or cause them to stop and reopen if they are in the process of closing. The doors shall remain open as long as the flow of traffic continues and shall close shortly after the last person passes through the door opening.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to start of Work, verify that Elevator Hoistway and Elevator Controls Room are ready for work of this section. 1. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under

which elevator work is to be performed. 2. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each

signal control cabinet in control space.

B. Prior to start of Work, verify that electrical power is available and of the correct characteristics.

D. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. 1. Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches.

Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances.

E. Prior to start of Work, verify that there are no projections within the hoistway. 1. Projections greater than 2 inches must be beveled not less than 75 degrees

from horizontal.

F. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation.

G. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. 1. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with

installed elevator equipment.

H. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings,


including sleeves and penetrations.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories.

B. Coordinate building-in and grouting hoistway door frames.

C. Arrange for temporary electrical power for installation work and testing of elevator components.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturer installation methods and recommended practices.

B. Install system components. Connect equipment to building utilities.

C. Provide conduit, boxes, wiring, and accessories.

D. Mount machines and motors on vibration and acoustic isolators, on bed plate and concrete pad. Place on structural supports and bearing plates. Securely fasten to building supports. Prevent lateral displacement.

E. Accommodate equipment in space indicated.

F. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure. 1. Install guide rails using threaded bolts with metal shims and lock washers

under nuts. Compensate for expansion and contraction movement of guide rails.

G. Accurately machine and align guide rails. Form smooth joints with machined splice plates.

H. Bolt brackets to inserts placed in concrete form work that will perform to four times the rated pull-out load.

I. Field Welds: Chip and clean away oxidation and residue, wire brush; spot prime with two coats.

J. Coordinate installation of hoistway wall construction.

K. Install hoistway door sills, frames, and headers in hoistway walls. Grout sills in place. Set entrances in vertical alignment with car openings and aligned with plumb hoistway lines.

L. Fill hoistway door frames solid with grout in accordance with Section 04810.

M. Lifeline Attachment: Install Lifeline Attachment in accordance with elevator manufacturer’s installation instructions and requirements of governing building code. 1. Unless otherwise indicated on shop drawings, Lifeline Attachment to be

installed within elevator hoistway overhead 10 inches from front of hoistway to centerline, with bottom of lifeline beam at same elevation as hoisting I-


beam.

N. Structural Metal Surfaces: Clean surfaces of rust, oil or grease; wipe clean with solvent; prime two coats.

N. Machine Room Components: Clean and degrease; prime one coat, finish with one coat of enamel.

O. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

P. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion. 1. Adjust equipment for smooth and quiet operation.

3.04 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work: 1. Guide rail brackets attached to steel shall be installed prior to application of

fireproofing. 2. Coordinate construction of entrance walls with installation of door frames

and sills. Maintain front wall opening until elevator equipment has been installed. a. Ensure adequate support for entrance attachment points at all landings. b. Coordinate wall openings for hall push buttons, signal fixtures and

sleeves. Each elevator requires sleeves within the hoistway wall. c. Coordinate emergency power transfer switch and power change

pending signals as required for termination at the primary elevator signal control cabinet in each group.

d. Coordinate interface of elevators and fire alarm system. e. Coordinate interface of dedicated telephone line.

B. Tolerances: 1. Guide Rail Alignment: Plumb and parallel to each other in accordance with

ASME A17.1, ASME A17.2.1, and ASME A17.2.2. 2. Cab Movement on Aligned Guide Rails: Smooth movement, with no

objectionable lateral or oscillating movement or vibration.


A. Testing and inspection by regulatory agencies will be performed at their discretion. 1. Schedule tests with agencies and notify Project Manager and Consultant. 2. Obtain permits required to perform tests. 3. Document regulatory agency tests and inspections. 4. Perform tests required by regulatory agencies. 5. Furnish test and approval certificates issued by authorities having

jurisdiction.

B. Perform testing and inspection in accordance with regulatory requirements. 1. Perform tests as required by ASME A17.2. 2. Provide two weeks written notice of date and time of tests. 3. Supply instruments and execute specific tests.

3.06 ADJUSTING


A. Adjust for smooth acceleration and deceleration of car so not to cause passenger discomfort.

B. Adjust automatic floor leveling feature at each floor to achieve 1/4 inch from flush.

3.07 CLEANING

A. Remove protective coverings from finished surfaces.

B. Clean surfaces and components ready for inspection.

3.08 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit construction traffic within cab after cleaning.

B. Protect installed products until project completion.

C. Touch-up, repair, or replace damaged products before Date of Substantial Completion.

3.09 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide a separate maintenance contract for specified maintenance service.

B. Perform maintenance work using competent and qualified personnel under the supervision and in the direct employ of the elevator manufacturer or original installer.

C. Maintenance service shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor without prior written consent of Project Manager.

D. Provide service and maintenance of elevator system and components for one year from effective date of Substantial Completion of the Project.

E. Examine system components monthly. Clean, adjust, and lubricate equipment.

F. Include systematic examination, adjustment, and lubrication of elevator equipment. 1. Repair or replace parts whenever required. 2. Use parts produced by the manufacturer of the original equipment.

G. Perform work without removing cars during peak traffic periods.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15010 - 1 of 4 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for mechanical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1:

1. Submittals. 2. Record documents. 3. Maintenance manuals. 4. Rough-ins. 5. Mechanical installations. 6. Cutting and patching.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

section:

1. Division 15 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT," for factory-installed motors, controllers, accessories, and connections.

2. Division 15 Section "BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS," for materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 15, plus general related specifications including:

a. Access to mechanical installations. b. Excavation for mechanical installations within the building boundaries, and

from building to utilities connections. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All work in this Division shall comply with the applicable sections of the following codes.

1. National Electrical Code NFPA 70-1996 Edition. 2. The South Florida Building Code - 1999 Broward County Edition.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Follow the procedures specified in Division 1 Section "SUBMITTALS@.


1.05 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions:

1. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and interior;

locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic maintenance or repair.

2. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification@. Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

3. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

4. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

5. Contract Modifications, actual equipment and materials installed. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN:

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.02 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other

building components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section "ACCESS DOORS" and Division 15 Section "BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS@.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.



A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND PATCHING@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect

adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide

for Architect/Engineer observation of concealed Work.

C. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

D. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the

spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

1. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. For Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

E. Training:

Contractor is to provide training for maintenance staff. Training will consist of two (2) eight hour sessions where al mechanical equipment will be visited and regular operation and service procedures discussed. Contractor shall obtain signed affidavits from maintenance staff that training was received. Specialized additional training is also included under Energy Management and Control Sections.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15030 - 1 of 4 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

SECTION 15030 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Related Sections: Separate electrical components and materials required for field

installation and electrical connections are specified in Division 16, Section 16480. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies the basic requirements for electrical components which are an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment. These components include, but are not limited to factory installed motors, starters, and disconnect switches furnished as an integral part of packaged mechanical equipment.

B. Specific electrical requirements (i.e. horsepower and electrical characteristics) for

mechanical equipment are scheduled on the Drawings.

C. Motors starter-controllers, or disconnect switches not supplied as integral part of mechanical equipment are specified for provision under Division 16.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. NEMA Standards MG 1: Motors and Generators.

B. NEMA Standard ICS 2: Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies.

C. NEMA Standard 250: Enclosures for Electrical Equipment.

D. NEMA Standard KS 1: Enclosed Switches.

E. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70). 1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures.

B. Submit product data for motors, starters, and other electrical components with submittal data required for the equipment for which it serves, as required by the individual equipment specification sections.


A. Electrical components and materials shall be UL labeled.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MOTORS

A. The following are basic requirements for simple or common motors. For special motors, more detailed and specific requirements are specified in the individual equipment specifications.

1. Torque characteristics shall be sufficient to satisfactorily accelerate the driven

loads. 2. Motor sizes shall be large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor

to operate in the service factor range. 3. 2-speed motors shall have 2 separate windings on poly-phase motors. 4. Temperature Rating: Rated for 40 deg. C environment with maximum 50 deg. C

temperature rise for continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). 5. Starting capability: frequency of starts as indicated by automatic control system,

and not less than 5 evenly time spaced starts per hour for manually controlled motors.

6. Service Factor: 1.15 for poly-phase motors and 1.35 for single phase motors. 7. Motor construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty,

Design "B", except "C" where required for high starting torque.

a. Frames: NEMA Standard No. 48 or 54; use driven equipment manufacturer's standards to suit specific application.

b. Bearings:

1. ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals; 2. re-greasable, except permanently sealed where motor is normally

inaccessible for regular maintenance; 3. designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives

produce lateral or axial thrust in motor; 4. for fractional horsepower, light duty motors, sleeve type bearings are

permitted.

c. Enclosure Type: 1. open drip-proof motors for indoor use where satisfactorily housed or

remotely located during operation; 2. guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees

or building occupants; 3. weather protected Type I for outdoor use, Type II where not housed;

d. Overload protection: built-in thermal overload protection and, where

indicated, internal sensing device suitable for signaling and stopping motor at starter.

e. Noise rating: "Quiet". f. Efficiency: "Energy Efficient" motors shall have a minimum efficiency as

scheduled in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors", in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, test


method B. g. Nameplate: indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings,

characteristics, construction, special features and similar information. 2.02 STARTERS, ELECTRICAL DEVICES, AND WIRING:

A. Motor Starter Characteristics:

1. Enclosures: NEMA 1, general purpose enclosures with padlock ears, except in wet locations shall be NEMA 3R with conduit hubs, or units in hazardous locations which shall have NEC proper class and division.

2. Type and size of starter shall be as recommended by motor manufacturer and the driven equipment manufacturer for applicable protection and start-up condition.

B. Manual switches shall have:

1. Pilot lights and extra positions for multi-speed motors. 2. Overload protection: melting alloy type thermal overload relays.

C. Magnetic Starters:

1. Maintained contact push buttons and pilot lights, properly arranged for single speed

or multi-speed operation as indicated. 2. Trip-free thermal overload relays, each phase. 3. Interlocks, pneumatic switches and similar devices as required for coordination with

control requirements of Division-15 Controls sections. 4. Built-in 120 volts control circuit transformer, fused from line side, where service

exceeds 240 volts. 5. Externally operated manual reset. 6. Under-voltage release or protection.

D. Motor connections:

1. Flexible conduit, except where plug-in electrical cords are specifically indicated.

2.03 CAPACITORS

A. Features:

1. Individual unit cells 2. all welded steel housing 3. each capacitor internally fused 4. non-flammable synthetic liquid impregnated 5. craft tissue insulation 6. aluminum foil electrodes

KVAR size shall be as required to correct motor power factor to 90 percent or better and shall be installed on all motors 1 horsepower and larger, that have an uncorrected power factor of less than 85 percent at rated load.


B. Disconnect Switches:

1. Fusible switches: fused, each phase; general duty; horsepower rated; non-teasible quick-make, quick-break mechanism; dead front line side shield; solderless lugs suitable for copper or aluminum conductors; spring reinforced fuse clips; electro silver plated current carrying parts; hinged doors; operating lever arranged for locking in the "OPEN" position; arc quenchers; capacity and characteristics as indicated.

2. Non-fusible switches: for equipment 2 horsepower and smaller, shall be horsepower rated; toggle switch type; quantity of poles and voltage rating as indicated. For equipment larger than 2 horsepower, switches shall be the same as fusible type.

PART 3 EXECUTION

NOT APPLICABLE END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15050 - 1 of 9 MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements" apply

to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with mechanical installations as follows:

1. Mechanical equipment nameplate data. 2. Excavation for underground utilities and services, from building to a point 5 feet

from it including underground piping (under the building and from building to utility connection), tanks, basins, and equipment.

3. Miscellaneous metals for support of mechanical materials and equipment. 4. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of

mechanical materials and equipment. 5. Joint sealers for sealing around mechanical materials and equipment; and for

sealing penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 6. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to mechanical

materials and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Division 1 Section - Submittal Procedures.

B. Product data for the following products:

1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers.

C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal fabrications, and wood

supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment.

D. Welder certificates, signed by Contractor, certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" article of this Section.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint sealers, access panels, and doors.


B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators in accordance with AWS D1.1

"Structural Welding Code – Steel”.

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

C. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide

access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.


A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers'

recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations.

3. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

4. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities in excavation areas. If utilities are indicated to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations.

5. Remove existing underground utilities indicated to be removed.

a. Uncharted or Incorrectly Charted Utilities: Contact utility owner immediately for instructions.

6. Use of explosives is not permitted.

B. Interruptions of existing utilities and services must be closely coordinated with the

building officials and the Institution Project Manager. Some of the work required may have to be scheduled for overnight, weekend, or over the holiday time schedules. Most utility services are vital to the Library operation and safeguard of contents. No prolonged service interruptions will be accepted.


C. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity

conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

1.07 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the shut-off and disconnection of utility services with the Owner and the utility company.

B. Notify the Architect at least 5 days prior to commencing demolition operations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATE DATA

A. Nameplate: For each piece of power operated mechanical equipment provide a permanent operational data nameplate indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessible location.

2.02 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.

B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or

uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification

groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; frozen materials; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500. C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Non-shrink, Non-metallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, non-staining, non-

corrosive, non-gaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.


2.04 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue;

thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 2.05 JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

D. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for

use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

2.06 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in

unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.


C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed

continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and self-closing mechanism.

D. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

E. Refer to Architectural drawings for access door location and type.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation.

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply

with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed

to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and

ordinances.

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system


components necessary to convey water away from excavations. 2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside

excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until

required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

F. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical Structures: Conform to

elevations and dimensions shown within a tolerance of plus or minus 0.10 foot; plus a sufficient distance to permit placing and removal of concrete formwork, installation of services, other construction, and for inspection.

1. Excavate, by hand, areas within drip-line of large trees. Protect the root system

from damage and dry-out. Maintain moist conditions for root system and cover exposed roots with burlap. Paint root cuts of 1 inch in diameter and larger with emulsified asphalt tree paint.

2. Take care not to disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before concrete reinforcement is placed.

G. Trenching: Excavate trenches for mechanical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working

room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of pipe and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth indicated or required for piping to establish indicated slope and invert elevations.

3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which pipe can be installed, tested, and the trench backfilled within the same day.

4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of pipe. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and pipe.

5. Excavate trenches for piping and equipment with bottoms of trench to accurate elevations for support of pipe and equipment on undisturbed soil.

a. For pipes or equipment 6 inches or larger in nominal size, shape bottom of

trench to fit bottom 1/4 of the circumference. Fill unevenness with tamped sand backfill. At each pipe joint over-excavate to relieve the bell or pipe joint of the pipe of loads, and to ensure continuous bearing of the pipe barrel on the bearing surface.

H. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for

each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and


excavated or borrowed materials. 2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock

bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. For piping less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick

concrete base slab support. After installation and testing of piping, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.

I. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been

recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

J. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8

inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

K. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum

moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy.

L. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to required elevations. Prevent displacement of piping and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

M. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum

percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).

a. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top

12 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

b. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

c. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.


2. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture

conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

N. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at mechanical installation excavations during the

period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code@.

3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be

exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.06 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint

sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint

sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and

other accessory materials, to fill openings around mechanical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall


assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15055 - 1 of 6 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS

SECTION 15055 BASIC PIPING MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies piping materials and installation methods common to more than one section of Division 15 and includes joining materials, piping specialties, compressed air pressure, fuel oil piping, and basic piping installation instructions.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 15 Basic Mechanical Requirements section applies to the work at

this Section. 2. Piping materials and installation methods peculiar to individual systems are

specified within their respective system specification sections of Divisions 2 and 15.

3. Valves are specified in a separate section and in individual piping system sections of Division 15.

4. Supports and Anchors are specified in a separate section of Division 15. 5. Mechanical Identification is specified in a separate section of Division 15.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Refer to Basic Mechanical Requirements for administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

C. Product Data: Submit product data on the following items:

1. Escutcheons 2. Dielectric Unions and Fittings 3. Mechanical Sleeve Seals 4. Strainers.


A. Welder's Qualifications: All welders shall be qualified in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

B. Welding procedures and testing shall comply with ANSI Standard B31.1.0 -

Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping, and The American Welding Society, Welding Handbook.


C. Soldering and Brazing procedures shall conform to ANSI B9.1 Standard Safety

Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube, except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay pipe. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer uniformity: conform with the requirements specified in Basic Mechanical Requirements, under "Product Options”.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide piping materials

and specialties from one of the following:

1. Pipe Escutcheons: Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co. Grinnell

2. Dielectric Unions:

Eclipse, Inc. Perfection Corp. Watts Regulator Co.

3. Strainers:

Armstrong Machine Works. Metraflex Co. Spirax Sarco.

2.02 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2.03 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: Comply with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Brazing Materials: Comply with SFA-5.8, Section II, ASME Boiler and Pressure

Vessel Code for brazing filler metal materials appropriate for the materials being joined.

C. Soldering Materials: Refer to individual piping system specifications for solder

appropriate for each respective system.


D. Gaskets for Flanged Joints: Gasket material shall be full-faced for cast-iron flanges

and raised-face for steel flanges. Select materials to suit the service of the piping system in which installed and which conform to their respective ANSI Standard (A21.11, B16.20, or B16.21). Provide materials that will not be detrimentally affected by the chemical and thermal conditions of the fluid being carried.

2.04 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated, stamped steel, hinged, split-ring escutcheon, with set screw. Inside diameter shall closely fit pipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Outside diameter shall completely cover the opening in floors, walls, or ceilings.

B. Unions: Malleable-iron, Class 150 for low pressure service and class 250 for high

pressure service; hexagonal stock, with ball-and-socket joints, metal-to-metal bronze seating surfaces; female threaded ends.

C. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the

pipe materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

D. Y-Type Strainers: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends

matching piping system materials. Screens shall be Type 304 stainless steel, with 3/64" perforations at 233 per square inch.

1. Provide strainers with 125 psi working pressure rating for low pressure

applications. 2. Threaded Ends, 2" and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer

with centered blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 3. Flanged Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer

with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug. 4. Butt Welded Ends, 2-1/2" and Larger For Low Pressure Application:

Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screen retainer with off-center blowdown fitted with pipe plug.

E. Sleeves:

1. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 10 gage, galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed

with welded longitudinal joint. 2. Steel Sleeves: Schedule 40 galvanized, welded steel pipe, ASTM A53,

Grade A.

F. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected with bolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes, and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris for both inside and outside of piping and fittings before assembly.

3.02 INSTALLATIONS

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated. Refer to individual system specifications for requirements for coordination drawing submittals.

B. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,

below grade or floors, unless indicated otherwise.

C. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

D. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are

not permitted, unless expressly indicated on the Drawings.

E. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1" clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

F. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full

insulation and servicing of valves.

G. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4" ball valve, and short 3/4" threaded nipple and cap.

H. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6" shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6" and larger shall be sheet metal.

I. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions,

ceilings, or floors, the fire rated integrity shall be maintained. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

3.03 FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES

A. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

B. Remake leaking joints using new materials.


C. Install strainers on the suction side of each pump.

D. Install unions adjacent to each valve, and at the final connection to each piece of equipment and plumbing fixture having 2" and smaller connections, and elsewhere as indicated.

E. Install Flanges in piping 2-1/2" and larger, where indicated, adjacent to each valve,

and at the final connection to each piece of equipment.

F. Install dielectric fittings to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals in wet piping systems.

3.04 JOINTS

A. Steel Pipe Joints:

1. Pipe 2" and Smaller: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI B2.1. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant suitable for the service for which the pipe is intended on the male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.

2. Pipe Larger Than 2":

a. Weld pipe joints (except for exterior water service pipe) in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.

b. Weld pipe joints of exterior water service pipe in accordance with AWWA C206.

c. Install flanges on all valves, apparatus, and equipment. Weld pipe flanges to pipe ends in accordance with ASME B31.1.0 Code for Pressure Piping. Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to torque specified by manufacturer of flange and flange bolts, to provide uniform compression of gaskets.

B. Non-ferrous Pipe Joints:

1. Brazed And Soldered Joints: For copper tube and fitting joints, braze joints

in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 - Standard Code for Pressure Piping, Power Piping and ANSI B9.1 - Standard Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

2. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the fittings, using very fine emory cloth, prior to making soldered or brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

C. Joints for other piping materials are specified within the respective piping system

sections.



A. Testing: Refer to individual piping system specification sections. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15100 - 1 of 9 VALVES

SECTION 15100 VALVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section:

1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements@. 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods@. 3. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods@.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general duty valves common to most mechanical piping systems.

B. Valve tags and charts are specified in Division 15 Section "MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION@.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, including body material, valve design, pressure and temperature classification, end connection details, seating materials, trim material and arrangement, dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.


A. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Do not remove valve end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect valves from weather. Store valves indoors. Maintain valve temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, support valves off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 VALVE FEATURES, GENERAL

A. Valve Design: Rising stem or rising outside screw and yoke stems. 1. Non-rising stem valves may be used where headroom prevents full extension of

rising stems.


B. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

C. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Operators: Provide the following special operator features:

1. Handwheels, fastened to valve stem, for valves other than quarter turn. 2. Lever handles, on quarter-turn valves 6-inch and smaller, except for plug valves.

Provide plug valves with square heads; provide one wrench for every 10 plug valves.

3. Chain-wheel operators, for valves 2-1/2-inch and larger, install 72 inches or higher above finished floor elevation. Extend chains to an elevation of 5'-0" above finished floor elevation.

E. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.

F. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45 bypass and drain connections.

G. End Connections: As indicated in the valve specifications.

1. Threads: Comply with ANSI B1.20.1. 2. Flanges: Comply with ANSI B16.1 for cast iron, ANSI B16.5 for steel, and ANSI

B16.24 for bronze valves. 3. Solder-Joint: Comply with ANSI B16.18.

Caution: Where soldered end connections are used, use solder having a melting point below 840 deg F for gate, globe, and check valves; below 421 deg F for ball valves.

2.02 GATE VALVES

A. Gate Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, body and bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, solid disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires.

B. Gate Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-70; Class 125 iron body, bronze

mounted, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; with flanged ends, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.03 BALL VALVES

A. Ball Valves, 1 Inch and Smaller: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi WOG pressure; two-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, standard (or regular) port, chrome-plated brass ball, replaceable "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder domestic hot and cold water service.

B. Ball Valves, 1-1/4-Inch to 2-Inch: Rated for 150 psi saturated steam pressure, 400 psi


WOG pressure; 3-piece construction; with bronze body conforming to ASTM B 62, conventional port, chrome-plated brass ball, replace-able "Teflon" or "TFE" seats and seals, blowout proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle. Provide solder ends for domestic hot and cold water service.

2.04 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: Rated at 150 psi WOG; bronze body, with straightaway pattern, square head, and threaded ends.

B. Plug Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-78; rated at 175 psi WOG; lubricated plug

type, with semi-steel body, single gland, wrench operated, and flanged ends. 2.05 GLOBE VALVES

A. Globe Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125; body and screwed bonnet of ASTM B 62 cast bronze; with threaded or solder ends, brass or replaceable composition disc, copper-silicon alloy stem, brass packing gland, "Teflon" impregnated packing, and malleable iron handwheel. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above where system pressure requires.

B. Globe Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-85; Class 125 iron body and bolted

bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; with outside screw and yoke, bronze mounted, flanged ends, and "Teflon" impregnated packing, and two-piece backing gland assembly.

2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES

A. Butterfly Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-67; rated at 200 psi; cast-iron body conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B. Provide valves with field replaceable EPDM sleeve, nickel-plated ductile iron disc, stainless steel stem, and EPDM O-ring stem seals. Provide lever operators with locks for sizes 2 through 6 inches and gear operators with position indicator for sizes 8 inches and above. Provide lug or wafer type as indicated. Drill and tap valves on dead-end service or requiring additional body strength.

2.07 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing Check Valves, 2-Inch and Smaller: MSS SP-80; Class 125, cast-bronze body and cap conforming to ASTM B 62; with horizontal swing, Y-pattern, and bronze disc; and having threaded or solder ends. Provide valves capable of being re-ground while the valve remains in the line. Provide Class 150 valves meeting the above specifications, with threaded end connections, where system pressure requires or where Class 125 valves are not available.

B. Swing Check Valves, 2-1/2-Inch and Larger: MSS SP-71; Class 125 (Class 175 FM

approved for fire protection piping systems), cast iron body and bolted cap conforming to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, and bronze disc or cast-iron disc with bronze disc ring; and flanged ends. Provide valves capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.



A. Examine valve interior through the end ports for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove special packing materials, such as blocks used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

B. Actuate valve through an open-close and close-open cycle. Examine functionally

significant features, such as guides and seats made accessible by such actuation. Following examination, return the valve closure member to the shipping position.

C. Examine threads on both the valve and the mating pipe for form (i.e., out-of-round or

local indentation) and cleanliness.

D. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

E. Prior to valve installation, examine the piping for cleanliness, freedom from foreign

materials, and proper alignment.

F. Replace defective valves with new valves. 3.02 VALVE ENDS SELECTION

A. Select valves with the following ends or types of pipe/tube connections:

1. Copper Tube Size, 2-Inch and Smaller: Solder ends. 2. Steel Pipe Sizes, 2-Inch and Smaller: threaded or grooved end. 3. Steel Pipe Sizes 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: grooved end or flanged.

3.03 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General Application: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves for shut-off duty; globe, ball, and butterfly for throttling duty. Refer to piping system specification sections for specific valve applications and arrangements.

B. Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.

C. Install valves and unions for each fixture and item of equipment arranged to allow

equipment removal without system shutdown. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

D. Install three-valve bypass around each pressure reducing valve using throttling-type

valves.

E. Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above the center of the pipe.


F. Install valves in a position to allow full stem movement.

G. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Wafer Check Valves: Horizontal or vertical position, between flanges. 3. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb.

3.04 SOLDER CONNECTIONS

A. Cut tube square and to exact lengths.

B. Clean end of tube to depth of valve socket with steel wool, sand cloth, or a steel wire brush to a bright finish. Clean valve socket in same manner.

C. Apply proper soldering flux in an even coat to inside of valve socket and outside of tube.

D. Open gate and globe valves to full open position.

E. Remove the cap and disc holder of swing check valves having composition discs.

F. Insert tube into valve socket, making sure the end rests against the shoulder inside

valve. Rotate tube or valve slightly to ensure even distribution of the flux.

G. Apply heat evenly to outside of valve around joint until solder will melt upon contact. Feed solder until it completely fills the joint around tube. Avoid hot spots or overheating valve. Once the solder starts cooling, remove excess amounts around the joint with a cloth or brush.

3.05 THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends, and proximity of valve internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except where

dry seal threading is specified).

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

3.06 FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.


C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for proper shutoff and retention.


A. Tests: After piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing, inspect valves for leaks. Adjust or replace packing to stop leaks; replace valves if leak persists.


A. Cleaning: Clean mill scale, grease, and protective coatings from exterior of valves and prepare valves to receive finish painting or insulation.

3.09 VALVE PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE CLASSIFICATION SCHEDULES

VALVES, 2-INCHES AND SMALLER

SERVICE GATE GLOBE BALL CHECK Domestic Hot and Cold Water 125 125 150 125

VALVES, 2-1/2-INCHES AND LARGER

SERVICE GATE GLOBE BALL CHECK Domestic Hot and Cold Water 125 125 200 125

3.10 VALVE SCHEDULE

A. Gate Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller, 125 lb.:

THREADED SOLDER MANUFACTURER NRS RS NRS RS Crane 438 428 1701S 1700S Grinnell 3000 3010 3000SJ 3010SJ Jenkins 370 47 1240 1242 Lunkenheimer 2129 2127 2133 2132 Milwaukee 105 148 115 1149 Powell 507 500 1822 1821 Stockham B103 B-100 B-104 B-108

B. Gate Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller, 150 lb.:

THREADED SOLDER MANUFACTURER NRS RS NRS RS Crane x 431UB x x Grinnell 3050 3060 x x


Jenkins x 47U x x Lunkenheimer 3153 3151 3154 3155 Milwaukee x 1151 x 1169 Powell 2712 2714 x 1842 Stockham B-130 B-120 x B-124

x means not available.

C. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:

MANUFACTURER OS&Y RS NRS Crane 465-1/2 461 Grinnell 6020A 6060A Jenkins 651A 326 Lunkenheimer 1430 1428 Milwaukee F-2885 F-2882 Stockham G-623 G-612 Powell 1793 1787

D. Ball Valves - 1 Inch and Smaller:

THREADED SOLDER

MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS Conbraco (Apollo) 70-100 70-200 Crane 9302 9322 Grinnell 3500 3500SJ Jenkins 900T 902T Lunkenheimer 708HST x Stockham S-216 BR-R-T S-216 BR-R-S Watts B-6000 B-6001

E. Ball Valves - 1-1/4 Inches to 2 Inches:

THREADED SOLDER

MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS Conbraco (Apollo) 82-100 82-200 Grinnell 3810 3810SJ Nibco T-590-Y S-590-Y Stockham S-216 BR-R-T S-216 BR-R-S Watts B-6800 B-6801

F. Plug Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller:

Lunkenheimer: 454.

G. Plug Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:

Powell: 2201.


H. Globe Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller:

CLASS 125 CLASS 150 MANUFACTURER THREADED SOLDER THREADED Crane 1 1310 17TF Grinnell 3210 3210SJ 3240 Jenkins 746 1200 106-A-2 Lunkenheimer 2140 2146 407 Milwaukee 502 1502 590 Powell 650 1823 150 Stockham B-16 B-14T B-22

I. Globe Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:

MANUFACTURER STRAIGHT BODY ANGLE BODY Crane 351 353 Jenkins 613 x Lunkenheimer 1123 1124 Milwaukee F2981 F2986 Powell 241 243 Stockham G-512 G-515

J. Butterfly Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:

The following are model numbers for wafer-type, with nickel-plated ductile-iron disc:

MANUFACTURER LEVER GEAR Center Line Series A Series A Crane 12 12 Grinnell WC-8209-7 WC-8202-7 Powell 1011-DA1 1011-DA1 Stockham LG512-DS3E LG-522-DS3E Watts BF-04-111-11 BF-04-111-12

The following are model numbers for lug-type, with nickel-plated ductile-iron disc:

MANUFACTURER LEVER GEAR Center Line Series LT Series LT Crane 14 14

Grinnell LC-8209-7 LC-8202-7 Powell 5011-DA1 5011-DA1 Stockham LG-712-DS3E LG-722-DS3E Watts BF-03-111-11 BF-03-111-12

K. Swing Check Valves - 2 Inches and Smaller:

CLASS 125 CLASS 150

THREADED SOLDER THREADED MANUFACTURER ENDS ENDS ENDS


Crane 37 1342 137 Grinnell 3300 3300SJ 3320 Jenkins 92-A 1222 92-A Lunkenheimer 2144 2145 230-70 Milwaukee 509 1509 510 Powell 578 1825 596 Stockham B-319 B-309 B-321

L. Swing Check Valves - 2-1/2 Inches and Larger:

MANUFACTURER CLASS 125 CLASS 175 Crane 373 x Grinnell 6300A x Jenkins x 729 Kennedy x FIG. 126 Lunkenheimer 1790 IBBM x Milwaukee F2974 x Nibco F-918 x Powell 559 x Stockham G-931 G-940

x means not available.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15135 - 1 of 4 METERS AND GAGES

SECTION 15135 METERS AND GAGES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following types of meters and gages:

1. Temperature gages and fittings. 2. Pressure gages and fittings. 3. Flow meters.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of meter and gage. Include scale range, ratings, and calibrated performance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gage schedule showing manufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter and gage.


A. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters and gages. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Mercury-In-Glass Thermometers:

a. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. b. Trerice (H.O.) Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.


2. Direct-Mount Filled-System Dial Thermometers: a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries/Instrument Div. b. Marsh Instrument Co., Unit of General Signal. c. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

3. Remote-Reading Filled-System Dial Thermometers:

a. Ametek, U.S. Gauge Div. b. Ashcroft Dresser Industries/Instrument Div. c. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

4. Bimetal Dial Thermometers:

a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries/Instrument Div. b. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. c. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

5. Thermometer Wells: Same as for thermometers.

6. Insertion Dial Thermometers:

a. Ashcroft Dresser Industries/Instrument Div. b. Trerice (H.O.) Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

7. Pressure Gages:

a. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc. b. Trerice (H.O.) Co. c. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

8. Pressure Gage Accessories: Same as for pressure gages.

9. Test Plugs:

a. MG Piping Products Co. b. Peterson Equipment Co., Inc.

2.02 THERMOMETERS, GENERAL

A. Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division of maximum of 1.0 percent of range span.

B. Scale range: Temperature ranges for services listed as follows:

1. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 240 deg with 2-degree scale divisions (0 to 115 deg C

with 1-degree scale divisions). 2. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38

deg C with 1-degree scale divisions). 3. Chilled Water: 0 to 100 deg F with 2-degree scale divisions (minus 18 to 38 deg C

with 1-degree scale divisions). 2.03 MERCURY-IN-GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. Case: Die cast, aluminum finished, in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 inches long.


B. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180-degree adjustment in vertical plan, 360-

degree adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

C. Tube: Red reading, mercury filled, magnifying lens.

D. Scale: Satin-faced, non-reflective aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

E. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

2.04 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. Thermometer Wells: Brass or stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping system design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap.

2.05 PRESSURE GAGES

A. Type: General use, ASME B40.1, Grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon-tube type, bottom connection.

B. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4-1/2-inches diameter.

C. Connector: Brass, 1/4-inch NPS.

D. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

E. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span.

F. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Vacuum: 30 inches Hg to 15 psi. 2. All fluids: 2 times operating pressure.

2.06 PRESSURE GAGE ACCESSORIES

A. Syphon: 1/4-inch NPS straight coil constructed of brass tubing with threads on each end.

B. Snubber: 1/4-inch NPS brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous metal disc. Disc

material shall be suitable for fluid served and rated pressure. 2.07 TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plugs shall be nickel-plated brass body, with 1/2-inch NPS fitting and 2 self-sealing valve-type core inserts, suitable for inserting a 1/8-inch O.D. probe assembly from a dial-type thermometer or pressure gage. Test plug shall have gasketed and threaded cap with retention chain and body of length to extend beyond insulation. Pressure rating shall be 500 psig.


B. Ranges of pressure gage and thermometers shall be approximately 2 times systems operating conditions.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 THERMOMETERS INSTALLATION

A. Install thermometers in vertical and tilted positions to allow reading by observer standing on floor.

B. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. 2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air-handling units.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where thermometers are indicated, but its

provision is not required in vertical position. Fill well with oil or graphite and secure cap. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAGES

A. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage valve, located on pipe at most readable position.

B. Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:

1. At suction and discharge of each pump. 2. At discharge of each pressure-reducing valve. 3. At building water service entrance.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF TEST PLUGS

A. Test Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.


A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility.

B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces. Replace cracked and broken windows, and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15140 - 1 of 4 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

SECTION 15140

SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawing and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This section includes the following:

1. Horizontal-piping hangers and supports. 2. Vertical-piping clamps. 3. Hanger-rod attachments. 4. Building attachments. 5. Saddles and shields. 6. Spring hangers and supports. 7. Miscellaneous materials. 8. Equipment supports.

B. Related sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this

section:

1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Control" for vibration-isolation hangers and supports. 2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for pipe insulation.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data, including installation instructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.

C. Maintenance data for supports and anchors for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance

Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements@.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to product


materials and installation of supports and anchors.

B. NFPA Compliance: Hangers and supports shall comply with NFPA standard No. 13 when used as a component of a fire protection system.

C. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components shall be listed and

labeled by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Hangers and support components shall be factory fabricated of materials, design, and manufacturer complying with MSS SP-58.

1. Components shall have galvanized coatings where installed for piping and

equipment that will not have field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments shall have nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36.

B. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix ratio shall be 1.0 part cement to 3.0 parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement and hydration.

C. Pipe Alignment Guides: Factory fabricated, of cast semisteel or heavy fabricated steel,

consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guiding spider that bolts tightly to pipe. Length of guides shall be as recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.


A. Examine substrates and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed with installing until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properly from building structure; comply with MSS SP-69 and SP-89. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for


smaller diameter pipe as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

B. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten insert to forms. Where concrete with compressive strength less than 2,500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

C. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,

washers, and other accessories.

D. Field-Fabricated, Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS D-1.1.

E. Support fire protection systems piping independently from other piping systems.

F. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, to permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

G. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

H. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 Building Services Piping Code is not exceeded.

I. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9.

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Shields: Install protective shields MSS Type 40 on cold piping that has vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees and shall have dimensions in inches not less than the following:

NPS LENGTH THICKNESS

1/4 THROUGH 3-1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 & 6 18 0.060

4. Insert material shall be at least as long as the protective shield.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ASME B31.9 and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected


equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS Standards D1.1.

3.04 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for piping and equipment.

3.05 METAL FABRICATION

A. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe anchors and equipment supports. Install and align fabricated anchors in indicated locations.

B. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that

cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, appearance and quality of welds made, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and

corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no

roughness shows after finishing, and so that contours welded surfaces to match adjacent contours.

3.06 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection of anchors and supports, clean field

welds and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA-1 requirements for touch-up of field-painted surfaces.

1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15190 - 1 of 6 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 15190 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. This section is Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is part

of each Division-15 section making reference to identification devices specified herein. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other Division-15 sections.

B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Painted Identification Materials. 2. Plastic Pipe Markers. 3. Plastic Tape. 4. Underground-Type Plastic Line Marker. 5. Valve Tags. 6. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs. 7. Plastic Equipment Markers.

C. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified

as part of equipment assembly in other Division-15 sections.

D. Refer to Division-16 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,

colors, and viewing angles of identification devices. 1.04 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identification materials of one of the following:

1. Allen Systems, Inc. 2. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.02 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division-15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.

2.03 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with letter sizes generally complying with recommendations of ANSI A13.1 for piping and similar applications, but not less than 1-1/4" high letters for ductwork and not less than 3/4" high letters for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

B. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise

indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

C. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel colors indicated or, if not indicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.

PIPE IDENTIFICATION CHART

Symbol

Pipe Color

Marker Background Color

CW

(Domestic) Cold Water Light Green

Green

HWS

(Domestic) Hot Water Orange

Orange

RWL

Rain Water Leader Brown

Brown

SD

Storm Drainage Brown

Brown

SAN

Sanitary Waste Brown

White


CD Condensate Drain Black White VTR

Vent Thru Roof Beige

White

F

Fire Protection Red

Red

SW

Safewaste Beige

White

RL

Refrigerant Liquid Green

Green

RS

Refrigerant Suction Green

Green

IW

Indirect Waste Yellow

Black

P&T

Blow-Off Water Relief Yellow

Black

2.04 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on, color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Pressure-Sensitive Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, permanent

adhesive, color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any), provide

full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods:

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. 2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. 3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than

3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2".

D. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods:

1. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation). 2. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than

1-1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3". 3. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's

standard stainless steel bands.

E. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature which best describes piping system in each instance, as selected by Architect/Engineer in cases of variance with name as shown or specified.

F. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown,

and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length.


1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separate unit of plastic.

2.05 PLASTIC TAPE

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard color-coded pressure-sensitive (self-adhesive) vinyl tape, not less than 3 mils thick.

B. Width: Provide 1-1/2" wide tape markers on pipes with outside diameters (including

insulation, if any) of less than 6", 2-1/2" wide tape for larger pipes.

C. Color: Comply with ANSI A13.1, except where another color selection is indicated. 2.06 UNDERGROUND-TYPE PLASTIC LINE MARKERS

A. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates type of service of buried pipe. 1. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between 2-layers of

plastic tape. 2.07 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gage polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener.

1. Provide 1-1/2" diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

2.08 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/16", except as otherwise indicated. C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 2.09 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color coded equipment markers. Conform to the following color code:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components. 2. Red: Fire protection equipment. 3. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.02 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:

1. All mechanically exposed pipes shall be painted. 2. Stenciled markers, including color-coded background band or rectangle, and

contrasting lettering of black or white. Extend color band or rectangle 2" beyond ends of lettering.

3. Stenciled markers, with lettering color complying with ANSI A13.1. 4. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in this

section. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

5. Stenciled markers, black or white for best contrast, wherever continuous color-coded painting of piping is provided.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view in

occupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations.

1. Near each valve and control device. 2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark

each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern. 3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enter

non-accessible enclosures. 4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points which permit view of

concealed piping. 5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. 6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50' along each piping run, except

reduce spacing to 25' in congested areas of piping and equipment. 7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced

markers. 3.03 UNDERGROUND PIPING IDENTIFICATION

A. General: During back-filling/top-soiling of each exterior underground piping systems, install continuous underground-type plastic line marker, located directly over buried line at 6" to 8" below finished grade. Where multiple small lines are buried in common trench and do not exceed overall width of 16", install single line marker. For tile fields and similar installations, mark only edge pipe lines of field.


3.04 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures, terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

3.05 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices:

1. Pumps. 2. Fans, blowers, and mixing boxes. 3. HVAC units.

B. Sign to carry the equipment initials and order number indicated on Contract Documents

(i.e. AHU-1, P-1, CU-1, etc.) unless other numbering system is indicated by the Owner. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15241 - 1 of 4 VIBRATION CONTROL

SECTION 15241 VIBRATION CONTROL PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division - 1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. This section is Division - 15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section, and is

part of each Division - 15 section making reference to vibration control products specified herein.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and/or specified in other Division-15 sections.

B. Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following:

1. Neoprene Pads. 2. Spring Isolators, Housed. 3. Inertia Base Frames. 4. Isolation Hangers. 5. Flexible Pipe Connectors.

C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants,

gaskets, and other work related to vibration control work.

D. Refer to other Division-15 sections for requirements of duct connections to air handling equipment isolated on vibration control products.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration control products, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

1. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single

manufacturer. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instruction for each type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, and location for each product furnished.



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vibration control products of one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Co. 2. Korfund Dynamics Corp. 3. Mason Industries, Inc. 4. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc. 5. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

2.02 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS

A. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness with cross-ribbed or waffled pattern.

B. Spring Isolator, Housed: Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation

spring between telescoping steel housings with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bonded to bottom of loading plate. Include resilient inserts to separate and guide telescoping housings.

1. Equip top loading plate with equipment anchorages as indicted or as required for

support and attachment. 2. Include pad-type isolator bonded to top of top loading plate, except on units with

leveling bolts. 3. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit to substrate.

C. Inertia Base Frames: Where inertia bases are indicated for use with isolation units to

support equipment, provide rectangular structural beam channel, or complete sheet metal box concrete forms for floating foundations, with materials complying with ASTM A35. Frame unit with minimum depth of 0.08 x longest dimension of base, but no less than 6" deep. Size frame so that weight of frame plus concrete fill will be greater than operating weight of equipment supported. Provide steel reinforcing both ways with both ends of reinforcing butt welded to base framing.

1. Provide welded support brackets at points indicated, and anchor base frame to

spring isolator units.

D. Isolation Hangers: Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standard compression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading of units. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 15 degrees off center in any direction before contacting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, and including acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.

1. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap in lower part of hanger and rubber

hanger element in top, securely retained in unit.


E. Flexible Pipe Connectors:

1. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braid with NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS

A. General: Comply with minimum static deflections recommended by ASHRAE, for selecting and application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with

manufacturer's recommendations for selection and application of vibration isolation materials and units.

3.03 APPLICATIONS

A. Piping: For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, install isolation hangers for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 4" and less, for first 4 points of support for sizes 5" through 8".

B. Air Handling Units: Mount air handling units on housed spring isolators sitting on

neoprene pads. Provide flexible hoses for piping connections.

C. Pumps: Provide inertia bases with steel frames on housed spring isolators sitting on neoprene pads. Provide flexible hoses on suction and discharge connections to pumps.

3.04 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are short-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similar devices intended for temporary support during installation.

B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and to

prevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim units as required where substrate in not level.

D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 1"

clearance below base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported


equipment has been installed and loaded for operation.

E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints wherever thrust exceeds 10% of equipment weight.

F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.

G. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally and

parallel to equipment shafts wherever possible. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is no dirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit unit isolation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15250 - 1 of 5 MECHANICAL INSULATION

SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this

section. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Piping System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass. b. Flexible Unicellular.

2. Ductwork System Insulation:

a. Fiberglass.

C. Refer to Division-15 section "Supports and Anchors" for protection saddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Division-15 section "Mechanical Identification" for installation of identification

devices for piping, ductwork, and equipment; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanical insulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical insulation (insulation, jackets,

coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame spread index of 75 and

smoke developed index of 150. 1.04 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product number, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical system requiring insulation.


A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers with manufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not

install damaged or wet insulation; do not allow installed insulation to become wet; remove from project site.


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Manville Products Corp. 3. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp. 4. Rubatex Corp.

2.02 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Flexible Unicellular Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I.

C. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for piping with temperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type I may be used for all piping at Installers option.

1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece pre-molded PVC fitting covers,

fastened as per manufacturer's recommendations.

D. Staples, Bands, and Wires: As recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Adhesives, Sealers, and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation

manufacturer for applications indicated. 2.03 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1.

B. Flexible Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I, Class B-4.


C. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I for ductwork with temperatures

below ambient.

D. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, corner angles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

E. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,

protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except for handicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance caulks, flow regulators, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

B. Cold Piping:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:

a. Potable water piping in EWC. b. Condensate drain from A/C units and drain from water coolers. c. Stacks, waste pipes, and hub of floor drains serving the mechanical rooms.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with the following type and thickness

of insulation: a. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thickness.

C. Hot Piping and Rain Water Leaders:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:

a. Potable hot water piping. b. Rain water leaders in ceiling plenums or M.E.R.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and

thicknesses of insulation: a. Fiberglass: 1" thick for pipe sizes up to and including 6".

3.03 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Piping (30 deg. F (4.4 deg. C) to ambient):


1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:

a. HVAC refrigerant suction piping above and below ground. b. Air conditioner condensate drain piping, see Item 3.02 B.

B. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types and

thicknesses of insulation:

1. Flexible Unicellular: 1/2" thick for pipe sizes up to 2" (largest size permitted). (Condensate drain).

2. Flexible Unicellular: 1" thick for pipe sizes 1" or less; 1-1/2" thick for pipe sizes over 1". (Refrigerant suction piping).

C. Weather exposed and pipe insulation to be covered as follows:

1. Paint all flexible unicellular insulation with two (2) coats of UV resistant, white Latex

paint. 3.04 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Cold Ductwork (Below Ambient Temperature):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold ductwork: a. Outdoor air intake ductwork between air entrance and fan inlet or HVAC unit

inlet. b. HVAC supply ductwork between fan discharge, or HVAC unit discharge, and

room terminal outlet. c. Insulate neck and bells of supply diffusers.

2. HVAC return ductwork between room terminal inlet and return fan inlet, or HVAC

unit inlet.

3. HVAC plenums and unit housings.

B. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types and thicknesses of insulation:

1. Rigid Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick, increase thickness to 2" in machine, fan and

equipment rooms. 2. Flexible Fiberglass: 1-1/2" thick, application limited to concealed locations.

3.05 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to painting, testing, and acceptance of

tests.


C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run of piping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use cut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to

ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to prevent puncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness

and composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar piping

penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For cold piping apply wet coat of vapor barrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3" wide vapor barrier tape or band.

3.06 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves its intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent

puncture and other damage.

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductwork penetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15300 - 1 of 8 FIRE PROTECTION

SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. The requirements of the following Division-15 Sections apply to this Section:

1. Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Supports and Anchors. 4. Mechanical Identification.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies automatic sprinkler systems for buildings and structures. Materials and equipment specified in this Section include:

1. Pipe, fittings, valves, and specialties. 2. Sprinklers, and accessories.

B. Products furnished but not installed include sprinkler head cabinet with spare sprinkler

heads. Furnish to the Owner's maintenance personnel.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Division-10 Section "Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets, and Accessories" for fire

extinguishers and extinguisher cabinets.

2. Division-15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of fire protection piping system and components.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Pipe sizes used in this Specification are Nominal Pipe Size (NPS).

B. Other definitions for fire protection systems are listed in NFPA Standards 13, 14, and 24.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection specialty, and fire department connection, specified.


C. Shop Drawings prepared in accordance with NFPA 13 identified as "Working Plans@,

including hydraulic calculations where applicable, and which have been approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

D. Maintenance Data for each type sprinkler head, valve, piping specialty, fire protection

specialty, fire department connection, hose and rack, and hose cabinet specified, for inclusion in operating and maintenance manual specified in Division 1 and Division-15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements@.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installation and alterations of fire protection piping, equipment, specialties, and accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified means licensed to perform, and experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with all precautions required, and has complied with all the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.

B. Qualifications for Welding Processes and Operators: Comply with the requirements of

AWS D10.9, Specifications for Qualifications of Welding Procedures and Welders for Piping and Tubing, Level AR-3".

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following codes:

1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. 2. NFPA 14 - Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. 3. NFPA 1961 - Standard for Fire Hose. 4. NFPA 1963 - Screw Threads and Gaskets for Fire Hose Connections. 5. UL and FM Compliance: Fire protection system materials and components shall be

Underwriter's Laboratories listed and labeled, and Factory Mutual approved for the application anticipated.

1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule rough-in installations with installations of other building components. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Valve Wrenches: Furnish to Owner, 2 valve wrenches for each type of sprinkler head installed.

B. Sprinkler Heads and Cabinets: Furnish extra sprinkler heads of each style included in

the project. Furnish each style with its own sprinkler head cabinet and special wrenches as specified in this Section.



A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire protection system products from one of the following:

1. Gate Valves:

a. Fairbanks b. Jenkins c. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. d. Stockham

2. Swing Check Valves:

a. Fairbanks b. Jenkins c. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. d. Stockham

3. Grooved Mechanical Couplings:

a. Stockham b. Victaulic Company of America

4. Water Flow Indicators:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Victaulic Company of America c. Viking Corp.

5. Water-Motor Gongs:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Viking Corp.

6. Detector Check Valves:

a. Ames Company, Inc. b. Kennedy Valve, Div of ITT Grinnell Valve Co., Inc. c. Victaulic Company of America

7. Alarm Check Valve:

a. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. Star Sprinkler Corp. c. Viking Corp.

8. Fire Department Connection Valve:

a. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

9. Sprinkler Heads: a. Guardian Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. b. ITT Grinnell c. Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc. d. Viking Corp.

2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3 Article "PIPE APPLICATIONS" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.


B. Ductile Iron Pipe: ANSI A21.51, wall thickness Class 2 per ANSI A21.50/AWWA 150

with Class 250 mechanical joints per ANSI 21.11/AWWA C111, Cement-mortar lined per ANSI A21.4/AWWA C104.

C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, seamless, black or galvanized steel pipe, plain,

threaded or grooved ends, and Schedule 10, seamless black steel pipe, plain or grooved ends.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ANSI B16.3, Class 300, standard pattern, for threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ANSI B1.20.1.

B. Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234, seamless or welded, for welded joints.

C. Grooved Mechanical Fittings: ASTM A 536, Grade 65-45-12 ductile iron; ASTM A 47

Grade 32510 malleable iron; or ASTM A53, Type F or Types E or S, Grade B fabricated steel fittings with grooves or shoulders designed to accept grooved end couplings.

D. Grooved Mechanical Couplings: consist of ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic

rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design; with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure roll-grooved pipe and fittings.

2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

B. Gasket Materials: thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid or gas to be handled,

and design temperatures and pressures. 2.05 GENERAL DUTY VALVES

A. Gate Valves - 2 Inch and Smaller: body and bonnet of cast bronze, 175 pound cold water working pressure - non-shock, threaded ends, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, rising stem, screw-in bonnet, and malleable iron handwheel. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.

B. Gate Valves - 2-1/2 Inch and Larger: iron body; bronze mounted, 175 pound cold water

working pressure - non-shock. Valves shall have solid taper wedge; outside screw and yoke, rising stem; flanged bonnet, with body and bonnet conforming to ASTM A 126 Class B; replaceable bronze wedge facing rings; flanged ends; and a packing assembly consisting of a cast iron gland flange, brass gland, packing, bonnet, and bronze bonnet bushing. Valves shall be capable of being repacked under pressure, with valve wide open.

C. Swing Check Valves: MSS SP-71; Class 175, cast iron body and bolted cap conforming

to ASTM A 126, Class B; horizontal swing, with a bronze disc or cast iron disc with bronze disc ring, and flanged ends. Valve shall be capable of being refitted while the valve remains in the line.


2.06 SPECIALTY VALVES

A. Alarm Check Valve: 175 psig working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical installations, and have cast iron, flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with "O" ring seals, single hinge pin and latch design. Provide trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure gages, precision retarding chamber, drip cup assembly piped with check valve to main drain line, and fill line attachment with strainer.

B. Detector Check Valves: Galvanized cast iron body, with a bolted cover with air bleed

device for access to internal parts; 175 psig working pressure. One piece bronze disc with bronze bushings, pivot and replaceable seat. Provide threaded bypass taps in the inlet and outlet for bypass meter connection. Valve shall be set to allow minimal water flow through the bypass meter; when major water flow is required, the water pressure will fully open the clapper.

2.07 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLERS

A. Sprinkler Heads: fusible link type, and style as indicated or required by the application. Unless otherwise indicated, provide heads with nominal 1/2 inch discharge orifice, for 165oF temperature range. Heads shall be Grinnell Corporation Universal Model AA@, Universal Model A/Q-71, or equal.

B. Sprinkler Head Finishes: Provide heads with the following finishes:

1. Upright, Pendant, and Sidewall Styles: chrome plated in finish spaces, exposed to

view; rough bronze finish for heads in unfinished spaces and not exposed to view. 2. Concealed Style: rough brass, with factory painted cover plate to match ceiling

color.

C. Sprinkler Head Cabinet and Wrench: finished steel cabinet, suitable for wall mounting, with hinged cover and space for six (6) spare sprinkler heads plus sprinkler head wrenches. Provide a separate cabinet for each style sprinkler head on the project.

2.08 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Wall Type Siamese Connections: polished cast brass, flush wall type, with wall escutcheon and two-way connections. Connection sizes shall be 4 inch outlet and two 2-1/2 inch female inlets, having NH standard threads, for the connection size indicated, as specified in NFPA 1963. Each inlet shall have a clapper valve, and plug and chain. Unit shall have wall escutcheon of cast brass, finish to match connections, with words or "AUTO SPKR - FIRE DEPT CONNECTION@, or in raised letters.

2.09 FIRE SIAMESE

A. Fire Department siamese inlets shall be sidewalk type, cast brass with clappers, consisting of angle body, plate branded AAUTO SPRINKLER & STANDPIPE FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION@, hex brass adapter fittings with 2-1/2" female N.P.T. x 2-1/2" pin lug swivel female N.S.T. hose thread, and two plugs with chains. Finish to be chrome plated.


B. Connection shall be a minimum of 30", but not more than 36" above finished grade.

C. Size shall be 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 6". 2.10 INDICATOR POST

A. Cast iron body and cap, anti-condensation type.

B. Visual valve position indicator with plexiglass window and bronze frame.

C. Factory or field installed tamper/monitoring switch. 2.11 ALARM DEVICES

A. General: Types and sizes shall mate and match piping and equipment connections.

B. Water Flow Indicators: vane type waterflow detector, rated to 250 psig; designed for horizontal or vertical installation; have 2-SPDT circuit switches to provide isolated alarm and auxiliary contacts, 7 ampere 125 volts AC and 0.25 ampere 24 Volts DC; complete with factory-set, field-adjustable retard element to prevent false signals, and tamper-proof cover which sends a signal when cover is removed.

C. Supervisory Switches: SPST, normally closed contacts, designed to signal valve in

other than full open position. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Install Schedule 40 steel pipe with threaded joints and fittings for 2 inches and smaller, and with welded joints for 2-1/2 inches and larger.

B. Install Schedule 10 steel pipe with welded joints or roll-grooved ends and grooved

mechanical couplings, 2-1/2 inches and larger. 3.02 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

B. Install sprinkler piping to provide for system drainage in accordance with NFPA 13.

C. Use approved fittings to make all changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and

reductions in pipe sizes.

C. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve. Unions are not required on flanged devices or in piping installations using grooved mechanical couplings.

D. Install flanges or flange adaptors on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2-1/2 inch


and larger connections.

E. Hangers and Supports: Comply with the requirements of NFPA 13 and NFPA 14. Hanger and support spacing and locations for piping joined with grooved mechanical couplings shall be in accordance with the grooved mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions, for rigid systems. Provide protection from damage where subject to earthquake in accordance with NFPA 13.

F. Make connections between underground and above-ground piping using an approved

transition piece strapped or fastened to prevent separation.

G. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetrations in foundation walls. Refer to Division 15 Section "Basic Piping Materials and Methods."

H. Install test connections sized and located in accordance with NFPA 13 complete with

shutoff valve. Test connections may also serve as drain pipes.

I. Install pressure gage at each roof manifold and on the riser or feed main at or near each test connection. Provide gage with a connection not less than 1/4 inch and having a soft metal seated globe valve, arranged for draining pipe between gage and valve. Install gages to permit removal, and where they will not be subject to freezing.

3.03 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Welded Joints: AWS D10.9, Level AR-3.

B. Threaded Joints: conform to ANSI B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field cut threads. Join pipe, fittings, and valves as follows:

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal

seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint. 2. Align threads at point of assembly. 3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. 4. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on valves place

the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. 5. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged.

If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

C. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt

tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.

D. Mechanical Grooved Joints: cut or roll grooves on pipe ends dimensionally compatible

with the couplings.

E. End Treatment: After cutting pipe lengths, remove burrs and fins from pipe ends. 3.04 VALVE INSTALLATIONS


A. General: Install fire protection specialty valves, fittings, and specialties in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, NFPA 13 and 14, and the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Gate Valves: Install supervised-open gate valves so located to control all sources of

water supply except fire department connections. Where there is more than one control valve, provide permanently marked identification signs indicating the portion of the system controlled by each valve. Refer to Division-15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for valve tags and signs.

C. Install check valves in each water supply connection.

D. Alarm Check Valves: Install valves in the vertical position, in proper direction of flow

including the bypass check valve and retard chamber drain line connection. Install valve trim in accordance with the valve manufacturer's appropriate trim diagram. Test valve for proper operation.

E. Detector Check Valves: Install in proper direction of flow in a location to detect system

leakage and unauthorized use of water, and to prevent backflow into public water mains. Install bypass meter, with gate valves on each side of the meter to permit meter removal, and check valve downstream from the meter.

3.05 SPRINKLER HEAD INSTALLATIONS

A. Use proper tools to prevent damage during installations. 3.06 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATIONS

A. Install automatic drip valves at the check valve on the fire department connection to the mains.

B. Install mechanical sleeve seal at pipe penetration in outside walls.


A. Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler piping systems in accordance with NFPA 13.

B. Replace piping system components which do not pass the test procedures specified, and retest repaired portion of the system.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15411 - 1 of 10 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING

SECTION 15411 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements@. 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods@. 3. "Basic Piping Materials and Methods@. 4. "Supports and Anchors@.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes potable cold water, piping, fittings, and specialties within the building to a point 5 feet outside the building.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this

section.

1. Division 2 Section "Potable Water Systems" for water service piping (which connects the "Water Distribution Piping".

2. Division 2 Section "Earthwork" for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for underground piping installations.

3. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Identification" for labeling and identification of piping system.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each piping specialty and valve specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the provisions of the following codes:

1. ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME label.


A. Store pipe in a manner to prevent sagging and bending.



A. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Maintenance Stock: Furnish one valve key for each key-operated hose bibb, fixture supply, or faucet installed.



1. Basket Strainers:

a. Jones Manufacturing b. Josam Co. c. Spirax Sarco, Inc.

2. Balance Cocks:

a. Hammond Valve Corp. b. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc. c. Nibco, Inc.

3. Hose Bibbs:

a. Jones Manufacturing b. Nibco, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.

4. Backflow Preventers:

a. Cla-Val Co. b. Watts Regulator Co.

5. Pressure-Regulating Valves:

a. Cla-Val Co. b. ITT Bell and Gossett c. Watts Regulator Co.

6. Relief Valves:

a. Cash (A.W.) Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Watts Regulator Co. c. Zurn Industries, Inc. Wilkins Regulator Div.

7. Water Hammer Arresters:

a. Jones Manufacturing b. Josam Co. c. Wade Div., Tyler Pipe


8. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings For Grooved-End Steel Pipe: a. Grinnell Corp. b. Stockham Valves & Fittings, Inc. c. Victaulic Co. of America

9. Mechanical Couplings and Fittings For Grooved-End Copper Tube:

a. Victaulic Co. of America

10. Vacuum Breakers For Hose Connections: a. Cash (A.W.) Valve Mfg. Corp. b. Conbraco Industries, Inc. c. Watts Regulator Co.

2.02 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Pipe and Tube: Refer to Part 3, Article "Application, General," for identification of systems where the below materials are used.

B. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L Water Tube, drawn temper.

C. Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type K Water Tube, annealed temper.

2.03 FITTINGS

A. Wrought Copper Solder-Joint Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern.

B. Wrought Copper and Bronze Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 Tube and ASTM B 584 Bronze Castings.

C. Galvanized Cast-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard pattern, for

threaded joints. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

D. Mechanical Couplings For Grooved-End Piping: Ductile or malleable iron housing, a synthetic rubber gasket of a central cavity pressure-responsive design, with nuts, bolts, locking pin, locking toggle, or lugs to secure grooved pipe or tube and fittings.

E. Unions: ASME B16.39, malleable iron, Class 150, hexagonal stock, with

ball-and-socket joints, metal-to- metal bronze seating surfaces, female threaded ends. Threads shall conform to ASME B1.20.1.

F. Dielectric Unions: Threaded, solder, or grooved-end connections as required to suit

application; constructed to isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and prevent corrosion.

2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Solder Filler Metal: Lead-free silver alloy.

B. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled at design temperatures and pressures.


2.05 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES

A. General-duty valves (i.e., gate, globe, check, ball, and butterfly valves) are specified in Division 15 Section "Valves." Special duty valves are specified below by their generic name; refer to Part 3 Article "Valve Application" for specific uses and applications for each valve specified.

2.06 SPECIAL DUTY VALVES

A. Balance Cocks: 400 PSI WOG, 2 piece, ball valve, handle, memory stop, with threaded-end connections conforming to ASME B1.20.1.

2.07 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Water Hammer Arresters: Bellows type, with stainless steel casing and bellows, pressure rated for 250 psi, sized, tested and certified in accordance with PDI Standard WH-201.

B. Basket Strainers: Cast-iron body, 125 psi flanges, bolted-type or yoke-type cover with

removable noncorrosive perforated strainer basket having 1/8-inch perforations and lift-out handle.

C. Hose Connections: Hose connections shall have garden hose thread outlets

conforming to ASME B1.20.7.

D. Hydrants: In recessed stainless steel box with locking bronze body, 3/4-inch solder inlet, hose outlet, stainless steel cover. Vacuum breaker, backflow preventer, key handle.

E. Vacuum Breakers: Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard

1011, with finish to match hose connection.

F. Backflow Preventers: Reduced-pressure-principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve located between 2 positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013.

G. Pressure-Regulating Valves: Single-seated, direct- operated type, having bronze body with integral strainer and complying with requirements of ASSE Standard 1003. Select proper size for maximum flow rate and inlet and outlet pressures indicated.

H. Relief Valves: Sizes for relief valves shall be in accordance with ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Codes for indicated capacity of the appliance for which installed.

1. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat, complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Temperature relief valves shall be factory set at 210 deg F, and pressure relief at 150 psi.



A. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment with water connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Install Type L, drawn copper tube with wrought copper fittings and solder joints for pipe sizes 6 inches and smaller, above ground, within building. Install Type K, annealed temper copper tube for pipe sizes 4 inches and smaller, with minimum number of joints, below ground.

B. Water piping below ground at entry point to building in sizes 4 to 6 inches shall be

cement lined ductile iron with mechanical joints. 3.03 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and branch connections.

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not

permitted unless expressly indicated.

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below

grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view. F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent

elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1-inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulation

and servicing of valves.

H. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, 3/4-inch ball valve, and short 3/4-inch threaded nipple and cap.

I. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls with sleeves

and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inches shall be galvanized steel pipe; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be galvanized steel sheet metal.


J. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass though fire-rated walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors, maintain the fire-rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

K. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot (1/4 percent) downward slope towards drain point.

3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hanger, support, and anchor devices conforming to MSS SP-69 are specified in Division 15 Section "Supports and Anchors." Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:

B. Pipe Attachments: Install the following:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers, MSS Type 1, for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.

2. Adjustable roller hangers, MSS Type 43, and spring hangers, MSS Type 41 with Type 49, for individual horizontal runs 20 feet and longer.

3. Pipe roll, complete MSS Type 44 for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer, support on a trapeze.

4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

C. Install hangers for horizontal piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:

Nom. Pipe Size - In.

Steel Pipe

Max. Span - Ft. Copper Tube

Max. Span - Ft. Min. Rod Dia. - In.

Up to 3/4

7 5 3/8

1

7 6 3/8

1-1/4

7 7 3/8

1-1/2

9 8 3/8

2

10 8 3/8

2-1/2

11 9 1/2

3

12 10 1/2

3-1/2

13 11 1/2

4

14 12 5/8 (1/2 for copper)

5

16 13 5/8 (1/2 for copper)

6

17 14 3/4 (1/2 for copper)

8

19 16 7/8 (1/2 for copper)

D. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.


3.05 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Soldered Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Soldering Manual@.

B. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual."

1. CAUTION: Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal

parts of piping specialties before soldering and brazing. 2. Fill the tubing and fittings during soldering and brazing with an inert gas (nitrogen or

carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale. 3. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature.

C. Threaded Joints: Conform to ASME B1.20.1, tapered pipe threads for field-cut threads.

Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:

1. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

2. Align threads at point of assembly.

3. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads (except

where dry seal threading is specified).

4. Assemble joint wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded. a. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with corroded or damaged threads. If a

weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

D. Flanged Joints: Align flange surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt

tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

E. Grooved-End Joints: Prepare pipe and tubing and install in accordance with

manufacturer's installation instructions. 3.06 SERVICE ENTRANCE

A. Extend water distribution piping to connect to water service piping, of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Water service piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.

B. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at penetrations through foundation wall for

watertight installation.

C. Install shutoff valve at service entrance inside building; complete with strainer, pressure gage, and test tee with valve.


3.07 ROUGH-IN FOR WATER METER

A. Install rough-in piping and specialties for water meter installation in accordance with utility company's instructions and requirements.

3.08 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General-Duty Valve Applications: The Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following requirements apply:

1. Shut-off duty: Use gate, ball, and butterfly valves. 2. Throttling duty: Use globe, ball, and butterfly valves.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves on each branch and riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more plumbing fixtures or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated. For sectional valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet of each plumbing equipment item, on each

supply to each plumbing fixture, and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves on each plumbing equipment item, located to drain

equipment completely for service or repair. Install drain valves at the base of each riser, at low points of horizontal runs, and elsewhere as required to drain distribution piping system completely. For drain valves 2 inches and smaller, use gate or ball valves; for drain valves 2-1/2 inches and larger, use gate or butterfly valves.

D. Hydrants: Install on piping where indicated with vacuum breaker.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install backflow preventers at each connection to mechanical equipment and systems and in compliance with the plumbing code and authority having jurisdiction. Locate in same room as equipment being connected. Install air cap fitting and pipe relief outlet drain without valves to nearest floor drain.

B. Install pressure-regulating valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and balance cock

bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet. 3.11 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide hot and cold water piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but in no case smaller than required by plumbing code.


B. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot and cold water piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection; provide drain valve on drain connection. For connections 2-1/2 inches and larger, use flanges instead of unions.


A. Inspections: Inspect water distribution piping as follows:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved.

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Architect/Engineer at least 48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in the presence of the plumbing official.

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system before

concealed or closed in after system is roughed in and prior to setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection to observe the tests specified below and to ensure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

3. Reinspections: Whenever the piping system will not pass the test or inspection,

make the required corrections and arrange for reinspection.

B. Test water distribution piping as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced water distribution piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of 50 psig above the operating pressure without exceeding the pressure rating of the piping system materials. Isolate the test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired.

4. Repair all leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

5. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge all new water distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired prior to use.


2. Use the purging and disinfecting procedure proscribed by the authority having

jurisdiction or, in case a method is not prescribed by that authority, the procedure described in either AWWA C651, or AWWA C652, or as described below:

a. Flush the piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not

appear at the points of outlet. b. Fill the system or part thereof with a water/chlorine solution containing at

least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Isolate (valve off) the system or part thereof and allow to stand for 24 hours.

c. Drain the system or part thereof of the previous solution and refill with a water/chlorine solution containing at least 200 parts per million of chlorine and isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

d. Following the allowed standing time, flush the system with clean, potable water until chlorine does not remain in the water coming from the system.

1. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to the authority having

jurisdiction. Repeat the procedure if the biological examination made by the authority shows evidence of contamination.

B. Prepare reports for all purging and disinfecting activities.

3.14 COMMISSIONING

A. Fill the system.

B. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1. Close drain valve, hydrants, and hose bibbs. 2. Open valves to full open position. 3. Remove and clean strainers.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15420 - 1 of 9 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS

SECTION 15420 DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. Basic Mechanical Requirements. 2. Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. 3. Supports and Anchors.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes building sanitary and storm drainage and vent piping systems, including drains and drainage specialties.


section:

1. Division 2 Section "Earthwork," for trenching and backfilling materials and methods for underground piping installations.

2. Division 2 Section "Storm Sewage Systems," for storm water drainage piping beginning from 5' - 0" outside the building.

3. Division 2 Section "Sanitary Sewage System," for sanitary drainage piping beginning from 5' - 0" outside the building.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



1. Drainage piping specialties. 2. Floor drains. 3. Roof drains.


A. Regulatory Requirements: comply with the provisions of the following:

1. South Florida Building Code, Broward County Edition, 1999. 1.05 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof drains, flashing, and roof penetrations.


B. Coordinate flashing materials installation of roofing, waterproofing, and adjoining

substrate work.

C. Coordinate the installation of drains in poured-in- place concrete slabs, to include proper drain elevations, installation of flashing, and slope of slab to drains.

D. Coordinate with installation of sanitary and storm sewer systems as necessary to

interface building drains with drainage piping systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide drainage and vent systems from one of the following:

1. Drainage Piping Specialties, including backwater valves, expansion joints,

drains, trap primers, and vandal-proof vent caps:

a. Josam Mfg. Co. b. Smith (Jay R) Mfg. Co. c. Tyler Pipe; Subs. of Tyler Corp. d. Zurn Industries Inc; Hydromechanics Div.

2.02 ABOVE GROUND DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Hubless Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: CISPI Standard 301, Service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings, with neoprene gaskets conforming to CISPI Standard 310.

B. Copper DWV Pipe: ASTM B306

2.03 UNDERGROUND BUILDING DRAIN PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM A74, Extra-Heavy weight, hub-and-spigot soil pipe and fittings. Pipe and fittings shall have a heavy coating of coal tar varnish or asphaltum on both inside and outside surfaces.

1. Neoprene Compression Gaskets: ASTM C564.

2.04 DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Backwater Valves: Valve assembly shall be bronze fitted cast-iron, with bolted cover. Flapper shall provide a maximum 1/4 inch clearance between flapper and seat for air circulation. Valve ends shall suit piping material.

B. Trap Primers: Bronze body valve with automatic vacuum breaker, with 1/2 inch

connections matching piping system. Complying with ASSE 1018.


C. Cleanout Plugs: Cast-bronze or brass, threads complying with ANSI B2.1, countersunk head.

D. Floor Cleanouts: Cast-iron body and frame, with cleanout plug and adjustable round

top as follows:

1. Nickel-Bronze Top: Manufacturer's standard cast unit with the following patterns:

a. Exposed rim type, with recess to receive 1/8 inch thick resilient floor

finish. b. Exposed flush type, standard non-slip scored or abrasive finish.

E. Wall Cleanouts: Cast-iron body adaptable to pipe with cast-bronze or brass

cleanout plug; stainless steel cover including screws.

F. Flashing Flanges: Cast-iron watertight stack or wall sleeve with membrane flashing ring. Provide underdeck clamp and sleeve length as required.

G. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Cast-iron calking type roof coupling for cast-iron stacks,

cast-iron threaded type roof coupling for steel stacks, and cast-bronze stack flashing sleeve for copper tubing.

2.05 FLOOR DRAINS

A. Floor drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.

B. Floor Drain Type "FD" (Equipment rooms): Josam 30000-E or equal, cast-iron body and flashing collar with adjustable top, and tractor grate, with the following features:

1. Sediment bucket. 2. Adjustable extension. 3. Square top. 4. Vandal-proof top. 5. Flat bottom strainer. 6. Deep body. 7. Bottom outlet, inside caulk. 8. Trap primer connection.

C. Floor Drain Type "FD" (Toilet rooms): Josam 30000-S or equal, cast-iron body and

flashing collar with closure plug, nickel bronze adjustable strainer head with secured grate, with the following features:

1. Sediment bucket. 2. Hinged grate. 3. Heel-proof grate. 4. Trap primer connection. 5. Vandal-proof grate. 6. Square Top. 7. Bottom outlet, inside caulk.


2.06 ROOF DRAINS

A. Roof drain type designations and sizes are indicated on Drawings.

B. Roof Drain Type "RD": Josam Series 21000 or equal Cast-iron body and combined flashing collar and gravel stop, cast-iron dome, with the following features:

1. Underdeck clamp. 2. 1-1/2 inch Extension. 3. Sump receiver. 4. Expansion Joint. 5. Deep sump body. 6. Vandal-proof dome. 7. Bottom outlet, inside caulk.

C. Roof-Drain Type "PD": Josam Series 23000 or equal cast-iron body, flashing collar

with seepage openings, satin finish bronze top, with the following features:

1. Underdeck clamp 2. Extension 3. Sump receiver 4. Expansion joint 5. Bottom outlet, inside caulk.


A. Verify existing grades, inverts, utilities, obstacles, and topographical conditions prior to installations.

B. Examine rough-in requirements for plumbing fixtures and other equipment having

drain connections to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

C. Examine walls, floors, roof, and plumbing chases for suitable conditions where piping and specialties are to be installed.

D. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS - ABOVE GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING

A. Install hubless, service weight, cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for larger than 3 inch drainage and vent pipe.

3.03 PIPE APPLICATIONS - BELOW GROUND, WITHIN BUILDING

A. Install hub and spigot, extra-heavy weight cast-iron soil pipe and fittings with gasketed joints for 15 inches and under drainage pipe.


3.04 PIPE AND TUBE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Copper DWV Pipe: Joining and installation of Copper drainage pipe and fittings shall conform to AWS "Soldering Manual".

3.05 INSTALLATION

A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of the piping systems. Location and arrangement of piping layout take into account many design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

B. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

C. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are

not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

D. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper insulation applications.

E. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings,

below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

F. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements of the building. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

G. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.

H. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions,

ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

I. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate 45 degree

wyes, half-wyes, or long sweep quarter, sixth, eighth, or sixteenth bends. Sanitary tees or short quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where the change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical, except use long-turn tees where two fixtures are installed back to back and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. No change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees shall be made. Where different sizes of drainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size, standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

J. Install building drain pitched down at minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent)

for piping 2 1/2 inches and smaller, and 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 3 inches and larger.


K. Extend building drain to connect to sewer piping, of size and in location indicated for

service entrance to building. Sewer piping is specified in a separate section of Division 2.

L. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal through foundation wall for watertight

installation. 3.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hanger, supports, and anchors devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods". Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports:

B. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20

feet in length.

C. Install hangers at the following intervals:

MAX HORIZ SPACING MAX VERT SPACING PIPE MATERIAL IN FEET IN FEET

Cast-Iron Pipe 5 15

3.07 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Install backwater valves in sanitary building drain piping as indicated, and as required by the plumbing code. For interior installation, provide cleanout cover flush to floor centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service.

B. Above Ground Cleanouts: Install in above ground piping and building drain piping

as indicated, and:

1. as required by plumbing code; 2. at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees; 3. at minimum intervals of 50' for piping 4" and smaller and 100' for larger

piping; 4. at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.

C. Cleanouts Covers: Install floor and wall cleanout covers for concealed piping, types

as indicated.

D. Flashing Flanges: Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through waterproof membranes.

E. Vent Flashing Sleeves: Install on stacks passing through roof, secure over stack

flashing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


3.08 INSTALLATION OF FLOOR DRAINS

A. Install floor drains in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in locations indicated.

B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as indicated. Set

tops of drains flush with finished floor.

C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as listed below to provide proper slope to drain:

DEPRESSION IN INCHES RADIUS OF AREA DRAINED - FEET

1/2 5 3/4 10 1 15 1-1/4 20 1-1/2 25

D. Trap all drains connected to the sanitary sewer.

E. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and

adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated. F. Position drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

3.09 INSTALLATION OF TRAP PRIMERS

A. Install trap primers with piping pitched towards drain trap, minimum of 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). Adjust trap primer for proper flow.

3.10 INSTALLATION OF ROOF DRAINS

A. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, in accordance with the roof membrane manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between roof drain

and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

C. Position roof drains so that they are accessible and easy to maintain.

3.11 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated; but in no case smaller than required by the plumbing code.

B. Locate piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures

or drains.



A. Inspections:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been inspected and approved.

2. During the progress of the installation, notify the Architect/Engineer at least

48 hours prior to the time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in their presence.

a. Rough-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of the piping system

before concealed or closed-in after system is roughed-in, and prior to setting fixtures.

b. Final Inspection: Arrange for a final inspection official to observe the tests specified below and to insure compliance with the requirements of the plumbing code.

3. Re-inspections: Whenever the piping system fails to pass the test or

inspection, make the required corrections, and arrange for reinspection.

B. Piping System Test Test drainage and vent system in accordance with the procedures of the authority having jurisdiction, or in the absence of a published procedure, as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects all new drainage and vent piping systems and

parts of existing systems, which have been altered, extended or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test, complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested.

2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed all new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose all such work for testing, that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved.

3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain tile, test the piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems upon completion of the rough piping installation. Tightly close all openings in the piping system, and fill with water to the point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before the inspection starts, through completion of the inspection. Inspect all joints for leaks.

4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After the plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, their connections shall be tested and proved gas and water-tight. Plug the stack openings on the roof and building drain where it leaves the building, and introduce air into the system equal to a pressure of 1" water column. Use a "U" tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without the introduction of additional air throughout the period of inspection. Inspect all plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

5. Repair all leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.


6. Prepare reports for all tests and required corrective action. 3.13 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.

B. Clean drain strainers, domes, and traps. Remove dirt and debris. 3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protect drains during remainder of construction period, to avoid clogging with dirt and debris, and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or whenever work stops.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15440 - 1 of 9 PLUMBING FIXTURES

SECTION 15440 PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies plumbing fixtures and trim. The types of fixtures specified included the following:

1. Lavatories (including wheelchair type); 2. Water Closets; 3. Urinals; 4. Mop Basins; 5. Wall Mounted Water Coolers (including wheelchair type); 6. Faucets; 7. Flush Valves; 8. Fixture Supports (including wheelchair type); 9. Toilet Seats; 10. Fittings, Trim, and Accessories.


A. Codes and Standards: 1. ARI Standard 1010: "Drinking-Fountains and Self- Contained Mechanically-

Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers@. 2. UL Standard 399: "Drinking-Water Coolers@. 3. Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design (LEED).

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit Product Data and installation instructions for each fixture, faucet, specialties, accessories, and trim specified; clearly indicate rated capacities of selected models of water coolers.

C. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturers certification that no lead or lead

based solder has been used in the fabrication of electric water cooler's water ways or refrigeration equipment.


A. Store fixtures and trim in the manufacturer's original shipping containers. Do not stack containers or store in such a manner that may cause damage to the fixture or trim.


1.06 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULES

A. Schedule rough-in installations with the installation of other building components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with specified requirements, provide plumbing fixtures of one of the following:

1. Lavatories, Water Closets, Urinals:

a. Zurn. 2. Faucets:

a. Zurn.

3. Flush Valves: a. Zurn.

4. Water Closet Seats:

a. Eljer b. Forbes-Wright Industries, Inc.; Church Products. c. Sperzel Co. d. Zurn.

5. Water Coolers:

a. Haws b. Halsey-Taylor.

6. Service Sinks: a. Florestone b. Fiat.

7. Fixture Supports: a. Jones Manufacturing b. Josam Mfg. Co. c. Kohler Co. d. Zurn.

2.02 FIXTURES A. Lavatories: 1. Wall Hung LAV/HC LAV (LV-1):

a. White enameled cast iron, 20 inches x 18 inches, 3 holes, 4 inch centers, with lug holes for concealed carrier arms.


1) Hudson K-2867 by Kohler. 2) Bucknell 052-0198 by Eljer.

b. Cold Water Faucet: Provide a battery operated sensor faucet with an

integral four inch cover plate. The faucet incorporates an infrared convergence-type proximity sensor into the chrome plated cast brass spout. The faucet is to be furnished complete with sensor module, spout module and in-line filter, 4 "AA" batteries, a 0.5 gpm vandal resistant aerator and an inlet for 1/2"ball riser supply hose. Sensor range is factory set for optimum performance.

1) Z6915-F c. Trim: 1) Handi LAV-Guard Insulation kit 102/105 - White, by Truebro (lV-

1A only). 2) Handi-Shield Original Series - White, by Plumberex, Palm

Springs, CA. 3) Use manufacturer's vandal resistant fasteners. 4) Supply Pipe: 3/8" rigid riser with loose key control. By Mcguire or

accepted equivalent. 5) "P" Trap: Adjustable offset with tubing drain to wall, cleanout plug

and wall escutcheon. By Mcguire or accepted equivalent. 6) Grid Drain: Perforated, chrome plated, 1-1/4" offset tailpiece. By

Mcguire or accepted equivalent. 7) Floor Mounted Carrier Arms: Josam 17100-m-628 or accepted

equivalent. 2. Countertop Mounted LAV/HC LAV (LV-1A): a. White enameled cast iron, 19 inches x 16 inches, self-rimming, 4 inch

centers. 1) Ledgelyn 3211.000 by American Standard. 2) Farmington K-2904 by Kohler. b. Cold Water Fitting: Single lavatory fitting, self closing metering,

adjustable time cycle, push handle, vandal resistant aerator. 1) 1340.000 by American Standard. 2) 333-669 by Chicago Faucets. 3) K-7504-c by Kohler. 4) 8884 by Moen. 5) S-72 by Symmons. c. Trim: 1) Supply pipe: 3/8" rigid riser with loose key control. By Mcguire or

accepted equivalent.


2) "P" Trap: Adjustable with tubing drain to wall, cleanout plug and wall escutcheon. By Mcguire or accepted equivalent.

3) Handi lav-guard insulation kit 102/105 - white, by Truebro. 4) Handi-shield original series - white, by Plumberex, Palm Springs,

CA. 5) Use manufacturer's vandal resistant fasteners. 6) Grid drain: perforated, chrome plated, 1-1/4" tailpiece. By Mcguire

or accepted equivalent.

B.Water Closets: 1. Wall Hung Water Closet (WC-1): a. “Green-Spec” listed white vitreous china, top spud, siphon jet flush action,

1.28 gpf, elongated bowl. Mount at a rim height of fifteen (15) inches from finished floor.

1) Ecovantage Z5615 by Zurn. b. Flush Valve: Zurn 1.28 GPF valve operated by an infrared convergence-type

proximity sensor with smart technology, powered by a single 9V battery, furnished with a vandal resistant chrome plated cast brass valve body, chloramine resistant internal seals, manual override button, and reversible cover. Provide complete with high pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for TP spud connection. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop CA, sweat solder kit and cast wall flange with screw.

c. Seat: Elongated, Open Frontless Cover: 1) 95 by Olsonite. 2) Lustra K-4670-C by Kohler. 3) 50ESS by Sperzel. 4) SC514 by Toto.

2. Wall Hung Water Closet, HC Accessible (WC-1A):

a. Same as WC-1 above, but mounted at a rim height of seventeen (17) inches from finished floor. Top of seat elevation shall be between nineteen (19) and twenty (20) inches from finished floor.

C. Urinals: 1. Wall Hung Urinal (UR-1): a. "Green-Spec" listed washout flushing action: Wall hung, 1/8 gpf, vitreous

china, 3/4" top inlet spud. Mount at a rim height of twenty-four (24) inches from finished floor.

1) Ecovantage Z 5798 by Zurn.


b. Flush Valve: Zurn 1/8 gpf valve operated by an infrared convergence-type proximity sensor with smart technology, powered by 4"aa" batteries, furnished with a vandal resistant chrome plated cast brass valve body, chloramine resistant internal seals, manual override button an reversible cover. Valve shall be provided with internal flow regulator to maintain constant flow rates independent of line pressures and inline filter to protect the valve from debris within the water. Provide complete with high pressure vacuum breaker, one piece hex coupling nut, adjustable tailpiece, spud coupling and flange for TP spud connection. Control stop has internal siphon-guard protection, vandal resistant stop ca, sweat solder kit and cast wall flange with Screwdexter K5016-T by Kohler.

2. Wall Hung Urinal, HC Accessible (UR-1A): a. Same as UR-1 above, but mounted at a rim height of seventeen (17) inches

from finished floor. D. Mop Receptors: 1. Mop Receptor (SS): a. Molded resin, 24 inches x 24 inches x 10 inches, rim guards, center drain. 1) Model MSR-2424 by Fiorestone. 2) Model MSB-2424 by Fiat. b. Fitting: Exposed yoke, wall mounted, vacuum breaker, top brace, stops in

shanks. 1) Z843M1 by Zurn. E. Single Compartment Sinks: 1. Single Compartment Stainless Steel Sinks (SK-): a. Type 304 stainless steel, 18 gage, self-rimming. b. Sizes and model numbers by Elkay or accepted equivalent: Length x Width (Inches) Depth (Inches) Model # (SK-1) 20 X 22 6.5 LRAD-202265 c. Hot and Cold Water Fitting: Cold Water Faucet: Provide a battery operated

sensor faucet with an integral four inch cover plate. The faucet incorporates an infrared convergence-type proximity sensor into the chrome plated cast brass spout. The faucet is to be furnished complete with sensor module, spout module and in-line filter, 4 "AA" batteries, a 0.5 gpm vandal resistant aerator and an inlet for 1/2"ball riser supply hose. Sensor range is factory set for optimum performance.


1) Z6920-F-MV d. Trim: 1) Supply Pipes: Flexible risers and loose key controls. 2303.063 by

American Standard. 2) "P" Trap: Adjustable with tubing drain to wall, cleanout plug and wall

escutcheon. 4419.030 by American Standard or accepted equivalent.

3) Grid Drain: Perforated with 1-1/2" diameter tailpiece. LK18 by Elkay or accepted equivalent.

F. Handicap Shower / Wall Mounted and Handheld – Hot and Cold Water (P-6):

1. Trim: Concealed shower supply with pressure-balanced single-handle mixing valve, diverter, 2.5 GPM flow control and chrome plated fixed vandal-resistant standard height showerhead and handicap handheld shower head.

a. Zurn Ecovantage 27000-S9 b. Leonard #LVC-SB Mixing Valve c. Powers #T425C Mixing Valve d. Leonard #D21 Diverter e. Powers #141-701Y Diverter

G. Electric Water Cooler EWC: Halsey Taylor Model HAC8FSBL-Q Child SS. Unit shall have 5 year factory guarantee. Lead-free construction.

1. Units shall be factory assembled and tested, listed and labeled in compliance with

UL Standard 399, and have capacities rated in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 18, and ARI Standard 1010.

2. Top: deep basin, anti-splash, smoothly contoured stainless steel with raised bubbler mount, chrome plated brass strainer, and 1-1/4" tailpiece.

3. Bubbler and Valve: chrome plated brass, adjustable automatic stream control, push-button valve with vandal-resistant bubbler designed to provide uniform stream without spurting.

4. Refrigeration System: refrigerant R-134A, hermetically sealed, capillary tube. All joints silver soldered.

a. Compressor: hermetically sealed, with automatic reset overload protection. b. Condenser: air-cooled. c. Cooling Unit: tube type, self-cleaning, continuous coil of seamless copper. d. Temperature Control: thermostat with adjustable range of 45 deg F to 55

deg F.

5. Electrical Characteristics: 120 volts, 60 Hz, 1/4 HP, 4.5 amperes, leads for direct connection.

6. Capacity: 12 GPH of 50 deg F water. 7. Connections: Provide 1-1/4" cast brass P-trap with cleanout, 1/2" supply and stop.


H. Carriers: 1. All carriers shall be fully bolted to floor and installed as recommended by

manufacturer. a. Lavatory/Lavatory HC: 1) Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded heavy steel

foot, cast iron concealed arms. Model 17100 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

b. Urinal: 1) Rectangular structural steel uprights with integral welded steel foot,

hanger bracket, lower bearing plate. Model 17810 by Josam or accepted equivalent.

c. Water Closet: 1) Josam 12000 Series Chase-Saver II, 4 inch pipe size, with pylon

feet, adjustable, provided with vandal proof trim, supply pipe support and adjustable chase extensions or accepted equivalent.

2.03 FIXTURES SUPPORTS

A. Lavatory Supports: adjustable cast iron, with thin concealed arms and sleeves, and complete with escutcheons and mounting fasteners.

B. Water Closet Supports: adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate, support base,

and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture washers. Provide an appropriate model to suit deep or shallow rough-in, siphon jet or blow-out water closet, and type of sanitary piping system to which it is connected.

C. Wheelchair Water Closet Supports: adjustable, factory painted, cast iron face plate,

support base, and appropriate type waste fitting having face plate gasket; zinc plated steel fixture studs and fasteners; coated and threaded adjustable wall coupling with neoprene closet outlet gasket; and chrome plated fixture cap nuts and fiber fixture washers. Units shall have elevated mounting heights of wheelchair fixtures, siphon jet or blow-out water closet, and type of sanitary piping system to which it is connected.

D. Urinal Supports: concealed arm supports for urinals shall have steel top and bottom

plates with bolts to support fixture independently from the wall; adjustable sleeves, steel tubular uprights and alignment trusses, steel plates with adjustable holes, bolts, nuts, and chrome plated cap nuts and washers.

2.04 FITTINGS, TRIM, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Toilet Seats: elongated, plastic with U.L. flammability spread rating 94VO, closed back/open front, less cover, and having stainless steel check hinge and replaceable bumpers.


B. Supplies and Stops for Lavatories and Sinks: Polished chrome-plated, loose-keyed angle stop, having 1/2" inlet and 3/8" O.D. x 12" long flexible tubing outlet, and wall flange and escutcheon.

C. Traps: Cast brass, adjustable "P" trap with cleanout and waste to wall.

D. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated cast brass with set screw.


A. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify that all plumbing fixtures may be installed in accordance with pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.

B. Examine rough-in for potable water and waste piping systems to verify actual locations

of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

C. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, and pertinent codes and regulations, the original design, and the referenced standards.

B. Comply with the installation requirements of ANSI A117.1 and Public Law 90-480 with

respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports or building structure. Secure supplies behind or within wall construction to provide rigid installation.

D. Set mop basins in a leveling bed of cement grout.

E. Install a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture.

F. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork.

G. Seal fixtures to walls and floors using silicone sealant as specified in Section 07900. Match sealant color to fixture color.


A. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning units, then retest.

B. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged fixtures.


3.04 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucets, and flush valves to provide proper flow and stream.

B. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.

3.05 CLEANING

A. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturer's recommended cleaning methods and materials.

3.06 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers, and trim.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless expressly approved in writing by the Owner.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15530 - 1 of 7 REFRIGERANT PIPING

SECTION 15530 REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications. This Section includes:

1. Pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties. 2. Special duty valves. 3. Refrigerants.

1.03 SUBMITTALS



1. Each type valve specified. 2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.

C. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including,

but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, roof penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.

D. Brazer's Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with

requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below.

E. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements".


A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code@, Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.



A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. EATON Corporation, Control Div. Henry Valve Company. Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.02 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed

coils, seamless copper tubing. 2.03 FITTINGS

A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 2.04 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg-1 (Silver). 2.05 VALVES

A. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Solenoid Valves: 250 deg. F temperature rating, 400 psig working pressure; forged

brass, with Teflon valve seat, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 24 volt, 60 Hz. normally closed holding coil.

C. Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: pilot-operated, forged brass or cast bronze; complete with pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure gage tappings, 24 volts DC, 50/60 Hz, standard coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

D. Thermal Expansion Valves: thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required

for specific evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator superheat


requirements. Valves shall have copper fittings for solder end connections; complete with sensing bulb, a distributor having a side connection for hot gas bypass line, and an external equalizer line.

2.06 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200 deg. F

maximum operating temperature; forged brass body, with replaceable polished optical viewing window, and solder end connections.

C. Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure, 225 deg. F maximum

operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant. for removal of acids and moisture for refrigerant vapor.

D. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin bronze or

stainless steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inches in length.

2.07 REFRIGERANT

A. Refrigerant shall match type depicted on drawing schedules. Refrigerant type shall be in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 34.


A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

3.02 PIPE APPLICATIONS

A. Use Type L, or Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground, within building.

B. If other than Type ACR tubing is used, clean and protect inside of tubing as specified in

Article "CLEANING" below.

3.03 PIPING INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - "The Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration@.

B. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.


C. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as possible.

D. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other

equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.

E. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between

pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation.

F. Insulate suction lines. Liquid line are not required to be insulated, except where they

are installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks have

been eliminated.

G. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be exposed to mechanical injury.

1. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2 inch per 10 feet downward slope to the

compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs.

2. Install traps and double risers where indicated, and where required to entrain oil in vertical runs.

3. Liquid lines may be installed level.

H. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

I. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

J. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit

proper insulation applications.

K. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

L. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent

elements of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1 inch clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

M. Locate groups of pipe parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and

servicing of valves.

N. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be sheet metal.


O. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

P. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side

down.

Q. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2-1/8 inch OD, using a bypass

line.

R. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

3.04 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Install the following pipe attachments:

1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet in length.

2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe rollers complete supports for multiple horizontal runs, 20 feet or longer

supported by a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

B. Install hangers with the following minimum rod sizes and maximum spacing:

NOM. PIPE SIZE MAX. SPAN-FT MIN. ROD SIZE - INCHES

1 7 3/8 1-1/2 9 3/8 2 10 3/8

C. Support vertical runs at each floor. 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual".

1. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

2. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do not apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve.


B. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (i.e., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

C. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.

3.06 VALVE INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install

solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 16. Coordinate electrical requirements and connections.

C. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as possible to

the evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly on the expansion valve outlet.

2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the bulb.

3. Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line.

4. Where external equalizer lines are required make the connection where it will clearly reflect the pressure existing in the suction line at the bulb location.

3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect, test, and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter VI.

B. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks.

3.09 CLEANING

A. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing, clean the tubing and fitting using following cleaning procedure:

1. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth through

the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician's tape. 2. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the tube or

pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. 3. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry, through


the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

4. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 3.10 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with requirements of

Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods section "Pipes and Pipe Fittings".

C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment with new materials and products.

3.11 COMMISSIONING

A. Charge system using the following procedure:

1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35 deg F is

indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between

vacuum pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allow pressure to build up to 2 psi. 6. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide

full operating charge. B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up

and shut-down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping specialties.

C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 section

"Project Closeout".

D. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least 7 days advance notice. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15670 - 1 of 2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

SECTION 15670 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Air cooled condensing units including necessary accessories indicated on drawings and specified in this section.


1. 01043 - Mechanical and Electrical General Requirements. 2. 15241 - Vibration Control. 3. 15530 - Refrigerant Piping.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit properly identified product data before commencing the work. 1.03 UNIT SCHEDULE

A. Provide air cooled condensing units of type, size and capacity shown in unit schedule. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: 1. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 (2004). PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

A. Casing:

1. Fully weatherproof the unit, suitable for outdoor installation. 2. Fabricate casing of galvanized or zinc-coated steel and finish with baked enamel. 3. Fabricate structural members of continuous galvanized steel with steel channel. 4. Provide openings for power and refrigerant connections and adequate removable

panels for service access. 5. Unit shall be welded hermetic type with internal vibration isolation and be covered

with a shield to muffle operating sound. 6. Compressor shall have both thermal and current sensitive overload devices and

internal high-pressure protection.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15670 - 2 of 2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNITS

B. Condenser Fans:

1. Direct drive, propeller-type fans arranged for vertical discharge.

a. Resilient mount fans factory statically and dynamically balanced and provide heavy gage safety guards.

C. Condenser Coils:

1. Aluminum Plate Fins: Mechanically bonded to aluminum tubes. 2. Adequately protect fins against hail damage. 3. Provide with factory applied salt spray exposure protection coating, with a five year

coil warranty.

D. Accessories:

1. Controls: Factory wired and located in a readily accessible location.

a. Overload Devices: Provide compressor and fan motor with both thermal and current sensitive devices.

2. Transformer: Factory installed 24V control circuit transformer. 3. Time Delay: Provide five-minute time delay to prevent compressor short cycling.

E. Acceptable Manufacturers: York, Trane, Dunham Bush.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, accepted shop drawings, and as indicated on the drawings.

B. Rigidly anchor all units to slab to withstand wind velocities in accordance with the

requirements of the Florida Building Code and ASCE-7, Current Edition. 3.02 SPECIAL PROJECT WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Motor/Compressor: Provide written warranty, signed by manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, motors/compressors with inadequate or defective materials and workmanship, including leakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; provided manufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting, and maintaining units have been adhered to during warranty period. Warranty is limited to component replacement only, and does not include labor for removal and re-installation.

1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of substantial completion.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15854 - 1 CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS

SECTION 15854 CENTRAL-STATION AIR-HANDLING UNITS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. "Basic Mechanical Requirements@. 2. "Basic Materials and Methods@. 3. "Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment@.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes variable volume, central-station air-handling units with coils for indoor installations.


section:

1. Division 15 Section "Vibration Controls" for inertia bases, isolation pads, and vibration isolation hangers and supports.

2. Division 15 Section "Mechanical Insulation" for field-applied equipment insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each central-station air-handling unit indicated, including the following:

1. Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated. 2. Certified fan sound power ratings. 3. Certified coil performance ratings with system operating conditions indicated. 4. Motor ratings and electrical characteristics plus motor and fan accessories. 5. Materials gages and finishes. 6. Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.

C. Data on variable frequency drives indicating compliance with specifications, including

wiring diagrams, and control interlocks.

D. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing dimensions, required clearances, components, and location and size of each field connection.

E. Maintenance data for central-station air-handling units and variable frequency drives for

inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Requirements@.



A. NFPA Compliance: Central-station air-handling units and components shall be designed, fabricated, and installed in compliance with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems@.

B. ARI Certification: Central-station air-handling units and their components shall be

factory tested in accordance with the applicable portions of ARI 430 - Standard for Central-Station Air-Handling Units and shall be listed and bear the label of the Air- Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute.


A. Lift and support units with the manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.

B. Disassemble and reassemble units as required for movement into the final location following manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Deliver central-station air-handling units as a factory-assembled unit to the extent

allowable by shipping limitations, with protective crating and covering. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of concrete equipment pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.



1. Dunham-Bush, Inc. 2. York International Corp. 3. Trane Corp.

2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. General Description: Factory assembled, consisting of fans, motor and drive assembly, coils, damper, plenums, filters, drip pans, and dampers.

B. Types: Central-station air-handling units as indicated on drawings.

1. Draw-through, double wall.

C. Motor and Electrical Components: Refer to Division 15 Section "Electrical

Requirements for Mechanical Equipment", and to Division 16. This contractor to provide reduced voltage starters for all air handlers.


2.03 CABINET

A. Materials: Formed and reinforced galvanized steel panels, fabricated to allow removal for access to internal parts and components, with joints between sections sealed. Internal aluminum or stainless steel panels are acceptable.

1. Medium-pressure units shall be constructed with additional bracing and supports.

Internal panel with perforations. Panels to sandwich 2 inch fiberglass insulation.

B. Insulation: Comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", for insulation.

1. Type: Coated, glass-fiber insulation, 2 inches thick and having a minimum density

of 3 pcf. 2. Location and Application: Factory applied to section panels downstream from and

including the cooling coil section.

C. Access Panels and Doors: Same materials and finishes as cabinet and complete with hinges, latches, handles, and gaskets.

1. Fan section shall have inspection and access panels and doors sized and located

to allow periodic maintenance and inspections.

D. Double-Wall Drain Pans: Formed sections of galvanized sheet steel. Fabricate pans in sizes and shapes to collect condensate from cooling coils (including coil piping connections and return bends) when units are operating at the maximum catalogued face velocity across the cooling coil. Fill space between double- wall construction with foam insulation and seal moisture-tight.

1. Drain connections: Both ends of the pan. 2. Pan top surface coating: Elastomeric compound. 3. Units with stacked coils shall have an intermediate drain pan or a drain trough to

collect condensate from top coil. 2.04 FANS SECTION

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1. General: Sound power level ratings shall comply with AMCA Standard 301 "Method for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings From Laboratory Test Data" and shall be the result of tests made in accordance with AMCA Standard 300 "Test Code for Sound Rating." Fans shall be licensed to bear the AMCA Certified Sound Ratings Seal.

2. Unit's fans performance ratings for flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation, and efficiency shall be factory tested and ratings established in accordance with AMCA Standard 210/ASHRAE Standard 51 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating.

B. Fan Section Construction: Fan section shall be equipped with a formed steel channel

base for integral mounting of fan, motor, and casing panels. The fan scroll, wheel,


shaft, bearings, and motor shall be mounted on a structural steel frame with frame mounted on base with vibration isolators.

C. Fans and Shafts: Statically and dynamically balanced and designed for continuous

operation at the maximum rated fan speed and motor horsepower. Fan wheel shall be double-width, double-inlet type with forward-curved blades or backward-curved airfoil section blades as indicated. Forward-curved blade wheels shall be galvanized steel. Airfoil wheels shall be steel painted with zinc chromate primer and an enamel finish coat. Fan shaft shall be solid steel, turned, ground, and polished. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft.

D. Shaft Bearings: Grease-lubricated ball bearings selected for 200,000 hours' average

life, with grease fittings extended to an accessible location outside the fan section.

E. Fan Drives: Designed for a 1.4 service factor and factory mounted with final alignment and belt adjustment made after installation.

1. Belt Drive: Motors and fan wheel pulleys shall be adjustable pitch for use with

motors up to and including 15 HP and fixed pitch for use with motors larger than 15 HP.

2. Motors mounted on the outside of the fan cabinet shall have steel belt guards. 2.05 MOTORS

A. Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to accelerate the driven loads satisfactorily.

B. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so that the driven load will not require the motor to operate in the service factor range.

C. Temperature Rating: 50 deg C maximum temperature rise at 40 deg C ambient for

continuous duty at full load (Class A Insulation). D. Service Factor: 1.15 for polyphase motors and 1.35 for single-phase motors.

E. Motor Construction: NEMA Standard MG 1, general purpose, continuous duty, Design

B.

1. Bases: Adjustable.

2. Bearings: The following features are required:

a. Ball or roller bearings with inner and outer shaft seals. b. Grease lubricated. c. Designed to resist thrust loading where belt drives or other drives produce

lateral or axial thrust in motor.

3. Enclosure Type: The following features are required:

a. Open drip-proof motors where satisfactorily housed or remotely located during operation.

b. Guarded drip-proof motors where exposed to contact by employees or building occupants.


4. Overload protection: Built-in, automatic reset, thermal overload protection. 5. Noise rating: Quiet. 6. Efficiency: Energy-efficient motors shall have a minimum efficiency as scheduled

in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B. If efficiency not specified, motors shall have a higher efficiency than "average standard industry motors" in accordance with IEEE Standard 112, Test Method B.

7. Nameplate: Indicate the full identification of manufacturer, ratings, characteristics, construction, and special features.

2.06 COILS

A. Testing Requirements: The following factory tests are required:

1. Coil Performance Tests: Cooling coils, shall be factory tested for rating in accordance with ARI 410 - Standard for Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils.

B. Coil Sections: Common or individual insulated, galvanized steel casings for cooling

coils. Coil section shall be designed and constructed to facilitate removal of coil for maintenance and replacement and to assure full air flow through coils.

C. Medium-pressure units shall have double gaskets between sections and coil connection

penetrations through casing sealed to minimize leakage.

D. Coils, General: Rigidly supported across the full face of the coil, with supply ad return connections on the same side. 1. Fins: Aluminum or copper, constructed from flat plate with belled collars for tubes.

Fins shall be bonded to tubes by mechanically expanding copper tubes. 2. Tubes: Seamless copper. 3. Coil Casing: Galvanized steel. 4. DX coils shall have venturi type refrigerant distributor arranged for down feed.

a. Proof test coils at 450 psig and leak tested at 300 psig air pressure under

water, cleaned, dehydrated and sealed with a dry nitrogen charge. b. Coils shall be suitable for a working pressure of up to 300 psig.

2.07 FILTERS SECTION

A. General: Filters shall comply with NFPA Standard 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems@.

B. Filter Section: Cabinet material and finish shall match the air-handling unit cabinet, with

filter media holding frames arranged for flat or angular orientation. Section shall have access doors on both sides of the unit.

C. Disposable Filters: Provide disposable type air filters 12 inches thick, pleated filtering

media. Airflow resistance with clean media shall not exceed 0.8 inch w.g. at face velocity of 600 fpm, and filter efficiency of 80 to 85 percent based on ASHRAE Test Standard 52 - Method of Testing Air- Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. Filter similar to FARR RIGA-FLO-100 or approved equal.



A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, housekeeping pads, and other conditions affecting performance of central-station air- handling units.

B. Examine rough-in for refrigerant, condensate drainage piping and electrical to verify

actual locations of connections prior to installation.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install central-station air-handling units level and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Support floor-mounted units on concrete equipment bases using housed spring

isolators. Secure units to anchor bolts installed in concrete equipment base.

B. Arrange installation of units to provide access space around air-handling units for service and maintenance.

3.03 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Construct concrete equipment pads as follows:

1. Coordinate size of equipment bases with actual unit sizes provided. Construct base 4 inches larger in both directions than the overall dimensions of the supported unit.

2. Form concrete pads with framing lumber with form release compounds. Chamfer top edge and corners of pad.

3. Install reinforcing bars, tied to frame, and place anchor bolts and sleeves to facilitate securing units.

4. Place concrete and allow to cure before installation of units. Use Portland Cement conforming to ASTM C 150, 4,000 psi compressive strength, and normal weight aggregate.

3.04 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 sections. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, valves, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Arrange piping installations adjacent to units to allow unit servicing and

maintenance. 2. Connection piping to air-handling units with flexible connectors. 3. Connect condensate drain pans using Type M copper tubing. Extend to the


nearest equipment or floor drain. Construct deep trap at connection to drain pan and install cleanouts at changes in direction. Provide traps and condensate drainage piping to both pan connections provided.

B. Duct installations and connections are specified in other Division 15 sections. Make

final duct connections with flexible connections.

C. Electrical Connections: The following requirements apply:

1. Electrical power wiring is specified in Division 16. 3.05 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTING

A. Adjust units to cooling capacity indicated in schedules.

B. Clean unit cabinet interiors to remove foreign material and construction dirt and dust. Vacuum clean fan wheel, fan cabinet, and coils entering air face.

C. Install clean filters at substantial completion.

3.06 COMMISSIONING

A. Final Checks Before Start-Up: Perform the following operations and checks before start-up:

1. Remove shipping, blocking, and bracing. 2. Verify unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections for

piping, ductwork, and electrical are complete. Verify proper thermal overload protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnects.

3. Perform cleaning and adjusting specified in this Section. 4. Disconnect fan drive from motor and verify proper motor rotation direction and

verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearings operations. Reconnect fan drive system, align belts, and install belt guards.

5. Lubricate bearings, pulleys, belts, and other moving parts with factory-recommended lubricants.

6. Set outside-air and return-air mixing dampers to minimum outside- air setting. 7. Comb coil fins for parallel orientation. 8. Install clean filters. 9. Verify manual and automatic volume control, and fire and smoke dampers in

connected ductwork systems are in the full-open position. 10. Disable automatic temperature control operators.

B. Starting procedures for central-station air-handling units:

1. Energize motor, verify proper operation of motor, drive system, and fan wheel.

Adjust fan to indicated RPM.

a. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design conditions and as required by the Test and Balance Agency.

2. Measure and record motor electrical values for voltage and amperage.


C. Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature control operators.

D. Refer to Division 15 Section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for procedures for

air-handling-system testing, adjusting, and balancing. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15870 - 1 of 4 POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS

SECTION 15870 POWER AND GRAVITY VENTILATORS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




A. Extent of power and gravity ventilator work required by this section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of power and gravity ventilators specified in this section include the following:

1. Power ventilators:

a. Inline Fans. b. Ceiling exhausters.

C. Refer to Division-15 section "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing" for balancing of power

and gravity ventilators; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Division-16 sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on ventilators. Include starters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified as furnished, or factory- installed, by manufacturer, or provided under another division.

E. Provide the following electrical work as work of this section, complying with

requirements of Division-16 sections:

1. Control wiring between field-installed controls, indicating devices, and ventilators. 2. Control wiring specified as work of Division-15 for Automatic Temperature Controls

is work of that section. 3. Across the line starters for all fans requiring it.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of power and gravity ventilators, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.



1. AMCA Compliance: Provide power ventilators which have been tested and rated in accordance with AMCA standards, and bear AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

2. UL Compliance: Provide power ventilators which are listed by UL and have UL label affixed.

3. NEMA Compliance: Provide motors and electrical accessories complying with NEMA standards.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data for power ventilators and air intakes including specifications, capacity ratings, dimensions, weights, materials, accessories furnished, and installation instructions.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of power and

gravity ventilator, accessory, and control. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 POWER VENTILATORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide standard prefabricated power ventilator units of type and size indicated, modified as necessary to comply with requirements, and as required for complete installation.

B. Inline Fans: Provide centrifugal inline type power ventilators of type, size, and capacity

as scheduled, and as specified herein.

1. Type: Aluminum steel fan wheel, direct or belt driven as scheduled. Provide aluminum or steel housing. Provide permanent split-capacitor type motor for direct driven fans, capacitor-start, induction-run type motor for belt driven fans.

2. Electrical: Provide factory-wired non-fusible type disconnect switch at motor in fan housing. Provide thermal overload protection in fan motor. Provide conduit chase within unit for electrical connection.

3. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide centrifugal wall ventilators of one of the following:

a. Greenheck Fan Corp. b. ILG Industries, Inc. c. Penn Ventilator Co., Inc. d. Power Line Fans; Div. of Torin Corp. e. Cook Co., Loren.

C. Ceiling Exhausters:

1. Fans shall have a centrifugal wheel enclosed in an acoustically insulated housing.


2. Units shall have integral backdraft damper and an inlet grille. 3. Motor shall be resiliently supported and shall be completely removable through the

face of the unit. 4. Discharge position shall be changeable through use of interchangeable casing

panels. 5. Direct drive fans shall be equipped with electronic speed control. 6. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide bathroom

exhausters of one of the following:

a. Cook Co., Loren. b. Penn Ventilators Co., Inc. c. Greenheck Fan Corp.


A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which power ventilators are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF POWER VENTILATORS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated or specified, install ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and recognized industry practices to insure that ventilators serve their intended function.

B. Coordinate ventilator work with work of walls and ceilings, as necessary for proper

interfacing.

C. Ductwork: Refer to Division-15 section "Ductwork". Connect ducts to ventilators in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified

to be factory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to Electrical Installer.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's

submittal and installation requirements of Division-16 sections. Verify proper rotation direction of fan wheels. Do not proceed with equipment start-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

E. Remove shipping bolts and temporary supports within ventilators. Adjust dampers for

free operation. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing: After installation of ventilators has been completed, test each ventilator to demonstrate proper operation of units at performance requirements specified. When possible, field correct malfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace units which cannot be satisfactorily corrected.



A. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch- up paint.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15891 - 1 of 6 METAL DUCTWORK

SECTION 15891 METAL DUCTWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Division-15 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this


A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Refer to other Division-15 sections for exterior insulation of metal ductwork; not work of

this section.

C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for ductwork accessories; not work of this section.

D. Refer to other Division-15 sections for fans and air handling units; not work of this section.

E. Refer to other Division-15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of metal

ductwork systems; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductwork products of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards, Metal and Flexible" for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook, Equipment Volume,

Chapter 1 "Duct Construction", for fabrication and installation of metal ductwork. 3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 90A "Standard for the Installation of Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" and NFPA 90B "Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems".

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions


for metal ductwork materials and products.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, but not limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductwork and proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conform to local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials, and rigidity are not reduced.

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal

ductwork and ductwork products. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protection: Protect shop-fabricated and factory- fabricated ductwork, accessories and purchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent end damage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Where

necessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view in occupied spaces, provide materials which are free from visual imperfections including pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, including those which would impair painting.

B. Sheet Metal: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate ductwork from galvanized sheet

steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality; with G 90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A 525; and mill phosphatized for exposed locations.

2.02 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and, where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductwork system requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15

deg. change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45 deg. laterals and 45 deg. elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90 deg. branches are indicated, provide conical type tees.

C. Duct Sealant: Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant, type

applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for sealing joints and seams in ductwork.


D. Duct Cement: Non-hardening migrating mastic or liquid neoprene based cement, type applicable for fabrication/installation detail, as compounded and recommended by manufacturer specifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.

E. Ductwork Support Materials: Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped

galvanized steel fasteners, anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.

F. Flexible Ducts: Spiral-wound spring steel with flameproof vinyl sheathing, complying

with UL 181 with (1) in thick continuous flexible fiberglass sheath with vinyl vapor barrier jacket. Maximum length allowed is 8'-0".

2.03 FABRICATION

A. Shop fabricate ductwork in 4, 8, 10 or 12-ft lengths, unless otherwise indicated or required to complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimize field assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping and handling. Match-mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. Shop fabricate ductwork of gages and reinforcement complying with SMACNA "HVAC

Duct Construction Standards.

C. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements as applicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center-line radius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbows where shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30 deg. for contracting tapers and 20 deg. for expanding tapers.

D. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extent

possible. Refer to Division-15 section "Ductwork Accessories" for accessory requirements.

2.04 FACTORY-FABRICATED LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. General: At installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and fittings.

B. Material: Galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527, lockforming quality, with

ASTM A 525, G90 zinc coating, mill phosphatized.

C. Gage: As per "SMACNA".

D. Elbows: One piece construction for 90 deg. and 45 deg. elbows 14" and smaller. Provide multiple gore construction for larger diameters with standing seam circumferential joint.

E. Divided Flow Fittings: 90 deg. tees, constructed with saddle tap spot welded and

bonded to duct fitting body.


F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of the following:

1. Semco Mfg., Inc. 2. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.

2.05 FACTORY-FABRICATED MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. General: At Installer's option, provide factory-fabricated duct and fittings, in lieu of shop-fabricated duct and fittings.

B. Round Ductwork: Construct of galvanized sheet steel complying with ASTM A 527 by

the following methods and in minimum gages complying with "SMACNA".

C. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricated ductwork of one of the following:

1. Semco Mfg., Inc. 2. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill Corp.


A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve air-tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3" and under; 1% for systems rated over 3") and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performing each indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductwork accurately at connections, within 1/8" misalignment tolerance and with internal surfaces smooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type which will hold ducts true-to-shape and to prevent buckling.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork,

as required to avoid delays in work.

C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shop-fabricated work and accommodate installation requirements.

D. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and

horizontally and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent enclosure elements of building. Limit clearance to 1/2" where


furring is shown for enclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1" clearance outside of insulation. Wherever possible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating in mechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encase horizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work.

E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through electrical equipment

rooms or transformer vaults and their electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

F. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and are exposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same gage as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least 1-1/2". Fasten to duct and substrate.

1. Where ducts pass through fire-rated floors, walls, or partitions, provide firestopping

between duct and substrate, in accordance with requirements of Division-7 Section "Firestopping".

G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers,

coil frames, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.

H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF FLEXIBLE DUCTS

A. Maximum Length: For any duct run using flexible ductwork, do not exceed 8' - 0" extended length.

B. Installation: Install in accordance with Section III of SMACNA's, "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".


A. Leakage Tests: After each duct system which is constructed for duct classes over 3" is completed, test for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual. Repair leaks and repeat tests until total leakage is less than 1% of system design air flow.

3.05 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated, provide flexible connection for each ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipment containing rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.


A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean external surfaces of foreign substances which might cause corrosive deterioration of


metal or, where ductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15910 - 1 of 4 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

SECTION 15910 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1. Dampers. 2. Low pressure manual dampers. 3. Control dampers. 4. Fire and smoke dampers. 5. Turning vanes. 6. Duct hardware. 7. Duct access doors. 8. Flexible connections.

C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductwork

accessories; not work of this section. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductwork accessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible".

2. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with UL Standard 555 "Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers".

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A "Air

Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", pertaining to installation of ductwork accessories.


1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductwork accessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installation instructions.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DAMPERS

A. Low Pressure Manual Dampers: Provide dampers of single blade type or multi-blade type, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of the

following:

1. Air Balance, Inc. 2. Airguide Corp. 3. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

2.02 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Fire Dampers: Provide fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated. Construct casings of 11-ga galvanized steel with bonded red acrylic enamel finish. Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165 deg. F (71 to 74 deg. C) unless otherwise indicated. Provide damper with positive lock in closed position, and with the following additional features: 1. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type. 2. Blade Material: Steel, match casing.

2.03 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructed in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Duct Construction Standards".

B. Manufactured Turning Vanes: Provide turning vanes constructed of 1-1/2" wide curved

blades set at 3/4" o.c., supported with bars perpendicular to blades set at 2" o.c., and set into side strips suitable for mounting in ductwork.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of airfoil shaped

aluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of the following:

1. Aero Dyne Co. 2. Airsan Corp. 3. Duro Dyne Corp.


2.04 DUCT HARDWARE

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items on project, for the following:

1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at AHU fan inlet and outlet, duct test holes,

consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests. 2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of

shaft; and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12". Provide extended quadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one

of the following:

1. Ventfabrics, Inc. 2. Young Regulator Co.

2.05 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. General: Provide where fire dampers are installed duct access doors. Minimum 12 in x 12 in or max. size allowed by duct.

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gage as ductwork served, provide double

wall, insulated doors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extended frames for externally insulated duct. Provide one size hinged, other side with one handle-type latch for doors 12" high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of

one of the following:

1. Air Balance Inc. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Ruskin Mfg. Co. 4. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2.06 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibration isolated equipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene-coated flameproof fabric crimped into duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provide adequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, and also capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of

one of the following:

1. American/Elgen Co.; Energy Div. 2. Duro Dyne Corp. 3. Flexaust (The) Co.


4. Ventfabrics, Inc. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intended function.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90 deg. elbows in supply and exhaust air

systems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure.

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation of ductwork accessories properly with other work.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, as required to obtain proper operation and leakproof performance.


A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in fire dampers and adjust for proper action.

1. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division-15 section "Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing".

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touch-up paint.

3.05 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperature range; obtain receipt.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15932 - 1 of 5 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

SECTION 15932 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



A. Extent of air outlets and inlets work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of air outlets and inlets required for project include the following:

1. Ceiling air diffusers. 2. Wall and ceiling registers and grilles. 3. Louvers.

C. Refer to other Division-15 sections for ductwork and duct accessories required in

conjunction with air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.

D. Refer to other Division-15 sections for balancing of air outlets and inlets; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air outlets and inlets of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


1. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in accordance with ARI 650

"Standard for Air Outlets and Inlets". 2. ADC Compliance: Test and rate air outlets and inlets in certified laboratories under

requirements of ADC 1062 "Certification, Rating and Test Manual". 3. ADC Seal: Provide air outlets and inlets bearing ADC Certified Rating Seal.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air outlets and inlets including the following:

1. Data sheet for each type of air outlet and inlet, and accessory furnished; indicating

construction, finish, and mounting details.


2. Performance data for each type of air outlet and inlet furnished, including aspiration ability, temperature and velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings. Indicate selections on data.

C. Contractor shall provide a certified letter of compliance indicating that the diffusers,

grilles and similar items will fit in the specified ceiling grid suspension system. Submittals should be approved prior to ordering materials.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air outlets and inlets wrapped in factory-fabricated fiber-board type containers. Identify on outside of container type of outlet or inlet and location to be installed. Avoid crushing or bending and prevent dirt and debris from entering and settling in devices.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING AIR DIFFUSERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard ceiling air diffusers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide ceiling air diffusers that have, as minimum, temperature and

velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide diffusers with border styles that are compatible with

adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into ceiling module with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of ceiling systems which will contain each type of ceiling air diffuser.

D. Types: Provide ceiling diffusers of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes as

listed on diffuser schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:

1. Diffuser Faces:

a. Fixed, Directional: Square, or rectangular housing with removable core. b. Linear (LR): Extruded aluminum continuous slot, single or multiple.

2. Diffuser Mountings:

a. Flush (FL): Diffuser housing above ceiling surface with flush perimeter flange and gasket to seal against ceiling.

b. Lay-In (L-I): Diffuser housing sized to fit between ceiling exposed suspension tee bars and rest on top surface of tee bar.

3. Diffuser Patterns:

a. 1 Way (1-W): Fixed louver face for 1-direction air flow, direction indicated on drawings.

b. 2 Way (2-W): Fixed louver face for 2-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.


c. 3 Way (3-W): Fixed louver face for 3-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.

d. 4 Way (4-W): Fixed louver face for 4-direction air flow, directions indicated on drawings.

4. Diffuser Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade (O-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper assembly, key operated from face of diffuser.

5. Diffuser Accessories:

a. Equalizing Deflectors (E-D): Adjustable parallel blades in frame for straightening air flow.

b. Plaster Ring (P-R): Perimeter ring designed to act as plaster stop and diffuser anchor.

c. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through diffuser face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.

6. Diffuser Finishes:

a. White Enamel (W-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.

E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diffusers of one of the following:

1. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. of America. 2. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

2.02 CEILING REGISTERS AND GRILLES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard wall or ceiling registers and grilles where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide registers and grilles that have, as minimum, temperature and

velocity traverses, throw and drop, and noise criteria ratings for each size device as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Ceiling Compatibility: Provide registers and grilles with border styles that are compatible

with adjacent ceiling systems, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction with accurate fit and adequate support. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of construction which will contain each type of register and grille.

D. Types: Provide registers and grilles of type, capacity, and with accessories and finishes

as listed on register and grille schedule. The following requirements shall apply to nomenclature indicated on schedule:

1. Register and Grille Materials:

a. Aluminum Construction (AL): Manufacturer's standard extruded aluminum frame and adjustable blades.


2. Register and Grille Faces: a. Eggcrate type fixed blades.

3. Register and Grille Dampers:

a. Opposed Blade (O-B): Adjustable opposed blade damper asembly, key operated from face of register.

b. Operating Keys (OP-KY): Tools designed to fit through register or grille face and operate volume control device and/or pattern adjustment.

4. Register and Grille Finishes:

a. White Enamel (A-E): Semi-gloss white enamel prime finish.

E. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide registers and grilles of one of the following:

1. Anemostat Products Div.,; Dynamics Corp. of America. 2. Tuttle & Bailey. 3. Titus Products Div.; Philips Industries, Inc.

2.03 LOUVERS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard louvers where shown; of size, shape, capacity and type indicated; constructed of materials and components as indicated, and as required for complete installation.

B. Performance: Provide louvers that have minimum 55% free area, and maximum of 0.05

in water pressure drop for each type as listed in manufacturer's current data.

C. Substrate Compatibility: Provide louvers with frame and sill styles that are compatible with adjacent substrate, and that are specifically manufactured to fit into construction openings with accurate fit and adequate support, for weatherproof installation. Refer to general construction drawings and specifications for types of substrate which will contain each type of louver.

D. Materials: Construct of aluminum extrusions, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T52. Weld units

or use stainless steel fasteners.

E. Louver Screens: On inside face of exterior louvers, provide 1/2" square mesh anodized aluminum wire bird screens mounted in removable extruded aluminum frames.

F. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide louvers of one of the

following:

1. Airline Products Co. 2. Arrow United Industries, Inc. 3. Construction Specialties, Inc. 4. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air outlets and inlets are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install air outlets and inlets in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and in accordance with recognized industry practices to insure that products serve intended functions.

B. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork and duct accessories, as necessary to

interface installation of air outlets and inlets with other work.

C. Locate ceiling air diffusers, registers, and grilles, as indicated on general construction "Reflected Ceiling Plans". Unless otherwise indicated, locate units in center of acoustical ceiling modules.

3.03 SPARE PARTS

A. Furnish to Owner, with receipt, 3 operating keys for each type of air outlet and inlet that require them.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15975 - 1 of 6 H.V.A.C. CONTROLS SYSTEM

SECTION 15975 H.V.A.C. CONTROLS SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Requirements of all Division 15 Sections apply to this section.

C. Requirements of Division 16 Sections covering wiring and conduits apply to this section.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. Provide a complete, operating, HVAC controls system.

B. The HVAC controls system shall consist of all required equipment to control and automatically operate all components of the HVAC system. It shall include, but not be limited to, all microprocessors, panels, software, modems, sensors, valve actuators, thermostats, personal computers, wall switches, automatic valves, and auxiliary items for a complete integrated system.

C. All conduits, boxes and wiring related to the HVAC controls system is the responsibility

of this Contractor. All wiring in ceiling plenums shall be in conduit or plenum rated cable.

1. All electric wiring concerning the HVAC controls system shall be provided by the

Controls/Mechanical Contractor under this Section. 2. The term wiring shall include furnishing of wire, conduit, miscellaneous materials

and labor as required for mounting and connecting HVAC controls system and electrical control devices, except as specifically noted otherwise.

3. The Controls/Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for calibration and proper functioning of HVAC controls system and electric control devices furnished under this section.

D. Training of Owner designated personnel is included under this section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Submit manufacturer's literature for proposed equipment, materials, and software showing performance specifications, dimensions, and installation instructions.

C. Submit detailed shop drawings showing proposed equipment locations, control

sequences, raceway routing, interconnections, grounding requirements, and special instructions. Wiring shall be clearly shown with terminations occurring on labeled terminal strips.


D. Submit a list of equipment for which spare parts shall be provided as specified in this

section.

E. Contract Closeout Submittals: Upon project substantial completion provide Owner with the following:

1. Record drawings, three sets. 2. Record drawing files (CAD and pdf). 3. Manufacturer's maintenance and repair instructions (three sets) including

troubleshooting instructions and schematic diagrams for system components. 4. A list of recommended spare parts with current prices at the time of bid submittal. 5. Special tools (two each) as required to perform maintenance, calibration and

repairs. 6. Diagnostics and maintenance software as required to perform maintenance and

repairs. 7. Spare parts, ten percent (minimum one unit) of the total installed for the following

components: fuses, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, plug-in and remote relays, and any other sensors used.

F. The Contractor shall satisfy additional project completion requirements as described in

other sections of this project specifications. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage: Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Do not remove protector cases unless necessary for inspection; then reinstall for storage.

2. Protect components from weather. Store indoors. Maintain component temperature higher than the ambient dew point temperature.

1.05 HVAC CONTROLS SYSTEM

A. The manufacturer for the HVAC controls system components shall be the same.

B. Provide the product of only one of the following manufacturers:

1. Reliable Controls 2. Honeywell 3. Delta Controls 4. Johnson Controls

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ADVANCED APPLICATION CONTROLLERS (AAC) A. General

1. Provide a micro-processor based, networkable, custom programmed, 100%


Native BACnet (BTL) Advanced Application Controller for each heat pump, AHU, etc., wall mounted where shown on floor plans. Each AAC shall include an LCD user interface and all input/output points required to monitor and control each unit as a stand-alone system, according to the specified sequence of operation. In addition, AAC’s shall allow monitoring and remote control via a supervisory network.

2. Provide a 5-year standard manufacturer’s warranty for the AAC and all sensors.

B. Network Protocol and Operator Connections

1. The AAC’s shall allow direct connection to a host network using BACnet MS/TP (EIA-485) protocol. The network communication speed shall be operator selectable up to 76.8 kbps.

2. Each AAC shall be BTL tested and listed to meet the B-AAC Standard Device Profile, including BIBB’s for this level of device. A Protocol Implementation Conformance statement for the AAC proposed shall be submitted along with shop drawings. Network points to be viewable on each AAC are listed in the sequence of operation, however, provide a minimum of 32 Read/Write objects per AAC.

3. Each AAC shall include an externally mounted port allowing operators to connect a laptop computer directly to the AAC for network configuration, custom programming, and trouble-shooting.

C. Hardware Components

1. Provide the following hardware input points at minimum in each AAC select inputs

to match the application, then re-calculate available points:

a. Room temperature sensor, local or remote 10K thermistor with an accuracy of +/- 0.1 Deg C.

b. Manual set-point adjustment slider with programmable set-point limits. c. In addition to the above, provide 4 user-definable universal inputs capable of

accepting 0 -5 VDC, 4 – 20 mA, 10K thermistor, or dry contacts. Refer to the sequence of operation for specific input point requirements.

2. Provide hardware analog and digital output points as required by the sequence of

operation, however include the following point types at minimum to allow for future expansion:

a. Six universal outputs, user-definable as analog or digital b. Two additional digital output points c. Digital output points shall be dry contacts capable of switching 0.5 Amps at

24 VAC.

3. Provide a large LCD screen for display and adjustment of AAC points and mapped network points. Minimum LCD size shall be 128 x 64 pixels. The screen shall be back-lit, however the light may be configured to shut off after a programmable inactive time.

4. Provide push-buttons on the panel face to facilitate navigation, point adjustment,

data entry, and switching of operational modes.


5. AAC memory shall include a minimum 64 Kb RAM for logs and temporary data,

and 512 kb flash EEPROM for non-volatile storage of firmware configuration and custom database. Provide a 24 hour clock and 365 day calendar on-board. Clock accuracy shall be +/-1 second over 24 hours, and system time shall be retained during power outages exceeding 7 years.

6. Provide a software configurable buzzer which shall be set-up to trigger on the

occurrence of selected alarms, and shall be audible and acknowledgeable either to all users, or only to those users with sufficient password authority.

7. AAC’s shall be capable of monitoring and controlling at least 4 networked, remote

temperature sensors, each with adjustable set-point and outputs for zone controls. These networked sensors shall not consume input/output points in the AAC.

D. Custom Configuration

1. Each AAC shall allow custom setup of the primary user interface screen; definition

of all points to be monitored, controlled and displayed; alarms; schedules; trends; password access; and programmed sequence of operation as required to optimize the AAC for the specific requirements of this project, and also to allow future modification by the owner. AAC’s using canned programs for pre-determined HVAC applications are not acceptable.

2. Each AAC shall allow the following custom set-up at minimum:

a. Primary User Interface screen set-up, including display of time, system

mode, fan mode, primary temperature display, and display of up to 3 additional operator-defined AAC or network points.

b. Seven additional user defined point groups, each including up to six AAC or network points per group, to be displayed and adjusted by system users with sufficient password authority. Each group and each individual point shall be defined to allow/disallow editing and manual override by users, and the password level required. Point definition shall also determine if units are to be displayed, and whether point names are displayed as text, or alternatively using an icon chosen from an on-board list of industry standard symbols.

c. 4 custom programs of 2000 bytes each, using a BASIC control language, with source code stored on board.

d. The AAC may be defined with full access by all users without password protection, or with three levels of password protected access. Each level of access shall be enabled by entering a 4 digit password via the front panel keys. AAC’s that require removal of the faceplate to unlock the keyboard are not acceptable.

e. Alarm states shall be defined using AAC custom programming, with the definition including the password level required to acknowledge, reset, and clear alarms. When an AAC alarm condition exists, an alarm icon shall be displayed on all screens.

f. 48 user-definable program-driven variables, with selectable ranges and standard or custom units.

g. 4 user-definable PID controls loops


h. 3 user-definable trend logs, each with 150 samples of 6 points each, and programmable sampling times

i. 8 user-definable runtime logs to accumulate the run-times of selected digital points, and record the time and date of the last 100 changes of state

j. 2 user-definable system groups, 50 points per group, allowing related points to be grouped together on one display for use in network graphics

k. 1 user-definable weekly schedule, including 4 on/off pairs for each weekday, and two additional daily schedules triggered by the annual schedule or by custom programming

l. Override of the unoccupied schedule for a programmed period of time shall be triggered via a front panel button

m. 1 annual schedule, allowing pre-programming of holidays 365 days in advance


A. Install the HVAC controls system in accordance with the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Codes and Standards and manufacturer requirements.

B. The HVAC controls system checkout and testing procedures shall include tests for short

circuits, ground faults, and continuity of wiring and components.

C. Final connections and operational tests of HVAC controls system equipment shall be performed by a certified, factory trained technician employed by or under the direct supervision of the equipment manufacturer.

D. HVAC controls system wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with manufacturer's

instructions and diagrams. HVAC controls system wiring shall be installed in minimum of 3/4” conduit using plenum rated cables.

E. The Controls/Mechanical Contractor shall be responsible for selection of proper control

valves including line sizes, pressure rating, flow coefficient, shut-off rating, and allowable leakage factor.

F. Control valves and wells shall be provided by the Controls/Mechanical Contractor for

installation under Division 15 of this specification. 3.02 SEQUENCE OF CONTROLS A. H.V.A.C. Sequence of Operations 1. Refer to Contract Drawing for interlocking of different mechanical devices. 2. Air Handling Unit (AHU) Operation and Control:

The internal calendar and time clock of the programmable AAC is to determine the AHU(s) run time. Upon proof of successful start and operation of the air handling unit, the automatic controls are placed into operation modulating the condensing


unit compressor stages to maintain a set leaving air temperature condition of 55°F (adjustable). When the scheduled air handling units are first started [thirty (30) minutes (adjustable) prior to the opening of the building], outside air dampers shall remain closed and supply/exhaust fans de-energized to allow for space dehumidification. Once the building is scheduled for opening, the outside air motorized damper (in conjunction with the supply fans). When the units are stopped, the automatic outside air motorized dampers shall be driven closed and the condensing units de-energized.

3. Supply Air Temperature Control:

The supply air temperature, measured downstream of each air handling unit's main direct expansion (DX) coil by a DDC controlled coil discharge temperature sensor, shall be maintained at constant discharge temperature of 54°F (adjustable), by adjusting the condensing units’ compressor stages and by modulating the compressor hot-gas bypass stages. The discharge air temperature will be reset upwards, through the DDC controller, if the return air temperature falls below 70°F.

B. Condensing Units: Shall be energized from the HVAC controls system. Once in operation the condensing units shall cycle, on and off under the control of the HVAC controls system in conjunction with condensing unit controller. Under no circumstances shall any protection devices or circuits be bypassed by the HVAC controls system. Operating temperature shall be maintained by loading/unloading compressor and modulating the hot gas bypass based on cooling demand.

C. Zone Temperature Control: A room type wall mounted temperature sensor, through the HVAC controls system, shall

select heat-pump setpoint (cooling/heating) in order to maintain zone temperature set point.

3.03 TRAINING

A. The Contractor shall provide training of the Owner representatives in the operation, programming, maintenance, and repair of the system and its components. Said training shall be scheduled at the Owner's discretion within substantial to final completion window. On-site instruction shall consist of at least twenty hours of training on system operation and programming. Training shall be conducted by a qualified manufacturer's representative.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 15990 - 1 of 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. Other Division-15 Sections specify balancing devices and their installation, and

materials and installations of mechanical systems. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the requirements and procedures for total mechanical systems testing, adjusting, and balancing. Requirements include measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

B. Test, adjust, and balance the following mechanical systems:

1. Supply air systems, all pressure ranges; including variable volume systems: 2. Return air systems; 3. Exhaust air systems; 4. Verify temperature control system operation.

C. Test systems for proper sound and vibration levels.

1.03 DEFINITIONS

A. Systems testing, adjusting, and balancing is the process of checking and adjusting all the building environmental systems to produce the design objectives. It includes:

1. The balance of air distribution; 2. Adjustment of total system to provide design quantities; 3. Electrical measurement; 4. Verification of performance of all equipment and automatic controls; 5. Sound and vibration measurement.

B. Test: To determine quantitative performance of equipment.

C. Adjust: To regulate the specified fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal

equipment (e.g., reduce fan speed, throttling). D. Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system (submains, branches, and

terminals) according to specified design quantities.


E. Procedure: Standardized approach and execution of sequence of work operations to yield reproducible results.

F. Report forms: Test data sheets arranged for collecting test data in logical order for

submission and review. These data should also form the permanent record to be used as the basis for required future testing, adjusting, and balancing.

G. Terminal: The point where the controlled fluid enters or leaves the distribution system.

These are supply outlets on air terminals, return and exhaust or return inlets on air terminals such as registers, grilles, diffusers, louvers, and hoods.

H. Main: Duct containing the system's major or entire fluid flow.

I. Submain: Duct containing part of the systems' capacity and serving two or more branch

mains.

J. Branch main: Duct serving two or more terminals.

K. Branch: Duct serving a single terminal. 1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Agency Data, Engineer, and Technicians Data:

1. Submit the qualifications of the Test and Balance Agency and Engineer assigned to supervise the procedures, and the technicians proposed to perform the work for approval by the Architect/Engineer.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit a synopsis of the testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures and agenda proposed to be used for this project.

D. Sample Forms: Submit sample forms, if other than those standard forms prepared by the AABC are proposed.

E. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and

signature of the Test and Balance Engineer. The reports shall be certified proof that the systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with the referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how the systems have been installed; are a true representation of how the systems are operating at the completion of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are an accurate record of all final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow the procedures and format specified below:

1. Draft reports: Upon completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures,

prepare draft reports on the approved forms. Draft reports may be hand written, but must be complete, factual, accurate, and legible. Organize and format draft reports in the same manner specified for the final reports. Submit 2 complete sets of draft reports. This report must be submitted to and approved by the Architect/Engineer prior to the substantial completion walk-thru. For this purpose,


the Architect/Engineer must receive report at least five (5) working days prior to substantial completion walk-thru. Only 1 complete set of draft reports will be returned.

2. Final Report: Upon verification and approval of draft reports, prepare final reports, type written, and organized and formatted as specified below. Submit 2 complete sets of final reports.

3. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by the referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with the project identification and a title descriptive of the contents. Divide the contents of the binder into the below listed divisions, separated by divider tabs:

a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Temperature Control Systems d. Special Systems e. Sound and Vibration Systems.

4. Report Contents: Provide the following minimum information, forms and data:

a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Also include a certification sheet containing the seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of the Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division a listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with the proof of calibration.

b. The remainder of the report shall contain the appropriate forms containing as a minimum, the information indicated on the standard report forms prepared by the AABC for each respective item and system. Prepare a schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

F. Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all required instrumentation has been calibrated

to tolerances specified in the referenced standards, within a period of six months prior to starting the project.


A. Agency: This contractor shall solicit quotes for test and balance work from at least (3) qualified companies. Submit quotes and names to Architect/Engineer and Owner=s Project Manager for final acceptance. An allowance of $10,000.00 shall be included in the CM budget to cover test and balance work.

B. Agency Qualifications:

1. Employ the services of an independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency

meeting the qualifications specified below, to be the single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building mechanical systems identified above, to produce the design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for


conformity to design, measurement and establishment of the fluid quantities of the mechanical systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting the results.

2. Tester: A firm certified by the National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB), Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or satisfying Owner and Architect/Engineer of their competency in the testing and balancing disciplines similar to those required for this project, who is not Installer of system to be tested and is otherwise independent of the project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. AABC: "National Standards For Total System Balance". 2. ASHRAE: ASHRAE Handbook, 1984 Systems Volume, Chapter 37, Testing,

Adjusting, and Balancing.

D. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of the testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures, schedule and conduct a conference with the Architect/Engineer and representatives of installers of the mechanical systems. The objective of the conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.


A. Systems Operation: Systems shall be fully operational prior to beginning procedures. Coordinate test and balance effort to conduct a preliminary air flow tests prior to the complete installation of the ceiling.


A. Test, adjust, and balance the air systems.

B. Test, adjust and balance air conditioning systems during summer season and heating systems during winter season, including at least a period of operation at outside conditions within 5 deg F wet bulb temperature of maximum summer design condition, and within 10 deg F dry bulb temperature of minimum winter design condition. Take final temperature readings during seasonal operation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES FOR AIR SYSTEM BALANCING

A. Before operating the system, perform these steps:

1. Obtain design drawings and specifications and become thoroughly acquainted with the design intent.


2. Obtain copies of approved shop drawings of all air handling equipment, outlets (supply, return, and exhaust) and temperature control diagrams.

3. Compare design to installed equipment and field installations. 4. Walk the system from the system air handling equipment to terminal units to

determine variations of installation from design. 5. Check filters for cleanliness. 6. Check dampers (both volume and fire) for correct and locked position, and

temperature control for completeness of installation before starting fans. 7. Prepare report test sheets for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet

factors and recommended procedures for testing. Prepare a summation of required outlet volumes to permit a crosscheck with required fan volumes.

8. Determine best locations in main and branch ductwork for most accurate duct traverses.

9. Place outlet dampers in the full open position. 10. Prepare schematic diagrams of system "as-built" ductwork and piping layouts to

facilitate reporting. 11. Check fan belt tension 12. Check fan rotation

3.02 MEASUREMENTS

A. Provide all required instrumentation to obtain proper measurements, calibrated to the tolerances specified in the referenced standards. Instruments shall be properly maintained and protected against damage.

B. Provide instruments meeting the specifications of the referenced standards.

C. Use only those instruments which have the maximum field measuring accuracy and are

best suited to the function being measured.

D. Apply instrument as recommended by the manufacturer.

E. Use instruments with minimum scale and maximum subdivisions and with scale ranges proper for the value being measured.

F. When averaging values, take a sufficient quantity of readings which will result in a

repeatability error of less than 5 percent. When measuring a single point, repeat readings until 2 consecutive identical values are obtained.

G. Take all reading with the eye at the level of the indicated value to prevent parallax.

H. Use pulsation dampeners where necessary to eliminate error involved in estimating

average of rapidly fluctuation readings.

I. Take measurements in the system where best suited to the task. 3.03 PERFORMING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING

A. Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system identified, in accordance with the detailed procedures outlined in the referenced standards.


B. Cut insulation on ductwork for installation of test probes to the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures.

C. Patch insulation, ductwork, and housings, using materials identical to those removed.

D. Seal ducts, and test for and repair leaks.

E. Seal insulation to re-establish integrity of the vapor barrier.

F. Mark equipment settings, including damper control positions, valve indicators, fan speed

control levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings. Mark with paint or other suitable, permanent identification materials.

G. Retest, adjust, and balance systems subsequent to significant system modifications,

and resubmit test results. 3.04 TESTING FOR SOUND AND VIBRATION

A. Test and adjust mechanical systems if required by Architect/Engineer for sound and vibration in accordance with the detailed instructions of the referenced standards.

3.05 RECORD AND REPORT DATA

A. Record all data obtained during testing, adjusting, and balancing in accordance with, and on the forms recommended by the referenced standards, and as approved on the sample report forms.

B. Prepare report of recommendations for correcting unsatisfactory mechanical performances when system cannot be successfully balanced.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16010 - 1 of 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements for electrical installations. The following administrative and procedural requirements are included in this Section to expand the requirements specified in Division 1:

1. Submittals. 2. Record documents. 3. Maintenance manuals. 4. Rough-ins. 5. Electrical installations. 6. Cutting and patching.


section:

1. Division 15 Section "ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT@, for factory-installed or field supplied motors, controllers, accessories, and connections.

2. Division 16 Section "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS@, for

materials and methods common to the remainder of Division 16, plus general related specifications including:

a. Access to electrical installations. b. Excavation for electrical installations within the building boundaries and from

building to utility connections.

3. Division 15 Section "TEMPERATURE CONTROLS". 1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01330 - Submittal Procedures. 1.04 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1,


indicate installed conditions for:

1. Major raceway systems, including cable trays size and location, for both exterior and interior; locations of control devices; distribution and branch electrical circuitry; and fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements.

2. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

3. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, and actual equipment and materials installed.

1.05 MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare a minimum of four sets of maintenance manuals in accordance with Division 1 Section "PROJECT CLOSEOUT@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, include the following information for equipment items:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to the project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades, compliance labels, and other information needed for identification.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

NOT APPLICABLE PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins of all electrical installations with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. The A/E reserves the right to make minor adjustments (+3') in box locations during rough-in at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

3.02 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of electrical


systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate electrical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components. It is the intent of the design to locate all conduits, cable trays, and wiring in the suspended ceiling space unless otherwise indicated.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed. 5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and

equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components, where installed exposed in finished spaces.

10. Install electrical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Division 8 Section "ACCESS DOORS" and Division 16 Section "BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS@.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.


A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 Section "CUTTING AND PATCHING@. In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials required

to:

a. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. b. Remove and replace defective Work. c. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. d. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to

provide for Architect observation of concealed Work.


e. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

f. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

g. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

B. Training:

1. Contractor is to provide training for maintenance staff. Training will consist fo two

(2) eight hour sessions where all electrical equipment will be visited and regular operation and service procedures discussed. Contractor shall obtain signed affidavits from maintenance staff that training was received.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Requirements specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements" apply to

this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes limited scope general construction materials and methods for application with electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavation for underground utilities and services, including underground raceways,

vaults, and equipment. 2. Miscellaneous metals for support of electrical materials and equipment. 3. Wood grounds, nailers, blocking, fasteners, and anchorage for support of electrical

materials and equipment. 4. Joint sealers for sealing around electrical materials and equipment; and for sealing

penetrations in fire and smoke barriers, floors, and foundation walls. 5. Access panels and doors in walls, ceilings, and floors for access to electrical

materials and equipment. 1.03 SUBMITTALS



1. Access panels and doors. 2. Joint sealers.


A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer for the installation and application joint sealers, access panels, and doors.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where a fire-resistance classification is indicated, provide

access door assembly with panel door, frame, hinge, and latch from manufacturer listed in the UL "Building Materials Directory" for rating shown.

1. Provide UL Label on each fire-rated access door.



A. Deliver joint sealer materials in original unopened containers or bundles with labels informing about manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multi-component materials.

B. Store and handle joint sealer materials in compliance with the manufacturers'

recommendations to prevent their deterioration and damage. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Conditions Affecting Excavations: The following project conditions apply:

1. Maintain and protect existing building services which transit the area affected by selective demolition.

2. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by excavation operations.

3. Site Information: Subsurface conditions were investigated during the design of the Project. Reports of these investigations are available for information only; data in the reports are not intended as representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity of conditions. The Owner will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this information.

4. Existing Utilities: Locate and identify all existing underground utilities in the project area. If utilities are to remain, support and protect services during excavation operations. If required by the extent of the work, extend, reroute and reconnect said utilities to clear the required excavation work.

5. Use of explosives is not permitted.

B. Environmental Conditions: Apply joint sealers under temperature and humidity conditions within the limits permitted by the joint sealer manufacturer. Do no apply joint sealers to wet substrates.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, crushed slag, or natural or crushed sand.

B. Drainage Fill: Washed, evenly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or

uncrushed gravel, with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve, and not more than 5 percent passing a No. 4 sieve.

C. Backfill and Fill Materials: Materials complying with ASTM D2487 soil classification

groups GW, GP, GM, SM, SW, and SP; free of clay, rock, or gravel larger than 2 inches in any dimension; debris; waste; and vegetable and other deleterious matter.


2.02 MISCELLANEOUS METALS

A. Steel plates, shapes, bars, and bar grating: ASTM A 36.

B. Cold-Formed Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500.

C. Hot-Rolled Steel Tubing: ASTM A 501.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Schedule 40, welded.

E. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Premixed, factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout, recommended for interior and exterior applications.

F. Fasteners: Zinc-coated, type, grade, and class as required.

2.03 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. Framing Materials: Standard Grade, light-framing-size lumber of any species. Number 3 Common or Standard Grade boards complying with WCLIB or AWPA rules, or Number 3 boards complying with SPIB rules. Lumber shall be preservative treated in accordance with AWPB LP-2, and kiln dried to a moisture content of not more than 19 percent.

B. Construction Panels: Plywood panels; APA C-D PLUGGED INT, with exterior glue;

thickness as indicated, or if not indicated, not less that 15/32 inches. 2.04 JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Joint sealers, joint fillers, and other related materials compatible with each other and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application.

B. Colors: As selected by the Architect from manufacturer's standard colors.

C. Elastomeric Joint Sealers: Provide the following types:

1. One-part, nonacid-curing, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S,

Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for masonry, glass, aluminum, and other substrates recommended by the sealant manufacturer.

2. One-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for uses in non-traffic areas for glass, aluminum, and nonporous joint substrates; formulated with fungicide; intended for sealing interior joints with nonporous substrates; and subject to in-service exposure to conditions of high humidity and temperature extremes.

D. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealants: One-part, nonsag, mildew-resistant, paintable complying

with ASTM C 834 recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations involving joint movement of not more than plus or minus 5 percent.

E. Fire-Resistant Joint Sealers: Two-part, foamed-in-place, silicone sealant formulated for

use in through-penetration fire-stopping around cables, conduit, pipes, and duct penetrations through fire-rated walls and floors. Sealants and accessories shall have


fire-resistance ratings indicated, as established by testing identical assemblies in accordance with ASTM E 814, by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., or other testing and inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. "Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam@, Dow Corning Corp. b. "Pensil 851", General Electric Co.

2.05 ACCESS DOORS

A. Steel Access Doors and Frames: Factory-fabricated and assembled units, complete with attachment devices and fasteners ready for installation. Joints and seams shall be continuously welded steel, with welds ground smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces.

B. Frames: 16-gage steel, with a 1-inch-wide exposed perimeter flange for units installed in

unit masonry, pre-cast, or cast-in-place concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling.

1. For installation in masonry, concrete, ceramic tile, or wood paneling: 1 inch-wide-exposed perimeter flange and adjustable metal masonry anchors.

2. For gypsum wallboard or plaster: perforated flanges with wallboard bead. 3. For full-bed plaster applications: galvanized expanded metal lath and exposed

casing bead, welded to perimeter of frame.

C. Flush Panel Doors: 14-gage sheet steel, with concealed spring hinges or concealed continuous piano hinge set to open 175 degrees; factory-applied prime paint.

1. Fire-Rated Units: Insulated flush panel doors, with continuous piano hinge and

self-closing mechanism.

D. Locking Devices: Flush, screwdriver-operated cam locks.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Karp Associates, Inc. 2. Milcor Div. Inryco, Inc. 3. Nystrom, Inc.

F. Refer to architectural drawings for access door locations, type and size required.


A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting installation and application of joint sealers and access panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


3.02 PREPARATION FOR JOINT SEALERS

A. Surface Cleaning for Joint Sealers: Clean surfaces of joints immediately before applying joint sealers to comply with recommendations of joint sealer manufacturer.

B. Apply joint sealer primer to substrates as recommended by joint sealer manufacturer.

Protect adjacent areas from spillage and migration of primers, using masking tape. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 EXCAVATION

A. Slope sides of excavations to comply with local codes and ordinances. Shore and brace as required for stability of excavation.

B. Shoring and Bracing: Establish requirements for trench shoring and bracing to comply

with local codes and authorities. Maintain shoring and bracing in excavations regardless of time period excavations will be open.

1. Remove shoring and bracing when no longer required. Where sheeting is allowed

to remain, cut top of sheeting at an elevation of 30 inches below finished grade elevation.

C. Install sediment and erosion control measures in accordance with local codes and

ordinances.

D. Dewatering: Prevent surface water and subsurface or ground water from flowing into excavations and from flooding project site and surrounding area.

1. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Remove water to prevent

softening of bearing materials. Provide and maintain dewatering system components necessary to convey water away from excavations.

2. Establish and maintain temporary drainage ditches and other diversions outside excavation limits to convey surface water to collecting or run-off areas. Do not use trench excavations as temporary drainage ditches.

E. Material Storage: Stockpile satisfactory excavated materials where directed, until

required for backfill or fill. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles for proper drainage.

1. Locate and retain soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip-line of trees indicated to remain.

2. Remove and legally dispose of excess excavated materials and materials not acceptable for use as backfill or fill.

F. Trenching: Excavate trenches for electrical installations as follows:

1. Excavate trenches to the uniform width, sufficiently wide to provide ample working

room and a minimum of 6 to 9 inches clearance on both sides of raceways and equipment.

2. Excavate trenches to depth required. 3. Limit the length of open trench to that in which installations can be made and the


trench backfilled within the same day. 4. Where rock is encountered, carry excavation below required elevation and backfill

with a layer of crushed stone or gravel prior to installation of raceways and equipment. Provide a minimum of 6 inches of stone or gravel cushion between rock bearing surface and electrical installations.

G. Backfilling and Filling: Place soil materials in layers to required subgrade elevations for

each area classification listed below, using materials specified in Part 2 of this Section.

1. Under walks and pavements, use a combination of subbase materials and excavated or borrowed materials.

2. Under building slabs, use drainage fill materials. 3. Under piping and equipment, use subbase materials where required over rock

bearing surface and for correction of unauthorized excavation. 4. For raceways less than 30 inches below surface of roadways, provide 4-inch-thick

concrete base slab support. After installation of raceways, provide a 4-inch thick concrete encasement (sides and top) prior to backfilling and placement of roadway subbase.

5. Other areas, use excavated or borrowed materials.

H. Backfill excavations as promptly as work permits, but not until completion of the following:

1. Inspection, testing, approval, and locations of underground utilities have been

recorded. 2. Removal of concrete formwork. 3. Removal of shoring and bracing, and backfilling of voids. 4. Removal of trash and debris.

I. Placement and Compaction: Place backfill and fill materials in layers of not more than 8

inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

J. Before compaction, moisten or aerate each layer as necessary to provide optimum moisture content. Compact each layer to required percentage of maximum dry density or relative dry density for each area classification specified below. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice.

K. Place backfill and fill materials evenly adjacent to structures, piping, and equipment to

required elevations. Prevent displacement of raceways and equipment by carrying material uniformly around them to approximately same elevation in each lift.

L. Compaction: Control soil compaction during construction, providing minimum

percentage of density specified for each area classification indicated below.

1. Percentage of Maximum Density Requirements: Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum density for soils which exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesive soils), determined in accordance with ASTM D 1557 and not less than the following percentages of relative density, determined in accordance with ASTM D 2049, for soils which will not exhibit a well-defined moisture-density relationship (cohesionless soils).

2. Areas Under Structures, Building Slabs and Steps, Pavements: Compact top 12


inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

3. Areas Under Walkways: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 90 percent maximum density for cohesive material, or 95 percent relative density for cohesionless material.

4. Other Areas: Compact top 6 inches of subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils, and 90 percent relative density for cohesionless soils.

5. Moisture Control: Where subgrade or layer of soil material must be moisture conditioned before compaction, uniformly apply water. Apply water in minimum quantity necessary to achieve required moisture content and to prevent water appearing on surface during, or subsequent to, compaction operations.

M. Subsidence: Where subsidence occurs at electrical installation excavations during the

period 12 months after Substantial Completion, remove surface treatment (i.e., pavement, lawn, or other finish), add backfill material, compact to specified conditions, and replace surface treatment. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of surface or finish to match adjacent areas.

3.04 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS "Structural Welding Code@.

3.05 ERECTION OF WOOD SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE

A. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.

B. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be

exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

C. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

3.06 APPLICATION OF JOINT SEALERS

A. General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers' printed application instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 962 for use of elastomeric joint

sealants. 2. Comply with recommendations of ASTM C 790 for use of acrylic-emulsion joint

sealants.

B. Tooling: Immediately after sealant application and prior to time shinning or curing


begins, tool sealants to form smooth, uniform beads; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. Remove excess sealants from surfaces adjacent to joint. Do not use tooling agents that discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces or are not approved by sealant manufacturer.

C. Installation of Fire-Stopping Sealant: Install sealant, including forming, packing, and

other accessory materials, to fill openings around electrical services penetrating floors and walls, to provide fire-stops with fire-resistance ratings indicated for floor or wall assembly in which penetration occurs. Comply with installation requirements established by testing and inspecting agency.

3.07 INSTALLATION OF ACCESS DOORS

A. Set frames accurately in position and securely attached to supports, with face panels plumb and level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.

B. Adjust hardware and panels after installation for proper operation.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16110 - 1 of 7 RACEWAYS

SECTION 16110 RACEWAYS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this Section:

1. "Basic Electrical Requirements@. 2. "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods@.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes raceways for electrical wiring. Types of raceways in this section include the following:

1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). 2. Flexible metal conduit. 3. Liquidtight flexible conduit. 4. Underground plastic utilities duct. 5. Galvanized rigid metal conduit. 6. Surface raceways. 7. Wireway. 8. Intermediate metallic conduit (IMC).

B. Related Sections: The following Division 16 Sections contain requirements that relate to

this Section:

1. "Cable Trays" for cable-tray-type raceway. 2. "Underfloor Ducts" for underfloor duct raceways. 3. "Wires and Cables" for other wiring methods. 4. "Supporting Devices" for raceway supports. 5. "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for boxes used with conduit and tubing systems.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for the proposed products. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", 1987 Edition


B. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA standards pertaining to raceways.

C. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of UL standards

pertaining to electrical raceway systems. Provide raceway products and components listed and labeled by UL, ETL, or CSA.


A. Coordinate with other Work, including metal and concrete deck installation, as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and components with other Work.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Conduit Bodies:

Adalet-PLM American Electric Appleton Electric Co. Crouse-Hinds Division, Cooper Industries, Inc.

2. Surface Metal Raceway:

Allied Tube & Conduit American Electric B-Line Systems, Inc. Hubbell Square D Co. The Wiremold Co.

2.02 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.

B. Intermediate Steel Conduit: UL 1242.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit: UL 1, zinc-coated steel.

E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Fittings: UL 360.

F. Fittings shall be specifically approved for use by the A/E for each type of raceway.


2.03 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS

A. Underground PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct: NEMA TC 6, Type I for encased burial in concrete, Type II for direct burial.

B. PVC and ABS Plastic Utilities Duct Fittings: NEMA TC 9; match to duct type and

material.

C. Conduit, Tubing, and Duct Accessories: Types, sizes, and materials complying with manufacturer's published product information. Mate and match accessories with raceway.

2.04 CONDUIT BODIES

A. General: Types, shapes, and sizes as required to suit individual applications and NEC requirements. Provide matching gasketed covers secured with corrosion-resistant screws.

B. Metallic Conduit and Tubing: Use metallic conduit bodies. Use bodies with threaded

hubs for threaded raceways.

C. Conduit Bodies 1 Inch and Smaller: Use bodies with compression type connectors. 2.05 WIREWAYS

A. General: Electrical wireways shall be of types, sizes, and number of channels as indicated. Fittings and accessories including but not limited to couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, and end caps shall match and mate with wireway as required for complete system. Where features are not indicated, select to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with applicable provisions of NEC.

2.06 SURFACE RACEWAYS

A. General: Sizes and channels as indicated. Provide fittings that match and mate with raceway.

B. Surface Raceway: Non-metallic pre-wired surface, two piece, snap fit raceway with fully

assembled 20 ampere, 125 V AC duplex receptacles and factory installed integral transient voltage surge supressor device. Provide raceways in lengths required.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD

A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC)

1. Galvanized rigid conduit may be used for all applications. Except where indicated otherwise, galvanized rigid conduit must always be used in the following applications.


a) Underground b) Cast in floor slabs c) Anywhere there is exposed conduit, up to 8'-0" above floor.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC)

1. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC) may be used for the same applications as rigid

galvanized, except:

a) IMC may not be used underground. b) IMC may not be used in or below the ground floor.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT)

1. EMT may be used for the following applications, unless indicated otherwise:

a) Indoors in concealed areas (in partitions, above ceiling). b) Exposed in storage rooms and in mechanical and electrical rooms. c) Above 8'-0" in areas of exposed conduit.

2. EMT may not be used in the following applications:

a) Out-of-doors. b) Damp or moist locations. c) Exposed under exterior canopies or overhangs. d) Underground. e) Cast in floor slabs.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit

1. Flexible metal steel conduit shall be used for all connections to indoor lighting

fixtures in lengths not to exceed six feet. 2. Liquid-tight type flexible metal steel conduit shall be used for all other applications

where flexible connections are required.

E. PVC Conduit

1. PVC conduit may be used in the following applications:

a) In ductbanks when totally encased on all sides in a concrete envelope. b) For routing of lightning protection system down conductors when cast into

building elements. c) Cast in floor slabs.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install electrical raceways in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and as follows:


B. Conceal Conduit and EMT, unless indicated otherwise, within finished walls and

ceilings. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of hot water pipes. Install raceways level and square and at proper elevations.

C. Elevation of Raceway: Where possible, install horizontal raceway runs above water

piping.

D. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of conductors within raceways.

E. Provide supports for raceways as specified elsewhere in Division 16.

F. Prevent foreign matter from entering raceways by using temporary closure protection.

G. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise from floor slabs. Arrange so curved

portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

H. Make bends and offsets so the inside diameter is not effectively reduced. Unless otherwise indicated, keep the legs of a bend in the same plane and the straight legs of offsets parallel.

I. Use raceway fittings that are of types compatible with the associated raceway and

suitable for the use and location. For rigid and intermediate steel conduit, use threaded rigid steel conduit fittings. All EMT fittings shall be steel, compression type. Die cast or pot metal set screw indenter type are not acceptable.

J. Run concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance

considering the type of building construction and obstructions except as otherwise indicated. This does not apply to conduits in crawl spaces.

K. Raceways embedded in slabs: Install in middle third of the slab thickness where

practical and leave at least 1 inch concrete cover. Tie raceways to reinforcing rods or otherwise secure them to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in the concrete. Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size, parallel with or at right angles to the main reinforcement; where at right angles to the reinforcement, the conduit shall be close to one of the supports of the slab.

L. Install exposed raceways parallel and perpendicular to nearby surfaces or structural

members and follow the surface contours as much as practical.

M. Run exposed, parallel, or banked raceways together. Make bends in parallel or banked runs from the same center line so that the bends are parallel. Factory elbows may be used in banked runs only where they can be installed parallel. This requires that there be a change in the plane of the run such as from wall to ceiling and that the raceways be of the same size. In other cases provide field bends for parallel raceways.

N. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for the purpose and make joints tight.

Where joints cannot be made tight, use bonding jumpers to provide electrical continuity of the raceway system. Make raceway terminations tight. Where terminations are subject to vibration, use bonding bushings or wedges to assure electrical continuity.


Where subject to vibration or dampness, use insulating bushings to protect conductors.

O. Terminations: Raceways shall be terminated with locknuts and bushings. Align the raceway to enter squarely and install the locknuts with dished part against the box. Where terminations cannot be made secure with one locknut, use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box.

P. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub so

the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

Q. Install pull wires in all empty raceways. Use polyester or monofilament plastic line

having not less than 200 -lb. tensile strength. Leave not less than 12 inches of slack at each end of the pull wire. Identify pull wires at both ends and securely caulk in place. Pull wire shall be #14TW Thomas Industries Set Line #14TW Thomas Industries Set Line #232.

R. Telephone and Signal System Raceways 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to

the above requirements, install raceways 2-inch and smaller trade size in maximum lengths at 150 feet and with a maximum of two, 90-deg bonds or equivalent. Install pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements.

S. Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to

freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above the floor.

T. Flexible Connections: Use short length (maximum of 6 ft.) of flexible conduit for

recessed and semi-recessed lighting fixtures, for equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use liquidtight flexible conduit in wet locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.

U. Select each surface raceway outlet box to which a lighting fixture is attached to be of

sufficient diameter to provide a seat for the fixture canopy.

V. Where a surface raceway is used to supply a fluorescent lighting fixture having central stem suspension with a backplate and a canopy, with or without extension ring, the backplate and canopy will serve as the outlet box and no separate outlet box need be provided.

W. Provide surface raceway outlet box, in addition to the backplate and canopy, at the

feed-in location of each fluorescent lighting fixture having end stem suspension.

X. Where a surface raceway extension is made from an existing outlet box on which a lighting fixture is installed, provide a backplate slightly smaller than the fixture canopy, and no additional surface mounted outlet box need be installed.

Y. Conduits rigidly secured to building construction on opposite sides of a building

expansion joint shall be provided with expansion joints and deflection couplings.



A. Upon completion of installation of raceways, inspect interiors of raceways; clear all blockages and remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16120 - 1 of 4 WIRES AND CABLES

SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. Basic Electrical Requirements.

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power, lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts and less.


section:

1. Division 16 Section "Electrical Boxes and Fittings" for connectors for Terminating Cables in boxes and other electrical enclosures.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for electrical wires, cables and connectors. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", 1987 Edition.

1. Conform to applicable codes and regulations regarding toxicity of combustion products of insulating materials.

C. UL Compliance: Provide components which are listed and labeled by UL.




1. Wire and Cable:

American Insulated Wire Corp. Brintec Corp. Southwire Company.

2. Connectors for Wires and Cable Conductors:

3M Company O-Z/Gedney Co. Square D Company.

2.02 WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Provide wire and cable suitable for the temperature, conditions and location where installed.

B. Conductors: Provide solid copper conductors for all power and lighting circuits no. 10

AWG and smaller. Provide stranded conductors for sizes no. 8 AWG and larger. Branch circuit conductors shall be #12 AWG minimum.

C. Conductor Material: copper for all to include:

1. All wire and cable. 2. All bussing in switchboards and panelboards. 3. All lugs and connectors.

a. Lugs must be copper (not aluminum or Cu/Al). b. All compression lugs and connectors shall be installed per UL Article 486-B

and terminated with combination dual rated compression tool.

D. Provide color coding for phase identification in accordance with Table 1 in Part 3 below.

E. Insulation: In general, provide THHN/THWN insulation for all conductors. In addition, provide THW or XHHW insulation as appropriate for the locations where installed.

F. Jackets: Factory-applied nylon or PVC external jacketed wires and cables for pulls in

raceways over 100-feet in length, for pulls in raceways with more than three equivalent 90 deg. bends, for pulls in conduits underground or under slabs on grade, and where indicated.

G. Cables: Provide cables in NEC approved locations and applications where indicated.

Provide cable UL listed for particular application. 2.03 CONNECTORS FOR CONDUCTORS

A. Provide UL-listed factory-fabricated, solderless metal connectors of sizes, ampacity ratings, materials, types and classes for applications and for services indicated. Use connectors with temperature ratings equal to or greater than those of the wires upon which used.


PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING METHOD

A. Use the following wiring methods as indicated:

1. Wire: install all wire in raceway. Not more than five (5) wires including equipment ground conductor shall be installed in a conduit run except by special permission.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES

A. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.

B. Coordinate cable installation with other Work.

C. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in same raceway. Use UL listed pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary.

D. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave wire/cable grips

which will not damage cables or raceways. Do not use rope hitches for pulling attachment to wire or cable.

E. Conceal all cable in finished spaces.

F. Install exposed cable parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours, where possible.

G. Keep conductor splices to minimum.

H. Install splice and tap connectors which possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation rating than conductors being spliced.

I. Use splice and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material.

J. Provide adequate length of conductors within electrical enclosures and train the

conductors to terminal points with no excess. Bundle multiple conductors, with conductors larger than no 10 AWG cabled in individual circuits. Make terminations so there is no bare conductor at the terminal.

K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance

with manufacturer's published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

L. 120 volt circuits for lighting and receptacles exceeding 100 feet in length from the

panelboard to the first outlet shall be #10 AWG to the first outlet and #12 AWG there on. 277 volt lighting circuits exceeding 200 feet in length from the panelboard to the first lighting outlet shall be #10 AWG to the first outlet and #12 AWG there on. Contractor to


provide for these provisions at no additional costs to the Owner. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper

functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. 3.04 TABLE 1

A. Color Coding for Phase Identification:

1. Color code secondary service, feeder, and branch circuit conductors as follows:

Wire of size No. 6 and smaller shall be factory color coded. Wire sizes larger than No. 6 may be factory color coded or color coded with properly applied tape. Should tape be used, it shall cover not less than 6 inches of cable at each outlet, cabinet or junction box. Tape shall be Scotch No. 461.

Colors to be used in coding shall be:

208y/120 Volts Phase 480y/277 Volts Black A Brown Red B Orange Blue C Yellow White Neutral Gray w/White Tracer Green Ground Green

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16135 - 1 of 4 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. This section is a Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is a

part of each Division-16 section making reference to electrical wiring boxes and fittings specified herein.


A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this section include the following:

1. Outlet boxes. 2. Junction boxes. 3. Pull boxes. 4. Floor boxes. 6. Bushings. 7. Locknuts. 8. Knockout closures.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical boxes and fittings, of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of

electrical wiring boxes and fittings.

C. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514-Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide electrical boxes and fittings which are UL-listed and labeled.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical boxes and fittings.



A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following:

1. Appleton Electric; Emerson Electric Co. 2. Bell Electric; Square D Company 3. Eagle Electric Mfg. Co., Inc. 4. Pass and Seymour, Inc. 5. RACO Div; Harvey Hubbell Inc. 6. Walker, Omni Box.

2.02 FABRICATED MATERIALS

A. Outlet Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting holes, and with cable and conduit-size knockout openings in bottom and sides. Provide boxes with threaded screw holes, with corrosion-resistant cover and grounding screws for fastening surface and device type box covers, and for equipment type grounding.

1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required for each

installation, including box supports, mounting ears and brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code-compliance option.

B. Device Boxes: Provide galvanized coated flat rolled sheet-steel non-gangable device

boxes, of shapes, cubic inch capacities, and sizes, including box depths as indicated, suitable for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush mounting with mounting holes, and with cable-size knockout openings in bottom and ends, and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion-resistant screws for fastening cable clamps, and for equipment type grounding.

1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required for each

installation, including mounting brackets, device box extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring situations. Choice of accessories is Installer's code-compliance option.

C. Raintight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion-resistant cast-metal raintight outlet wiring

boxes, of types, shapes and sizes, including depth of boxes, with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast-metal face plates with spring-hinged watertight caps suitably configured for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion-resistant plugs and fasteners.


D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide galvanized code-gage sheet steel junction and pull boxes, with screw-on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, bolts, screws and washers.

E. Floor Boxes: Provide galvanized steel floor boxes as indicated, with threaded-conduit-

entrance ends, and vertical adjusting rings, gaskets, brass floor plates with flush screw-on covers with ground flange and stainless steel cover and screws.

1. Floor Box Accessories: Provide flush type two-pole, three-wire, grounded,

125-volts, 20-amperes, floor-type receptacles with brass flanges and brass recessed flap cover.

F. Bushings, Knockout Closures and Locknuts: Provide corrosion-resistant box knockout

closures at all unused box openings, conduit locknuts and malleable iron conduit bushings, offset connectors, of types and sizes, to suit respective installation requirements and applications.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS

A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire/cable, wiring devices,

and raceway installation work.

C. Coordinate the exact location and mounting height of all system boxes with architectural plans and elevations prior to rough-in.

D. The A/E reserves the right to offset and/or modify the location of device backboxes prior

to rough-in at no additional cost to the Owner.

E. Provide weathertight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to weather or moisture.

F. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have been

removed. G. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to enclosed

electrical wiring.

H. Avoid installing boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide not less than 6" (150 mm) separation.

I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish thickness.

J. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material.


K. Avoid using round boxes where conduit must enter box through side of box, which

would result in difficult and insecure connections when fastened with locknut or bushing on rounded surfaces.

L. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces to which

attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry.

M. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris and damage.

N. Die cast or pot metal boxes, extensions or mud rings are not acceptable. Provide steel

for all.

O. Boxes which enclose flush devices shall be provided with the proper mud ring to insure that the front edge to finish sets flush in compliance to the NEC. Goofrings are not acceptable.

3.02 GROUNDING

A. Upon completion of installation work, properly ground electrical boxes and demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16142 - 1 of 5 FOR EQUIPMENT

SECTION 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. This section is a Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is part

of each Division-15 and -16 section making reference to electrical connections for equipment specified herein.


A. Provide all required electrical connections for equipment as required and/or indicated by drawings and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include electrical power, connections and ancillary equipment such as low voltage relays, transformers, etc. used for providing electrical power to equipment.

B. Applications of electrical power connections specified in this section include the

following:

1. To resistive heaters. 2. From electrical source to motor starters. 3. From motor starters to motors. 4. From motor starters to variable frequently drives to motors. 5. To lighting fixtures. 6. To converters, rectifiers, step-down transformers, inverters, rheostats, relays,

remote control units, and similar current adjustment features of equipment. 7. To grounds including earthing connections. 8. To master units of communication, signal, alarm, clock, public address, sound, and

video systems. 9. To motorized dampers. 10. To fire/smoke dampers.

C. Electrical connections for related equipment, not furnished as an integral part of

equipment, are specified in Division-15 and other Division-16 sections, and are work of this section.

D. Motor starters and controllers, not furnished as an integral part of equipment, are

specified in applicable Division-16 sections, and are work of this section.

E. Refer to Division-15 sections for motor starters and controllers furnished integrally with equipment; not work of this section.

F. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors and other

electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division-16 sections, and are work of this section.


G. Electrical identification for wire/cable conductors is specified in Division-16 section,

"Electrical Identification", and is work of this section.

H. Raceways and wires/cables required for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division-16 sections, and are work of this section.

I. Refer to other Division-16 sections for junction boxes and disconnect switches required

for connecting motors and other electrical units of equipment; not work of this section.

J. Refer to Division-15 sections for control system wiring; not work of this section.

K. Refer to sections of other Divisions for specific individual equipment power requirements, not work of this section.


A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, and cable ties, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation

experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for equipment similar to that required for this project.

C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to type products

used and installation of electrical power connections (terminals and splices), for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect switches.

D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for

Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide electrical connection products and materials which are UL-listed and -labeled.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following (for each type of product):

1. Adalet-PLM Div, Scott and Fetzer Co. 2. Appleton Electric Co. 3. Arrow-Hart Div, Crouse-Hinds Co. 4. Burndy Corporation. 5. Gould, Inc. 6. Harvey Hubbell Inc. 7. Square D Company. 8. Thomas and Betts Corp.


2.02 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS

A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete assembly of materials, including but not necessarily limited to, pressure connectors, terminals lugs, electrical insulating tape, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing, cable ties, solderless wire-nuts, and other items and accessories as needed to complete splices and terminations of types indicated.

B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings:

1. General: Provide metal conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and

weights (wall thicknesses) indicated for each type service. Provide products complying with Division-16 basic electrical materials and methods section "Raceways", and in accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings:

a. Rigid steel conduit. b. Rigid metal conduit fittings. c. Electrical metallic tubing. d. EMT fittings. e. Flexible metal conduit. f. Flexible metal conduit fittings. g. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit. h. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduit fittings.

C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors:

1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with Division-16 basic

electrical materials and methods section "Wires and Cables". 2. Wires/Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires/cables (conductors) for

electrical connections which match, including sizes and ratings, of wires/cables which are supplying electrical power. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 20 deg. C (68 deg. F).

3. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals which mate and match, including sizes and ratings, with equipment terminals and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended applications.

4. Electrical Connection Accessories: Provide electrical insulating tape, heat-shrinkable insulating tubing and boots, electrical solder, electrical soldering flux, wirenuts and cable ties as recommended for use by accessories manufacturers for type services indicated.


A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation,

as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation

resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.

E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.

F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate

inspection, testing and maintenance.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.

H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections, and other electrical equipment

connections, where subject to movement and vibration.

I. Provide liquid-tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration, and also where connections are subjected to one or more of the following conditions:

1. Exterior location. 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to accumulate. 3. Water spray. 4. Dripping oil, grease, or water.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and


compliance with requirements. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16143 - 1 of 5 WIRING DEVICES

SECTION 16143 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Receptacles 2. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles 3. Plugs 4. Plug Connectors 5. Snap Switches 6. Incandescent Lamp Dimmer-Switches 7. Wall Plates 8. Floor Service Outlets


section:

1. Division 16 Section "Circuit and Motor Disconnects" for devices other than snap switches and plug/receptacle sets used as disconnects for motors.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes.

B. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", 1999 Edition.

1. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are listed and labeled by UL and comply with applicable UL and NEMA standards.


1.05 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Schedule installation of finish plates after the surface upon which they are installed has received final finish.



1. Leviton 2. Hubbell Inc. 3. Pass and Seymour 4. Slater

2.02 WIRING DEVICES

A. General: Provide wiring devices, in types, characteristics, grades, colors, and electrical ratings for applications indicated which are UL listed and which comply with NEMA WD 1 and other applicable UL and NEMA standards. Provide ivory color devices and wall plates except as otherwise indicated. Verify color selections with Architect.

B. Receptacles: As scheduled in Table 1 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 498 and NEMA

WD 1.

C. Receptacles, Industrial Heavy Duty: Provide pin and sleeve design receptacles conforming to UL 498. Comply with UL 1010 where installed in hazardous locations. Provide features indicated.

D. Ground-Fault Interrupter (GFI) Receptacles: as indicated in Table 1 in Part 3 below;

provide "feed-thru" type ground-fault circuit interrupter, with integral heavy-duty NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacles arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Provide unit designed for installation in a 2-3/4 inch deep outlet box without adapter, grounding type, Class A, Group 1, per UL Standard 94.3.

E. Plugs: 20-amperes, 125-volts, 3-wire, grounding, armored cap plugs, parallel blades

with cord clamp, and 0.4 inch cord hole; match NEMA configuration with power source's.

F. Plug Connetcors: 20-amperes, 125-volts, bakelite-body armored connectors, 3-wire,

grounding, parallel blades, double wipe contact, with cord clamp, and 0.4 inch cord hole, match NEMA configuration to mating plug's. Arrange as indicated.

G. Snap Switches: quiet type AC switches as indicated in Table 2 in Part 3 below. Comply with UL 20 and NEMA WD1.

H. Dimmer Switches: solid state dimmer switches conforming to NEMA WD 1, mounted in

outlet boxes as indicated and in accordance with the following:


1. Incandescent Lamp Dimmers: modular dimmer switches for incandescent fixtures; switch poles and wattage as indicated, 120-volts, 60-Hz, with slide control and quiet on-off switch. Equip with electromagnetic filter to eliminate noise, RF and TV interference, and 5 inch wire connecting leads.

2. Fluorescent Lamp Dimmers: full-wave modular type AC dimmer switches, for fluorescent fixtures; wattage and voltage ratings as required, and electromagnetic filters to minimize noise, and RF and TV interference. Construct with continuously adjustable trim potentiometer for adjustment of low end dimming, anodized heat sinks, 5 inch wire connecting leads and quiet on-off switch.

2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES

A. Wall plates: single and combination, of types, sizes, and with ganging and cutouts as indicated. Provide plates which mate and match with wiring devices to which attached. Provide metal screws for securing plates to devices with screw heads colored to match finish of plates. Provide wall plate color to match wiring devices except as otherwise indicated. Provide wall plates with engraved legend where indicated. Conform to requirements of Section "Electrical Identification." Provide plates possessing the following additional construction features:

1. Material and Finish: steel plate with wrinkled finish, baked-on white insulating

enamel. (Unfinished spaces). 2. Material and Finish: plastic, smooth. (Finished spaces).

B. Floor Service Outlets: modular, flush-floor service outlets and fittings of types and

ratings indicated. Construct of die cast aluminum, satin finish. Use design compatible with floor outlet wiring methods indicated. Provide 20-amperes, 125-volts, gray duplex receptacles. NEMA configuration 5-20R where indicated. Provide with 3/4 inch or 1 inch NPT, 1 inch long, locking nipple for installation where compatible with wiring method.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES AND ACCESSORIES

A. Install wiring devices and accessories as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements.

B. Coordinate with other Work, including painting, electrical boxes and wiring installations,

as necessary to interface installation of wiring devices with other Work. C. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from building

materials, dirt, and debris.

D. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed.

E. Install wiring devices after painting work is completed.


F. Install wall plates after painting work is completed.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for wiring devices. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A. Use properly scaled torque indicating hand tool.

H. All convenience receptacle outlets installed within six (6) feet of water supplies, wet

locations, toilet rooms and the exterior of the Building shall have an integral ground fault circuit interruptor (GFCI) protection device.

3.02 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed components from damage. Replace damaged items prior to final acceptance.


A. Testing: Prior to energizing circuits, test wiring for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. Subsequent to energizing, test wiring devices and demonstrate compliance with requirements, operating each operable device at least six times.

B. Test ground fault interruptor operation with both local and remote fault simulations in

accordance with manufacturer recommendations:


TABLE 1 RECEPTACLES

DESIG- CURRENT VOLTAGE SINGLE/ NEMA UL NOTES NATION RATING RATING DUPLEX CONFIG- GRADE (1) AMPS URATION - 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY D 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY TVSS PROTECTION WP 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY WEATHERPROOF GFI 20 125 DUPLEX 5-20R HEAVY DUTY INTEGRAL GFI

GFI (3) NOTES (1) Letter designations are used where symbols alone do not clearly designate on plans locations where

specific receptacle types are used. (2) Item is a clock type outlet with device recessed below face of cover plate and with hood to hang clock. (3) Protects downstream receptacles on same circuit. TABLE 2 SNAP SWITCHES

DESIG- TYPICAL LOAD VOLTAGE POLES UL NOTES NATION APPLICATION RATING RATING GRADE (3) (AC) S CONTROL LIGHTS 20A 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY S3 CONTROL LIGHTS 20A 120/277 3-way HEAVY DUTY SM DISCONN. MOTOR HP 120/277 1 HEAVY DUTY (2)

RATED SD DIMMER SWITCH 1000W 120 1 HEAVY DUTY (3) NOTES (1) For snap switches, designation is the same as the symbol used on plans for the device. Type of switch is

determined from plan context including type of device or circuit being controlled. (2) No overload element in switch. (3) Derate dimmer switch and increase required rating per manufacturer's recommendations where dimmers

are ganged together. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16144 - 1 of 5 SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM

SECTION 16144 SURGE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to this Section.



1.02 SUMMARY

A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a high energy transient voltage surge suppression system (TVSS). The specified system shall provide effective high energy surge current diversion and be suitable for application in ANSI/IEEE C62.41 Category A, B, and C environments. The system shall be connected in parallel with the protected system; no series-connected elements shall be used.

1.03 STANDARDS

A. The specified system shall be designed, manufactured, tested, and installed in compliance with:

1. American National Standards Institute and

Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.1, C62.41 and C62.45).

2. Canadian Standards Association (CSA). 3. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94). 4. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA). 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 70, 75, and 78). 6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL 1449).

B. The system shall be UL listed as a complete system under UL 1449 Standard for

Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Environmental Requirements:

1. Storage Temperature: Range shall be -55 to +85 C (-67 to +185 F). 2. Operating Temperature: Range shall be -40 to +50 C (-40 to 122 F). 3. Relative Humidity: Operation shall be reliable in an environment with 0% to 95%

non-condensing relative humidity. 4. Audible Noise: The audible noise level of the specified system shall be less than

40 dBA at 5 feet (1.5m).


5. Operating Altitude: The system shall be capable of operation up to an altitude of 12,000 feet above sea level.

B. Electrical Requirements:

1. System Operation Voltage: The nominal system operating voltage shall be:

a. 120/208 volt, three phase wye, 4 wire plus ground.

2. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage: The transient voltage suppressor's maximum continuous operating voltage shall be greater than 110% of the nominal system operating voltage to ensure the ability of the system to withstand temporary overvoltage conditions.

3. Operating Frequency: The operating frequency range of the system shall be at

least 47 to 63 Hertz.

4. Protection Modes: Transient voltage suppression shall be provided for protection against line-to-neutral, line-to-ground, and neutral-to-ground disturbances.

The maximum surge current capacity of the specified system shall be at least 75 kAmps based on the standard 8 x 20 microsecond current waveform.

5. Performance Ratings: The system performance ratings shall be based on the Ul

1449 listing ratings for IEEE C62.41 Category B equipment. The maximum UL 1449 voltage clamping ratings for each of the specified protection modes shall be:

a. 400 volts for 120/208 volt systems.

1.05 DOCUMENTATION

A. Equipment Manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual with installation, start-up, and operating instructions for the specified system.

B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer

which show unit dimensions, weights, component and connection locations, mounting provisions, connection details, and wiring diagram.

C. UL 1449 Ratings: Documentation of specified system's UL 1449 listing and clamping

voltage ratings shall be included as required product data submittal information.

D. Spare Parts: A list of recommended spare parts shall be supplied at the customer's request.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. The manufacturer shall provide a full five-year warranty from date of shipment against any part failure when installed in compliance with manufacturer's written instructions, UL listing requirements, and any applicable national or local electrical codes.



A. The specified system shall be thoroughly factory-tested before shipment. Testing of each system shall include but shall not be limited to quality control checks, "Hi-Pot" tests at two times rated voltage plus 1000 volts per UL requirements, IEEE C62.41 Category B surge tests, UL ground leakage tests, and operational and calibration tests.



1. Liebert 2. Advanced Protection Technologies 3. L.E.A. Dynatech 4. Leviton 5. Atlantic Scientific Corp.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. The system shall be constructed using surge current diversion modules, each rated for at least 75 kAmps of surge current capacity based on the standard 8 x 20 microsecond waveform. Further, each module shall be capable of withstanding over 1000 pulses of the 10k amps IEEE C62.41 Category C surge current without degradation of clamping voltage. The module shall consist of multiple gap-less metal oxide varistors, with each MOV individually fused. The modules shall be designed and constructed in a manner which ensures reasonable MOV surge current sharing. No gas tubes or silicon avalanche diodes shall be used. The status of each varistor shall be monitored and a green LED shall be illuminated if the module is in full working order. When module performance is degraded, such as if one or more fuses or varistors have failed, the LED shall indicate a failed module.

2.03 CONNECTIONS

A. Terminal shall be provided for all of the necessary power and ground connections. The terminals shall accommodate wire sizes of #14 to #2/0 AWG for two conductors per required connection, thereby allowing a Kelvin connection of the TVSS which minimizes the actual clamped voltage at the protected circuit.

2.04 INTERNAL CONNECTIONS

A. All surge current diversion module intra-unit connections shall be by way of low impedance plated busbars. No small gauge round wire or plug-in connections shall be used as the surge current carrying conductor. Surge current diversion modules shall use bolted connections to the plated busbars for reliable low impedance connections. All module mounting hardware and power wiring shall be captive or remain in place when a module is removed or replaced.


2.05 ENCLOSURE

A. The specified system shall be provided in a heavy duty NEMA 12 dustight, driptight enclosure with no ventilation openings. The cover of the enclosure shall be hinged on the left side and require a tool for access to internal components. A drawing pocket shall be provided inside the door for storage of unit drawings and installation/operation manual. Indication of surge current module status shall be visible without opening the door. Enclosure maximum dimensions shall be 24 inches wide, 30 inches high, and 7 inches deep.

2.06 ACCESSORIES

A. Unit Status Indicators. Red and green solid state indicators shall be provided on the hinged front cover to redundantly indicate unit module status. The absence of the green light and the presence of the red light shall reliably indicate that one or more surge current diversion modules has failed and that service is needed to restore full operation. Additionally, a Form C (one N.O. and one N.C.) summary alarm contact rated for at least 120 VAC and 1 Ampere shall be provided for remote annunciation of unit status. The summary alarm contact shall change state if any one or more of the surge current diversion modules has failed.

B. Audible Alarm. The specified system shall be equipped with an audible alarm which

shall be activated when any one or more of the surge current diversion modules has failed. In conjunction with the audible alarm, an alarm on/off switch shall be provided to silence the alarm and an alarm push-to-test switch shall be provided to test the alarm function. Both switches and the audible alarm shall be located on the unit's hinged front cover.

C. Service Disconnect Switch. Each "TVSS" unit shall be provided with an integral

disconnect switch. The switch shall disconnect all ungrounded circuit conductors from the high energy surge current diversion modules. The switch shall be rated for 600 VAC and 100 Amps continuous. Wiring terminations shall be provided for at least #3 AWG. The disconnect switch shall comply with the provisions of Specification section 16170. The disconnect switch shall be field located and shall comply with applicable NEC requirements.


A. Inspect area and conditions under which electrical connections for equipment are to be installed and notify Architect/Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Architect/Engineer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS

A. Install electrical connections as indicated and required; in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, and


complying with applicable requirements of UL, NEC and NECA's "Standard of Installation" to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Coordinate with other work, including wires/cables, raceway and equipment installation,

as necessary to properly interface installation of electrical connections for equipment with other work.

C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in accordance

with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment.

D. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater insulation

resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those conductors being spliced.

E. Prepare cables and wires, by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper conductors while skinning wire.

F. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to facilitate

inspection, testing and maintenance.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturers published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Accomplish tightening by utilizing proper torquing tools, including torque screwdriver, beam-type torque wrench, and ratchet wrench with adjustable torque settings. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not available, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with torquing values contained in UL's 486A.


A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry has been energized with rated power source, test connections to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16170 - 1 of 3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

SECTION 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



1. Basic Electrical Requirements 2. Fuses

1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes circuit and motor disconnects.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Division 16 Section "Wiring Devices" for snap switches used as motor disconnects. 2. Division 16 Section "Motor Controllers" for combination type starters which

incorporate disconnect switches in the same enclosure as the starter and manual motor starters which include the disconnect function as part of the starter switch assembly.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified.

C. Maintenance data for circuit and motor disconnects, for inclusion in Operation and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Requirements@.


A. Electrical Component Standards: Provide components complying with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code" and which are listed and labeled by UL. Comply with UL Standard 98 and NEMA Standard KS 1.




1. Siemens ITE 2. Westinghouse 3. Square D Company 4. Challenger.

2.02 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches in types, sizes, duties, features, ratings, and enclosures as required. Provide NEMA 1 enclosure except for outdoor switches, and other indicated locations provide NEMA 3R enclosures with raintight hubs. For motor and motor starter disconnects, provide units with horsepower ratings suitable to the loads.

B. Fusible Switches: Heavy duty switches, with fuses of classes and current ratings

indicated. See Section "FUSES" for specifications. Where current limiting fuses are indicated, provide switches with non- interchangeable feature suitable only for current limiting type fuses.

C. Non-fusible Disconnects: Heavy duty switches of classes and current ratings as

indicated.

D. Service Switches: Heavy duty fusible switches. UL listed for use as service equipment under UL Standard 98 or 869.

2.03 ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Contacts and Interlocks: Provide number and arrangement of interlocks and contacts in switches as required.

B. Captive Fuse Pullers: Provide built-in fuse pullers arranged to facilitate fuse removal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS

A. General: Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated and where required by the Code. Comply with switch manufacturers' printed installation instructions.


A. Testing: Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, energize circuits and demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Except as otherwise indicated, do not test switches by operating them under load. However, demonstrate switch operation through six opening/ closing cycles with circuit unloaded. Open each switch enclosure for inspection of interior, mechanical and electrical connections, fuse installation, and for verification of type and rating of fuses installed. Correct deficiencies then retest to demonstrate compliance. Remove and replace defective units with new units and retest.


END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16190 - 1 of 5 SUPPORTING DEVICES

SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS




1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes secure support from the building structure for electrical items by means of hanger rods, supports, anchors, sleeves, inserts, seals, and associated fastenings.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contains requirements that relate to this

Section:

1. Refer to other Division 16 sections for additional specific support requirements that may be applicable to specific items.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code", 1999 Edition.



1. Slotted Metal Angle and U-Channel Systems:

a. American Electric b. B-Line Systems, Inc. c. Unistrut Diversified Products


2. Conduit Sealing Bushings:

a. Bridgeport Fittings, Inc. b. Red Seal Electric Corp. c. Thomas & Betts Corp.

2.02 COATINGS

A. Coating: Supports, support hardware, and fasteners shall be protected with zinc coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved alternative treatment, finish, or inherent material characteristic. Products for use outdoors shall be hot-dip galvanized.

2.03 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Raceway Supports: Clevis hangers, riser clamps, conduit straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and threaded hanger rods may be used.

1. Raceways shall not be suspended or supported from ceiling suspension wires. 2. Raceways shall not be suspended or supported from ductwork or piping. 3. Raceways shall not be suspended with wires. Threaded rod conduit hangers are

required. 4. When possible, raceways shall be grouped and suspended on "trapeze" supports.

B. Fasteners: Types, materials, and construction features as follows:

1. Expansion Anchors: Carbon steel wedge or sleeve type. 2. Toggle Bolts: All steel springhead type. 3. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel, designed specifically for the

intended service.

C. Conduit Sealing Bushings: Factory-fabricated watertight conduit sealing bushing assemblies suitable for sealing around conduit, or tubing passing through concrete floors and walls. Construct seals with steel sleeve, malleable iron body, neoprene sealing grommets or rings, metal pressure rings, pressure clamps, and cap screws.

D. Cable Supports for Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of

threaded body and insulating wedging plug for nonarmored electrical cables in riser conduits. Provide plugs with number and size of conductor gripping holes as required to suit individual risers. Construct body of malleable-iron casting with hot-dip galvanized finish.

E. U-Channel Systems: 16-gage steel channels, with 9/16-inch-diameter holes, at a

minimum of 8 inches on center, in top surface. Provide fittings and accessories that mate and match with U-channel and are of the same manufacture.

2.03 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. General: Shop- or field-fabricated supports or manufactured supports assembled from U-channel components.


B. Steel Brackets: Fabricated of angles, channels, and other standard structural shapes.

Connect with welds and machine bolts to form rigid supports.

C. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snaplock joint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate sleeves from the following gage metal for sleeve diameter noted:

3-inches and smaller: 20-gage. 4-inches to 6-inches: 16-gage. over 6-inches: 14-gage.

2. Steel Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe.


A. Install supporting devices to fasten electrical components securely and permanently in accordance with NEC requirements.

B. Coordinate with the building structural system and with other electrical installation.

C. Raceway Supports: Comply with the NEC and the following requirements:

1. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for selection and installation of

supports. 2. Install individual and multiple (trapeze) raceway hangers and riser clamps as

necessary to support raceways. Provide U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assembly and for securing hanger rods and conduits.

3. Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze-type hangers. 4. Space supports for raceways in accordance with Table I of this section. Space

supports for raceway types not covered by the above in accordance with NEC. 5. Support exposed and concealed raceway within 1 foot of an unsupported box and

access fittings. In horizontal runs, support at the box and access fittings may be omitted where box or access fittings are independently supported and raceway terminals are not made with chase nipples or threadless box connectors.

6. In vertical runs, arrange support so the load produced by the weight of the raceway and the enclosed conductors is carried entirely by the conduit supports with no weight load on raceway terminals.

D. Vertical Conductor Supports: Install simultaneously with installation of conductors.

E. Sleeves: Install in concrete slabs and walls and all other fire-rated floors and walls for

raceways and cable installations. For sleeves through fire rated-wall or floor construction, apply UL- listed firestopping sealant in gaps between sleeves and enclosed conduits and cables in accordance with "Fire Resistant Joint Sealers"


requirement of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers."

F. Conduit Seals: Install seals for conduit penetrations of slabs on grade and exterior walls below grade and where indicated. Tighten sleeve seal screws until sealing grommets have expanded to form watertight seal.

G. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, fasten electrical items and their supporting

hardware securely to the building structure, including but not limited to conduits, raceways, cables, cable trays, busways, cabinets, panelboards, transformers, boxes, disconnect switches, and control components in accordance with the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood, toggle bolts on

hollow masonry units, concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry, and machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel. Do not weld conduit, pipe straps, or items other than threaded studs to steel structures. In partitions of light steel construction, use sheet metal screws.

2. Holes cut to depth of more than 1-1/2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3/4 inch in concrete shall not cut the main reinforcing bars. Fill holes that are not used.

3. Ensure that the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent of the proof test load. Use vibration- and shock- resistant fasteners for attachments to concrete slabs.


TABLE I: SPACING FOR RACEWAY SUPPORTS Raceway No. of Size Conductors Maximum Spacing of (Inches) in Run Location Supports (Feet)

HORIZONTAL RUNS

1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 5 1/2, 3/4 1 or 2 Where it is difficult

to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction. 7

1/2, 3/4 3 or more Any location. 7 1/2-1 3 or more Any location. 7 1 & larger 1 or 2 Flat ceiling or wall. 6 1 & larger 1 or 2 Where it is difficult

to provide supports except at intervals fixed by the building construction. 10

1 & larger 3 or more Any location. 10 Any .... Concealed. 10

VERTICAL RUNS 1/2, 3/4 .... Exposed. 7 1, 1-1/4 .... Exposed. 8 1-1/2 and larger .... Exposed. 10 Up to 2 .... Shaftway. 10 2-1/2 .... Shaftway. 10 3 & larger .... Shaftway. 10 Any .... Concealed. 10 END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16195 - 1 of 5 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION

SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.



1.02 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes identification of electrical materials, equipment, and installations. It includes requirements for electrical identification components including but not limited to the following:

1. Identification labeling for raceways, cables, and conductors. 2. Warning and caution signs. 3. Equipment labels and signs. 4. Concealed boxes labels and signs.


Section:

1. Division 16 Section 16120 "Wires and Cables" for requirements for color coding of conductors for phase identification.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data for each type of product specified.


A. Electrical Component Standard: Components and installation shall comply with NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code@.




1. American Labelmark Co. 2. National Band and Tag Co. 3. Panduit Corp. 4. Seton Name Plate Co. 5. Standard Signs, Inc. 6. W. H. Brady, Co.

2.02 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application. Where more than single type is specified for an application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each application.

B. Color-Coded Conduit Markers

1. Provide on all conduits, trade size 4" and larger to identify systems.

a. General: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-painted, flexible or semi-rigid,

permanent, plastic-sheet conduit markers, extending 360 degrees around conduits; designed for attachment to conduit by adhesive, adhesive lap joint of marker, matching adhesive plastic tape at each end of marker, or pretensioned snap-on. Except as otherwise indicated, provide lettering which indicates voltage of conductor(s) in conduit. Provide 8" minimum length for 2" and smaller conduit, 12" length for larger conduit.

b. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide white markers with black letters.

C. Color-Coded Plastic Tape

1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3

mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. 2. Colors: Unless otherwise indicated or required by governing regulations, provide

orange tape.

D. Cable/Conductor Identification Bands

1. General: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl-cloth self-adhesive cable/ conductor markers of wrap-around type, either pre-numbered plastic coated type, or write-on type with clear plastic self-adhesive cover flap; numbered to show circuit identifications.

E. Plasticized Tags

1. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre-printed accident-

prevention and operational tags, of plasticized card stock with matte finish suitable for writing, approximately 3-1/4" X 5-5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre-printed wording including large-size primary wording, e.g., DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE.


F. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs

1. General: Provide engraving stock melanine plastic laminate, 3 layer complying with

FS L-P-387, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of sizes and wording indicated, black face and white letters, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

2. Thickness: 1/6", size 1" x 3". 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate substrate.

G. Underground Duct Banks

1. The top of all underground duct banks shall be continuously marked with 2" wide 2 line caution detection tape. Tape shall be metallic lined polyethylene.

a. Power duct banks shall be marked "Caution-Electrical line buried below",

Seton Cat #2ELE tape. b. Telephone duct banks shall be marked "Caution-Telephone line buried

below", Seton Cat No. 2 #TEL tape. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements

1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC.

2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require finish, install identification after completion of painting.

3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations, and requests of electrical work.

B. Conduit Identification

1. General: Where electrical conduit is exposed in spaces apply color-coded identification on electrical conduit in manner similar to piping identification. Except as otherwise indicated, use white as coded-color for conduit.

C. Junction Pullbox Identification

1. Junction boxes, pullboxes and their covers shall be distinctively painted to identify

their service. (A convenient way to facilitate this is to spray-paint the boxes and covers in groups before installation).

2. Boxes shall be color coded as follows:

Blue Normal Power Black Normal Lighting


Red Emergency Power/Lighting Orange Fire Alarm Green Clock System White Data System Brown MATV System Yellow Telephone Light Blue Sound System

D. Operational Identifications and Warnings:

1. General: Wherever reasonably required to ensure safe and efficient operation and

maintenance of electrical systems, and electrically connected mechanical systems and general systems and equipment, including prevention of misuse of electrical facilities by unauthorized personnel, install self-adhesive plastic signs or similar equivalent identification, instruction or warnings on switches, outlets and other controls, devices and covers of electrical enclosure. Where detailed instructions or explanations are needed, provide plasticized tags with clearly written messages adequate for intended purposes.

E. Danger Signs

1. General: In addition to installation of danger signs required by governing

regulations and authorities, install appropriate danger signs at locations indicated and at locations subsequently identified by Installer of electrical work as constituting similar dangers for persons in or about project.

2. High Voltage: Install danger signs wherever it is possible, under any circumstance, for persons to come into contact with electrical power of voltages higher than 110-120 volts.

3. Critical Switches/Controls: Install danger signs on switches and similar controls, regardless of whether concealed or locked up, where untimely or inadvertent operation (by anyone) could result in significant danger to persons, or damage to or loss of property.

F. Equipment/System Identification

1. General: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign on each major unit of electrical

equipment in building; including central or master unit of each electrical system including control/signal systems, unless unit is specified with its own self-explanatory identification or signal system. Except as otherwise indicated, provide single line of text, 1/2" high lettering, on 1-1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required), white lettering in black field. Provide text matching terminology and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical work:

a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures, disconnect switches,

starters and controllers, VFD units. b. Access panel/doors to electrical facilities c. Transformers d. Telephone equipment e. Fire Alarm master station or control panel f. Telecommunications systems main junction boxes concealed above ceilings


2. Install signs at location indicated or, where not otherwise indicated, at location for best convenience or viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. For major systems boxes located above ceiling, signs shall be installed visibly below ceiling indicating systems box above. Location to be coordinated with A/E prior to installation.Secure to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners should not or cannot penetrate substrate.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16402 - 1 of 3 ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES

SECTION 16402 ELECTRICAL SITE UTILITIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Coordinate all incoming utilities, including, but not limited to, power, telephone and cable TV to provide all required materials and labor necessary for site utility services into the Building. Coordination shall include all utility companies service specifications and requirements.

1.02 SUBMITTALS


B. Dimensioned drawings of all handholes. 1.03 LABELING: Materials to bear Underwriters' Laboratories Labels, where applicable. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.0l DUCTS

A. Underground ducts of the size as indicated on drawings shall consist of a number of individual PVC or steel ducts as indicated, encased in a reinforced concrete envelope with a minimum depth of 24 inches between finished grade and top of the concrete envelope.

B. Plastic conduit shall be single bore, and shall be schedule 40 polyvinyl-chloride conduit

conforming to NEMA TC 2. Conduit fittings shall conform to the applicable NEMA Standards, except that where NEMA standards for conduit fittings do not exist for the type of plastic installed, fittings shall be as recommended by the conduit manufacturer.

C. Conduit and fittings shall be free, within commercial tolerances, of objectionable lines,

striations, bubbles, welds, and other manufacturing defects that would impair the service of the conduit. The bore of the conduit shall be straight and circular in cross section with smooth interior surfaces free from obstructions and rough and flakey areas. The conduit and fittings shall be free from all substances that injuriously affect any wire or cable covering such as is used on rubber-covered wire, polyethylene or polyvinyl chloride sheathed cable. The conduit and fittings shall be corrosion-resistant and not adversely affected by acids, alkalies, salts, bacteria, and other organic matter that would normally be encountered in the ground. The conduit length for each size shall be the length that is standard with the manufacturer with a permissible tolerance of l/4 inch per l0-foot length. Bends, elbows, and other fittings shall be capable of freely passing a ball that is l/4 inch less in diameter that the nominal bore of the conduit. Fittings shall be of a type especially made for use with plastic conduit for electrical service. Conduit and fittings shall be capable of being joined, by means of a solvent welding cement so as to provide a watertight and rootproof joint.


D. Provide #l2 AWG galvanized iron drag wire in all empty power and signal ducts.

E. Steel ducts shall be schedule 40 hot dipped galvanized rigid steel conduit. 2.02 UNDERGROUND CONCRETE PULL BOXES

A. Concrete pull boxes sizes as shown on the drawings can be either pour-in-place as described for MANHOLES, or precast concrete, as manufactured by Brooks Products, Inc., or equivalent. Boxes to be provided with vehicular traffic covers. Covers to have 1/2 inch hex bolt at two places to bolt down cover to pull box walls. Boxes to be installed plumb and level with final grade: do not install boxes in walkways. Boxes to be accessible and only for the use intended: do not mix power and communication cables in the same box or normal power with emergency power unless system cables are completely isolated in a manner approved by Project Engineer. Boxes shall be installed not to allow more than 200 feet of cable pulling. Provide ground rod where shown on drawings.


A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 DUCT LINE INSTALLATION

A. Duct lines shall be laid to a minimum grade of 4 inches per l00 feet. Grade may be away from buildings, from one manhole to the next or both ways from a high point between manholes, depending on the contour of the finished grade. Low points that may trap water are not acceptable. Duct lines shall be installed so that the top of concrete in encased duct lines is not less than 24 inches below finished grade or finished paving at any point. Changes in direction of runs exceeding a total of 10 degrees, either vertical or horizontal, shall be accomplished by long sweep bends having a minimum radius of curvature of 25 feet, except that manufactured bends may be used at the ends of the run. The long sweep bends may be made up of one or more curved or straight sections and/or combinations thereof. Manufactured bends shall have a minimum radius of 18 inches for use with ducts of less than 3 inches in diameter and a minimum radius of 36 inches for ducts of 3 inches in diameter and larger. Conduits shall terminate in end bells where duct lines enter manholes. Conduit shall be thoroughly cleaned before using or laying. During construction and after the duct line is completed, the ends of the conduits shall be plugged to prevent water washing mud into the conduits or manholes. Particular care shall be taken to keep the conduits clean of concrete, dirt, and any other substance during the course of construction.

B. After the duct line has been completed, a standard flexible mandrel not less than 12

inches long, having a diameter approximately 1/4 inch less than the inside diameter of the conduit, shall be pulled through each conduit after which a brush with stiff bristles shall be pulled through each conduit to make certain that no particles of earth, sand, or gravel have been left in the line. Pneumatic rodding may be used to draw in the lead wire. Where connection is made to an existing duct that is of different material and shape that the duct line being installed, a suitable coupling of a type recommended by


the duct manufacturer shall be used. Conduits shall be stored to avoid warping or deterioration. Plastic conduit shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun. Conduit joints in concrete encasement may be placed side-by-side horizontally but shall be staggered at least 6 inches vertically. At all locations where transition couplings between different types of conduits are installed and either run of conduit is concrete encased, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or required, the encasement shall include the conduit joint plus a 30 inch extension of the encasement behind the conduit joint measured along the centerline of the conduit unless the 30 inch extension carries to a point more than 8 inches above grade level in which case the encasement may be terminated at the 8 inch level.

C. Each single conduit of the duct bank shall be completely encased in concrete as

indicated. The thickness of concrete encasement indicated is the minimum thickness, and may be increased to fit the actual shape of the trench. Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel, concrete, plastic, or a combination of these materials placed on not greater than 5-foot centers, wood spacers are not acceptable. Ducts shall be securely tied down and anchored to prevent movement during the placement of concrete.

D. Installation of couplings: Joints in all types of conduit shall be made up in accordance

with the manufacturer's recommendations for the particular conduit and coupling selected. In the absence of specific recommendations, the various types of conduit joint couplings shall be made watertight.

E. Plastic conduit joints shall be made up by brushing a plastic solvent cement on the

inside of the plastic coupling fitting and on the outside of the conduit ends. The conduit and fitting shall then be slipped together, until seated, With a slight twist to set the joint tightly, and the conduit then rotated one-half turn to distribute the cement evenly. Excess cement built up on the inside surface of the conduit shall then be removed.

F. Ends of cable carrying ducts shall be adequately sealed against water entry. Provide

end bells on conduit entries into manholes and walls as specified under manholes.

G. Duct openings in manholes shall have extended reinforcing rods and shall be keyed-in reinforcing rods of duct bank.

H. Steel reinforcing rods shall be installed during construction of the duct bank.

I. Spare conduits shall be capped inside building wall. Spare ducts shall be plugged with

plastic duct plugs in all manholes.

J. A No. 1/0 bare stranded copper ground conductor shall be laid in the top of all concrete encased power ductbanks. It shall be continuous in duct work and through manholes and shall be attached to ground rods in each manhole.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16430 - 1 of 1 METERING AND SUB-METERING

SECTION 16430 METERING AND SUB-METERING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section.


A. Metering and sub-metering including necessary accessories indicated on the drawings and specified in this section.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all requirements for metering with local Power Company; sub-meters to be installed where indicated and as requested by the Owner.


A. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metering products of one of the following:

1. Anchor 2. Landis & Gyr 3. Triad.



3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install minimum one-fourth (1-1/4) inch conduit as directed and required by Utility Company for connection to meter.

B. Sub-meter to be installed per manufacturer's instructions, semi-permanent to be reused

in other areas. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16452 - 1 of 4 GROUNDING

SECTION 16452 GROUNDING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Division-16 Basic Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this section.

C. Requirements of this section apply to electrical grounding and bonding work specified

elsewhere in these specifications. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment.

B. Type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this section includes the

following:

1. Solidly grounded.

C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this section includes the following:

1. Underground metal water piping. 2. Metal building frames. 3. Electrical power systems. 4. Grounding plate electrodes. 5. Grounding electrodes. 6. Separately derived systems. 7. Raceways. 8. Service equipment. 9. Enclosures. 10. Equipment.

D. Refer to other Division-16 sections for wires/cables, electrical raceways, boxes and

fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding products and associated accessories.


C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for electrical grounding and bonding work

which indicates layout of ground rings, location of system grounding electrode connections, routing of grounding electrode conductors, also include diagrams for circuits and equipment grounding connections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types, and ratings required, and ancillary grounding materials, including stranded cable, copper braid and bus , grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and bonding jumpers whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience

on projects with electrical grounding work similar to that required for project.


1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction, and NEC as applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to systems, circuits and equipment.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding Equipment", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment", pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment. In addition, comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide grounding and bonding products which are UL-listed and labeled for their intended usage.

3. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements and recommended installation practices of IEEE Standards 80, 81, 141 and 142 pertaining to grounding and bonding of systems, circuits and equipment.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide grounding and bonding products of one of the following (for each type of product):

1. Adalet-PLM Div; Scott Fetzer Co. 2. Burndy Corporation. 3. Cadweld Div; Erico Products Inc. 4. Crouse-Hinds Div; Cooper Industries. 5. Eagle Electric Mfg Co. 6. Ideal Industries, Inc. 7. Joslyn Corporation. 8. Okonite Company. 9. OZ Gedney Div; General Signal Corp. 10. Thomas and Betts Corp.


2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING

A. Materials and Components:

B. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables/wires, connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and additional accessories needed for a complete installation. Where materials or components are not indicated, provide products which comply with NEC, UL, and IEEE requirements and with established industry standards for those applications indicated.

C. Conductors: Provide separately run "green" electrical grounding conductors for

grounding system connections that match power supply wiring materials and are sized according to NEC 250-94, 250-95, for all feeders and branch circuits.

D. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical bonding plates,

connectors, terminals, lugs and clamps as recommended by bonding plate, connector, terminal and clamp manufacturers for indicated applications.

E. Ground Electrodes and Plates:

1. Grounding Electrodes: Steel with copper welded exterior, 3/4" dia. by 10 feet.

2. Grounding Plate: 1/4" x 4" x 10" copper plate.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and bonding connections are to be made and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS

A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and applicable portions of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products comply with requirements.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation of electrical

grounding and bonding system work with other work.

C. Weld grounding conductors to underground grounding electrodes.

D. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance equipment to grounding electrodes.


E. Ground each separately-derived system neutral to:

1. Separate grounding electrode.

F. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed non-current carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground connectors, and plumbing systems.

G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment grounding conductors with

grounding lug, bus, or bushing.

H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to 1-inch diameter, or greater, metallic cold water pipe using a suitably sized ground clamp. Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange.

I. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer's published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with tightening torque values specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.

J. Route grounding connections and conductors to ground and protective devices in

shortest and straightest paths as possible to minimize transient voltage rises.

K. Apply corrosion-resistant finish to field-connections, buried metallic grounding and bonding products, and places where factory applied protective coatings have been destroyed, which are subjected to corrosive action.

L. Install clamp-on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces, to ensure electrical

conductivity and circuit integrity. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests show resistance-to- ground is over 25 ohms, take appropriate action to reduce resistance to 25 ohms, or less, by driving additional ground rods; then retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16470 - 1 of 4 PANELBOARDS

SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work specified in

this section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules, and as specified herein.

B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the following:

1. Power-distribution panelboards. 2. Lighting and appliance panelboards.

C. Refer to other Division-16 sections for wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and

raceway work required in conjunction with installation of panelboards and enclosures.

D. Wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways required in conjunction with the installation of panelboards and enclosures are specified in other Division-16 sections.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures; including cabinet dimensions.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for panelboards showing connections to

electrical power feeders and distribution branches. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of panelboards

and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least 5 years of successful installation

experience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those required for this project.



1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of

the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 as applicable to installation, and construction of electrical panelboards and enclosures.

2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, "Electric Panelboards", and UL's 50, 869, 486A, 486B, and 1053 pertaining to panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units which are UL-listed and labeled.

3. NEMA Compliance: Comply with NEMA Stds Pub/No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)," Pub/No. PB 1, "Panelboards," and Pub/No. PB 1.1, "Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less@.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide panelboard products of one of the following (for each type and rating of panelboard and enclosure):

1. Siemens ITE. 2. Westinghouse Electric Corp. 3. Square D Company. 4. Challenger.

2.02 PANELBOARDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures and ancillary

components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and construction in accordance with published product information; equip with proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with NEC, UL and established industry standards for those applications indicated.

B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type power distribution

panelboards as indicated, with panelboard switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; with anti-turn solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders connecting at top of panel. Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98-percent conductivity, and with full-sized neutral bus; provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide molded-case main and branch circuit-breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Where multiple-pole breakers are indicated, provide with common trip so overload on one pole will trip all poles simultaneously. Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards.


C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead-front safety type lighting and appliance panelboards as indicated, with switching and protective devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti-burn solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with copper conductors; construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel; equip with copper bus bars, full-sized neutral bar, with bolt-in type heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, single-pole circuit-breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder required; and provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards.

D. Panelboards Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet type enclosures, in

sizes and NEMA types as indicated, code-gage, minimum 16-gage thickness. Construct with multiple knockouts and wiring gutters. Provide fronts with adjustable trim clamps, and doors with flush locks and keys, all panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and door swings as indicated. Equip with interior circuit-directory frame, and card with clear plastic covering. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide enclosures which are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards, which mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed.

E. Molded-Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory-assembled, molded-case circuit

breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings including RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault-current limiting protection, ampere ratings as indicated. Construct with over-center, trip-free, toggle-type operating mechanisms with quick-make, quick-break action and positive handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any physical position, and operating in an ambient temperature of 40 deg C. Provide breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs, AL/CU rated.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS

A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC standards and NECA's "Standards of Installation", and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and


terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A.

C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they are permanently and mechanically anchored.

D. Provide properly wired wired electrical connections for panelboards within enclosures.

E. Provide typewritten panelboard circuit directory card upon completion of installation

work.

F. Properly bundle and train conductors within panelboard enclosure with cable ties. 3.03 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.


A. Prior to energization of electrical circuitry, check all accessible connections to manufacturer's tightening torque specifications.

B. Prior to energization of panelboards, check with ground resistance tester

phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

C. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits, and for

short-circuits. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement.

B. Touch-up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16477 - 1 of 3 FUSES

SECTION 16477 FUSES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section.

B. Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections apply to work of this

section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of fuse work required by this section is indicated by drawings, and by requirements of this section.

B. Refer to other Division-16 sections for the following items; not work of this section.

1. Panelboards. 2. Motor disconnects.


A. Types of fuses specified in this section include the following:

1. Class RK1 and Class J current-limiting. 2. Class RK 5 time-delay. 3. Class T current-limiting.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data on fuses, including specifications, electrical characteristics, installation instructions, furnished specialties and accessories. In addition, include voltages and current ratings, interrupting ratings, current limitation ratings, time-current trip characteristic curves, and mounting requirements.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fuses of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


1. UL Compliance and Labeling: Comply with applicable provisions of UL 198D,


"High- Interrupting-Capacity Class K Fuses". Provide overcurrent protective devices which are UL-listed and labeled.

2. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fuseable devices.

3. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI C97.1 "Low-Voltage Cartridge Fuses 600 Volts or Less".

1.06 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Provide maintenance stock and fuses. For types and ratings required, furnish additional fuses, amounting to one unit for every 5 installed units, but not less than one set of 3 of each kind.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering fuseable devices which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses of one of the

following:

1. Littelfuse 2. Bussmann Div; Cooper Industries. 3. General Electric Co.

2.02 FUSES

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide fuses of types, sizes, ratings, and average time-current and peak let-through current characteristics indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and constructed in accordance with published product information, and with industry standards and configurations.

B. Class RK1 Current-Limiting Fuses: Provide UL Class RK1 current-limiting fuses rated

250-volts, 60 Hz, ampere rating indicated, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting circuit- breakers.

C. Class J Current-Limiting Fuses: Provide UL Class J current-limiting fuses rated

600-volts, 60 Hz, ampere rating indicated, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating.

D. Class RK5 Time-Delay Fuses: Provide UL Class RK5 time-delay fuses rated 600-volts,

60 Hz, ampere rating indicated, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protecting motors.

E. Class T Fuses: Provide UL Class T fuses rated 600-volts, 60 Hz, ampere rating

indicated, with 200,000 RMS symmetrical interrupting current rating for protection of physically small devices.



A. Examine areas and conditions under which fuses are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF FUSES

A. Install fuses as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices to ensure that protective devices comply with requirements. Comply with NEC, and NEMA standards for installation of fuses.

B. Coordinate with other work, including electrical wiring, as necessary, to interface

installation of fuses with other work.

C. Install fuses in fused switches, if any. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to energization of fuseable devices, test devices for continuity of circuitry and for short-circuits. Replace malfunctioning units with new units, and then demonstrate compliance with requirements.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16480 - 1 of 5 MOTOR STARTERS/CONTROLLERS

SECTION 16480 MOTOR STARTERS/CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



this section.

C. Division-15 Electrical Requirements for Mechanical Equipment. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of motor starter/controller work is indicated by drawings and schedules.

B. Types of motor starters/controllers specified in this section include the following:

1. Combination. 2. Fractional HP manual. 3. Solid-state reduced voltage. 4. Autotransformer reduced voltage. 5. Wye-delta. 6. Part winding.

C. Work of this section includes wires/cables, raceways, electrical boxes and fittings, as

specified in Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections, and used in conjunction with motor controllers.

D. Refer to applicable Division-16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections for

wires/cables, electrical raceways, and boxes and fittings required in connection with motor controllers.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data and installation instructions on motor starters/controllers.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings of motor starters/controllers showing accurately

scaled equipment locations and spatial relationships to associated motors and equipment.

D. Wiring Diagrams: Submit power and control wiring diagrams for motor

starters/controllers showing connections to electrical power panels, feeders, and


equipment. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer-installed and portions which are field-installed.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of motor controllers of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years of successful installation experience

with projects utilizing motor controller work similar to that required for this project.


1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 250, and 430, as applicable to installation, and construction of motor controllers.

2. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NFPA 70E, "Standard for Electrical Safety Requirements for Employee Workplaces."

3. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 486A and B, and UL 508, pertaining to installation of motor controllers. Provide controllers and components which are UL-listed and labeled.

4. IEEE Compliance: Comply with recommended practices contained in IEEE Standard 241, "Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings," pertaining to motor controllers.

5. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standard ICS 2, "Industrial Control Devices, Controllers and Assemblies", and Pub No. 250, "Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)", pertaining to motor controllers and enclosures.

1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver motor starters/controllers and components properly packaged in factory-fabricated type containers.

B. Store motor starters/controllers and components in original packaging and in a clean dry

space; protect from weather and construction traffic.

C. Handle motor starters/controllers and components carefully to avoid breakages, impacts, denting and scoring finishes. Do not install damaged equipment; replace and return damaged units to equipment manufacturer.


A. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/ cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of motor starters/ controllers with other work.

B. Sequence motor starter/controller installation work with other work to minimize

possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period.


1.07 MAINTENANCE

A. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each motor starter/controller and component; including "trouble shooting" maintenance guide. Include that data, product data and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 1.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide motor controllers of one of the following (for each type and rating of motor starter/ controller):

1. Siemens ITE 2. Westinghouse Corp. 3. Square D Co. 4. Challenger.

2.02 MOTOR STARTERS/CONTROLLERS

A. General: Provide motor starters/controllers and ancillary components not included as integral part of mechanical equipment. Comply with manufacturer's standard materials, design and construction in accordance with published product information, and as required for a complete installation.

B. Reversing Drum Switches: Provide reversing-drum switches capable of starting and

reversing squirrel cage, and single-phase motors which are designed for reversing service, and direct-current shunt and compound wound motors, of types, sizes, ratings, and NEMA size drums indicated. Equip with non-spring return (non-self centering) construction, and with type interlock which provides low-voltage protection, and requires that drum return to OFF position after voltage failures. Equip switches with ball lever operating handles, and with NEMA Type 1 enclosure; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

C. Combination Reversing Starters/Controllers: Provide full-voltage alternating-current

combination reversing controllers, consisting of controller and disconnect switch mounted in common enclosure, of types, sizes, ratings, and NEMA sizes indicated. Equip controllers with electrical and mechanical interlocks to prevent both forward and reverse contactors closing simultaneously. Equip controllers with block type manual reset overload relays and with non-fusible disconnect switches. Provide operating handle for disconnect switch mechanism with indication and control of switch position, with enclosure door either opened or closed, and capable of being locked in OFF position with three padlocks. Construct and mount controllers and disconnect switches in single NEMA Type 1 enclosure; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

D. Fractional HP Manual Starters/Controllers: Provide sing-phase fractional HP manual

motor controllers, of sizes and ratings indicated. Equip with manually operated quick-make, quick-break toggle mechanisms; and with one-piece melting alloy type


thermal units. Controller to become inoperative when thermal unit is removed. Provide controllers with double break silver alloy contacts, visible from both sides of controller; green pilot lights, and switch capable of being padlocked-OFF. Enclose controller unit in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure suitable for flush mounting; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

E. Solid-State Reduced Voltage Starters/Controllers: Provide solid-state reduced voltage

controllers for use with 3-phase squirrel cage induction motors, of types, sizes, ratings and electrical characteristics indicated; construct with silicon-controlled rectifiers (SCR's) for controlling motor voltages during acceleration. Equip controllers with circuit breakers, and with closed-loop feedback system to maintain motor acceleration at constant rate. Enclose controller in NEMA Type 1 enclosure; and coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

F. Autotransformer Reduced Voltage Starters/Controllers: Provide autotransformer type

reduced voltage controllers, of sizes, ratings, electrical characteristics and NEMA sizes indicated, with closed-circuit transition feature. Construct controllers with 3-pole contactors, 3-phase starting autotransformer, adjustable pneumatic timer, and 3-pole block type overload relay. Construct auto-transformer with voltage taps at 65 percent and 80 percent of full line voltage, and with thermal overload protection device on each phase to protect against overheating. Provide duty cycle of 15 second operation out of each 4 minutes for one hour followed by rest period of two hours. Construct controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

G. Wye-Delta Starters/Controllers: Provide wye-delta controllers, of sizes, ratings,

electrical characteristics and NEMA sizes indicated. Construct controllers with open-circuit transition type wiring, including three 3-pole contactors, adjustable pneumatic timer, and 3-pole overload protection relay. Equip with START-STOP push button for control. Construct controller with NEMA Type 1 enclosure; coat with manufacturer's standard color finish.

H. Part Winding Starters/Controllers: Provide part-winding, alternating-current controllers,

of NEMA sizes, ratings, and electrical characteristics indicated, suitable for use with motors with wye-connected windings. Select controller with 2-point construction consisting of two 3-pole contactors, heater unit, pneumatic timer, and six manual reset motor overload relays. Equip controller with external start buttons for closing contactors. Enclose controller unit in NEMA Type 1 general purpose enclosure suitable for recessed mounting; coat enclosure with manufacturer's standard color finish.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which motor starters/controllers are to be installed, and notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS/CONTROLLERS

A. Install motor starters/controllers where required, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards, to insure that products fulfill requirements.

B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

C. Install fuses, of sizes indicated, in each fusible disconnect switch, if any.


A. Prior to energization of motor controller equipment, check with ground resistance tester, phase-to-phase and phase-to-ground insulation resistance levels to ensure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energization, check circuitry for electrical continuity, and for short-circuits.

C. Ensure that direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirements.

3.04 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for motor controller equipment as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standard 486A to assure permanent and effective grounding.


A. Adjust operating mechanisms, where necessary, for free mechanical movement. B. Touch-up scratched or marred enclosure surfaces to match original finishes.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of installation of motor controller equipment and electrical circuitry, energize controller circuitry and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and retest to demonstrate compliance.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16515 - 1 of 5 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

SECTION 16515 INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



this section.

C. Division-16 Electronic Ballasts section applies to work specified in this section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent, location, and details of interior lighting fixture work are indicated on drawings and in schedules.

B. Types of interior lighting fixtures in this section include the following:

1. High-intensity-discharge (HID). 2. Fluorescent. 3. Incandescent.

1.03 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions on each type interior building lighting fixture and component.

C. Certificate of compliance: Prior to ordering of materials the contractor shall submit a

letter indicating that the specified electrical fixtures are compatible with and will fit into the specified and approved ceiling grid system.

D. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of interior lighting fixtures and their spatial

relationship to each other. In addition, submit fixture shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each fixture, assembled in "luminaire type" alphabetical or numerical order, with proposed fixture and accessories clearly indicated on each sheet. Submit details indicating compatibility with ceiling grid system.

E. Wiring Diagrams: Submit wiring diagrams for interior lighting fixtures showing

connections to electrical power panels, switches, dimmers, controllers, and feeders. Differentiate between portions of wiring which are manufacturer-installed and portions which are field-installed.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each interior lighting

fixture and accessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include that


data, product data, and shop drawings in a maintenance manual; in accordance with general requirements of Division 1.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of interior lighting fixtures of sizes, types and ratings required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


experience on projects with interior lighting fixture work similar to that required for this project.


1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of

the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Articles 220, 410, and 510 as applicable to installation, and construction of interior building lighting fixtures.

2. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Standards Pub/No.'s LE 1 and LE 2 pertaining to lighting equipment.

3. UL Compliance: Comply with UL standards, including UL 486A and B, pertaining to interior lighting fixtures. Provide interior lighting fixtures and components which are UL-listed and labeled.


A. Deliver interior lighting fixtures in factory- fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect fixtures from damage.

B. Store interior lighting fixtures in original packaging. Store inside well-ventilated area

protected from weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, humidity, laid flat and blocked off ground.

C. Handle interior lighting fixtures carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring of

finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate with other work including wires/cables, electrical boxes and fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of interior lighting fixtures with other work.

B. Sequence interior lighting installation with other work to minimize possibility of damage

and soiling during remainder of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of manufacturers as listed on the drawings for each type of interior lighting fixture listed.


2.02 FIXTURES

A. General: Provide lighting fixtures, of sizes, types and ratings indicated; complete with, but not limited to, housings, energy-efficient lamps, lamp holders, reflectors, energy efficient ballasts, starters and wiring. Ship fixtures factory-assembled, with those components required for a complete installation. Design fixtures with concealed hinges and catches, with metal parts grounded as common unit, and so constructed as to dampen ballast generated noise.

B. Wiring: Provide electrical wiring within fixture suitable for connecting to branch circuit

wiring as follows:

1. NEC Type AF for 120 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG. 2. NEC Type SF-2 for 277 volt, minimum No. 18 AWG.

C. Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts: Provide low-energy, high efficiency electronic fluorescent

lamp ballasts, capable of operating lamp types indicated; with high power factor, rapid-start, and low-noise features; Type 1; Class P; sound-rated A. Refer to specification section 16516 for additional requirements.

D. High-Intensity-Discharge Lamp Ballasts: Provide HID lamp ballasts, capable of

operating lamp types with ratings indicated; reactor type, high power-factor, core and coil assembly encapsulated in non-melt resin; install capacitor outside ballast encapsulation for easy field replacement.

E. Lamps:

1. Provide fluorescent lamps of energy saving, T-8 octron, 35o Kelvin type. 2. Provide clear/phosphor coated metal halide lamps in wattages indicated. 3. Provide high-pressure sodium lamps in wattages indicated. 4. Provide standard rated F40 fluorescent lamps for use with dimming ballasts.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which lighting fixtures are to be installed, and substrate for supporting lighting fixtures. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.02 INSTALLATION OF INTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURES

A. Install interior lighting fixtures at locations and heights as indicated, in accordance with fixture manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of Installation", NEMA standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that lighting fixtures fulfill requirements.


B. Provide fixtures and/or fixture outlet boxes with hangers to properly support fixture

weight. Submit design of hangers, method of fastening, other than indicated or specified herein, for review by Architect.

C. Install flush mounted fixtures properly to eliminate light leakage between fixture frame

and finished surface.

D. Provide plaster frames for recessed fixtures installed in other than suspended grid type acoustical ceiling systems. Brace frames temporarily to prevent distortion during handling.

E. For air return type fixtures, open side slots.

F. Fasten fixtures securely to indicated structural supports; and ensure that pendant

fixtures are plumb and level. Provide individually mounted pendant fixtures longer than 2 feet with twin stem hangers. Provide stem hanger with ball aligners and provisions for minimum one inch vertical adjustment. Mount continuous rows of fixtures with an additional stem hanger greater than number of fixtures in the row.

G. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with

equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

H. Support surface mounted fixtures greater than 2 feet in length at a point in addition to

the outlet box fixture stud.

I. Support all fixtures to the ceiling system by mechanical means such as clips, bolts or screws as required by the NEC.


A. At Date of Substantial Completion, replace lamps in interior lighting fixtures which are observed to be noticeably dimmed after Contractor's use and testing, as judged by Architect.

1. Refer to Division-1 sections for the replacement/restoration of lamps in interior

lighting fixtures, where used for temporary lighting prior to Date of Substantial Completion.

B. Furnish stock or replacement lamps amounting to 15%, but not less than 4 lamps in

each case, of each type and size lamp used in each type fixture. Deliver replacement stock as directed to Owner's storage space.


A. Clean interior lighting fixtures of dirt and construction debris upon completion of installation. Clean fingerprints and smudges from lenses.


B. Protect installed fixtures from damage during remainder of construction period. 3.05 GROUNDING

A. Provide equipment grounding connections for interior lighting fixtures as indicated. Tighten connections to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Std 486A to assure permanent and effective grounds.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of installation of interior lighting fixtures, and after building circuitry has been energized, apply electrical energy to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with retesting.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16516 - 1 of 2 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

SECTION 16516 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS


B. Requirements of the following Division 16 Sections apply to this section.

1. Basic Electrical Materials and Methods.


A. Electronic ballasts including necessary accessories indicated on the drawings and specified in this section.

1.03 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate all requirements for factory installed electronic ballast installation into the specified and approved lighting fixtures.

PART 2 MANUFACTURERS

Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electronic ballasts of one of the following:

A. Magnetek B. Advance C. Universal.

2.01 BALLASTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated provide electronic ballasts and ancillary components of pipes, sizes and rating which comply to the following requirements:

1. Ballasts shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2. Ballast shall be specifically designed to operate T-8, octron lamps. 3. Ballast shall be electronic type and operate lamps at a frequency above 20K HZ

from an input frequency of 60 HZ. 4. Ballast shall consistently start and operate lamps from a supply (line) voltage of

plus or minus 10 percent about the center design voltage of 120 or 277 volts as indicated.

5. Ballast shall provide installed light level equivalent to C.B.M. certified electromagnetic ballasts (plus or minus 5 percent).

6. Light output shall not vary by more than 12 percent over a plus or minus 10 percent variation in line voltage.

7. Ballast efficacy factor (relative light output per watt consumed) shall be at least 15

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16516 - 2 of 2 ELECTRONIC BALLASTS

percent greater than C.B.M. certified electromagnetic ballasted system for same application.

8. Ballasts for rapid start T-8 lamps shall be capable of operating remaining lamp(s) if one or more companion lamps fail or are removed.

9. Ballast shall provide starting sequence consistent with lamp manufacturers' recommendations and shall provide full rated lamp life.

10. Lamp current crest factor (ratio of peak to R.M.S. lamp current) shall be 1.7 or less per lamp manufacturers' recommendation.

11. Ballast shall comply with all applicable state, federal and industry performance and safety standards.

a) Shall be listed with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. b) Shall comply with F.C.C. requirements governing electromagnetic and radio

frequency interference. c) Shall comply with I.E.E.E. standards for line voltage transient protection. d) Shall comply with A.N.S.I. and I.E.E.E. standards for harmonic distortion.

12. Ballast shall produce audible noise levels lower than quietest C.B.M. certified

ballast for same application. 13. Ballast shall have input power factor (ratio of actual power to apparent power)

above 90%. 14. Ballast size and mounting configuration shall be consistent with C.B.M. certified

electromagnetic ballast for same application. 15. Ballast manufacturer shall have at least ten (10) years' experience manufacturing

electronic ballasts with a documentable low failure rate. 16. Ballast manufacturer shall warrant ballasts to be free from defects in material or

workmanship for at least five (5) years from date of manufacture under normal conditions of use.

17. Ballast shall provide for parallel-lamp operation. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION


END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16650 - 1 of 2 TEMPORARY WIRING SYSTEM

SECTION 16650 TEMPORARY WIRING SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions, Special Provisions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 16.




A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following code:

1. NFPA 70 "National Electrical Code". PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRES AND CABLES

A. Refer to Specification Section 16120 for wires and cables required for power, lighting and communications rated 600 volts and less.


A. Provide all labor, materials, necessary equipment and services to provide complete temporary wiring systems to provide temporary power & lighting, and communications during construction.

B. Temporary lighting, power and communications shall be provided in capacities required

to maintain existing areas that are outside of the working boundaries and are to remain operational, in use and undisturbed.

C. Temporary materials and installations shall comply with all requirements of Division 16

Electrical specifications. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WIRING

A. All wiring shall be run in conduit.

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16650 - 2 of 2 TEMPORARY WIRING SYSTEM

B. General: Install electrical cables, wires, and connectors in compliance with NEC.

C. Coordinate cable installation with other Work. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Prior to energizing, check installed wires and cables with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to assure requirements are fulfilled.

B. Prior to energizing, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for short-circuits.

C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook-ups, energize circuits and demonstrate proper

functioning. Correct malfunctioning units, and retest to demonstrate compliance. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16721 - 1 of 12 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Complete, operable, tested and certified, addressable or non-addressable (zoned), non-coded, electrically supervised fire alarm detection system including necessary controls and accessories.

B. Upgrade the entire existing fire alarm detection system to meet applicable current code

requirements.

C. Related Sections:

1. 16110 - Raceways. 2. 16120 - Wires and Cables. 3. 16135 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings.

1.02 REFERENCES

A. Florida Accessibility Code for Building Construction, October 1997 edition.

B. American National Standards Institute, Inc. (ANSI) A117.1, Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People, as referenced in SREF.

C. Department of Insurance, Division of State Fire Marshall (SFM), Uniform Fire Safety

Rules and Standards, Chapter 4A-48, Fire Alarm Systems, latest edition.

D. National Fire Protection Association, Inc. (NFPA):

1. NFPA 70 National Electric Code (NEC), 1999 edition. 2. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm Code, 1993 edition. 3. NFPA 90A Installation of Air-conditioning and Ventilating Systems, 1993

edition. 4. NFPA 92A Smoke Control Systems, 1993 edition.

E. Underwriters Laboratories (UL), latest edition.

1. UL 38 Manually Activated Signaling boxes for Use with Fire Protective

Signaling Systems. 2. UL 228 Door Closers-Holders, With or Without, Interior Smoke Detectors. 3. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 4. UL 268A Smoke detectors for Duct Application. 5. UL 346 Water Flow Indicators for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 6. UL 464 Audible Signal Appliances. 7. UL 497B Protectors for Data Communication and Fire Alarm Circuits. 8. UL 521 Heat Detectors for Fire Protective Signaling Systems.


9. UL 864 Control Units for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 10. UL 1424 Cables for Power Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits. 11. UL 1481 Power Supplies for Fire Protective Signaling Systems. 12. UL 1635 Digital Alarm Communication Systems Units. 13. UL 1971 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired.


A. Design addressable and non-addressable systems to meet the requirements of NFPA 70 (NEC), NFPA 72, accessibility codes, and UL.

1.04 SUBMITTALS


B. Before starting the work, the manufacturer=s authorized representative shall submit one of the following:

1. A signed document committing the manufacturer to provide the Owner or it

authorized maintenance contractor with all the special tools, hardware, software, any proprietary items or products, and instruction or training programs necessary to service and maintain the system installed under this contract.

2. A signed document stipulating that service and maintenance of the system installed under this contract does not require special tools, hardware, software, any proprietary items or products, or instruction or training programs.

C. Before starting the work, submit shop drawings and product data on all equipment

proposed. Data cut sheets and wiring diagrams shall be submitted concurrently to allow for complete overall system review. Incomplete submittals will not be reviewed. Submittals to include the following:

1. Dimensioned outline drawings and technical data sheets for all equipment. 2. Riser diagrams indicating wiring and conduits. 3. Indicate cabinet elevations with each item on the face of the cabinet identified. 4. Functional description of the complete fire alarm system and subsystem. 5. Fuel shut-off system. 6. Operation and maintenance manuals. 7. Parts list. 8. Name, address, and telephone numbers of local supplier and local factory trained

Technical Representative (TR). Provide 3 copies of TR's certificate verifying factory training on the submitted system.

9. Delineate the fire zones and the device identifications for the entire project.

D. Operating Instructions: Furnish 3 sets of detailed written operating instructions to the Board.

E. Quality Control Submittals:

1. Submit a signed NFPA 72-1993 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION form with

Parts 1 and 3 through 9 completed at least 5 working days before the first formal inspection of the installed fire alarm detection system.


2. Part 2 shall be completed, notarized, and 5 original copies submitted after the Owner's acceptance.

F. Substantial Completion Submittal Requirements:

1. Provide 3 complete sets of operating and maintenance instructions, literature,

and information concerning equipment, indexed and bound in accepted loose leaf binders.

2. Furnish 3 sets of Record Drawings to the A/E indicating accurate plan layout, conduit runs, and wiring diagrams as actually installed. One of the 3 sets shall be in reproducible sepia.

3. Provide and maintain 3 sets of record drawings for the complete system. Show connections, numbering system of every device including wiring and cabling identification, raceways, and junction and terminal cabinets. Update the record drawings daily and make available at all times for review by the Owner. Typical wiring diagrams are not allowed.

G. Technical data cut sheets and wiring diagrams must be submitted concurrently to allow

for complete review. Incomplete or partial submittals will not be accepted. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. The equipment manufacturer shall have a local branch office or authorized distributor staffed with factory trained, full-time employees capable of performing installation, testing, inspection, repair, and maintenance services for the life of the fire alarm detection system.

B. Any equipment, device, system component, or part provided or installed by contractor

containing or using date processing shall be Year 2000 (Y2K) compliant. Before substantial completion, contractor shall provide a manufacturer=s statement of Year 2000 compliance and manufacturer=s and contractor=s warranty against date-related failures.

C. Fire alarm system, devices, and wiring installation shall be by the certifying company,

either the original equipment manufacturer or the factory distributer for the brand of equipment used. Furnish wiring diagrams and wire runs for the raceway system installed by the licensed electrical contractor, under Division 16.

D. Installer Qualifications:

1. The installing contractor for the Fire Alarm Detection System shall be properly

licensed by the State of Florida Department of Business and Professional Regulation under Section 489, Part II of the Florida Statue as an EC-Unlimited electrical contractor or an EF-Alarm contractor I. The installing contractor shall possess a valid occupational license, and a current certificate of insurance.

2. The installing contractor shall ensure that a qualified representative of the fire alarm detection system manufacturer monitors and coordinates the installation and is present at the Acceptance Inspection to test and instruct the Owner as to the use of the system.

3. Employees installing the fire alarm detection system shall possess, or be directly supervised by a person with a Certificate of Competency as an Electrical Master,


Electrical Journeyman, Master Speciality or Journeyman Speciality in the fire alarm trade as issued by the Broward County Construction Trades Qualifying Board, Division B.

a. Provide a minimum of 1 Electrical Master, Electrical Journeyman, Master

Speciality or Journeyman Speciality in the fire alarm trade for every 3 apprentices performing the installation of the fire alarm detection system.

E. Fire Alarm Detection System:

1. Listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories. 2. Listed and labeled for commercial use. Residential devices are not allowed.

F. Components, Parts, and Assemblies: Furnished by the same manufacturer and

compatible throughout the system, one-to-the-other, without exception. 1.06 WARRANTY

A. Components, parts, raceways, wiring, and assemblies furnished and installed by the manufacturer's representative or distributor shall be warranted for 1 year after substantial completion, in writing, against defects in labor and materials.

1. Written Warranty:

a. Extend the requirements of General Conditions, to include a signed

manufacturer's 1 year written warranty against defects in materials and labor quality.

b. Provide 5 notarized copies signed by authorized manufacturer's representative, giving details of warranty being provided, listing components included and not included in the warranty, number of hours per days for warranted service, and billable rates for services not covered by warranty.

c. Provide 5 original copies of:

1) A notarized and properly completed NFPA 72-1993 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION form signed by the EF or EC license holder. License holder shall be employed by the manufacturer and/or Contractor.

2) Valid electrical license of the installing contractor.

B. Warranty service shall be performed by a certified factory trained and approved fire alarm technician of the equipment manufacturer's representative or distributor.

1. The Contractor shall respond to routine warranty service requests by completing

repairs within 24 hours of service request by the Owner.

2. The Contractor shall respond to emergency warranty service requests with the arrival of service technician at affected site within 4 hours of notification of emergency. Repairs shall be expedited to bring system online as soon as possible. Emergencies include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Total system failure.


b. Inability to acknowledge, silence, or reset audibles or panel troubles. c. Failure of air-conditioning to reset after an alarm. d. Failure of any gas system to reset after an alarm. e. Failure of alarm system to communicate with the M-DCPS monitoring center. f. Loss of battery power. g. Damage caused to system due to transients and power surges. h. Complete zone or loop failure. i. Fire at a facility.

3. If problem is not correctable within specified time frames, the Contractor shall

provide in writing an expected completion date to the Owner.

C. Inspections at End of Warranty:

1. At the end of the 1 year general warranty period, the Owner will decide if the warranty items cited during the course of the warranty period have been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner.

D. Equipment and systems shall be warranted by the Contractor for 1 year following

acceptance. The warranty shall include parts, labor, prompt field service, pickup, and delivery.


A. Fire Alarm Detection System:

1. Siemens. 2. Fire Control Instruments. 3. Notifier.

B. Lightning Protection and Transient Voltage and Surge Suppression:

1. Atlantic Scientific. 2. Diversified Technology Group (DITEK). 3. EDCO.

C. Fire Alarm Cables for Wet Locations: Aquaseal by West Penn or accepted equivalent.

2.02 COMPONENTS

A. System Type:

1. Provide a single standalone or a multiple panel network type system for the entire facility. The system shall be a 24-Volts Direct Current (VDC), fully analog addressable using multiple Signaling Line Circuits (SLC) Style 4 (Class B) and multiple Style Y (Class B) Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC), wired in exclusive conduits, electrically supervised and power limited.


B. Addressable Systems:

1. The fire alarm detection system shall consist of a UL 864 listed intelligent

microprocessor based main control panel, printer, automatic detection devices, manual stations, and notification appliance devices wired according to the schedule on the Drawings and function as specified.

a. Equipment shall allow a one-person walk-through test of either the complete

system or each individual SLC while maintaining full functionality of SCL not being tested. If no test activity occurs for a specified period, as determined by the manufacturer, the system shall automatically return to the normal operating mode.

b. System shall be capable of being programmed in the field, by a laptop computer. Store programmed information in non-volatile memory. System programming shall be password protected by fire alarm detection manufacturer and include full upload and download capability.

c. System shall be capable of monitoring intelligent/analog and non-addressable ionization, manual stations, thermal and photoelectric detection devices, and interface modules for water flow and tamper switches.

d. As a minimum, the panel shall have behind a locked door the following switches:

1) Audible silence. 2) Trouble silence. 3) Supervisory silence. 4) Panel reset. 5) Occupancy recall.

e. System shall have a real time history log, stored in non-volatile memory,

capable of containing a minimum of 400 events. f. The input AC power to the fire alarm detection system shall be from a

dedicated branch circuit of the facility emergency backup system. AC breaker shall be marked AWARNING - AC POWER TO FIRE ALARM DETECTION SYSTEM - DO NOT TURN OFF OR DISCONNECT@.

g. Provide 1 dry form C relay contacts for central monitoring for each of the following:

1) System alarm. 2) System trouble. 3) Sprinkler supervisory.

h. Provide battery backup capable of operating the fire alarm system under

maximum normal load for 24 hours and then operating in the alarm mode for 5 minutes after loss of input power. Include remote power supplies.

2. Intelligent/analog and non-addressable ionization, photoelectric and thermal

detectors shall be capable of being intermixed on the same control panel. Detection devices shall contain an integral alarm LED. Intelligent/analog detectors shall be individually identifiable from the control panel.


a. The intelligent/analog type smoke detector shall be UL 268 listed. b. The intelligent/analog detector type thermal detector shall be UL 521 listed. c. The intelligent/analog detector sensitivity shall be individually adjustable

from the control panel. It shall also be possible to accurately measure the intelligent/analog detector's sensitivity from the control panel.

3. The intelligent monitoring module shall incorporate a custom microprocessor

based integrated circuit, supervised and uniquely identifiable by the control panel. The intelligent interface module shall be used to uniquely identify water flow switches, tamper switches, and OS & Y valves.

4. The intelligent manual fire station shall be non-coded, single action, and operate

on any SLC. The intelligent manual fire station shall be individually annunciated on the control panel.

a. Intelligent Manual Fire Station: UL 38 listed. b. Manual Stations: Mount semi-flush where possible. c. If it is not possible to mount a semi-flush station, the supplier shall provide

the proper manufacturer's surface mounted box. d. Protect each manual pull station with a UL listed transparent protective

cover. e. Provide 10 keys or wrenches to the Owner.

5. The air duct detector shall operate on a cross-sectional air sampling principal to

overcome stratification and the skin effect. The air duct detector shall consist of a standard intelligent/analog ionization detector mounted in an air duct sampling assembly and sampling tube that protrudes across the duct of the ventilating system. The air duct detector shall retain the features of the (intelligent/analog or non-addressable) ionization detector, and be installed in the ventilating duct as indicated in the devices if both are required.

a. Intelligent/analog air duct detector shall be UL 268A listed. b. When used for air handling control, the relay within the base of the duct

detector shall be capable of operating from general alarm.

6. Horns: Polarized 24VDC type with capability of alarm audibility and occupancy recall.

a. UL 464 listed. b. Operate march time beat during alarm condition. c. Locate horns at heights according to NFPA 72 6-3.7. and ADA. d. Audio shall be used for alarm audibility and occupancy recall. The recall

signal shall be separate and distinct from any other signal. e. Provide horns of the same type and sound throughout the facility.

7. Horn/Strobes: Polarized 24VDC type and meeting ADA requirements. The audio

portion shall be used for alarm audibility and occupancy recall. The recall signal shall be separate and distinct from any other signal. Each unit shall have separate terminals associated with the horns and the strobes so the strobes may remain on during the alarm condition.


a. Horn/Strobes: UL 464 and UL 1971 listed respectively. b. Horns: Operate march time beat during alarm condition. c. Provide horns of the same type and sound throughout the facility. d. Locate horns/strobes at heights according to NFPA 72 6-4.4 and ADA.

8. Strobes: Polarized 24VDC type meeting ADA requirements. The strobes shall

remain on during any alarm condition and until the system is reset.

a. Strobes: UL 1971 listed. b. Install at heights according to NFPA 72 6-4.4. c. Protect each strobe with a UL listed transparent protective cover.

9. The Fire Alarm Detection System Annunciator shall be of an LCD or graphic LED

type and display the exact origin of the alarmed device with a custom user defined message. Locate as shown on the Drawings. The annunciator shall duplicate the information available at the main panel.

a. Locate a floor plan with legible device addresses and room numbers within

each room or an area zone map with device types and locations next to the fire alarm system annunciator panel.

b. Orient the map so when facing the mounting wall, the AYOU ARE HERE@ arrow will point up.

10. Wiring shall be power limited and meet the intent of NFPA 70, article 760. The

systems shall be wired Style 4(Class B) and Style Y (Class B).

a. Wiring shall be UL 1424 listed.

11. Fire Alarm Cables for Wet Locations: Cables shall be suitable for use in raceways and in wet locations, comply with NEC 70, articles 725 and 760, meet the minimum 70,000 BTU vertical tray flame test, have sequential footage markers applied to the outer jacket, and be UL rated for use at 300V and having an operating temperature of 75 degrees C.

a. Audible/Strobes:

1) Cable Description: 4 conductor non-shielded cable manufactured

according to UL 1424 and NEC 70, articles 725 and 760 type Fire Power Limited (FPL).

2) AWG of Conductors: 14 solid bare copper. 3) Number of Conductors: Four. 4) Conductor Insulation: 0.010 tri-rated semi-rigid PVC rated for 105C. 5) Cable Jacket: 0.015 Red PVC. 6) Nominal Cable Diameter: 0.225 inches. 7) Applicable UL Designation: Type FPL, 75C. 8) Meet the low capacitance requirements for the manufacture of the fire

alarm system being installed.

b. Initiating Circuits:


1) Cable description: 2 conductor shielded or non-shielded cable according to manufacturer=s requirements and UL 1424 and NEC, articles 725 and 760 - type fire power limited.

2) AWG of Conductors: 16 or 18 solid bare copper. 3) Number of Conductors: Two. 4) Conductor Insulation: 0.020 PVC rated for 105C. 5) Cable Shield: Overall aluminum backed polyester tape shield,

aluminum facing outward, and 100 percent shield coverage. 6) Cable Drain: 20 AWG stranded tinned copper. 7) Cable Jacket: 0.015 Red PVC. 8) Nominal Cable Diameter: 0.225 inches. 9) Applicable UL Designation: Type FPL, 75C. 10) Meet the manufacturer's low capacitance requirements for the fire

alarm system being installed.

12. Provide lightning protection and transient voltage and surge suppression for the input AC power and all load side circuits.

a. Lightning protection and transient voltage and surge suppression for load

side circuits shall be UL 497B listed. b. Furnish lightning/surge protection integral with panel. Provide additional

surge protection at 120 VAC disconnect breaker. c. Furnish and install additional transient suppression Isolated Loop Circuit

Protector devices (ILCP) on fire alarm wiring, (including shield), extending beyond the main building by either aerial, underground, or other methods (walkways, bridges, or other aboveground connectors). The ILCP shall be located as close as practicable to the point the circuits leave or enter the building containing the fire alarm control panel.

1) The ILCP grounding conductor shall be a No.12 AWG minimum wire

having a maximum length of 28 feet to be run in as straight a line as practicable and connected to the building grounding electrode system (unified ground) according to Article 800-31 of the National Electrical Code - 1996. The ILCP shall have a line to line response time of less than one nano second capable of accepting 2,000 amps (10 x 50uS pulse). Line to earth response time shall be less than 25 nano seconds with maximum current of 2,000 amps (8 x 20uS pulse) to earth Shield to earth current shall be 5,000 amps maximum.

2) The ILCP shall be protected by a high dielectric insulating material and be of small enough size to mount in a standard 4-11/16" square by 2-1/8" deep electrical box. Spark gap devices or devices incorporated in or installed within the fire alarm control panel in lieu of the specified ILCP are not acceptable.

C. Sequence of Operation/Alarm Activation:

1. The system shall function as follows when an area or duct detector, manual

station, or water flow switch operates:

a. Sound required audible in a march time mode and activate devices and strobes throughout the facility.


b. Automatically notify the Owner's Communication Management Center via a digital alarm communicator transmitter (DACT).

c. Display individual detector or zone number on alphanumeric display with user defined message.

d. Light an indicating LED on the device initiating the alarm. Smoke detectors and monitor modules only.

e. Shut down the HVAC system and operate selected dampers. f. There shall be no limit, other than maximum system capacity, as to the

number of intelligent/analog devices that may be in alarm simultaneously.

2. When an alarm has been acknowledged and silenced, the audible devices shall cease to operate but the strobes shall remain on.

a. The block acknowledge feature of addressable system is not allowed and

shall be disabled except for system start-up and maintenance.

3. After the alarm has been investigated, it shall be possible to press the recall button in the control panel to emit a steady sound throughout the facility as a recall signal.

a. It shall not be possible to activate the recall before the alarm signal is

silenced. b. The recall button shall be used as a signal to reoccupy the building after a

fire and not be for any other purpose.

4. Fire Alarm System Special Requirements:

a. To allow monitoring of signals through the telephone lines to DCOM, provide the fire alarm panel with 3 form C (open, common, close) auxiliary contacts to close/open on:

1) System alarm. 2) System trouble. 3) Sprinkler supervisory.

b. Provide a dual line Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (DACT) UL 1635

listed meeting NFPA 72 and power limited to monitor the signals described in this section.

c. Program the DACT to dial and transmit information to a FBI CP-220 receiver.

d. Connect fire alarm system to the 2 telephone outlets provided within 6 feet of fire alarm panel.

e. Upon activation of its inputs, the DACT shall not sound an audible alert tone. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Mount control and other panels with sufficient clearance for observation and testing of the display and panel controls to comply with ADA and Florida Accessibility Code for


Building Construction, Article 4.27 - Controls and Operating Mechanisms. Provide decal with telephone contact number for warranty work at the inside face of the panel door.

B. Clearly mark fire alarm junction boxes for easy identification according to established

color codes as outlined in Section 16110 - Raceways. Wiring shall be in conduit, EMT thin-wall or other approved methods, refer to Section 16110 - Raceways. Use flexible metal raceway for devices mounted in suspend ceiling panels. Conduit, mounting boxes, junction boxes, and panels shall be securely hung and fastened with appropriate fittings to insure positive grounding throughout the system.

C. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm, or auxiliary

fire protection functions shall be allowed in fire alarm conduits.

1. Avoid wiring splices to the extent possible and, if needed, splices shall be made only in junction boxes and be by NEC approved methods.

2. Transposing or changing color coding of wires is not allowed. 3. Conductors in conduit containing more than 1 wire shall be labeled on each end

with AE-Z markers@ or accepted equivalent. 4. Conductors in cabinets shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each

drop off directly opposite to its terminal. 5. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded. 6. Provide clearly labeled controls, function switches, etc., on equipment panels. 7. In junction or pull boxes with splices, provide:

a. Minimum dimension of junction or pull boxes according to NEC Articles 370-

18a.1.a. and 370-18a.2, the conductor size not withstanding. b. Terminal strips.

8. Color Codes:

a. Signaling Line Circuits: Red jacket with red and black conductors. b. Initiating Device Circuits: Red and black. c. Notification Appliance Circuit Horns: Brown and orange. d. Notification Appliance Circuit Strobes: White and yellow. e. Control Circuits for Door Holders and Relays: White and orange.

D. Check and test wiring to insure grounds, opens, or shorts are not present.

E. Manual Pull Stations: Where manual pull stations are indicated on the Drawings, install

4'-0" AFF, with a minimum of 3 inches of clear, flat, wall space all around the devices from door or window trim, wall outlets, wall openings, thermostats, cabinets, shelving, or any other adjacent obstruction.

F. Audible Alarms: Mount on walls at least 6 inches below the adjacent surface or at 7'-6"

AFF to top of unit, whichever is lower unless otherwise directed by the A/E. Use combination horn/strobe, with protective coves, if proposed location of audible unit is less than 7'-6" AFF or at unsecured or unsupervised student occupied locations.

G. Visual Alarms and Combination Horn/Strobes: Mount on walls 80 inches AFF or 6

inches below ceiling whichever is lower. Provide protective covers.


H. Conduit: Run concealed, unless written approval from the Owner has been received to do otherwise. Refer to Section 16110 - Raceways. Exceptions:

1. Electrical/Mechanical rooms.


A. Tests and Reports: Perform electrical and mechanical tests required by NFPA 72 inspection and test form. Test and report costs shall be in the contract price. Submit a check out report in triplicate, one copy of which will be registered with the equipment manufacturer. The report shall include, but not be limited to:

1. A complete list of equipment installed and wired. 2. Indication that equipment is properly installed and functions and conforms with

these specifications. 3. Test of individual zones as applicable. 4. Test of all manual stations and detectors that can be reset. 5. Verification of line supervision of each initiating and indicating circuit. 6. Verification of the Class B operation of each initiating circuit as specified. 7. Verifying the operation of all alarm initiated functions, including, but not limited to,

smoke control, and elevator capture features if used. 8. Written report indicating all area smoke detector sensitivity readings. 9. Written report indicating all AHU duct smoke detector air velocity and sensitivity

readings. 10. Technician's name and date.

3.03 DEMONSTRATION

A. Manufacturer's Training:

1. Provide factory level instructional training in the operation, maintenance and programming of the system for designated personnel from the Owner=s Facilities Department.

2. At end of training provide:

a. Training certificates to each trainee. b. Installation/user manual to each trainee.

3. System operation training shall be a minimum of 2 classes, at 2 hours minimum

for each class. a. Provide to each trainee, an operators manual incorporating a quick

reference operating instructions sheet. END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16740 - 1 of 6 COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS

SECTION 16740 TELEPHONE AND DATA COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS



this section. 1.02 SUMMARY

A. Extent of telephone and data system work is indicated by drawings and schedules, and is hereby defined to include, telephone and data conduits, boxes, jacks and faceplates to accommodate a telephone wiring system.

B. Installation of telephone and data communications facilities shall include: the

Equipment Room, Apparatus Closets and individual end user locations as indicated on plans.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on telephone systems and components.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of telephone systems and accessories including, but not necessarily limited to, service-entrance penetrations, mounting panels, apparatus, racks, terminals, and switching equipment.

C. Submit any deviations from stated fabrications, for approval.

D. Submit changes to stated materials or installation methods, for approval.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of telephone systems and ancillary equipment, of types, ratings and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


experience with projects utilizing telephone systems and equipment similar to that required for this project.


1. National Electrical Code, to include ANSI A17.1 as applied to elevators. 2. Material shall bear label of the Underwriters' Laboratory for the intended use. 3. National Electric Safety Code.


4. Bell System and ROLM references. 5. State Fire Marshall, NFPA 101, The Life Safety Code (Battery Room). 6. EIA/TIA 568 (TR 41.8.1) Building Wiring Draft Standard. 7. IEEE 802.3 10BASET, 10BASE5.


A. Deliver telephone equipment and components in factory-fabricated containers or wrappings, which properly protect equipment from damage.

B. Store telephone equipment and components in original packaging. Store inside in a

well-ventilated space protected from weather, moisture, soiling, humidity, and extreme temperatures.

C. Handle telephone equipment and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking,

and scoring of finishes. Do not install damaged units or components; replace with new. 1.06 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Installer shall notify local Bell operating company in writing of telephone interface connection requirements to ensure proper and timely interfacing of building telecommunication systems with the Bell operating company's systems.

B. Coordinate with other electrical work including wires/ cables, electrical boxes and

fittings, and raceways, to properly interface installation of telephone system with other work.

C. Sequence installation of telephone system with other work to minimize possibility of

damage and soiling during remainder of construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide telephone system equipment of one of the following (for each type and capacity of equipment):

1. Western Electric 2. Allen-Tell AT-217-6 3. AT & T 4. Siecor Corporation 5. DuPont (Teflon/Kaptan), Allied Chemical (Halar)

2.02 TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide telephone systems with voice-quality lines, of types, styles, sizes and capacities indicated, which comply with manufacturer's standard design, materials, and components. Construct system in accordance with published product information, and as required for complete installation. Where types are not indicated, provide products complying with Rules of FCC, and with established


industry standards.

B. Telephone Accessories: Provide telephone accessories, including modular wall and floor jacks, junction boxes, connecting blocks and pre-wired boxes as indicated.

C. Materials:

1. Punch-down block, 66E-M1-50 type. 2. Protection block, 190A1-XXX, 189E-XXX, or 189ET type. 3. Protection, surge device, solid state. 4. Telephone Station wire, 4 pair, 24 AWG, plenum rated. 5. Telephone Riser Cable, 22 AWG, ALVYN type. 6. Telephone Feeder Cable, 22 AWG, PIC, Filled. 7. Backboard, 3/4" plywood, 8' x 4', fire retardant treated. 8. Carbon Dioxide (CO 2) fire extinguisher. 9. Breaker panel with 208V 30 amp single and two 117V 20 amp double duplex

(minimum). 10. Paint, flat, black; paint, flat, blue. 11. Conduit, 1", rigid or thin wall type. 12. Outlet box, minimum standard size 2" x 4" x 2-1/2" 13. Wall Mountable Premise Hardware (data only) such as the Siecor Universal

Transport System Information Outlet to allow for storage of unterminated fiber as well as terminations for twisted pair. This is to include 3 blank panels, 1 panel with 2 8-Position modular jacks, label sheets, cable ties, adhesive strip and screws.

14. Modular face plate (telephone-only, exception basis), 2" x 4", ivory, duplex, female RJ-11 jacks, connecting block, 6 pin.

15. Raceways, Galvanized Rigid Conduit, zinc coated, approved for 90 degree radius turns.

16. Splice case(s) 17. Data Station Wire, hybrid or composite cable consisting of 2 62.5/125 micron fibers

and 8 wire, 4 pair twisted pair as manufactured by Siecor (Optitwist) or Belden (SuperLite Hybrid). The characteristics of the twisted pairs are 24 AWG with impedance of 100 + 10 , attenuation of 27.4 dB/1000 ft. @ 10 MHz. The station wire shall have a plenum outer jacket.

18. Ethernet Trunk Cable, 50 ohm, .0855 solid tinned copper center conductor, cellular polyethylene insulated dielectric, two foil shields, 92% tinned copper braid shields and an orange Teflon jacket.

19. Fiber Optic Data Feeder Cable, 12 Strand 62.5/125 micron optical fiber, dual window, graded-index profile, multimode glass-on-glass construction (EIA Class 1a) terminated on both sides of 4 (four) strands with ST connectors.


A. Examine areas and conditions under which telephone systems are to be installed. Notify Contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to Installer.


3.02 INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE SYSTEMS

A. Install telephone systems as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; ensure systems comply with installation and operational requirements of EIA, NEC and the Federal Communications Commission.

B. Interface building telephone system with the operating telephone company's network,

after the installation work has been completed.

C. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening values for equipment connectors. Where manufacturer's torquing requirements are not indicated, tighten connectors and terminals to comply with tightening torques specified in UL Standards 486A and B, and the National Electrical Code.

3.03 THE EQUIPMENT ROOM

A. Shall contain the primary/main terminal telephone and data communications facilities, located as close as possible to the building telephone vertical cable risers and apparatus closets, where electromagnetic interference is minimal. It shall be located on the first/main floor.

B. Shall have an 8' x 4' fire retardant backboard, painted black, mounted on one wall, in

such a way as to support telephone terminal, cable and other equipment weights. In addition, shall have an 8' x 4' fire retardant backboard, painted blue, mounted on another wall, in such a way as to support data communications terminal, cable and other equipment weights. (NOTE: fire retardant paint should not be used).

C. Shall contain a cabling Service Entrance consisting of a minimum of four 4" diameter

sleeves, protruding 1" above floor level, located at the center, bottom of the wall space designated for mounting the telephone backboard.

D. All conduit, raceway and terminations shall be connected to the common building

ground.

E. Shall have a clearly identified, dedicated 6 AWG, solid wire connected to the building grounding electrode system.

F. Shall have a dedicated breaker panel, with feeder breaker for each outlet (120 VAC, 3 wire, 20 amp, NEMA 5-15R(IG)). If the building has emergency power, the panel shall be supplied from the emergency power generating system, when it is operating. If any portion of the University PABX System is contained within the Equipment Room, the panel shall be configured for a minimum 11 KVA (3 each 208/240 VAC (+/-10%); 4 wire (2 hot, 1 neutral, 1 isolated ground) at 60 HZ +/-0.5HZ with a dedicated 20 amp breaker, outlet NEMA L14-20R.

3.04 THE APPARATUS CLOSET(S)

A. Shall contain telephone and data riser terminations and/or pass through, cross-connect


terminals, surge protection devices and cables.

B. Shall mirror the Equipment Room with backboards size 3/4" x 4' x 8' one each, for telephone (painted black) and data (painted blue). The black telephone backboard shall contain minimum one standard punch-down block of the 66E-M1-50 type. The blue data communications backboard shall have at least one (8 Position Modular Jack) discrete wire patch panel (AMP 555501-1) mounted on hinged wall brackets (AMP 555273-1). The blue data communications backboard shall also contain at least one wall mounted fiber optic distribution enclosure (AMP 502554-1) minimum 48 ports. Wall mounted equipment shall be located at eye level. The wall mounted equipment shall be sufficient to handle the number of connections required for the area serviced by the apparatus closet.

C. The Service Entrance to each closet shall be through 4" diameter sleeves. Capped,

spare 4" sleeves are required. 3.05 WIRING

A. Risers: A single uncut plenum Ethernet Trunk Cable for data is to be extended from the top floor Apparatus Closet through the Apparatus Closet on each floor to the Equipment Closet, with 30 feet of slack in each closet for University connections. Telephone risers shall be 22 AWG ALVYN-type cable.

B. Station wiring: Station wire for each telephone and data termination shall be a "home

run" from the room jack to the Apparatus Closet. Telephone station wire shall run from the room jack to the punch down block located on the backboard in the Apparatus Closet, and shall be 4 pair, 24 AWG plenum rated. Data station cable shall run from the room jack to the modular jack patch panel located on the blue board in the Apparatus Closet, and shall be a composite of 2 62.5/125 micron fibers and 8 wire, 4 pair twisted pair, 24 AWG. The cable jacket shall be plenum rated. The twisted pairs in the data station cable shall be rated for use with IEEE 802.3 10BASET with electrical characteristics of: 100 + 10 ohms impedance at 10Mhz and maximum attenuation of 27.4 dB/1000ft.. The telephone station wire shall be enclosed in a separate 1" conduit from the room jack, per applicable local building code. The data station cable shall also be enclosed in a separate 1" conduit from the room jack. The wire and cable will then continue into a raceway, 12" x 4", traversing the perimeter, following the hallways and entering the Apparatus Closet over the appropriate backboards. (i.e. The telephone station wire shall enter the Apparatus Closet over the telephone backboard and the data station cable shall enter the Apparatus Closet over the data backboard.)

C. Room Terminations: Room terminations shall be made to a Siecor Universal Transport

System Information Outlet (UTS-IO) with 3 blank panel and 1 modular type panel to accommodate interchangeable multi-purpose jacks. The data cable shall be connected to two (2) female RJ-45 jacks on a modular jack panel. The fiber optic cables shall be dipped and sealed to prevent moisture intrusion and shall be coiled inside the UTS-10. The telephone room terminations shall be made to flush, 2" x 4", modular type face plates. The telephone wire shall be connected to two (2) female RJ-11 jacks on the modular face plate.

D. Closet Terminations: Closet terminations for data shall be made to the 32 port modular

jack patch panel and the fiber optic cables shall be dipped and sealed to prevent


moisture intrusion and then stored in the fiber optic wall mounted distribution enclosure(s). Closet terminations for telephone shall be made to a 66-M1-50 type punch-down block.

3.06 OTHER

A. Elevator Telephones: Elevator(s) shall be equipped with a telephone and shall be completely wired and cabled back to the Equipment Room or Apparatus Closet, depending upon operating machinery location. Cross connection at the Room or Closet is the responsibility of the University.

B. Cable/Wire Tags: Color-coded or numerically marked non-conductive location tags

shall be provided at the Apparatus Closet cable terminations to insure positive identification for cable/wire routings.

C. Public Telephones: Public telephone circuit runs shall be one inch in diameter,

terminated in the nearest Equipment Room or Apparatus Closet. Public telephones shall be located in public acces areas to permit usage by handicapped individuals.

3.07 DEMONSTRATION

A. Upon completion of installation of telephone systems, and after telephone wire circuitry has been energized, demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units, and proceed with testing. Demonstrate to Owner that requirements for basic output signal levels, and values for attenuation and signal-to-noise ratios, have been achieved.

3.08 PERSONNEL TRAINING

A. Train Owner's personnel, as designated by Owner, in operation and maintenance of the telephone system. Provide minimum of 12 days of on-site in-service training by the manufacturer, or their representative.

END OF SECTION

RENOVATION OF HISTORIC FIRE STATION NO. 2 (Phase II-B) City of Miami Project No. B-30579 16845 - 1 of 6 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 16845 INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM PART 1 GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: A complete, operable, tested intrusion detection system, bearing Underwriters Laboratories (UL) mercantile listing and including raceway system and cables. All programming shall be by the Contractor with assistance from Owner District Communication Management Center (DCOM).


1. 09900 - Painting. 2. 16110 - Raceways. 3. 16135 - Electrical Boxes and Fittings.


A. Significant System Components and Procedures:

1. Contacts for every exterior door including roof accesses. 2. Motion detectors. 3. Intrusion control panels. 4. Power supply. 5. Extended zone modules. 6. Keypads. 7. Raceway and junction box system. 8. Testing. 9. Record drawings.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit properly identified manufacturer's literature and technical data before starting

work.

B. Shop Drawings: Include manufacturer's catalog cuts, data sheets, and riser and wiring diagrams with standard symbols for each component used.

C. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following with the required shop drawings

and manufacturer's literature and data.

1. Load calculations for battery backup and system components. 2. Programming schedule sheet with zone descriptions. 3. Warranty:

a. Letter from authorized manufacturer's representative addressed to the

Board, stating compliance to warranty requirements. b. Submit 5 copies of warranty to be provided.


D. Closeout Submittals: Record drawings and warranties.


A. Items and Components: UL listed meeting the latest editions of standards 603, 609,

634, 639, 1076, and 1610.

B. Install wiring according to National Electrical Code - 1999 (NEC).

C. Shunt switches are not allowed.

D. The system shall provide for the separate partitioning of cafeterias, cafetoriums, auditoriums, food service areas, gymnasium/locker rooms, little theaters, the administration area, music rooms, and any other areas according to program requirements. One building or wing may have more than one partition, but one partition shall not include more than one building.

E. System shall be hardwired in its entirety.

F. In terminal cabinets, use screw-on terminal strips for power and signal cable splices.

1.05 WARRANTY

A. Provide full manufacturer's published standard warranty for parts and components.

B. Provide 1 year full maintenance (parts, wiring, and labor) provided by Contractor or

manufacturer's authorized representative from date of substantial completion.

C. Provide warranty response information inside alarm system control panel.

D. Warranty shall allow the Board to repair vandalized areas without voiding the total system warranty

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.01 EQUIPMENT

A. Door Contacts:

1. Side Hinged Doors: Recessed magnetic switch, Model 1078W as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc. or accepted equivalent, complete with necessary mounting accessories for installation in closed circuit alarm systems.

2. Hinged Roof Access: Magnetic switch, Model 1085W as manufactured by Sentrol, Inc. accepted equivalent. Provide 2 mounting spacers and matching cover plate, for closed circuit alarm systems.

3. Roll-Up Overhead Doors: Magnetic switch, No.[2205A] [2505A] [2515A] by

Sentrol or accepted equivalent, complete with necessary mounting accessories for installation in closed circuit alarm systems.


B. Cable: Belden No.8740 (2 conductor), No.8443 (3 conductor), No.9794 (4 conductor),

or accepted equivalent.

1. Conductors for Monitoring Devices: Minimum 22 gage AWG stranded, unshielded cable with vinyl plastic insulation, color-coded.

2. UL listed, NEC type CM or CL3, UL standard 13 and 444. 3. Comply with UL 1581 flame test. 4. Power Conductor for Motion Detectors, EZMs, and Keypads: CL-2 or CL-3,

jacketed, minimum 18 gage stranded wire. 5. Power Conductor for Battery: Minimum 18 gage stranded wire. 6. Underground cable shall be for wet locations according to NEC.

C. Motion Detectors: Dual technology (PIR/microwave) motion detector sensors.

1. Recessed Ceiling Mount:

a. Model 2T360 by Sentrol Inc., Tualatin, OR. b. Model DS9360 by Simplex.

2. Wall Mount:

a. Models 2T40, 2T70, or 2T100 by Sentrol. b. Models DS720, DS860, DS950, RDS97 by Simplex.

D. Intrusion Control Panels:

1. Manufacturers:

a. NAPCO MA 3000 (96 zones). b. Simplex DS7400Xi.

2. Provide mandatory UL Mercantile listing with tamperproof provisions. 3. Indicate location on riser diagram. 4. Install panels with centerline at 5'-0" above finish floor.

E. Panel Batteries:

1. Provide two 7 amp batteries in parallel in the panel.

F. Remote Power Supplies:

1. Supervised for low battery failure and power supply failure. 2. Show locations on riser diagram. 3. These indications shall report through a dedicated zone of the intrusion

detection system to Owner DCOM as a priority trouble.

G. Zone Expansion Modules/Expansion Zone Modules (EZM):

1. Remotely located in a distributed fashion to minimize raceway and wiring. 2. Powered from the intrusion control panel.


3. Power supply load shall not exceed 85 percent of the maximum load. 4. Mount EZM's in a hinged door junction box with a fire retardant painted plywood

backboard inside the box, 10" x 10" x 4" minimum size. 5. Install EZM cabinets with centerline at 5'-0" above finish floor. 6. Install power supplies between 6"-0" to 8'-0" above finish floor. 7. List EZM's location numbers inside and outside the junction boxes and on riser

diagram. 8. Do not use the keypad as a zone expander.

H. Miscellaneous: Refer to Section 16112 for products also required for installation under

this section. PART 3 EXECUTION

3.01 INSPECTION

A. Do not proceed with the work of this section until conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the Work have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring, conduit, boxes, and the like required for a complete system according to

manufacturer's instructions and approved submittals.

B. System equipment and wiring installation shall be by the properly licensed company, either the original equipment manufacturer or the factory distributor for the brand of equipment used. Furnish wiring diagrams and wire runs for the raceway system installed by the licensed electrical contractor, under Division 16.

C. Provide door contacts and related devices at exterior doors, roof scuttles, and interior

doors to high security spaces including, but not limited to, spaces containing student records, audiovisual equipment, instructional TV equipment, computer equipment, chemical storage, facility operation and management equipment, and other similar valuable goods. Rooms with interior corridor access and motion detectors do not require door contacts.

1. Hinged Door Contacts: A maximum of 4 associated door contacts may be

grouped in a zone. Provide independent wiring to each switch from a junction box located next to the expansion zone module (E.M.) before converting to a zone.

a. Side Hinged Doors:

1) Install recessed switch components in spaces in both door and

head jamb prepared by the door and frame manufacturer. 2) Set magnet into top of door with accepted silicone sealant.

b. Hinged Roof Access: Mount on inside face of access housing according

to switch manufacturer's recommendations.


2. Motion Detectors:

a. Provide motion detectors in each area with windows, fixed glass, or glass block to the exterior and any room with vision panels, regardless of the location or function.

b. Provide motion detectors at exterior accessed storage rooms. c. Provide individual zones for each motion detector. d. Motion detectors shall have their own power supply and not be fed from

the security panel. e. Locate ceiling mounted motion detectors at least 5 feet away from A/C

supply registers and at least 10 feet from windows.

3. Wiring:

a. Install wiring in metallic conduit from door head switch through door lintel construction to adjacent junction box.

b. Connection between top of sheet metal sleeve in head jamb section and conduit in door lintel construction to adjacent junction box need not be solid but sheet metal sleeve and conduit shall be in alignment with each other.

c. Provide EOL resistor and indicate location on drawings d. A maximum of 4 associated door switches may be grouped in a zone.

Provide independent wiring to each switch from a junction box located next to the expansion zone module (E.M.) before converting to a zone.

e. Splices in main cabinets and sub panels shall be on terminal strips.

4. Bonding and Grounding: Provide as required by the latest edition of the NEC. 5. Conductor Identification: Identify each pair of conductors, each contact in each

panel, and at loose wire terminations. 6. Cable Slack:

a. Terminate cables with enough slack, each duly tagged for future

connections by the Board, on terminal strips in junction box in electrical room as shown on Drawings, extending 1 inch empty conduit from this box underground to pull box as shown Drawings (site plan).

D. At security cabinets, provide 3/4" plywood backboard with fire retardant paint. E. Provide patch cord from intrusion detection circuit board to telephone outlet provided

by Owner in the intrusion detection panel.

F. Connect fire alarm system to the 2 separate telephone outlets provided by Owner in the fire alarm panel.


A. Before testing the intrusion detection system transmission from the project site to the

central control station, coordinate with the Board and A/E to ensure Owner DCOM will be available to verify a successful and trouble free transmission signal.

B. Site Test:


1. Check and test installation for shorts, grounds, circuit continuity, and minimum

12 volts readings at all motion detectors. 2. Cables: Test free from opens, grounds, or crosses (shorts) between

conductors. 3. Walk-test doors and motion detectors for proper function and operation. Ensure

proper zoning of devices. 4. Test all functions on intrusion control panels for proper functions and

operations. 5. Verify signals are properly received at the Owner DCOM. 6. Check for proper standby battery backup in intrusion panels and remote power

supplies. 7. Verify remote power supplies are UL 603 listed for burglary systems. 8. Inspect and test cabinet tampers on intrusion cabinets. 9. Verify raceway cover is properly painted blue.

END OF SECTION

Date post:	26-Apr-2023
Category:	Documents
Upload:	khangminh22
View:	0 times
Download:	0 times